JP7133695B1 - DECORATION, DECORATION MANUFACTURING DEVICE AND DECORATION MANUFACTURING METHOD - Google Patents

DECORATION, DECORATION MANUFACTURING DEVICE AND DECORATION MANUFACTURING METHOD Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP7133695B1
JP7133695B1 JP2021142819A JP2021142819A JP7133695B1 JP 7133695 B1 JP7133695 B1 JP 7133695B1 JP 2021142819 A JP2021142819 A JP 2021142819A JP 2021142819 A JP2021142819 A JP 2021142819A JP 7133695 B1 JP7133695 B1 JP 7133695B1
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
color
layer
groove
decorative body
item
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
JP2021142819A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
JP2022135878A (en
Inventor
正義 平井
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Individual
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2020147178A external-priority patent/JP6997841B1/en
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Priority to JP2022041952A priority Critical patent/JP7288113B2/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of JP7133695B1 publication Critical patent/JP7133695B1/en
Publication of JP2022135878A publication Critical patent/JP2022135878A/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Landscapes

  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)

Abstract

【課題】安価かつ容易に製造可能であって、屋外等でのサイン用途に使用可能な樹脂材料・装飾体の提供。【解決手段】複数の層が積層された装飾体であって、前記複数の層が、透過性を有しかつ扁平着色剤が分散された扁平着色層と、前記扁平着色層と同じ扁平着色剤を別の層と、前記扁平着色層を前記別の層に接合する接着層と、を含み、前記扁平着色層において、前記扁平着色剤の色が前記透過性を有する部分の色と異なり、前記扁平着色剤が薄片状であり、前記複数の層が、前記複数の層の積層方向に垂直な外側の面である表面部及び前記表面部に対向する裏面部を有し、前記表面部のいずれとも平行でない外側の面である端面を有し、前記端面が鏡面状であって前記端面の算術平均粗さRaが0.5以下であり、前記端面が線条痕状の複数の筋を有し、前記複数の筋を含む前記端面の算術平均うねりWaが0.05以上である装飾体ことを特徴とする装飾体とする。【選択図】図19An object of the present invention is to provide a resin material/decorative body that can be manufactured inexpensively and easily, and that can be used for signs outdoors. A decorative body in which a plurality of layers are laminated, wherein the plurality of layers comprises a flat colored layer having transparency and a flat coloring agent dispersed therein, and a flat coloring agent identical to the flat coloring layer. and an adhesive layer that joins the flat colored layer to the another layer, and in the flat colored layer, the color of the flat coloring agent is different from the color of the transparent portion, and the The flat colorant is in the form of flakes, the plurality of layers has a surface portion that is an outer surface perpendicular to the stacking direction of the plurality of layers and a back surface portion that faces the surface portion, and any one of the surface portions Both have an end surface that is an outer surface that is not parallel, the end surface is a mirror surface, the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the end surface is 0.5 or less, and the end surface has a plurality of streak-like streaks. and the end face including the plurality of streaks has an arithmetic mean waviness Wa of 0.05 or more. [Selection drawing] Fig. 19

Description

本発明は装飾体並びにその装飾体を製造する装飾体製造装置及び装飾体製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a decorative body, a decorative body manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the decorative body, and a decorative body manufacturing method.

特許文献1に記載の発明のように、グリッターを使用した加飾画像が知られている。 Decorative images using glitter, such as the invention described in Patent Document 1, are known.

実開平4-124634号公報〔付記=特開2019-005965号公報〕Japanese Utility Model Laid-Open Publication No. 4-124634 [Appendix = Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2019-005965]

図20において、扁平着色層MCが厚く、扁平着色剤Cのz方向の分布の幅が大きいほど、扁平着色剤Cの立体感の効果が向上する。
〔付記=しかしこの加飾画像は、紙等を支持体とし、表面の保護がないか弱く、自立に耐える強度も耐候性も有さなかった。
In FIG. 20, the thicker the flat colored layer MC and the wider the width of the distribution of the flat coloring agent C in the z-direction, the more the effect of the three-dimensional effect of the flat coloring agent C is improved.
[Additional Note: However, this decorative image uses a paper or the like as a support, has no or weak surface protection, and does not have the strength or weather resistance to stand on its own. ]

しかし、装飾体Zの厚みが増すほど、その重量が増大し、壁等への取付コストと落下リスクが膨らむ。本発明はこの問題を解決する。〔付記=本発明は、安価かつ容易に製造可能であって、屋外等でのサイン用途に使用可能な材料・装飾体の提供を課題としてもよい。なお、本明細書における装飾体は表示体・光学体を含むことがある。 However, as the thickness of the decorative body Z increases, its weight increases, and the mounting cost to the wall or the like and the risk of falling increase. The present invention solves this problem. [Additional Note: The present invention may also provide a material/decoration body that can be manufactured inexpensively and easily, and that can be used for sign applications outdoors or the like. ] Note that the decorative body in this specification may include a display body and an optical body.

本発明の1つの態様は、以下である。項1:複数の層が積層された装飾体であって、前記複数の層が、透過性を有する部分に扁平着色剤が分散された扁平着色層と、前記透過性を有する部分とは異なる色の色面層と、を含み、前記扁平着色層において、前記扁平着色剤の色が前記透過性を有する部分の色と異なり、前記扁平着色剤の最大長さが0.02mm以上であり、前記扁平着色剤の少なくとも一部において、それぞれの最大長さが、前記最大長さの中点を通り前記最大長さの方向に直交する断面の径のうち前記中点を通る最も短い長さの5倍以上であり、前記扁平着色剤が薄片状であり、前記積層方向に垂直な方向において、前記色面層が複数の部分を有し、前記複数の部分の一部が前記垂直な方向における前記色面層の外周部に少なくとも一部で接せず、かつ前記色面層が存在しない抜き部分であり、前記抜き部分を透過して前記扁平着色層が観察可能であり、前記装飾体を前記垂直な方向に区分する複数の部分領域において、前記扁平着色層の少なくとも一部の外周部に対応する部分領域が前記色面層の外周部に対応する部分領域より狭いことを特徴とする装飾体。(段落0123-0128等参照)。
〔付記=付記項1:複数の層が積層された装飾体であって、前記複数の層が、透過性を有しかつ扁平着色剤が分散された扁平着色層と、前記扁平着色層とは別の層と、前記扁平着色層を前記別の層に接合する接着層と、を含み、前記扁平着色層において、前記扁平着色剤の色が前記透過性を有する部分の色と異なり、前記扁平着色剤が薄片状であり、前記扁平着色剤の最大長さが0.02mm以上であり、前記扁平着色剤の少なくとも一部において、それぞれの最大長さが、前記最大長さの中点を通り前記最大長さの方向に直交する断面の径のうち前記中点を通る最も短い長さの5倍以上であり、板状体であることを特徴とする装飾体(段落0111-0122参照)。〕
One aspect of the invention is as follows. Item 1: A decorative body in which a plurality of layers are laminated, wherein the plurality of layers includes a flat colored layer in which a flat coloring agent is dispersed in a portion having transparency, and a color different from that of the portion having transparency and a colored surface layer of, in the flat colored layer, the color of the flat coloring agent is different from the color of the transparent portion, the maximum length of the flat coloring agent is 0.02 mm or more, and the At least a part of the flat colorant has a maximum length of 5, which is the shortest length of the cross-sectional diameters passing through the midpoint of the maximum length and perpendicular to the direction of the maximum length, passing through the midpoint. the flat colorant is flaky, the colored surface layer has a plurality of portions in a direction perpendicular to the stacking direction, and a part of the plurality of portions is the A cutout portion that does not contact the outer peripheral portion of the color surface layer at least in part and does not have the color surface layer, the flat colored layer can be observed through the cutout portion, and the decorative body is the above A decorative body, wherein, in a plurality of partial regions divided in a vertical direction, a partial region corresponding to at least a part of the outer peripheral portion of the flat colored layer is narrower than a partial region corresponding to the outer peripheral portion of the colored surface layer. . (See paragraphs 0123-0128, etc.).
[Additional note = Additional note 1: A decorative body in which a plurality of layers are laminated, wherein the plurality of layers is a flat colored layer having transparency and in which a flat coloring agent is dispersed, and the flat colored layer and an adhesive layer that joins the flat colored layer to the another layer, and in the flat colored layer, the color of the flat coloring agent is different from the color of the transparent portion, and the flat The colorant is flaky, the maximum length of the flat colorant is 0.02 mm or more, and the maximum length of each of at least a portion of the flat colorant passes through the midpoint of the maximum length. A decoration having a diameter five times or more of the shortest length passing through the midpoint of the cross section orthogonal to the direction of the maximum length and being a plate-like body (see paragraphs 0111 to 0122). ]

前記装飾体は以下のようでもよい。項2:前記扁平着色層の少なくとも一部の前記垂直な方向の形状が、前記抜き部分の形状に沿う形状である、項1に記載の装飾体。項3:前記垂直な方向において、前記扁平着色層の少なくとも一部の外周部に対応する部分領域が前記抜き部分に対応する部分領域の少なくとも一部を包含する、項1又は2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記扁平着色層が複数である、項1~3の何れかに記載の装飾体。項5:前記色面層が粘着層を有する、項1~4の何れかに記載の装飾体。項6:前記色面層の視感透過率が30%以下である、項1~5の何れかに記載の装飾体。項7:前記扁平着色層の前記色面層側から、前記色面層及び前記扁平着色層以外の層を含む、前記色面層の反対側までの前記扁平着色層の前記垂直な方向の厚さが4mm以上である、項1~6の何れかに記載の装飾体。項8:前記色面層の前記垂直な方向の厚さが10~400μmである、項1~7の何れかに記載の装飾体。項9:前記最大長さが1mm以上である、項1~8の何れかに記載の装飾体。項10:板状体である、項1~9の何れかに記載の装飾体。
〔付記=付記項2:前記接合の少なくとも一部が化学拡散接合であるか、前記接合部分が強制的に分離された場合、前記分離された面の少なくとも一部の算術平均粗さRが1μm以上であるかの少なくとも一方である、付記項1に記載の装飾体。付記項3:前記扁平着色層及び前記別の層の間に色面層を有し、前記色面層の色が前記透過性を有する部分及び前記接着層の色と異なる、付記項1又は2に記載の装飾体。付記項4:前記扁平着色層及び前記別の層の間又は前記扁平着色層に対する前記別の層の反対側の少なくとも一方に色面層を有し、前記色面層の色が前記透過性を有する部分及び前記接着層の色と異なる、付記項1又は2に記載の装飾体。付記項5:前記扁平着色層に対する前記別の層の反対側に色面層を有し、前記複数の色面層の色が前記透過性を有する部分及び前記接着層の色と異なる、付記項1又は2に記載の装飾体。付記項6:前記扁平着色層の両側に色面層を有し、前記色面層の色が前記透過性を有する部分及び前記接着層の色と異なる、付記項1又は2に記載の装飾体。付記項7:複数の層の色面層を有し、前記複数の色面層の色が互いに異なり、前記複数の色面層の色が前記透過性を有する部分及び前記接着層の色と異なる、付記項1又は2に記載の装飾体。付記項8:前記複数の色面層が前記積層方向において少なくとも一部で互いに重なる、付記項6又は7に記載の装飾体。付記項9:前記複数の色面層のうち一部が他の一部の形状に沿う形状である、付記項6~8の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項10:前記複数の色面層が互いに異なる色である、付記項6~9の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項11:前記別の層の反対側の色面層に対する前記扁平着色層の反対側に被覆層を有し、前記被覆層が透過性を有し、前記被覆層を前記扁平着色層に接合する接着層を有する、付記項5・6・8・9・10の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項12:前記色面層が粘着層を有する、付記項3~11の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項13:前記色面層と前記色面層に接合された層との接合部分の少なくとも一部が化学拡散接合でない、付記項3~12の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項14:前記色面層の前記扁平着色層及び前記接着層の接合面方向の範囲が前記接合面の範囲より狭い、付記項3~13の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項15:前記色面層が、有色透明であって分光透過率における400~780nmの範囲内での波長間の透過率の差が10%以上・有色不透明であって波長間の分光反射率における400~780nmの範囲内での波長間の反射率の差が10%以上・全光線透過率10%以下の何れかであり、前記色面層が前記積層方向の厚さが10μm以上のフィルム状であり、前記フィルム状の色面層の有無によって画像・文字・ロゴ・図形・模様の少なくとも何れかを表示する、付記項3~14の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項16:前記別の層が前記透過性を有する部分より低透過性である、付記項1~15の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項17:外部との界面の一部である端面を有し、前記端面が前記扁平着色層及び前記接着層の界面に平行でなく、前記端面に露出した前記扁平着色層及び前記接着層を含む境界部分の少なくとも一部において、前記端面に垂直な方向の凹凸の深さが0.8mm以下、又は前記端面を前記扁平着色層及び前記接着層の界面に垂直に測定した最大高さ粗さRが100μm以下の少なくとも一方である、付記項1~16の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項18:前記扁平着色層が空気との界面である溝部又は端面の少なくとも一方を有し、前記溝部は互いに対向する複数の側面を有し、前記端面は前記装飾体の空気との界面の一部であり、前記溝部又は前記端面が前記扁平着色層及び前記接着層の界面に平行でなく、前記側面又は前記端面の少なくとも一部が鏡面状である、付記項1~17の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項19:前記鏡面状の少なくとも一部の算術平均粗さRが0.5μm以下である、付記項18に記載の装飾体。付記項20:外側の各面の角部の少なくとも一部が面取り加工されており、前記面取り加工された角部において、斜めに削られた部分の積層方向もしくは前記積層方向に垂直な方向の少なくとも一方の深さ又は丸みの半径が0.05mm以上である、付記項1~19の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項21:前記装飾体が、外側の界面の一部であって前記積層方向に垂直な表面部を有し、前記表面部を通して前記扁平着色剤が観察可能であり、前記扁平着色層が溝部又は端面の少なくとも一方を有し、前記溝部は空気との界面であって、互いに対向する複数の側面によってなり、前記端面は前記装飾体の空気との界面の一部であり、前記溝部又は前記端面が前記表面部に平行でなく、前記側面又は前記端面の少なくとも一部と前記少なくとも一部から前記表面部を含む面に下した垂線又は法線とがなす角度の絶対値がarcsin(1/n)以下(nは前記透過性を有する部分の屈折率)である、付記項1~20の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項22:前記接着層の屈折率が前記透過性を有する部分の屈折率以上である、付記項1~21の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項23:前記接着層の屈折率が前記透過性を有する部分の屈折率より0.002以上大きい、付記項1~22の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項24:前記扁平着色層の前記積層方向の厚さが1.4mm以上であり、前記別の層の前記積層方向の厚さが0.4mm以上である、付記項1~23の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項25:曲げ弾性率が1000MPa以上である、付記項1~24の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項26:前記扁平着色層の前記接着層とは反対側の面が最も外側の面である、付記項1~25の何れかに記載の装飾体。付記項27:前記接着層の屈折率が前記透過性を有する部分及び前記含有しない層の屈折率より大きく、前記屈折率の差が0.002以上である、付記項1~25の何れかに記載の装飾体。
The decoration may be as follows. Item 2: The decorative body according to Item 1, wherein the shape of at least a portion of the flat colored layer in the vertical direction follows the shape of the cutout portion. Item 3: The decoration according to Item 1 or 2, wherein the partial region corresponding to the outer peripheral portion of at least a part of the flat colored layer in the vertical direction includes at least a part of the partial region corresponding to the cutout portion. body. Item 4: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 3, wherein the flat colored layer is plural. Item 5: The decoration according to any one of Items 1 to 4, wherein the color surface layer has an adhesive layer. Item 6: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 5, wherein the color surface layer has a luminous transmittance of 30% or less. Item 7: Thickness in the vertical direction of the flat colored layer from the color layer side of the flat colored layer to the opposite side of the colored layer, including the color layer and layers other than the flat colored layer Item 7. The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 6, wherein the length is 4 mm or more. Item 8: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 7, wherein the color layer has a thickness of 10 to 400 μm in the vertical direction. Item 9: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 8, wherein the maximum length is 1 mm or more. Item 10: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 9, which is a plate-like body.
[Additional note = Additional note 2: When at least part of the bonding is chemical diffusion bonding or the bonding part is forcibly separated, the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of at least part of the separated surface is The decorative body according to additional item 1, which is at least one of 1 μm or more. Additional item 3: Additional item 1 or 2, wherein a colored surface layer is provided between the flat colored layer and the separate layer, and the color of the colored surface layer is different from the color of the transparent portion and the adhesive layer. The decorative body described in . Additional Item 4: A colored layer is provided between the flat colored layer and the another layer or at least one of the side opposite to the another layer with respect to the flat colored layer, and the color of the colored layer has the transparency. 3. The decorative body according to additional item 1 or 2, wherein the color of the portion having the adhesive layer and the color of the adhesive layer are different. Supplementary item 5: Supplementary item, having a color surface layer on the opposite side of the separate layer with respect to the flat colored layer, the color of the plurality of color surface layers being different from the color of the transparent portion and the adhesive layer 3. The decorative body according to 1 or 2. Additional Item 6: The decorative body according to Additional Item 1 or 2, which has a colored surface layer on both sides of the flat colored layer, and the color of the colored surface layer is different from the color of the transparent portion and the adhesive layer. . Additional Item 7: Having a plurality of colored layers, the colors of the plurality of colored layers are different from each other, and the colors of the plurality of colored layers are different from the colors of the transmissive portion and the adhesive layer. , Additional item 1 or 2, the decorative body. Additional item 8: The decorative body according to additional item 6 or 7, wherein the plurality of color surface layers overlap each other at least partially in the stacking direction. Additional item 9: The decorative body according to any one of additional items 6 to 8, wherein a part of the plurality of color surface layers has a shape that conforms to the shape of the other part. Additional item 10: The decorative body according to any one of additional items 6 to 9, wherein the plurality of color surface layers have different colors. Additional Item 11: A coating layer is provided on the opposite side of the flat colored layer to the color surface layer on the opposite side of the another layer, the coating layer has transparency, and the coating layer is joined to the flat colored layer The decorative body according to any one of additional items 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10, having an adhesive layer that Additional item 12: The decorative body according to any one of additional items 3 to 11, wherein the color surface layer has an adhesive layer. Additional Item 13: The decorative body according to any one of Additional Items 3 to 12, wherein at least a part of the bonding portion between the color surface layer and the layer bonded to the color surface layer is not chemical diffusion bonding. Additional Item 14: The decorative body according to any one of Additional Items 3 to 13, wherein the range of the bonding surface direction of the flat colored layer and the adhesive layer of the colored layer is narrower than the range of the bonding surface. Additional item 15: The color surface layer is colored and transparent, and the difference in transmittance between wavelengths in the range of 400 to 780 nm in spectral transmittance is 10% or more ・Colored and opaque, and spectral reflectance between wavelengths The difference in reflectance between wavelengths in the range of 400 to 780 nm in is either 10% or more or 10% or less in total light transmittance, and the color layer is a film having a thickness of 10 μm or more in the lamination direction. 15. The decorative body according to any one of additional items 3 to 14, wherein at least one of images, characters, logos, figures, and patterns is displayed depending on the presence or absence of the film-like color surface layer. Additional Item 16: The decorative body according to any one of Additional Items 1 to 15, wherein the separate layer has lower permeability than the permeable portion. Additional Item 17: Having an end face that is part of the interface with the outside, the end face is not parallel to the interface between the flat colored layer and the adhesive layer, and the flat colored layer and the adhesive layer exposed at the end face In at least a part of the boundary including, the depth of unevenness in the direction perpendicular to the end face is 0.8 mm or less, or the maximum height roughness measured perpendicular to the interface between the flat colored layer and the adhesive layer on the end face 17. The decorative body according to any one of additional items 1 to 16, wherein at least one of Rz is 100 μm or less. Additional item 18: The flat colored layer has at least one of a groove or an end surface that is an interface with the air, the groove has a plurality of side surfaces facing each other, and the end surface is an interface with the air of the decoration any one of additional items 1 to 17, wherein the groove portion or the end surface is not parallel to the interface between the flat colored layer and the adhesive layer, and at least a portion of the side surface or the end surface is a mirror surface. Described decorations. Additional Item 19: The decorative body according to Additional Item 18, wherein the arithmetic average roughness Ra of at least a portion of the mirror-like surface is 0.5 μm or less. Additional item 20: At least part of the corners of each outer surface is chamfered, and in the chamfered corners, the obliquely shaved corners are at least in the stacking direction or in the direction perpendicular to the stacking direction 20. The decorative body according to any one of additional items 1 to 19, wherein the depth of one side or the radius of roundness is 0.05 mm or more. Additional item 21: The decorative body has a surface portion that is part of the outer interface and is perpendicular to the lamination direction, the flat coloring agent can be observed through the surface portion, and the flat colored layer is formed in the groove portion. or at least one of the end faces, the groove is an interface with the air and consists of a plurality of side faces facing each other, the end face is part of the interface with the air of the decoration, the groove or the The absolute value of the angle formed between at least a portion of the side surface or the end surface and a perpendicular or normal line drawn from the at least a portion to the surface including the surface portion is arcsin (1/ n) or less (n is the refractive index of the portion having transparency). Additional item 22: The decoration according to any one of additional items 1 to 21, wherein the refractive index of the adhesive layer is equal to or higher than the refractive index of the transparent portion. Additional Item 23: The decorative body according to any one of Additional Items 1 to 22, wherein the refractive index of the adhesive layer is 0.002 or more greater than the refractive index of the transparent portion. Additional Item 24: Any one of Additional Items 1 to 23, wherein the thickness of the flat colored layer in the stacking direction is 1.4 mm or more, and the thickness of the separate layer in the stacking direction is 0.4 mm or more. The decorative body described in . Additional item 25: The decorative body according to any one of additional items 1 to 24, which has a bending elastic modulus of 1000 MPa or more. Additional item 26: The decoration according to any one of additional items 1 to 25, wherein the surface of the flat colored layer opposite to the adhesive layer is the outermost surface. Additional Item 27: Any one of Additional Items 1 to 25, wherein the refractive index of the adhesive layer is greater than the refractive index of the transparent portion and the non-containing layer, and the difference between the refractive indices is 0.002 or more. Described decorations. ]

付記=本発明の別の態様は、材料に接着剤を塗布する散布部と、複数の材料を接合する貼合部と、を有し、付記項1~26の何れかに記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造装置である。また、材料に接着剤を塗布する散布工程と、複数の材料を接合する貼合工程と、を有し、付記項1~26の何れかに記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造方法である。さらに別の態様は、前記装飾体を具える建築物・構造物・乗り物及び電子機器である。
[ Additional note = another aspect of the present invention has a spraying part for applying an adhesive to a material and a bonding part for joining a plurality of materials, and the decorative body according to any one of additional items 1 to 26 It is a decoration manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing. Further, a decorative body manufacturing method for manufacturing the decorative body according to any one of additional items 1 to 26, comprising a spraying step of applying an adhesive to a material and a bonding step of bonding a plurality of materials. . Still another aspect is a building/structure/vehicle and an electronic device comprising the decoration. ]

付記=本発明の別の態様は、以下である。項01:複数の層が積層された装飾体であって、前記複数の層が、透過性を有しかつ扁平着色剤が分散された扁平着色層と、前記扁平着色層のうち透過性を有する部分より透過性が低い層と、前記扁平着色層を別の層に接合する接着層と、を含み、前記扁平着色層において、前記扁平着色剤の色が前記透過性を有する部分の色と異なり、前記扁平着色剤の最大長さが0.02mm以上であり、前記扁平着色剤の少なくとも一部において、それぞれの最大長さが、前記最大長さの中点を通り前記最大長さの方向に直交する断面の径のうち前記中点を通る最も短い長さの5倍以上であることを特徴とする装飾体。項01に記載の装飾体は、さらに上記付記項2~13又は付記項15~23の何れかの特徴を具えてもよい。
[ Appendix= Another aspect of the present invention is as follows. Item 01: A decorative body in which a plurality of layers are laminated, wherein the plurality of layers includes a flat colored layer having transparency and in which a flat coloring agent is dispersed, and one of the flat colored layers having transparency and an adhesive layer for bonding the flat colored layer to another layer, wherein in the flat colored layer, the color of the flat coloring agent is different from the color of the transparent portion. , the maximum length of the flat colorant is 0.02 mm or more, and in at least a part of the flat colorant, each maximum length passes through the midpoint of the maximum length and extends in the direction of the maximum length A decoration having a diameter of at least 5 times the shortest length passing through the midpoint among the diameters of cross sections perpendicular to each other. The decorative body according to Item 01 may further include the features of any one of Items 2 to 13 or Items 15 to 23 above. ]

装飾体Zが軽量化される。
〔付記=本発明に係る装飾体は、高い耐久性及び意匠性を有する。
The decorative body Z is lightened.
[Additional Note: The decorative body according to the present invention has high durability and designability. ]

第1の実施形態等に係る装飾体製造装置の構成例を示す図A diagram showing a configuration example of a decoration manufacturing apparatus according to the first embodiment, etc. 第1の実施形態等に係る装飾体製造方法のフローチャート例Flowchart example of decoration manufacturing method according to first embodiment etc. 第1・2の実施形態等に係る装飾体の溝部の例の断面図Cross-sectional view of an example of the groove portion of the decorative body according to the first and second embodiments, etc. 側面で反射が起こる場合の光路の例を示す断面図Cross-sectional view showing an example of an optical path when reflection occurs on the side 第3の実施形態等に係る装飾体製造装置の構成例を示す図A diagram showing a configuration example of a decoration manufacturing apparatus according to a third embodiment, etc. 第3の実施形態等に係る装飾体製造方法のフローチャート例Flowchart example of decoration manufacturing method according to third embodiment etc. 第3の実施形態に係る装飾体の例の斜視図及び断面図Perspective view and cross-sectional view of an example of a decorative body according to the third embodiment 第4の実施形態に係る装飾体の例の断面図Sectional view of an example of a decorative body according to the fourth embodiment 第5の実施形態に係る装飾体の例の断面図Sectional view of an example of a decorative body according to the fifth embodiment 第6の実施形態に係る装飾体の例の斜視図及び断面図Perspective view and cross-sectional view of an example of a decorative body according to the sixth embodiment 第7の実施形態に係る装飾体の例の断面図Sectional view of an example of a decorative body according to the seventh embodiment 第8の実施形態に係る装飾体の例の断面図Sectional view of an example of a decorative body according to the eighth embodiment 第9の実施形態に係る装飾体の例の断面図Cross-sectional view of an example of a decorative body according to the ninth embodiment 第10の実施形態に係る装飾体の例の断面図Sectional view of an example of a decorative body according to the tenth embodiment 第10の実施形態に係る装飾体の別の例の断面図Sectional view of another example of the decorative body according to the tenth embodiment 第11の実施形態に係る装飾体の例の断面図Sectional view of an example of a decorative body according to the eleventh embodiment 第12の実施形態に係る装飾体の例の正面図及び断面図Front view and cross-sectional view of an example of a decorative body according to the twelfth embodiment 第13の実施形態に係る装飾体の例の側面図Side view of an example of a decorative body according to the thirteenth embodiment 第14の実施形態に係る装飾体の例の断面図Sectional view of an example of a decorative body according to the fourteenth embodiment 第15の実施形態に係る装飾体の例の断面図Sectional view of an example of a decorative body according to the fifteenth embodiment

《第1の実施形態》
以下、図1及び図2を参照して、第1の実施形態等に係る装飾体製造装置40の構成及び動作の例を説明する。装飾体製造装置40は、例えば溝加工部43・充填材料調合部44・充填加工部45・被覆加工部46を具える。第1の実施形態に係る装飾体製造方法は、例えば図2のように、溝加工工程S43・充填材料調合工程S44・充填加工工程S45・被覆加工工程S46を含む。なお本明細書においてAがBを「含む」とは、このように、AがB以外を含まない場合を排除しない。各部又は各工程の順序は変更可能である。各部又は各工程が他の各部又は各工程を含んでもよい。各部又は各工程の一部が繰り返されてもよく、省略されてもよい。洗浄・研磨等の既知の他の部工程が適宜追加されてもよい。
<<1st Embodiment>>
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2, an example of the configuration and operation of the decoration manufacturing apparatus 40 according to the first embodiment and the like will be described. The decoration manufacturing apparatus 40 includes, for example, a grooving section 43, a filling material preparation section 44, a filling processing section 45, and a coating processing section 46. As shown in FIG. The decoration manufacturing method according to the first embodiment includes, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a grooving step S43, a filling material preparation step S44, a filling processing step S45, and a coating processing step S46. In this specification, A "includes" B does not exclude the case where A does not include anything other than B. The order of each part or each step can be changed. Each part or each step may include other parts or steps. Each part or part of each step may be repeated or omitted. Other known processes such as cleaning and polishing may be added as appropriate.

溝加工部43は材料板20等を取得し、レーザ加工部431又は切削加工・金型加工・射出成形・ウォーターカット・ワイヤーカット・3Dプリンティング等既知の加工を行う装置により、材料板20に溝部Gを形成する(S43)。溝部Gは、材料板20の表面部F又はそれと対向する裏面部Rの少なくとも一方の側に開口部Oを有してもよい。なお、本明細書等は例えば表面部F側と記載するが、この○○側とは、○○と○○に対向する別の部分との位置関係において○○の方向であることを示す。開口部Oは、図3aでは表面部Fに接するが、図3bでは装飾体Zにおけるz方向の中心を基準として表面部Fに近く裏面部Rとは反対の箇所に位置する。本明細書等はこれらを併せて「表面部F側」と記載する。充填材料調合部44は充填材料21を取得し、計量・混合攪拌する(S44)。充填材料21は既製品でもよい。充填加工部45は溝部Gに充填材料21を充填する(S45)。充填加工部45は、例えば材料板20の溝部G以外の部分に付着した不要な充填材料21を拭き取ったり、溝部G以外の部分を覆ったりすることで、充填材料21が開口部Oからはみ出さないようにすることができる。溝部G内の充填材料21が硬化し充填部Lとなる。被覆加工部46は、別の材料板20を溝部Gの開口部O側に図3bのように接合して被覆部Tとし、溝部Gを密封してもよい(S46)。被覆部Tを有する装飾体Zの表面部F及び裏面部Rは、被覆部T接着後の外側の露出面である。また、表面部Fと裏面部Rとは、上記の開口部Oに係る事項及び図4が示す通り、互いに反転可能である。 The groove processing unit 43 acquires the material plate 20 or the like, and grooves are formed in the material plate 20 by a laser processing unit 431 or an apparatus that performs known processing such as cutting, mold processing, injection molding, water cutting, wire cutting, and 3D printing. G is formed (S43). The groove portion G may have an opening O on at least one side of the front surface portion F of the material plate 20 or the rear surface portion R opposite thereto. In this specification and the like, for example, the surface portion F side is described, but this XX side indicates the direction of XX in terms of the positional relationship between XX and another portion facing XX. The opening O is in contact with the front face F in FIG. 3A, but is located near the front face F and opposite to the back face R with respect to the z-direction center of the decoration Z in FIG. 3B. In this specification and the like, these are collectively described as "the surface portion F side". The filling material preparation unit 44 obtains the filling material 21, and measures, mixes and stirs (S44). The filling material 21 may be off-the-shelf. The filling processing unit 45 fills the groove portion G with the filling material 21 (S45). For example, the filling processing unit 45 wipes off the unnecessary filling material 21 adhering to the portion other than the groove G of the material plate 20 or covers the portion other than the groove G so that the filling material 21 protrudes from the opening O. can be prevented. The filling material 21 in the groove G hardens and becomes the filling portion L. As shown in FIG. The coating processing unit 46 may bond another material plate 20 to the opening O side of the groove G as shown in FIG. 3B to form a coating T, thereby sealing the groove G (S46). The front surface portion F and the rear surface portion R of the decorative body Z having the covering portion T are the exposed outer surfaces after the covering portion T is adhered. Further, the front surface portion F and the rear surface portion R can be reversed to each other as shown in the above-described opening portion O and FIG.

材料板20は、加工後の装飾体Zで基材部M・扁平着色層MC等となる。なお、基材部Mと扁平着色層MCとは同一であるが、光路等の説明の都合上、基材部Mは扁平着色剤Cを含まない場合がある。材料板20は特に制限されないが、ABS・セルロースアセテート・エポキシ(EP)・メラミン・ポリアミド・ポリカーボネート(PC)・フェノール・ポリエチレン(PE)・ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)・ポリイミド・PLA・アクリル(PMMA)又は(メタ)アクリレート系・ポリオレフィン・ポリプロピレン(PP)・ポリスチレン(PS)・ポリウレタン(PU)・ポリ塩化ビニル(PVC)・シリコーン(SI)・ユリア・不飽和ポリエステル(UP)・ビニルエステル(VE)等の各種樹脂やガラス等からなる板状体でもよい。本発明に係る装飾体は、屋外等に設置される場合には、自立でき、たわみにくく、傷がつきにくいことが望ましい。ゆえに、材料板20が樹脂である場合には硬質樹脂でもよい。硬質樹脂とは、JIS K 7161-1等に記載のように、曲げ弾性率が700MPaを超える樹脂である。なお軟質樹脂の曲げ弾性率は700MPa以下である。基材部M等や装飾体Zはさらに変形しにくくてもよく、その曲げ弾性率は、好ましくは1000以上・より好ましくは1500以上・さらに好ましくは2000以上・一層好ましくは2500ないし3000以上であり、割れにくさや加工適性から好ましくは20000以下・より好ましくは10000以下・さらに好ましくは5000以下である。例えば市販のPMMA板はこれらの条件を満たす。材料板20が、樹脂以外であってこれらの条件を満たしてもよい。曲げ弾性率の数値は、単位をMPaとし、基本的にはJIS K 7171・K 7203又はISO178等に記載の方法により測定される。測定の試験片は、本来は上記規格が定める形状及び寸法通りに作製されるべきである。しかし、実際の装飾体Zの各部から、上記規格の定め通りの試験片を作成することは困難な場合がある。そのようなやむを得ない場合には、測定値は、近似的な測定方法による測定値でもよく、当該材料板20と同じ又は同様の製品について製造元が公表している測定値ないし公称値でもよい。また、本明細書での数値の測定方法は、原則として本発明出願時点の最新版JIS及びISOの対応する記載に準拠し、当該JIS等の規定に適合せず、本明細書に記載がない事項については本発明出願時の技術常識に準拠する。以下の他の測定項目に関しても同様である。測定には、株式会社島津製作所製のAG-100kNXplusのような万能試験機等の測定装置が用いられる。一般に基材部Mは、大きい曲げ弾性率であるほど、低可撓性であって、衝撃等により充填部Lと剥離しやすい。ただし、室内用等では、材料板20はフィルム状でもよく、その可撓性や曲げ弾性率等は制限されない。 The material plate 20 becomes the base material portion M, the flat colored layer MC, and the like in the decorative body Z after processing. Although the base material portion M and the flat colored layer MC are the same, the base material portion M may not contain the flat colorant C for convenience of explanation of the optical path and the like. Although the material plate 20 is not particularly limited, ABS, cellulose acetate, epoxy (EP), melamine, polyamide, polycarbonate (PC), phenol, polyethylene (PE), polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyimide, PLA, acrylic (PMMA) or (Meth)acrylate, polyolefin, polypropylene (PP), polystyrene (PS), polyurethane (PU), polyvinyl chloride (PVC), silicone (SI), urea, unsaturated polyester (UP), vinyl ester (VE), etc. A plate-like body made of various resins, glass, or the like may also be used. When the decorative body according to the present invention is installed outdoors or the like, it is desirable that it can stand on its own, is resistant to bending, and is resistant to damage. Therefore, if the material plate 20 is made of resin, it may be made of hard resin. A hard resin is a resin having a flexural modulus of more than 700 MPa as described in JIS K 7161-1 or the like. The bending elastic modulus of the soft resin is 700 MPa or less. The base material part M and the decoration Z may be even less deformable, and their bending elastic modulus is preferably 1,000 or more, more preferably 1,500 or more, still more preferably 2,000 or more, and still more preferably 2,500 to 3,000 or more. , preferably 20,000 or less, more preferably 10,000 or less, and even more preferably 5,000 or less in terms of resistance to cracking and workability. For example, commercially available PMMA plates meet these conditions. The material plate 20 may be made of a material other than resin and satisfy these conditions. The flexural modulus is measured in units of MPa, basically according to the method described in JIS K 7171/K 7203, ISO 178, or the like. The test piece for measurement should originally be made according to the shape and dimensions specified by the above standards. However, it may be difficult to prepare a test piece according to the above standard from each part of the actual decorative body Z. In such unavoidable cases, the measured value may be a measured value by an approximate measuring method, or a measured value or a nominal value published by the manufacturer for the same or similar product as the material plate 20 in question. In addition, the method of measuring numerical values in this specification is in principle in accordance with the corresponding descriptions of the latest version of JIS and ISO at the time of filing of the present invention, and does not conform to the provisions of the JIS, etc., and is not described in this specification. Matters conform to the common general technical knowledge as of the filing of the present invention. The same applies to other measurement items below. For the measurement, a measuring device such as a universal testing machine such as AG-100kNXplus manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation is used. In general, the higher the flexural modulus of the base material portion M, the lower the flexibility, and the easier it is to separate from the filling portion L due to an impact or the like. However, for indoor use or the like, the material plate 20 may be in the form of a film, and its flexibility, flexural modulus, etc. are not limited.

本発明に係る装飾体Zでは、溝部Gの両側又は片側の側面Sが透過して見える必要がある場合には、基材部M・扁平着色層MC等は透過性を有してもよい。ただし、溝部Gの剥離の抑制が課題である場合、溝部Gの脱落防止という目的も含まれるので、基材部Mが透過性を有さなくてもよい。透過性とは光学的な透過性であり、無色透明(可視光線全域に対して透過性を有する)と有色透明(可視光線のうち一部の帯域と別の帯域とで透過性が異なる)の両方を含む。基材部M及び側面S等の全光線透過率(JIS K 7375、一部はISO 13468-1等、ただし試料が有彩色でもよい)は、好ましくは70%以上・より好ましくは80%以上・さらに好ましくは85%以上・一層好ましくは90%以上である。上限は100%でもよい。また、有色透明の場合、分光透過率における400~780nm(前数値以上後数値以下を示す。以下同様である。)の範囲内での波長間の透過率の差が好ましくは10%以上・より好ましくは20%以上・さらに好ましくは30%以上・一層好ましくは40%以上でもよい(有色不透明の場合、波長間の分光反射率の差が同様である。また不透明な板は、観察者に対しその板を挟んだ向こう側の像を観察させない。不透明の場合、全光線透過率が好ましくは30%以下・より好ましくは10%以下・さらに好ましくは5%以下である。)。上限は100%でもよいが、蛍光色の場合100%を超えることもある。加えて、一部の波長において透過率が好ましくは50%以上・より好ましくは70%以上・さらに好ましくは80%以上でもよい。これらの条件は充填部L・色面層U・色帯部K・液体充填部Q・先端充填部N・色膜H等に適用されてもよい。またこれらは、追加工の容易さから熱可塑性樹脂でもよく、透過性や寸法精度から非晶性樹脂でもよい。ただし、PETは結晶性樹脂であるが、低結晶化度により一般に高透過率である点で非晶性樹脂に準ずる。分光透過率の測定は株式会社島津製作所製SolidSpec 3700DUV等の分光光度計等によってもよく、依頼試験でもよい。なお、本明細書において依頼試験とは地方独立行政法人東京都立産業技術研究センターへの依頼試験を指す。試験片が小さすぎて測定できない場合には、基準となる試験片との目測比較でもよい。また、本明細書において、数値範囲の上限ないし下限は、より高性能の材料及び加工方法が開発される可能性があるので、特に定めないことがある。装飾体Zでは光の拡散が低い方がいい場合があるので、基材部M及び側面Sのヘーズ(JIS K 7136又はISO 14782等)は、好ましくは0~5%・より好ましくは0~2%・さらに好ましくは0~1%である。全光線透過率及びヘーズの測定は日本電色工業株式会社製NDH 5000等のヘーズメーター等によってもよく、依頼試験でもよい。なお、本明細書において色とは、色相・彩度・明度・透過率・ヘーズ・屈折率・反射率等の光学的ないし視覚的要素を含む。接合された2つの材料が何れも無色透明であっても、屈折率等が異なり、それらの接合部分が識別可能であれば、それらは互いに異なる色である。 In the decorative body Z according to the present invention, the substrate portion M, the flat colored layer MC, etc. may have transparency when both side surfaces or one side surface S of the groove portion G needs to be seen through. However, when suppression of peeling of the groove portion G is an issue, the purpose of preventing the groove portion G from coming off is also included, so the base portion M does not have to have transparency. Transmittance is optical transparency, and it is colorless and transparent (having transparency to the entire visible light range) and colored transparency (transmitting a part of the visible light band and another band). Including both. The total light transmittance (JIS K 7375, partly ISO 13468-1, etc., but the sample may be chromatic) of the base material portion M and the side surface S is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more. It is more preferably 85% or more and even more preferably 90% or more. The upper limit may be 100%. In the case of colored and transparent, the difference in transmittance between wavelengths within the range of 400 to 780 nm in spectral transmittance (preceding numerical value to post numerical value, the same shall apply hereinafter) is preferably 10% or more. It is preferably 20% or more, more preferably 30% or more, and even more preferably 40% or more (in the case of colored opaque, the difference in spectral reflectance between wavelengths is the same. The image on the other side of the plate is not observed.If the plate is opaque, the total light transmittance is preferably 30% or less, more preferably 10% or less, and even more preferably 5% or less.). The upper limit may be 100%, but may exceed 100% in the case of fluorescent colors. In addition, the transmittance at some wavelengths may be preferably 50% or more, more preferably 70% or more, and even more preferably 80% or more. These conditions may be applied to the filling portion L, the color surface layer U, the color band portion K, the liquid filling portion Q, the tip filling portion N, the color film H, and the like. Thermoplastic resins may be used for ease of additional processing, and amorphous resins may be used for transparency and dimensional accuracy. However, although PET is a crystalline resin, it is similar to an amorphous resin in that it generally has a high transmittance due to its low degree of crystallinity. The spectral transmittance may be measured by a spectrophotometer such as SolidSpec 3700DUV manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation, or by a request test. In this specification, the term “testing requested” refers to testing requested by the Tokyo Metropolitan Industrial Technology Research Center. If the test piece is too small for measurement, a visual comparison with a reference test piece may be used. Also, in this specification, the upper and lower limits of the numerical range may not be particularly defined because higher performance materials and processing methods may be developed. In some cases, the decorative body Z should have low light diffusion, so the haze (JIS K 7136 or ISO 14782, etc.) of the base material portion M and the side surface S is preferably 0 to 5%, more preferably 0 to 2. % · more preferably 0 to 1%. The total light transmittance and haze may be measured using a haze meter such as NDH 5000 manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd., or may be a request test. In this specification, color includes optical or visual factors such as hue, saturation, brightness, transmittance, haze, refractive index, and reflectance. Even if the two materials that are bonded are both colorless and transparent, if the refractive index and the like are different and the bonded portions are identifiable, the colors are different from each other.

材料板20・基材部M・装飾体Zの厚さは特に制限されないが、入手・加工の容易さから例えば1mm~30mmでもよく、さらに薄いフィルムも含めて0.5mm以上・0.2mm以上でもよく、100mm以下でもよい。厚さはノギス等で測定可能である。溝部Gの深さdGは、材料板20の厚さの50%から90%程度が、強度・費用対効果等からは好適であることが多い。微細な場合には深さdGが0.4mm又は0.1mm以上でもよい。それ未満であると、温度変化等による剥離が減少する。溝部Gは、例えば図3のy方向に長さを有してもよい。溝部Gの幅wは、0.2mm以上・0.1mm以上・0.01mm以上・1mm以下・0.6mm以下でもよい。複数の溝部Gが互いに平行である場合、そのピッチは、0.1mm以上でもよく、0.5mm以上でもよい。レーザ加工等、特にCOレーザ加工の場合には、加工限界から、溝部Gの深さdG又はピッチは1mm以上・2mm以上・3mm以上・4mm以上・5mm以上・6mm以上でもよい。YAG・ファイバ・エキシマ・ルビー等、他の各種レーザによる場合には、溝部Gがより浅くてもよい。なお、深さdGは表面部Fに垂直な方向の長さである。幅wは表面部Fに平行かつ溝部Gの長さ方向に垂直な方向の、溝部Gにおける最大の部分の長さである。幅wは、楔状の溝部Gでは開口部Oの幅であることが多い。楔状の溝部Gの先端部分の幅は幅wに対して無視できるほどに狭い。楔状の溝部Gは、その側面Sと設計上の基準形状(溝部Gの長さ方向が直線である場合には完全な平面)とのずれが幅wの1/10以下であれば楔状と認められる。つまり幅wの1/5までの凹凸差が許容される。深さdG/幅wは、好ましくは2以上・より好ましくは4以上・さらに好ましくは8以上・一層好ましくは10以上でもよい。幅w・深さdG・ピッチ、及び後述の各部の厚さ等は、主走査光学解像度4000dpi以上のフラットベッドスキャナ(セイコーエプソン株式会社製のGT‐X980等)による試験片のスキャン画像のピクセル数から測定可能である。スキャン時には自動シャープネスを最大とする。試験片は必要に応じて加工され、測定部分がスキャンガラス面に密着するのが望ましい。光学的歪みの低減のため、主走査方向の中央部分での測定が望ましい。この測定は株式会社トプコン製のTUM-220EH等の工具顕微測定機・Carl Zeiss製O‐INSPECT 543等のマルチセンサ・OGP社製Smart Scope Vantage 300等のレーザ測定機によってもよく、依頼試験でもよい。破壊・移動できない試験片の深さdG等は、試験片と定規等の撮影画像からも概算可能である。また、装飾体Zは平面的板状体でもよく、曲面状・球状・立方体状・円柱状・多角柱状等様々な形状でもよく、そのサイズも自由である。被覆加工部46等が装飾体Zを曲げ加工してもよい。装飾体Zが楔状で、表面部Fが裏面部Rに平行でなくてもよい。 The thickness of the material plate 20, the base material M, and the decorative body Z is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, 1 mm to 30 mm due to the ease of acquisition and processing, and 0.5 mm or more and 0.2 mm or more, including thin films. , or 100 mm or less. The thickness can be measured with a vernier caliper or the like. In many cases, the depth dG of the groove G is preferably about 50% to 90% of the thickness of the material plate 20 in terms of strength, cost effectiveness, and the like. In the case of fineness, the depth dG may be 0.4 mm or 0.1 mm or more. If it is less than that, peeling due to temperature change or the like is reduced. The groove portion G may have a length in the y direction of FIG. 3, for example. The width w of the groove portion G may be 0.2 mm or more, 0.1 mm or more, 0.01 mm or more, 1 mm or less, or 0.6 mm or less. When the plurality of grooves G are parallel to each other, the pitch may be 0.1 mm or more, or 0.5 mm or more. In the case of laser processing, particularly CO 2 laser processing, the depth dG or pitch of the grooves G may be 1 mm or more, 2 mm or more, 3 mm or more, 4 mm or more, 5 mm or more, or 6 mm or more, depending on the processing limit. When YAG, fiber, excimer, ruby, or other various lasers are used, the groove G may be shallower. The depth dG is the length in the direction perpendicular to the surface portion F. Width w is the length of the largest portion of groove G in a direction parallel to surface F and perpendicular to the lengthwise direction of groove G. As shown in FIG. The width w is often the width of the opening O in the wedge-shaped groove G. The width of the tip portion of the wedge-shaped groove portion G is narrow enough to be ignored with respect to the width w. The wedge-shaped groove G is recognized as wedge-shaped if the deviation between the side surface S and the design standard shape (complete plane when the length direction of the groove G is straight) is 1/10 or less of the width w. be done. That is, a difference in unevenness up to 1/5 of the width w is allowed. The depth dG/width w may be preferably 2 or more, more preferably 4 or more, even more preferably 8 or more, and even more preferably 10 or more. The width w, depth dG, pitch, and the thickness of each part described later are the number of pixels of the scanned image of the test piece with a flatbed scanner (such as GT-X980 manufactured by Seiko Epson Corporation) with a main scanning optical resolution of 4000 dpi or more. can be measured from Maximize auto sharpness when scanning. It is desirable that the test piece is processed as necessary so that the measurement portion is in close contact with the scan glass surface. Measurement in the central portion in the main scanning direction is desirable in order to reduce optical distortion. This measurement may be performed by a tool microscope measuring machine such as TUM-220EH manufactured by Topcon Co., Ltd., a multi-sensor such as O-INSPECT 543 manufactured by Carl Zeiss, a laser measuring machine such as Smart Scope Vantage 300 manufactured by OGP, or a request test. . The depth dG and the like of the test piece that cannot be broken or moved can be roughly estimated from the photographed images of the test piece and a ruler. Moreover, the decorative body Z may be a planar plate-like body, and may be in various shapes such as a curved surface, a spherical shape, a cubic shape, a columnar shape, and a polygonal columnar shape, and the size thereof is also free. The decoration body Z may be bent by the coating processing unit 46 or the like. The decorative body Z may be wedge-shaped and the front surface portion F may not be parallel to the rear surface portion R.

溝加工部43は、文字・ロゴ・図形・模様等の画像30のデータに基づいて溝部Gを加工してもよい。これにより製造された装飾体Zは、画像・文字・ロゴ・図形・模様の少なくとも何れかを表示してもよい。溝部Gの両側の側面Sがなす二面角のうち溝部側の角度を溝部楔角θGとする。溝部Gは、レーザ加工部431によってなる場合には、図3aのように楔状になることが多く、0<θG≦10(°)でもよい。ULS社等の10W程度の小出力のCOレーザ加工機が、PMMA板に深さ1mmで複雑な曲線形状の溝部Gを加工すると、θGは9~10°になることがある。機種及び加工条件によってはθG≦7又はθG≦5(°)の場合がある。レーザ加工により、アスペクト比が高く微細な溝部Gが低コストで加工可能となる。レーザ加工部431は、ヘリカル加工等により、楔状ではなく、θGが略0で、両側の側面Sが平行な溝部Gを加工してもよい(図3b)。すなわち|θG|≧0(°)でもよい。楔状の溝部Gの両側の側面Sがなす二面角を二等分するか、溝部Gの互いに平行な両側の側面Sと互いに平行でそれらから等距離にあるか、の何れかである面を二分面とする。二分面は、平面でも曲面でもよく、溝部G各部の長さ方向に平行である。二分面の各部が表面部F(ないし裏面部R)に垂直であることを溝部Gが表面部F(ないし裏面部R)に垂直であると記載する。溝部Gは表面部Fに垂直でもよく、そうでなくてもよい。それらのなす角度が装飾体Zの各部で一定でもよく、複数でもよい。例えばガルバノ式のレーザ加工部431による加工物では、その角度が各部で異なり、かつ、溝部G各部の長さ方向に垂直な断面と溝部Gの二分面との複数の交線の延長が1点で交差する(ただし、溝部G各部から前記1点を見込む角度のずれが10°以下・特記時には5°以下又は2°以下の場合、誤差の範囲内とする。)。なお、二分面は仮想面であり実際の溝部Gにはないため図示されない。本発明では、幅と長さが互いに異なり、二分面が面積を有する溝部Gを中心に記載するが、溝部Gの幅と長さが略同一でもよく、溝部Gが円錐・楕円錐・円柱・円錐台・角錐状等多様な形状でもよい。溝加工部43の動作及び基材部M・溝部Gの特徴の一部又は全部が、以下の実施形態の多くで以上と共通でもよい。 The groove processing section 43 may process the groove section G based on the data of the image 30 such as characters, logos, graphics, and patterns. The decorative body Z thus manufactured may display at least one of images, characters, logos, figures, and patterns. Of the dihedral angles formed by the side surfaces S on both sides of the groove G, the angle on the groove side is defined as a groove wedge angle θG. When the groove portion G is formed by the laser-processed portion 431, it is often wedge-shaped as shown in FIG. 3a, and may be 0<θG≦10 (°). When a low output CO 2 laser processing machine of about 10 W such as ULS Co., Ltd. processes a complicated curved groove portion G with a depth of 1 mm in a PMMA plate, θG may be 9 to 10°. There are cases where θG≦7 or θG≦5 (°) depending on the model and processing conditions. By laser processing, a fine groove portion G having a high aspect ratio can be processed at low cost. The laser-processed portion 431 may be processed by helical processing or the like to form a groove portion G that is not wedge-shaped but has θG of approximately 0 and side surfaces S on both sides are parallel (FIG. 3B). That is, |θG|≧0 (°) may be satisfied. A surface that either bisects the dihedral angle formed by both side surfaces S of the wedge-shaped groove G, or is parallel to and equidistant from both parallel side surfaces S of the groove G. Make it a bisecting face. The bisected surface may be flat or curved, and is parallel to the longitudinal direction of each part of the groove G. When each part of the bisected surface is perpendicular to the surface portion F (or the rear surface portion R), it is described that the groove portion G is perpendicular to the surface portion F (or the rear surface portion R). The groove G may or may not be perpendicular to the surface F. The angle formed by them may be constant in each part of the decoration Z, or may be plural. For example, in the workpiece processed by the galvano-type laser processing unit 431, the angle is different in each part, and the extension of a plurality of intersection lines between the cross section perpendicular to the length direction of each part of the groove part G and the bisected surface of the groove part G is one point. (However, if the deviation of the angle of viewing the one point from each part of the groove G is 10° or less, or if it is 5° or less or 2° or less, it is within the range of error.). Note that the bisecting plane is a virtual plane and does not exist in the actual groove portion G, so it is not illustrated. In the present invention, the width and length are different from each other, and the description is centered on the groove G having a bisected surface with an area. Various shapes such as truncated cone and pyramid may be used. Some or all of the operation of the grooving portion 43 and the features of the substrate portion M and the groove portion G may be common to many of the following embodiments.

充填材料調合部44は展色剤V・着色剤Co・分散剤D等の充填材料21を混合攪拌してもよい。なお、本明細書では混合前・混合後の両方を充填材料21と記載する。展色剤Vが着色剤Coを兼ね、着色なしで充填材料21となってもよい。そうでない場合には、展色剤Vの色は、着色の容易さ及び発色の良好さから無色透明又は白色がよい。着色剤Coは有機化合物からなる有機顔料でも無機化合物からなる無機顔料でもよい。顔料の色や種類により屈折率が異なり、後述のように適する屈折率の展色剤Vも変化する。装飾体Zの用途・加工方法・所望の色・実現すべき装飾効果等に応じて基材部Mと着色剤Coが決定されたのちに、それらの屈折率等から展色剤Vが選定されてもよい。 The filling material preparation unit 44 may mix and stir the filling material 21 such as the vehicle colorant V, the coloring agent Co, and the dispersing agent D. In this specification, both before and after mixing are referred to as the filling material 21 . The vehicle V may also serve as the coloring agent Co and may become the filler material 21 without coloring. Otherwise, the color of the vehicle V is preferably colorless and transparent or white in terms of ease of coloring and good color development. The colorant Co may be an organic pigment made of an organic compound or an inorganic pigment made of an inorganic compound. The refractive index varies depending on the color and type of the pigment, and the suitable refractive index of the vehicle V also varies as described later. After the base material portion M and the coloring agent Co are determined according to the application, processing method, desired color, decorative effect to be achieved, etc. of the decorative body Z, the colorant V is selected from their refractive indices and the like. may

展色剤Vは、上記樹脂の1つ以上からなってもよいが、本実施形態では、溝部Gへの充填加工の容易さから、熱硬化性樹脂が特に好適である。展色剤Vが、熱硬化性樹脂とともに、その硬化を妨げない程度の比率で熱可塑性樹脂を含んでもよい。基材部Mが硬質樹脂である場合、充填部Lが基材部Mから剥離しやすい。とりわけ充填部Lと基材部Mの線膨張率が異なると、温度変化の繰り返しによりしばしば剥離が発生する。ゆえに、充填部Lが基材部Mの伸縮や衝撃に追従できれば、剥離しにくくなる。そのためには、充填部Lの引張伸び率が好ましくは20%以上・より好ましくは30%以上・さらに好ましくは40%以上・一層好ましくは50%以上であればよい。数値が大きいほど、充填部Lが変形しやすいので、充填部Lと基材部Mとの線膨張率の差による剥離を防止する効果が向上する。なお、引張伸び率は、試験片が引張により破壊に至った時の、試験片の伸びの試験片の長さに対する比である。また、充填部Lの引張伸び率は、基材部Mの引張伸び率の好ましくは3倍以上・より好ましくは5倍以上・さらに好ましくは6倍以上・8倍以上・一層好ましくは10倍以上・15倍以上・20倍以上でもよい。この数値が大きいほど、衝撃が加わった際の基材部Mの伸びに対して、充填部Lが余裕をもって追従可能となり、また衝撃を吸収可能となるので、界面の耐衝撃性・難剥離性が向上する。あるいは、充填部Lの引張伸び率から基材部Mの引張伸び率を減じた差が、好ましくは15%以上・より好ましくは20%以上・さらに好ましくは30%以上・一層好ましくは40%以上でもよい。 The vehicle V may be made of one or more of the above resins, but in the present embodiment, a thermosetting resin is particularly suitable because of the ease with which the grooves G can be filled. The vehicle V may contain a thermosetting resin together with a thermoplastic resin in a proportion that does not interfere with the curing thereof. When the base material portion M is made of a hard resin, the filling portion L is easily separated from the base material portion M. In particular, if the filling portion L and the base portion M have different coefficients of linear expansion, peeling often occurs due to repeated temperature changes. Therefore, if the filling portion L can follow expansion and contraction and impact of the base material portion M, it becomes difficult to separate. For this purpose, the tensile elongation of the filling portion L is preferably 20% or more, more preferably 30% or more, still more preferably 40% or more, and still more preferably 50% or more. The larger the numerical value, the more easily the filling portion L is deformed, so that the effect of preventing separation due to the difference in coefficient of linear expansion between the filling portion L and the base material portion M is improved. The tensile elongation rate is the ratio of the elongation of the test piece to the length of the test piece when the test piece breaks due to tension. The tensile elongation of the filling portion L is preferably 3 times or more, more preferably 5 times or more, still more preferably 6 times or more, 8 times or more, and still more preferably 10 times or more of the tensile elongation of the base portion M.・15 times or more ・20 times or more is acceptable. The larger the numerical value, the more the filling part L can follow the elongation of the base material part M when an impact is applied, and the more the impact can be absorbed. improves. Alternatively, the difference obtained by subtracting the tensile elongation of the base portion M from the tensile elongation of the filling portion L is preferably 15% or more, more preferably 20% or more, still more preferably 30% or more, and even more preferably 40% or more. It's okay.

引張伸び率の測定方法等はJIS K7161及び関連規格等に基づくが、個々の装飾体Zの充填部Lに対しては、その規定通りの測定は困難であることが多い。試験片の形状はJIS K 7127の試験片タイプ2が望ましいが、一般に充填部Lは、装飾体Zから剥がされるか削ぎ落され試験片となった場合、前記規格の定める通りの形状にはならない。特に図3aのように溝部Gの長さ方向(y方向)に垂直な断面の形状が楔状の溝部Gでは、充填部Lの先端部分の厚さ(x方向の長さ)が開口部O付近の厚さより小さいため、引張時に楔状の先端部分から裂けてしまうことが多い。開口部Oが凹状でその肩部が尖っている部分についても同様である。これでは本来の値が測定されないので、装飾体Zから取り出された充填部Lの厚さが溝部Gの深さ方向で異なる場合には、充填部Lのz方向の長さがx方向の最大の長さの90~100%となるよう充填部Lのz方向の片側又は両側が切断されて試験片となる。何れの長さも大きい方がよいので、開口部Oに近く凹状の部分を除く部分がよい。これによりx方向の長さの各部での差が相対的に小さくなる。整形には、ピコ秒又はフェムト秒以下の超短パルスレーザーが、試験片への熱影響が無視できるので使用可能である。また、COレーザ加工等によってなる充填部Lでは、楔状の先端部分に凹凸があり、側面Sの先端付近及び開口部O側にも凹凸があるが、これも除去され、試験片の形状由来の測定誤差が低減される。ソーカッターも使用可能である。ただし試験片のy方向に平行な面はR50未満とする。試験片の長さは50mm以上が好ましい。チャッキング幅は10mm以上が好ましい。チャック間の距離は115mmが好ましいが、それができない場合には30mm以上が好ましい。図3aのz方向の両側からのチャッキングがよい。試験速度は5mm/分、許容範囲±20%である。比較対象である基材部Mの試験片も同様に整形・測定される。基材部Mと充填部Lとで試験片のサイズの差は大きい方の10%未満が望ましい。上記条件による[引張による破断時のチャックの長さの増加量]/[引張前のチャックの長さ]が引張伸び率である。破断前に降伏が発生した場合には降伏時で測定される。この試験は、株式会社島津製作所製AG-100kNXplus・AG-10TD等で可能であり、依頼試験でもよい。試験片ごとに、あるいは各部で引張伸び率が異なる場合には、その平均を測定値とする。試験片の数は5以上が望ましいが、可能な最大数でもよい。試験片となる充填部Lの二分面は溝部Gの長さ方向に平面であることが望ましく、曲面であれば平面に近いほうがよい。このように、装飾体Zの事情により、規格に定められた条件を満たさずに測定する必要がある場合には、本来の値より低い測定値となる可能性が大きいことに留意されるべきである。つまり、充填部Lが凹凸部分から破断することで、引張伸び率が、本来よりも小さい値で測定されるといった可能性である。そのため、なるべく試験回数を増やし、平均から極端に離れた外れ値は除外する等の対応が必要である。すなわち、複数の測定値を数値順に並べた分布図のうち第1四分位点から第3四分位点までに属する複数の測定値から暫定平均値が導かれ、暫定平均値の75~125%の範囲の測定値のみからさらに平均値が算出される。 The method of measuring the tensile elongation is based on JIS K7161 and related standards, but it is often difficult to measure the filling portion L of each decorative body Z as specified. The shape of the test piece is preferably JIS K 7127 test piece type 2, but generally, when the filling part L is peeled off or scraped off from the decoration Z to form a test piece, the shape does not conform to the standard. . In particular, as shown in FIG. 3a, in the groove G having a wedge-shaped cross section perpendicular to the length direction (y direction) of the groove G, the thickness (length in the x direction) of the tip portion of the filling portion L is Because it is smaller than the thickness of , it often splits from the wedge-shaped tip when pulled. The same applies to the portion where the opening O is concave and has a sharp shoulder. Since the original value cannot be measured in this way, if the thickness of the filling portion L taken out from the decoration Z differs in the depth direction of the groove portion G, the length of the filling portion L in the z direction is the maximum in the x direction. One or both sides of the filling portion L in the z direction are cut so as to be 90 to 100% of the length to obtain a test piece. Since the longer the length of each, the better, the part close to the opening O and excluding the recessed part is preferred. This makes the difference in length in the x direction relatively small. For shaping, an ultrashort pulse laser of picosecond or femtosecond or less can be used because the thermal effect on the specimen is negligible. In addition, in the filling portion L formed by CO 2 laser processing or the like, there is unevenness at the wedge-shaped tip portion, and there are unevenness near the tip of the side surface S and on the opening O side, but this is also removed, and the shape of the test piece is derived. measurement error is reduced. A saw cutter can also be used. However, the surface parallel to the y-direction of the test piece shall have Rz less than 50. The length of the test piece is preferably 50 mm or more. The chucking width is preferably 10 mm or more. The distance between chucks is preferably 115 mm, but if that is not possible, it is preferably 30 mm or more. Chucking from both sides in the z-direction of FIG. 3a is preferred. The test speed is 5 mm/min with a tolerance of ±20%. A test piece of the base material portion M to be compared is similarly shaped and measured. The difference in size of the test piece between the base portion M and the filling portion L is preferably less than 10% of the larger one. The tensile elongation rate is [increase in length of chuck at break due to tension]/[length of chuck before tension] under the above conditions. If yielding occurs before rupture, it is measured at yield. This test can be performed by AG-100kNXplus, AG-10TD manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation, or the like, and may be a request test. If the tensile elongation is different for each test piece or for each part, the average is used as the measured value. The number of specimens is preferably 5 or more, but may be the maximum number possible. It is preferable that the bisected surface of the filling portion L, which is the test piece, is flat in the longitudinal direction of the groove portion G, and if it is a curved surface, it is preferably close to a flat surface. In this way, it should be noted that there is a high possibility that the measured value will be lower than the original value if it is necessary to measure without satisfying the conditions stipulated in the standard due to the circumstances of the decorative body Z. be. In other words, there is a possibility that the tensile elongation rate is measured as a value smaller than the original value due to the filling portion L breaking from the uneven portion. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures such as increasing the number of tests as much as possible and excluding outliers that are extremely far from the average. That is, a provisional average value is derived from a plurality of measured values belonging to the first to third quartiles in a distribution map in which a plurality of measured values are arranged in numerical order, and the provisional average value of 75 to 125 Further average values are calculated only from the measured values in the % range.

通常の熱硬化性樹脂は硬質樹脂で脆性が大きく、伸びしろが少ないため、上記の条件を満たすことができない。例えば注型用のUPは、透過率には優れるものの、引張伸び率は5%以下である。一方PMMAの引張伸び率も5%程度である。従って、通常のUP等によってなる充填部Lは、PMMAによってなる基材部Mの伸縮や衝撃に追従できず、界面応力や内部破壊の蓄積により剥離しやすい。可塑剤は熱可塑性樹脂には有効であるが、一般の熱硬化性樹脂には添加できない。しかし、伸縮性が求められる防水工事用のコーキング材やシーリング材、例えばTPC(TPEE)等のエラストマーや、UP・VE・エポキシアクリレート・EPといった熱硬化性樹脂のうち一部の特殊なものは、50から200%ときわめて大きな引張伸び率を示す。本発明の発明者は、かかる樹脂が展色剤Vであれば、充填部Lが剥離しにくくなることを見出した。なお、赤外分光光度計・近赤外分析計(具体的な機材名としては、日本分光株式会社製FT/IR-6100又はFT/IR-670Plus・Thermo Scientific社製Nicolet 6700・ブラン・ルーベ製450LRが挙げられる。)等により、充填部L等の赤外吸収スペクトル等が測定可能である。その測定データと既知の物質のデータとの対照から、展色剤V等の樹脂の種類が特定可能である。 Ordinary thermosetting resins are hard resins, are highly brittle, and have little elongation, so they cannot satisfy the above conditions. For example, UP for casting has excellent transmittance, but has a tensile elongation of 5% or less. On the other hand, the tensile elongation of PMMA is also about 5%. Therefore, the filling portion L made of ordinary UP or the like cannot follow expansion and contraction and impact of the base portion M made of PMMA, and is likely to separate due to accumulation of interfacial stress and internal breakdown. Plasticizers are effective for thermoplastic resins, but cannot be added to general thermosetting resins. However, some special types of caulking and sealing materials for waterproofing that require elasticity, such as elastomers such as TPC (TPEE), and thermosetting resins such as UP, VE, epoxy acrylate, and EP, It exhibits a very large tensile elongation of 50 to 200%. The inventors of the present invention have found that if the resin is the vehicle colorant V, the filling portion L is less likely to peel off. In addition, infrared spectrophotometer / near-infrared analyzer (specific equipment names are FT / IR-6100 manufactured by JASCO Corporation or FT / IR-670 Plus · Thermo Scientific Nicolet 6700 manufactured by Blanc Roubaix 450LR), etc., can measure the infrared absorption spectrum of the filling portion L and the like. By comparing the measured data with the data of known materials, the type of resin such as Vehicle V can be identified.

SI・PU・フッ素系等の熱硬化性エラストマー(又は樹脂)は、特に大きい引張伸び率を呈する。しかしこれらは、通常では低屈折率であり、後述のように基材部Mの屈折率と視線角度によっては全反射を発生させるため、展色剤Vには適さないことがある。またこれらでは線膨張率やタックが大きい傾向にある。充填部Lの線膨張率が基材部Mの線膨張率より極端に大きくない方が、高温時に充填部Lが基材部Mに応力をかけにくい。よって、充填部Lの引張伸び率は、好ましくは1000%以下・より好ましくは500%以下・さらに好ましくは300%以下でもよい。充填部Lの引張伸び率は基材部Mの引張伸び率の好ましくは200倍以下・より好ましくは100倍以下・さらに好ましくは50倍以下でもよい。充填部LはSI・PU・フッ素系の少なくとも何れか以外の熱硬化性樹脂によってなってもよい。ただし、SI・PU・フッ素樹脂とUP等との混合樹脂は、屈折率及び引張伸び率の可変性により有用である。 Thermosetting elastomers (or resins) such as SI, PU, and fluorine exhibit a particularly large tensile elongation. However, these materials usually have a low refractive index, and as described later, depending on the refractive index of the base material M and the line of sight angle, they may cause total reflection, so they may not be suitable for the vehicle V. In addition, these tend to have a large coefficient of linear expansion and tack. When the coefficient of linear expansion of the filling portion L is not extremely larger than that of the base portion M, the filling portion L is less likely to apply stress to the base portion M at high temperatures. Therefore, the tensile elongation of the filling portion L may be preferably 1000% or less, more preferably 500% or less, and even more preferably 300% or less. The tensile elongation of the filling part L may be preferably 200 times or less, more preferably 100 times or less, and even more preferably 50 times or less of the tensile elongation of the base material part M. The filling portion L may be made of a thermosetting resin other than at least one of SI, PU, and fluorine. However, a mixed resin of SI/PU/fluororesin and UP or the like is useful due to the variability of the refractive index and tensile elongation.

本実施形態の課題は装飾体Zで発生する界面の剥離の防止でもよい。この剥離現象の原因を考察する。(1)屋外等で温度変化により装飾体Z各部が伸縮する際、基材部Mと充填部Lとで線膨張率が異なるために、伸縮のたびに残留応力が蓄積し、あるいは界面にせん断力が働き、やがて剥離する。これは溝部Gの両端近くでよく見られる。(2)基材部Mの吸水性が比較的高いと、基材部Mの表面部Fや裏面部Rが雨水等を吸って膨張するが、内部は膨張しないので、装飾体Z全体にゆがみが生じたり、反ったりする。気温上昇時及び下降時の装飾体Z表面と内部との温度差によっても、同様の現象が発生する。これにより、主として溝部Gの深さ方向にせん断力がかかって、界面が耐えきれなくなり、各部で剥離する。(3)図3aのように開口部O側が露出している場合、温度や湿度の変化により、基材部Mの開口部O側が開いたり閉じたりする。すなわち基材部Mの溝部楔角が変化する。充填部L及び界面には幅方向に軸力がかかるが、幅方向の伸縮には限界があるので剥離する。(4)装飾体Zは商業施設等の屋内の公共空間に設置されることもあるが、その場合も含めて人や荷物等の往来が多い場所では、振動や衝突も多い。衝撃により、曲げモーメントやねじりモーメント等を含む多様な方向の内力が各部の界面にかかった際、界面が剥離してその衝撃を吸収する。このように、装飾体Zが受ける界面応力は、図3の溝部Gの(1)長さ(y)方向(2)深さ(z)方向(3)幅(x)方向(4)多方向とさまざまであり、それらが複合して界面剥離をもらたらすと考えられる。充填部Lの引張伸び率を大きくすることは、(1)から(4)の界面応力への耐性向上に有効であるが、とりわけ(4)の耐衝撃性の改善に大きな効果をもたらす。 The problem of this embodiment may be prevention of peeling of the interface that occurs in the decorative body Z. FIG. Consider the cause of this peeling phenomenon. (1) When each part of the decorative body Z expands and contracts due to temperature changes outdoors, etc., since the base material part M and the filling part L have different coefficients of linear expansion, residual stress accumulates each time expansion and contraction occurs, or the interface is sheared. Force works, and eventually it peels off. This is often seen near the ends of the groove G. (2) If the base material portion M has a relatively high water absorbency, the surface portion F and the back surface portion R of the base material portion M absorb rainwater and swell, but the interior does not swell, so the decoration Z as a whole is distorted. occurs or warps. A similar phenomenon occurs due to the temperature difference between the surface and the inside of the decorative body Z when the temperature rises and falls. As a result, a shearing force is applied mainly in the depth direction of the groove portion G, and the interface becomes unbearable, resulting in peeling at each portion. (3) When the side of the opening O is exposed as shown in FIG. 3a, the side of the opening O of the base material M opens and closes due to changes in temperature and humidity. That is, the groove wedge angle of the base material portion M changes. Axial force is applied to the filling portion L and the interface in the width direction, but there is a limit to expansion and contraction in the width direction, so separation occurs. (4) The decorative body Z may be installed in an indoor public space such as a commercial facility, and even in such cases, there are many vibrations and collisions in places where many people and luggage come and go. When internal forces in various directions, including bending moment and torsional moment, are applied to the interface of each part due to impact, the interface separates and absorbs the impact. In this way, the interfacial stress received by the decorative body Z is determined in (1) the length (y) direction, (2) the depth (z) direction, (3) the width (x) direction, and (4) the multidirectional , and they are thought to combine to bring about interfacial delamination. Increasing the tensile elongation of the filling portion L is effective in improving resistance to interfacial stress in (1) to (4), and is particularly effective in improving impact resistance in (4).

充填部Lは、それ自体を基材部Mに接着する接着剤と考えられる。その界面の結合力が充填部Lの引張強さを上回ってもよい。つまり、充填部Lの剥離は広い範囲での溝部Gの色の消失をもたらし、その上、その部分は光を全反射するので、白く見えて目障りである。一方、充填部Lの破断(その断面は溝部Gの長さ方向又は深さ方向に垂直な面である。)は、通常ごく細い筋状であり、その亀裂部分には光が届かず暗いので、ほとんど目につかない。ゆえに、剥離よりは破断の方が、装飾体Zの装飾性に及ぼす悪影響が少ないと言える。また、基材部Mが溝部Gの幅方向に膨張した時、充填部Lが、二分面で2つの部分に破断して、2つの部分それぞれが両側の側面Sに接合したままであれば、剥離を避けられる。それゆえ、場合によっては、充填部Lが、基材部Mの変形に追従できない時に、破断することで剥離しないですむことが望ましい。そのためには、充填部Lの接着強さが、充填部Lの引張強さ以上であればよい。これは充填部Lの剥離にかかる応力(N)と充填部Lの引張切断にかかる応力(N)との比較に相当する。具体的には、この測定は次のように行われる。装飾体Zが固定され、側面Sを境界として両側に分離するように、底面部B側と、必要があれば開口部O側の基材部Mが切断される。加工時の応力が充填部Lに極力かからないように加工される必要がある。次に、基材部Mが両側に分離されるが、ここで両側の基材部Mに充填部Lが引き裂かれたら、接着強さが引張強さより大きい。あるいは、試験者が指でつかみ部分を挟んで略90°の角度で引張、充填部Lの終端まで切れずに剥がせるか途中で切れるかを調べることで代替することもできる。 Filler portion L can be considered an adhesive that adheres itself to substrate portion M. FIG. The bonding strength of the interface may exceed the tensile strength of the filling portion L. In other words, the peeling of the filling portion L causes the color of the groove portion G to disappear over a wide area, and furthermore, since the portion totally reflects light, it looks white and is an eyesore. On the other hand, the rupture of the filling portion L (the cross section of which is perpendicular to the length direction or depth direction of the groove portion G) is usually a very thin streak, and the crack portion is dark because light does not reach it. , almost invisible. Therefore, it can be said that breakage has less adverse effect on the decorativeness of the decorative body Z than peeling. Further, when the base material portion M expands in the width direction of the groove portion G, if the filling portion L is broken into two portions at the bisecting plane and the two portions are still joined to the side surfaces S on both sides, Avoids peeling. Therefore, in some cases, when the filling portion L cannot follow the deformation of the base portion M, it is desirable to avoid peeling by breaking. For that purpose, the adhesive strength of the filling portion L should be equal to or higher than the tensile strength of the filling portion L. This corresponds to a comparison between the stress (N) applied to peeling of the filling portion L and the stress (N) applied to tensile breaking of the filling portion L. FIG. Specifically, this measurement is performed as follows. The base material portion M on the side of the bottom surface portion B and, if necessary, the opening portion O side is cut so that the decorative body Z is fixed and separated into both sides with the side surface S as a boundary. It is necessary to perform processing so that stress during processing is not applied to the filling portion L as much as possible. Next, the substrate portion M is separated on both sides, and if the filling portion L is torn to both substrate portions M here, the adhesive strength is greater than the tensile strength. Alternatively, the tester can pinch the gripped portion with his/her fingers and pull it at an angle of approximately 90°, and examine whether the filled portion L can be peeled off without being cut to the end or whether it can be cut in the middle.

装飾体Zの長期的な耐久性のためには、展色剤V及び着色剤Co等は化学的に安定し、耐光性が高いことが望ましい。着色剤Coの種類と充填部Lに占める着色剤Coの比率によって、溝部Gの濃度・透過率・発色度合が変化する。充填作業前の充填材料21に対する着色剤Coの重量比は、通常は0.1から20%、好ましくは0.5から10%であるが、溝部Gの幅・着色剤Coの種類・展色剤Vに対する着色剤Coの比重・求める視覚的効果によってはそれ以外でもよい。充填材料調合部44は、凝集した着色剤Coをロールミル・ボールミル・ビーズミル等により粉砕してより微細な粒子とし、さらに攪拌や分散剤Dの混合等により、展色剤V中に充分に分散させてもよい。ただし、粒子サイズが大きい着色剤Coによるざらざらした質感等、なめらかで透明感のある発色とは別の効果が求められる場合にはその限りではない。分散剤Dは、亜鉛・アルミニウム・カリウム・カルシウム・ナトリウム・バリウム・マグネシウム・リチウム等の金属石鹸、例えばステアリン酸石鹸・ヒドロキシステアリン酸石鹸・ベヘン酸石鹸・モンタン酸石鹸・ラウリン酸石鹸を含む既知の群から、展色剤V及び着色剤Coとの適性に応じて適宜選択され、配合率等を決められてもよい。分散剤Dは、図3bでは図示の都合上独立しているが、実際には脂肪酸等の被膜として着色剤Coを覆っていることが多い。通常の顔料等と分散剤Dの組み合わせに代えて、易分散加工済の着色剤Coや分散済の塗料等が用いられてもよい。また、充填材料調合部44と充填加工部45が連携し、1つの装飾体Zの加工中に着色剤Coの調合を漸次変更していくことで、複数の溝部Gの色をグラデーション状に徐々に変化させてもよく、それぞれの溝部G内の一部から別の一部にかけて、色をグラデーション状に変化させてもよい。また、充填時等の減圧により気泡の抑制が可能である。 For the long-term durability of the decorative body Z, it is desirable that the vehicle V, the coloring agent Co, etc. are chemically stable and have high light resistance. Depending on the type of coloring agent Co and the ratio of the coloring agent Co in the filling portion L, the density, transmittance, and degree of color development of the groove portion G change. The weight ratio of the coloring agent Co to the filling material 21 before the filling operation is usually 0.1 to 20%, preferably 0.5 to 10%. Depending on the specific gravity of the coloring agent Co with respect to the agent V and the desired visual effect, other materials may be used. The filling material preparation unit 44 pulverizes the aggregated colorant Co by a roll mill, ball mill, bead mill, or the like to make finer particles, and further, by stirring or mixing the dispersant D, etc., to sufficiently disperse it in the vehicle V. may However, this is not the case when an effect other than the smooth and transparent coloring is required, such as a rough texture due to the colorant Co having a large particle size. Dispersant D is a known metal soap containing zinc, aluminum, potassium, calcium, sodium, barium, magnesium, lithium, etc., such as stearic acid soap, hydroxystearic acid soap, behenic acid soap, montanic acid soap, and lauric acid soap. It may be appropriately selected from the group according to suitability with the colorant V and the colorant Co, and the mixing ratio and the like may be determined. Although the dispersant D is independent in FIG. 3B for convenience of illustration, in practice, it often covers the colorant Co as a film of fatty acid or the like. Instead of a combination of a normal pigment or the like and a dispersant D, an easily dispersed colorant Co or a dispersed paint or the like may be used. In addition, the filling material blending unit 44 and the filling processing unit 45 work together to gradually change the blending of the coloring agent Co during the processing of one decorative body Z, thereby gradually changing the color of the plurality of grooves G in a gradation manner. , or the color may be changed in a gradation from one part of each groove G to another part. Also, air bubbles can be suppressed by depressurizing at the time of filling or the like.

被覆部Tのための材料板20は、無色透明で、全光線透過率又は可視光線透過率が高いほうがよいが、用途によっては有色透明でもよい。被覆部Tはなくてもよい。簡易的には、被覆部Tは厚さ0.5mm以下のPET等の薄い粘着性軟質フィルムでもよい。長期用途には、板状の被覆部Tが接合されるのがよい。板状の被覆部Tは装飾体Zを割れにくくするだけでなく、基材部Mが溝部Gの幅方向に伸縮することを抑制し、上記(3)が原因の剥離を防止する。平面的板状の被覆部Tが、基材部Mと同一・同種・類似の材質でより薄ければ、溝部Gを有する側の材料板20と物性が近いので好ましい。例えばPMMAのキャスト板と押出し板とは同一の材質ではないが、何れもPMMAであり、上記の各種樹脂のうちの同じ分類に属するので、同種である。また、硬質PVCとPMMAとが、近似した線膨張率であり、同じ溶剤により溶着可能であれば、その点でこれらは類似である。被覆部Tが接合されていることが、装飾体Zの端面Xに生じる0.01mm以上・0.03mm以上・0.1mm以上の段差によって明らかな場合がある。被覆加工部46等がUVプリンタ等により被覆部T・基材部M・色面層U等にプリントしてもよい。あらかじめプリントされた材料がこれらに用いられてもよい。 The material plate 20 for the covering portion T is preferably colorless and transparent and has a high total light transmittance or visible light transmittance, but it may be colored and transparent depending on the application. The covering portion T may be omitted. For simplicity, the covering portion T may be a thin adhesive soft film such as PET having a thickness of 0.5 mm or less. For long-term use, a plate-like covering T is preferably joined. The plate-like covering portion T not only makes the decorative body Z less likely to break, but also suppresses the expansion and contraction of the base material portion M in the width direction of the groove portion G, thereby preventing peeling caused by the above (3). It is preferable that the planar plate-shaped covering portion T is made of the same, the same kind, or similar material as the base portion M and is thinner because the material plate 20 on the side having the groove portion G has the same physical properties. For example, a cast plate of PMMA and an extruded plate of PMMA are not the same material, but both are made of PMMA and belong to the same class among the various resins described above, so they are of the same type. Further, if rigid PVC and PMMA have similar coefficients of linear expansion and can be welded by the same solvent, they are similar in that respect. In some cases, it is clear from the difference in level of 0.01 mm or more, 0.03 mm or more, or 0.1 mm or more that occurs on the end face X of the decorative body Z that the covering portion T is joined. The covering section 46 and the like may print on the covering section T, the base material section M, the color surface layer U, and the like using a UV printer or the like. Pre-printed materials may be used for these.

充填部Lは、着色剤Coの含有により、基材部M及び被覆部Tとは異なる色となる。装飾体Zの複数の部分の色において、色相・彩度・明度・全光線透過率・可視光線透過率の何れかが明らかに相違してもよい。色相では、複数の色を比較した際、マンセル色相環(D65、透過又は反射)において近い側が25~50歩度分離れていれば明らかに別の色と識別でき、35~50なら主要原色の何れかの色の色相の差に相当し、45~50なら補色どうしに近いので、何れも明らかに色が異なる。又は複数の色がHSV色空間のH値において離れている小さい側の角度が、90~180°なら明らかに別の色と識別でき、120~180°ならRGB系又はCMY系の一方の原色系等の何れかの色の色相の差に相当し、150~180°なら補色どうしに近いので同様に異なる。彩度では、色相にもよるが、複数の色の差が概してマンセル表色系(D65)における彩度で4以上であれば明らかに色が異なり、6以上、8以上であればより明確に異なる。明度では、複数の色の差が3以上であれば明らかに色が異なり、4以上・5以上でより明確に異なる。それらが組合わさればさらに判然と異なる。あるいはΔE ab(CIE1976)での色差が好ましくは10以上・より好ましくは20以上・さらに好ましくは40以上でもよい。これらの測色には例えばコニカミノルタ株式会社製CM‐5等の分光測色計やCR‐5等の色彩色差計が用いられるが、測色範囲が狭い等の理由で測定が困難な場合には、目視比較が併用されてもよい。全光線透過率では、複数の色の差が40%以上で明らかに色が異なり、60%以上・80%以上でより明確に異なる。分光可視光線透過率の場合、一部の波長において上記の差であればよい。求める効果によっては、装飾体Zの一部と他の一部とが、上記の範囲より狭い測定値で異なってもよい。 The filling portion L has a color different from that of the base portion M and the covering portion T due to the inclusion of the coloring agent Co. Any of the hue, saturation, lightness, total light transmittance, and visible light transmittance may clearly differ between the colors of the plurality of portions of the decoration Z. FIG. In terms of hue, when comparing multiple colors, if the near side of the Munsell color wheel (D65, transmission or reflection) is separated by 25 to 50 steps, it can be clearly distinguished from another color, and if it is 35 to 50 steps, any of the main primary colors can be distinguished. This corresponds to the difference in hue between these colors, and 45 to 50 are close to complementary colors, so the colors are clearly different. Or if the angle on the small side where the colors are separated in the H value of the HSV color space is 90 to 180°, it can be clearly distinguished from another color, and if it is 120 to 180°, it is one of the primary colors of the RGB system or the CMY system. , and 150 to 180 degrees are close to complementary colors, so they are also different. In terms of saturation, although it depends on the hue, if the difference between multiple colors is 4 or more in chroma in the Munsell color system (D65), the color is clearly different, and if it is 6 or more, 8 or more, the color is clearly different. different. In lightness, if the difference between a plurality of colors is 3 or more, the color is clearly different, and if it is 4 or more or 5 or more, it is more clearly different. When they are combined, they are even more distinctly different. Alternatively, the color difference in ΔE * ab (CIE1976) may be preferably 10 or more, more preferably 20 or more, still more preferably 40 or more. For these colorimetry, for example, a spectrophotometer such as CM-5 manufactured by Konica Minolta Co., Ltd. or a color difference meter such as CR-5 is used. may be used in combination with visual comparison. In terms of total light transmittance, the colors are clearly different when the difference between a plurality of colors is 40% or more, and more clearly different when the difference is 60% or more and 80% or more. In the case of the spectral visible light transmittance, the above difference is sufficient for some wavelengths. Depending on the desired effect, one part of the decoration Z may differ from the other part by a measurement narrower than the above range.

以上に加えて、次のような条件を具える装飾体Zでは、難剥離性のために本実施形態の導入が望ましい。ただし、これらの条件を具えない場合でも、本実施形態の適用は有効である。溝部Gの剥離は、環境要因を度外視すれば、難接着材の樹脂等が充填部Lを有する場合に特有の問題ということができる。さらに基材部Mの表面(側面S)が粗面なら、より強固に接着される。溝部Gが浅く、その幅が狭ければ、温度変化に伴う充填部Lと基材部Mとの伸縮量の差が小さいので、剥離が発生しにくい。溝部Gの溝部楔角が充分に大きければ、溝部の両側の複数の側面に塗料がそれぞれ片側ずつ付着し、その間に空隙があるので、双方からの引張による剥離がない。よって必ずしも本発明が適用されなくてもよい。溝部楔角が小さくても、溝部Gの側面Sのみに展色剤V等が塗布され、溝部Gの中央が空隙であれば、基材部Mが溝部Gの幅方向に伸縮した時に、空隙がクッションとなって剥離に至らずにすむことがある。しかし、図3のように溝部Gに空隙がなく、溝部Gのほぼ全体が充填部Lであると、基材部Mが膨張し、溝部楔角が幅方向に開いた時に、その伸びが充填部Lの伸びを超えていれば剥離する。本発明が特に必要となるのは、基材部Mのぬれ張力が比較的小さく、側面Sが平滑で、溝部Gが深く、その溝部楔角が小さい場合である。さらに、側面Sが基材部Mを透過して見える程度に基材部Mの透過率が高いことも条件の1つである。 In addition to the above, the introduction of the present embodiment is desirable for the decorative body Z that satisfies the following conditions because of its difficult peelability. However, even if these conditions are not satisfied, application of the present embodiment is effective. Disregarding environmental factors, the peeling of the groove portion G can be said to be a problem peculiar to the case where the filling portion L is made of a difficult-to-adhere resin or the like. Furthermore, if the surface (side surface S) of the base material portion M is a rough surface, the adhesion is stronger. If the groove portion G is shallow and has a narrow width, the difference in the amount of expansion and contraction between the filling portion L and the base portion M due to temperature change is small, so peeling is less likely to occur. If the groove wedge angle of the groove G is sufficiently large, the paint adheres to each of the plurality of side surfaces on both sides of the groove, and since there is a gap between them, there is no peeling from both sides due to tension. Therefore, the present invention does not necessarily have to be applied. Even if the groove wedge angle is small, if the vehicle V or the like is applied only to the side surface S of the groove G and if the center of the groove G is a gap, the gap will be generated when the base material M expands and contracts in the width direction of the groove G. may act as a cushion to prevent exfoliation. However, if there are no gaps in the groove portion G as shown in FIG. 3 and almost the entire groove portion G is the filled portion L, the base portion M expands and when the wedge angle of the groove portion opens in the width direction, the elongation of the groove portion G causes the filling portion to expand. If the elongation of the portion L is exceeded, the peeling occurs. The present invention is particularly required when the substrate portion M has a relatively low wetting tension, the side surface S is smooth, the groove portion G is deep, and the groove wedge angle is small. Furthermore, one of the conditions is that the transmittance of the substrate portion M is high enough to allow the side surface S to be seen through the substrate portion M.

より具体的には、次のような場合に充填部Lが剥離しやすく、又は剥離が目立ちやすく、本実施形態が顕著な効果を発揮する。1、溝部Gが空隙を有さない。2、基材部Mと充填部Lの線膨張率(JIS K 7197等)が、大きい方の10%以上、又は5%以上異なる。3、基材部MがPE・PMMA・PP・PS等の難接着材である。4、側面Sの算術平均粗さRが好ましくは1以下・より好ましくは0.5以下・さらに好ましくは0.25以下、最大高さ粗さRが好ましくは4以下・より好ましくは2以下・さらに好ましくは1以下、下限は測定限界である(JIS B 0601又はISO 4287等、単位はμm、後述の凹凸のためカットオフλcは通常は0.08mmでもよく、特に凹凸のピッチが大きい場合は0.25mmでもよい。基準長さlrも同様である。カットオフλsは最小又は2.5μmでもよい。Taylor-Hobson社製TALYSURF2等の表面粗さ測定機等で測定可能である。)。側面Sが上記の全光線透過率及びヘーズの値を満たす場合も平滑であって剥離しやすい。5、深さdGがmmオーダー以上、例えば5mm以上である。溝部Gが深いほど、開口部O側とその反対側とで温度変化等による変位量が大きくなり、界面応力も増大する。溝部Gが深い装飾体Zは概してx及びy方向のサイズも大きいので、溝部Gの長さ方向の界面応力も大きくなり、結果として、浅く短い溝部の装飾体では発生しなかった問題が顕在化する。6、基材部Mの側面Sに熱影響がある。7、側面Sが装飾体Zの表面部F又は裏面部Rへの垂線又は法線となす小さい側の角度が90-2arcsin(1/n)以下である(nは基材部Mの屈折率)。 More specifically, in the following cases, the filling portion L is likely to peel off, or the peeling is likely to be conspicuous, and this embodiment exhibits a remarkable effect. 1. The groove G has no voids. 2. The linear expansion coefficients (JIS K 7197, etc.) of the base material portion M and the filling portion L differ by 10% or more, or 5% or more, whichever is greater. 3. The base material M is a hard-to-bond material such as PE, PMMA, PP, or PS. 4. The arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the side surface S is preferably 1 or less, more preferably 0.5 or less, more preferably 0.25 or less, and the maximum height roughness Rz is preferably 4 or less, more preferably 2 or less, more preferably 1 or less, the lower limit is the measurement limit (JIS B 0601 or ISO 4287, etc., unit is μm, the cutoff λc is usually 0.08 mm due to unevenness described later, and the pitch of unevenness is particularly large 0.25 mm may be used.The same applies to the reference length lr.The cutoff λs may be the minimum or 2.5 μm.It can be measured with a surface roughness measuring instrument such as TALYSURF2 manufactured by Taylor-Hobson.) . Even when the side surface S satisfies the above values of total light transmittance and haze, it is smooth and easily peeled off. 5. The depth dG is mm order or more, for example 5 mm or more. The deeper the groove G, the greater the amount of displacement due to temperature changes and the like between the opening O side and the opposite side, and the interface stress also increases. Since the decoration Z with the deep groove G generally has large sizes in the x and y directions, the interfacial stress in the longitudinal direction of the groove G becomes large, and as a result, the problem that did not occur with the decoration with the shallow and short groove becomes apparent. do. 6. The side surface S of the base material portion M is affected by heat. 7. The small angle formed by the side surface S with the normal or normal to the surface portion F or the back surface portion R of the decoration Z is 90-2 arcsin (1/n M ) or less (n M is the base portion M refractive index).

上記3・4は基材部Mと充填部Lとの接着性に関連する。4・5・6・7は、レーザ加工による溝部Gで見られる特徴である。特に、COレーザによる切断加工では、切断面すなわち側面Sは赤外線で加熱されて融解し、冷却後に硬化する。これにより、側面Sが4のように平滑となるため、機械加工の表面よりも接着性に劣る。また、側面Sには、融解した樹脂の流れによるとみられる、溝部Gの長さ方向に平行な複数の線状の凹凸と、その凹凸に垂直又はそれと70°から110°の角度をなす、レーザのパルスを反映した複数の凹凸とが形成されることが多い。後者は、レーザ出力・速度・周波数等により変動するが、通常50~2000μm・多くは100~1200μm・典型的には200~700μmピッチで、溝部Gの先端付近では算術平均うねりW又は最大高さうねりWが好ましくは0.3~16・より好ましくは0.5~8・さらに好ましくは1~4・一層好ましくは2~4である(JIS B 0601等)。これらは16以上でもよいが、最大でも幅w又はその1/2以下である。ピッチに応じてカットオフλcは0.08でもよく、0.25mmでもよく、凹凸のピッチが小さければ0.025mmでもよい。後者は、幅wの1/20~10倍・あるいは1/10~3倍・時に1/5~1倍のピッチで、1/4000~1/20倍・あるいは1/2000~1/50倍・時に1/1000~1/100倍の深さでもよい。前者及び後者は上記の互いに他方の深さ・ピッチと同じ範囲でもよい。また両者とも、凹凸の高さは、好ましくは1~40μm・より好ましくは2~20μm・さらに好ましくは4~10μmでもよい。凹凸のピッチは、表面うねり測定の解析曲線に現れる周期的凹凸の複数のピーク間距離の算術平均でもよく、その場合うねり測定の解析より101/2倍又は10倍大きいカットオフλcを用いてもよい。7について次に説明する。 The above 3 and 4 relate to the adhesiveness between the base material portion M and the filling portion L. 4, 5, 6, and 7 are features seen in the groove portion G formed by laser processing. In particular, in the cutting process using a CO 2 laser, the cut surface, that is, the side surface S is heated by infrared rays to melt and harden after cooling. As a result, the side surface S becomes smooth as shown at 4, and is therefore less adhesive than the machined surface. In addition, on the side surface S, a plurality of linear unevenness parallel to the length direction of the groove G, which is considered to be due to the flow of the molten resin, and a laser beam perpendicular to the unevenness or at an angle of 70° to 110° therewith. In many cases, a plurality of undulations reflecting the pulse of the current is formed. The latter varies depending on the laser output, speed, frequency, etc., but is usually 50 to 2000 μm, often 100 to 1200 μm, typically 200 to 700 μm pitch, and near the tip of the groove G, the arithmetic mean waviness W a or the maximum height Waviness W z is preferably 0.3 to 16, more preferably 0.5 to 8, still more preferably 1 to 4, still more preferably 2 to 4 (JIS B 0601, etc.). These may be 16 or more, but at most have a width w or less than half of it. Depending on the pitch, the cutoff λc may be 0.08, 0.25 mm, or 0.025 mm if the uneven pitch is small. The latter is 1/20 to 10 times, or 1/10 to 3 times, sometimes 1/5 to 1 times the width w, and 1/4000 to 1/20 times, or 1/2000 to 1/50 times.・Sometimes the depth may be 1/1000 to 1/100 times. The former and the latter may be in the same range as the depth/pitch of the other. In both cases, the height of the unevenness may be preferably 1 to 40 μm, more preferably 2 to 20 μm, still more preferably 4 to 10 μm. The pitch of the asperities may be the arithmetic mean of the peak-to-peak distances of the periodic asperities appearing in the analytical curve of the surface waviness measurement, with a cutoff λc that is 10 1/2 times or 10 times greater than the analysis of the waviness measurement. good too. 7 is described below.

基材部Mと充填部Lとが剥離し、それらの界面が密着していない状態であっても、側面Sが全反射を起こして充填部Lの色が見えない場合だけでなく、充填部Lの色が側面Sを透過して見える場合がある。以下にそれら両者の臨界となる条件を示す。
図4は楔状の溝部Gの長さ方向に垂直な断面の図である。図4では、入射角θI(θI<0)で側面Sに入射した光が、反射角-θIで反射し、この反射光が裏面部Rで屈折して視点Eに届いている。ただし、充填部Lが側面Sで剥離していなければ、側面Sでの反射光は入射光の一部であり、残りは充填部Lに吸収されるか、充填部Lを透過するか、側面Sで拡散する。図4において、視点Eからの視線が裏面部Rへの垂線又は法線となす角度(以下視線角度又はθEと記載する。)は裏面部Rからの光の出射角に等しい。側面Sが表面部Fを含む面への垂線又は法線となす角度をθS(|θS|<90)、基材部Mの屈折率をn、充填部Lの屈折率をn、空気の屈折率を1とする。右回りを正方向とするので、θS>0であれば図4aの右側の側面S又は図4bの左側の側面S、θS<0であれば図4bの右側の側面S又は図4aの左側の側面Sに対応する。被覆部T・着色剤Co等は図4では省略される。被覆部Tの両面が互いに平行かつ平面状で、被覆部Tの屈折率がnであれば、被覆部Tの有無は屈折角等に影響しない。n<n又は充填部Lが側面Sで剥離している場合、反射角-θIの絶対値が臨界角arcsin(n/n)以上であれば、側面Sでの反射が全反射となり、充填部Lの色は視点Eに届かない。この状態を式で示すと、スネルの法則より、
(1)図4a(θS≧0)の場合

Figure 0007133695000002
側面Sでの反射が全反射となるようなθSの範囲は、
Figure 0007133695000003
充填部Lが剥離しているか、溝部Gが空隙で側面Sに基材部Mが露出しているならば、空気ないし真空が充填部Lに相当し、n=1なので
Figure 0007133695000004
θE=-90(°)までのθEがとりうる範囲のすべてにおいて、側面Sで全反射が発生して充填部Lの色が見えなくなるようなθSの範囲は、数3より
θS≦90-2arcsin(1/n)…(i)
θE=0(°)、すなわち視点Eが溝部Gを裏面部Rの正面から見た時に、充填部Lの色が見えなくなるθSの範囲は、数3より
θS≦90-arcsin(1/n)…(ii)
(2)図4b(θS<0)の場合
側面Sでの反射が基材部M側から(溝部Gを通さずに)見える最大のθEとなる(図4bの最も左寄りである)視点Eは、
arcsin[(sinθE)/n]=θS
となる位置であるから、
arcsin[(sinθE)/n]≦θS
側面Sでの全反射が視点Eで観察される最小のθSでは、θE=-90(°)の時のみ反射が観察可能となるので、
θS≧arcsin(-1/n)…(iii)
図4aにおけるθS<0の場合及び図4bにおけるθS≧0の場合、すなわち図4a・bの溝部Gのそれぞれ左側の側面Sに関する場合は、上記の場合に対し左右対称の関係であり、上記各数式において各項の正負及び不等号の向きが逆になる。ゆえに、(iii)から、図4bのように溝部Gの開口部O側のみから観察される場合には、
|θS|≦arcsin(1/n
であれば、溝部Gの手前に側面Sが見えるようなθEのすべての範囲において、側面Sで全反射が発生して充填部Lの色が見えなくなる。この事態の回避のためには、本実施形態の適用が必要である。arcsin(1/n)を片面全反射角と記載する。例えばn=1.5とすると、θSの絶対値が約41.8°以下ならば、可能な全θEに対し、剥離した充填部Lの色は側面Sを通しては見えない。
次に、開口部O側からだけでなく、図4aのように溝部Gの開口部Oの反対側からも観察される場合には、(i)から、
|θS|≦90-2arcsin(1/n
であれば、溝部Gの手前に側面Sが見えるようなθEのすべての範囲において、側面Sで全反射が発生して充填部Lの色が見えなくなる。その事態の回避のためには、本実施形態の適用が必要である。90-2arcsin(1/n)を両面全反射角と記載する。例えばn=1.5とすると、|θS|が約6.38°以下ならば、表面部F及び裏面部R側の可能な全θEに対し、剥離した充填部Lの色は側面Sを通しては見えない。表面部Fに垂直な溝部Gでは、θGが約12.76°以下ならば同様である。基材部MがPMMAで、n=1.49ならば、|θS|が約5.69°以下、又は表面部Fに垂直な溝部GでθGが約11.38°以下の場合、本実施形態により充填部Lの剥離が生じないことで、どこから見ても充填部Lの色が鮮明に見える効果が得られる。また、(ii)から、
|θS|≦90-arcsin(1/n
であれば、少なくとも一部のθEにおいて、側面Sで全反射が発生して充填部Lの色が見えなくなるので、本実施形態が適用された方がよい。90-arcsin(1/n)を一部全反射角と記載する。n=1.5とすると、θSが約48.19°以下ならば、剥離した充填部Lの色は正面からは見えない。なお、数3より、充填部Lの色が見えないθEの範囲は、
Figure 0007133695000005
である。|θS|が両面全反射角より大きいならば、図4aにおいて、θEがこれより小さい時、すなわち視点Eが右寄りの時には、側面Sで全反射が起こらず、充填部Lが剥離していても側面Sを透過してその色が見える。
側面Sが曲面の場合、上記条件を満たす範囲内で上記作用が発生する。また、表面部F又は裏面部Rの一方の側が不透明であって、その反対側が観察面であり、充填部Lがないか剥離しているとする。さらに|θS|が上記条件を満たす場合、可能な全θEから、基材部Mと不透明な面との界面に映った反射が見える。この反射は、観察面側から入射して側面Sで全反射した光が界面に当たったものである。この場合、可能なすべての入射角からの入射光に対してこの作用が発生する。 Even if the base material portion M and the filling portion L are separated and the interface between them is not in close contact, the side surface S causes total reflection and the color of the filling portion L cannot be seen. The color of L may be seen through the side S. The critical conditions for both of them are shown below.
FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view perpendicular to the lengthwise direction of the wedge-shaped groove G. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 4, light incident on the side surface S at an incident angle .theta.I (.theta.I<0) is reflected at a reflection angle -.theta.I, and this reflected light is refracted at the rear surface portion R and reaches the viewpoint E. In FIG. However, if the filling portion L is not peeled off at the side surface S, the reflected light from the side surface S is a part of the incident light, and the rest is absorbed by the filling portion L, transmitted through the filling portion L, or separated from the side surface. Diffuse in S. In FIG. 4, the angle formed by the line of sight from the viewpoint E with the perpendicular or normal to the back surface portion R (hereinafter referred to as the line of sight angle or θE) is equal to the angle of emergence of light from the back surface portion R. In FIG. θS (|θS|<90) is the angle formed by the side surface S with the perpendicular or normal to the plane including the surface portion F , nM is the refractive index of the base portion M , nG is the refractive index of the filling portion L, and air is assumed to have a refractive index of 1. 4a or the left side S in FIG. 4b if .theta.S>0, and if .theta.S<0 the right side S in FIG. 4b or the left side S in FIG. 4a. Corresponds to side S. The covering portion T, coloring agent Co, etc. are omitted in FIG. If both surfaces of the covering portion T are parallel and planar and the refractive index of the covering portion T is nM, the presence or absence of the covering portion T does not affect the angle of refraction. When n G <n M or the filling portion L is peeled off on the side surface S, if the absolute value of the reflection angle −θI is the critical angle arcsin (n G /n M ) or more, the reflection on the side surface S is total reflection. As a result, the color of the filling portion L does not reach the viewpoint E. When this state is expressed by an equation, according to Snell's law,
(1) In the case of Fig. 4a (θS≥0)
Figure 0007133695000002
The range of θS in which the reflection on the side surface S is total reflection is
Figure 0007133695000003
If the filling portion L is peeled off, or if the groove portion G is a gap and the base material portion M is exposed on the side surface S, air or vacuum corresponds to the filling portion L, and n G =1.
Figure 0007133695000004
In all possible ranges of θE up to θE=−90 (°), the range of θS in which total reflection occurs on the side surface S and the color of the filling portion L cannot be seen is θS≦90−2 arcsin from Equation 3. (1/ nM ) (i)
θE=0 (°), that is, the range of θS in which the color of the filling portion L disappears when the viewpoint E views the groove portion G from the front of the back surface portion R is θS≦90−arcsin(1/n M ) (ii)
(2) In the case of FIG. 4b (θS<0), the reflection on the side surface S becomes the maximum θE that can be seen from the base material portion M side (without passing through the groove portion G). ,
arc sin [(sin θE)/n M ]=θS
Since the position is
arc sin [(sin θE)/n M ] ≤ θS
At the minimum θS at which the total reflection on the side surface S can be observed at the viewpoint E, the reflection can be observed only when θE = -90 (°).
θS≧arcsin(−1/n M ) (iii)
The case of θS<0 in FIG. 4A and the case of θS≧0 in FIG. In the formula, the positive/negative and inequality signs of each term are reversed. Therefore, from (iii), when observed only from the opening O side of the groove G as shown in FIG.
|θS|≦arc sin(1/n M )
Then, in the entire range of θE in which the side surface S can be seen in front of the groove portion G, total reflection occurs at the side surface S, and the color of the filling portion L cannot be seen. To avoid this situation, it is necessary to apply this embodiment. We write arcsin(1/n M ) as the one-sided total internal reflection angle. For example, if n M =1.5, the color of the delaminated fill L is not visible through side S for all possible θE if the absolute value of θS is less than or equal to about 41.8°.
Next, when it is observed not only from the opening O side but also from the opposite side of the opening O of the groove G as shown in FIG. 4a, from (i),
|θS|≦90−2 arc sin(1/n M )
Then, in the entire range of θE in which the side surface S can be seen in front of the groove portion G, total reflection occurs at the side surface S, and the color of the filling portion L cannot be seen. In order to avoid such a situation, it is necessary to apply this embodiment. 90-2 arcsin (1/n M ) is described as the two-sided total internal reflection angle. For example, if n M =1.5, then for all possible θE on the front surface F and back surface R sides, the color of the peeled fill L is can't see The same is true for the groove portion G perpendicular to the surface portion F, provided that θG is about 12.76° or less. If the substrate portion M is PMMA and n M =1.49, |θS| Since the filling part L does not peel off according to the embodiment, it is possible to obtain the effect that the color of the filling part L can be clearly seen from any angle. Also, from (ii),
|θS|≦90−arc sin(1/n M )
In this case, at least part of θE, total reflection occurs on the side surface S, and the color of the filling portion L cannot be seen. Therefore, it is better to apply this embodiment. 90-arcsin(1/n M ) is described as the angle of partial total internal reflection. When n M =1.5, the color of the peeled filling portion L cannot be seen from the front if θS is about 48.19° or less. From Equation 3, the range of θE in which the color of the filling portion L cannot be seen is
Figure 0007133695000005
is. If |θS| is greater than the double-sided total reflection angle, then when θE is smaller than this in FIG. The color can be seen through the side surface S.
When the side surface S is a curved surface, the above action occurs within the range that satisfies the above conditions. It is also assumed that one side of the front surface portion F or the rear surface portion R is opaque, the opposite side is the viewing surface, and the filling portion L is absent or peeled off. Furthermore, if |θS| satisfies the above conditions, the reflection reflected at the interface between the base material portion M and the opaque surface can be seen from all possible θE. This reflection is caused by light entering from the viewing surface side and totally reflected by the side surface S hitting the interface. In this case, this effect occurs for incident light from all possible angles of incidence.

溝部Gの幅wが深さdGに対して充分に大きければ、正面から開口部Oの充填部Lの色が見えるので、側面Sが剥離していても色の消失はない。これは、溝部Gが底面部Bを有し、台形状であれば、θGが小さくてもあてはまる。しかし、dG/wが5倍以上であれば、視点Eが斜め方向から側面Sを見た時、屈折により見かけの深さが浅くなるものの幅の約2・5倍以上に見えるので、本実施形態が適用された場合に一定の効果を呈する。10倍以上であれば、見かけの深さが幅の約5倍以上に見えるので、本実施形態が明確な効果を奏する。15倍以上なら本実施形態が充分な効果を示し、20倍以上なら本実施形態が適用されないと側面Sがほとんど見えない可能性がある。また、溝部Gの幅方向の断面は、U字状のようにθSが複数又は変化する形状でもよい。その場合、両側の側面S・底面部B・開口部Oの長さの合計のうち、|θS|が両面全反射角(又は一部全反射角)以下である範囲の長さの合計が、好ましくは1/2以上であれば両面全反射角が明確な効果を奏し、より好ましくは4/5以上・さらに好ましくは9/10以上・一層好ましくは19/20以上であれば、溝部Gの大部分が上記条件を満たしていると見なすことができ、本実施形態の適用による利得が大きい。なお、溝部Gが上記条件を満たさなくても、剥離時には色が見えづらくなり、またθEによっては側面Sでの全反射が発生するので、本実施形態が適用された方がよい。 If the width w of the groove G is sufficiently large relative to the depth dG, the color of the filled portion L of the opening O can be seen from the front, so even if the side surface S is peeled off, the color will not disappear. This applies even if θG is small if the groove portion G has a bottom portion B and is trapezoidal. However, if dG/w is 5 times or more, when the viewpoint E looks at the side S from an oblique direction, although the apparent depth becomes shallow due to refraction, it appears to be about 2.5 times or more than the width. Has a certain effect when the form is applied. If it is 10 times or more, the apparent depth appears to be about 5 times or more than the width, so this embodiment has a clear effect. If the magnification is 15 times or more, the present embodiment exhibits a sufficient effect, and if the magnification is 20 times or more, the side surface S may hardly be seen unless the present embodiment is applied. Further, the cross section of the groove portion G in the width direction may have a shape in which θS is plural or varies, such as a U shape. In that case, among the total lengths of the side surfaces S, the bottom surface portion B, and the opening portion O on both sides, the total length of the range in which |θS| If it is preferably 1/2 or more, the double-sided total reflection angle exhibits a clear effect. It can be considered that most of them satisfy the above conditions, and the gain by applying this embodiment is large. Even if the groove portion G does not satisfy the above conditions, the color becomes difficult to see at the time of peeling, and total reflection occurs at the side surface S depending on θE. Therefore, it is better to apply this embodiment.

ただし、n<21/2であると、θEが-90°に近い時、数3からθS<0となることがあるが、数3は(1)すなわちθS≧0の場合の式であるから、成立しない。θS<0の場合も同様に成立しない。つまり、屈折率が約1.41未満の材料板20、例えばPFA・FEP等の透明なフッ素樹脂によってなる装飾体Zでは、図4aのように開口部Oの反対側の視点からは、θS=0を含むすべてのθSの溝部Gにおいて、充填部Lと基材部Mとが剥離していても、基材部Mの側面Sを透過して充填部Lの色が見えることがある。θSが大きいほど、θEの絶対値が小さくてもこれが成立するので、充填部Lの色が見える範囲が拡がる。よって、上記の条件に加えて、n≧21/2の場合に、本実施形態の必要性が比較的高い。とはいえ、n<21/2の場合でも、θEによっては剥離した充填部Lの色が見えなくなるので、本実施形態が適用された方がよい。 However, when n M <2 1/2 , when θE is close to −90°, θS<0 may be obtained from Equation 3. It doesn't work because there is. The same does not hold when θS<0. That is, in the material plate 20 having a refractive index of less than about 1.41, for example, the decorative body Z made of a transparent fluororesin such as PFA/FEP, from the viewpoint on the opposite side of the opening O as shown in FIG. In the groove portion G of all θS including 0, even if the filling portion L and the base material portion M are separated, the color of the filling portion L may be seen through the side surface S of the base material portion M. As .theta.S is larger, this holds true even if the absolute value of .theta.E is small, so the range in which the color of the filling portion L can be seen is expanded. Therefore, in addition to the above conditions, the need for this embodiment is relatively high when n M ≧2 1/2 . However, even when n M <2 1/2 , the color of the peeled filling portion L cannot be seen depending on θE, so this embodiment should be applied.

次に、充填部Lが剥離していない溝部Gにおける、充填部Lの屈折率と基材部Mの屈折率との関係について検討する。
(1)n≧nの場合
基材部Mの屈折率が充填部Lの屈折率以下であれば、臨界角の作用による全反射は起こらない。この逆も真であり、表面部F及び裏面部R側のすべてのθEにおいて、基材部Mから側面Sへの入射光に対し側面Sで全反射が起こらず、反射があっても部分反射ないし拡散反射であり、その側の側面Sが見えるどの視点からも側面Sを通して充填部Lの色が見えていれば、基材部Mの屈折率は充填部Lの屈折率以下である。屈折率は、アッベ屈折計等により測定可能である。アッベ屈折計は、例えば株式会社アタゴ製NAR‐1T SOLIDであり、ナトリウムD線、23±0.5℃で測定し、他詳細はJIS K 7142・一部はISO489等又は出願時の技術常識に準拠する。本明細書の他の箇所でも同様である。アッベ屈折計は、臨界角法を用いて試験片表面の屈折率を測定するので、この用途に適する。その測定値は、充填部Lに含まれる着色剤Co等の屈折率には基本的に影響されず、展色剤Vの屈折率を示す。一般に、SIやシリコーンゴムの屈折率は1.43以下、PETE等のフッ素樹脂やフッ素ゴムの屈折率は1.3台である。一般にPMMAの屈折率は1.49以上であり、硬質樹脂の屈折率はSIの屈折率より高い。すべてのθEで溝部Gの色が鮮明に見えるためには、基材部M以上の屈折率の展色剤Vがよい。各部の屈折率を比較すると、着色剤Co≧展色剤V≧基材部Mであれば、すべてのθEで全反射が起こらず、色が常に鮮明に見える。また、真空蒸着・スパッタリング等により金属が側面Sの界面に密着していれば、屈折率の大小にかかわらず、金属光沢が生じ、臨界角による全反射とは異なる反射効果が得られる。反射防止のため、溝部Gはかかる金属膜を有さなくてもよい。これと異なり、金属パウダーを混入させた塗料等では、側面Sに密着しているのは透明樹脂等の展色剤Vであるため、その展色剤Vの屈折率が影響する。
Next, the relationship between the refractive index of the filling portion L and the refractive index of the base portion M in the groove portion G where the filling portion L is not separated will be examined.
(1) In the case of n G ≧n M If the refractive index of the base material portion M is equal to or lower than the refractive index of the filling portion L, total reflection due to the action of the critical angle does not occur. The converse is also true. At all θE on the front surface portion F and the rear surface portion R side, the light incident on the side surface S from the base material portion M does not undergo total reflection on the side surface S, and even if there is reflection, partial reflection occurs. or diffuse reflection, and if the color of the filling portion L can be seen through the side surface S from any viewpoint from which the side surface S of that side can be seen, the refractive index of the base material portion M is equal to or lower than the refractive index of the filling portion L. The refractive index can be measured with an Abbe refractometer or the like. The Abbe refractometer is, for example, NAR-1T SOLID manufactured by Atago Co., Ltd., measured at sodium D line, 23 ± 0.5 ° C., and other details are JIS K 7142, partly ISO 489, etc. or common general knowledge at the time of filing Compliant. The same applies to other portions of this specification. Abbe refractometers are well suited for this application as they use the critical angle method to measure the refractive index of the specimen surface. The measured value is basically unaffected by the refractive index of the coloring agent Co or the like contained in the filling portion L, and indicates the refractive index of the vehicle V. In general, the refractive index of SI and silicone rubber is 1.43 or less, and the refractive index of fluororesin and fluororubber such as PETE is in the order of 1.3. In general, PMMA has a refractive index of 1.49 or more, and the refractive index of hard resin is higher than that of SI. In order for the color of the groove portion G to be clearly seen at all θE, the developer V having a refractive index equal to or higher than that of the base portion M is preferable. Comparing the refractive index of each part, if colorant Co≧colorant V≧base part M, total reflection does not occur at all θE, and colors always look sharp. Also, if metal is adhered to the interface of the side surface S by vacuum deposition, sputtering, etc., metallic luster is produced regardless of the magnitude of the refractive index, and a reflection effect different from total reflection due to the critical angle can be obtained. For anti-reflection, the groove G may not have such a metal film. On the other hand, in the case of paint mixed with metal powder or the like, since it is the colorant V such as a transparent resin that is in close contact with the side surface S, the refractive index of the colorant V has an effect.

(2)n<nの場合
充填部Lの屈折率が基材部Mの屈折率より小さいと、θEが小さい時には全反射が起こり、充填部Lの色が見えないことがある。θS=0ならば、そのようなθEの絶対値の範囲は

Figure 0007133695000006
基材部Mの屈折率を1.5とする。
a 充填部Lの屈折率が基材部Mの屈折率に近ければ、側面Sの臨界角が90°に近づくため、界面での反射がほとんど起こらない。充填部Lの屈折率が1.49ならば、数5より|θE|が0から約9.96°までの範囲で側面Sでの全反射が見える。この範囲内では、側面Sへの入射角の絶対値が臨界角以上であるため充填部Lの色は見えない。9.96<|θE|<90(°)の範囲では充填部Lの色が見える。この範囲では、裏面部R側に文字等が貼られていると、充填部Lの色に隠れて見えなくなる効果が得られる。この効果は、側面Sで全反射が起こると、側面Sに裏面部Rが映って見えるために低下する。よって、この効果のためには、充填部Lの屈折率が基材部Mの屈折率以上であればよい。あるいはその差が小さいほうがよく、好ましくは0.1以下・より好ましくは0.05以下・さらに好ましくは0.03以下でもよい。ただし、正面に近い一部のθEでは全反射が見え、それ以外の範囲では充填部Lの色が見える、という対比効果が望ましい場合にはその限りではない。他の技術事項でも同様である。
b 充填部Lの屈折率と基材部Mの屈折率との差が大きいほど、側面Sでの反射が起きやすくなる。充填部Lの屈折率が1.4ならば、数5より|θE|が0から約32.6°までの範囲で側面Sでの全反射が見え、それ以外の範囲では充填部Lの色が見える。充填部Lの屈折率が1.3ならば、|θE|が0から約48.4°までの範囲で側面Sでの全反射が見える。これらの場合、正面からある程度のθEまでは、光源の位置によっては、側面Sが背景を反射して充填部Lの色が見えず、側面Sが平滑で背景が近ければ背景が映って見え、背景が遠ければぼんやりと映るか光って見える。光源がしかるべき位置になければ、側面Sは暗く落ち込んで見える。θEが数5の範囲を超えると、充填部Lの色が見えるようになる。ただし、界面での反射は多少残る。全反射から充填部Lの色への転換は、臨界角の作用により、中間段階がなく急激に起こる。それは、常に充填部Lの色が見えているのとは異なる意外さを観察者に感じさせ、用途によっては有用な効果をもたらす。正面に近いθEでは充填部Lの色が見えず、θEが大きくなると充填部Lの色が見える、という効果が意図される場合には、基材部Mの屈折率から充填部Lの屈折率を減じた差は0.3以下・0.2以下・0.1以下でもよく、0.05以上でもよい。 (2) When n G <n M If the refractive index of the filling portion L is smaller than that of the base material portion M, total reflection occurs when θE is small, and the color of the filling portion L may not be visible. If θS=0, then the range of absolute values of such θE is
Figure 0007133695000006
The refractive index of the base material portion M is assumed to be 1.5.
a If the refractive index of the filling portion L is close to the refractive index of the base portion M, the critical angle of the side surface S approaches 90°, so reflection at the interface hardly occurs. If the refractive index of the filling portion L is 1.49, total reflection at the side surface S can be seen in the range of |θE| Within this range, the color of the filling portion L cannot be seen because the absolute value of the angle of incidence on the side surface S is greater than or equal to the critical angle. In the range of 9.96<|θE|<90 (°), the color of the filling portion L can be seen. Within this range, if a character or the like is pasted on the back surface portion R side, it is hidden by the color of the filling portion L and becomes invisible. This effect is reduced because the rear surface portion R appears to be reflected on the side surface S when total reflection occurs on the side surface S. Therefore, for this effect, the refractive index of the filling portion L should be equal to or higher than the refractive index of the base portion M. Alternatively, the difference is preferably as small as possible, preferably 0.1 or less, more preferably 0.05 or less, still more preferably 0.03 or less. However, this is not the case if a contrast effect is desired in which total reflection is visible in a part of θE close to the front and the color of the filling portion L is visible in other ranges. The same applies to other technical matters.
b Reflection on the side surface S is more likely to occur as the difference between the refractive index of the filling portion L and the refractive index of the base portion M increases. If the refractive index of the filling portion L is 1.4, total reflection at the side surface S can be seen in the range of |θE| can see If the refractive index of the filling portion L is 1.3, total internal reflection at the side S is visible in the range of |θE| from 0 to about 48.4°. In these cases, up to a certain θE from the front, depending on the position of the light source, the side surface S reflects the background and the color of the filling portion L cannot be seen. If the background is far away, it appears dim or shiny. If the light source is not in place, side S will appear dark and depressed. When θE exceeds the range of Equation 5, the color of the filling portion L becomes visible. However, some reflection at the interface remains. The conversion from total internal reflection to the color of the fill L occurs abruptly without intermediate steps due to the action of the critical angle. This makes the observer feel a surprise different from seeing the color of the filling portion L all the time, and brings about a useful effect depending on the application. When the effect is intended that the color of the filling portion L is invisible at θE close to the front, and the color of the filling portion L is visible as θE increases, the refractive index of the filling portion L is calculated from the refractive index of the base material portion M. may be 0.3 or less, 0.2 or less, 0.1 or less, or 0.05 or more.

θSが、わずかではあっても一部全反射角以下だと、|θE|が小さい時に剥離した側面Sでの全反射が発生するので、全反射が目につきやすい。つまり、図4aの場合には正面付近からの観察時に全反射が見える。片面全反射角でも同様に、|θE|が大きい(90°に近い)時よりも小さい時に全反射が見える。図4bの場合には少なくとも|θE|がarcsin(nsinθS)にきわめて近い時だけは全反射が見える。つまり、θSが一部全反射角や片面全反射角を下回った時の変化は、一瞬ではあれ明確に現れる。しかもそれは、装飾体Zへの正対に近い、最も高頻度の観察状態で起こるから、直ちに視認される。ゆえに、この事態が望ましくない場合、側面Sが一部全反射角等以下であるかどうかは大いに臨界的意義を有するといえる。また、剥離していない充填部Lで充填部Lの屈折率が基材部Mの屈折率をごくわずかに下回る場合でも、少なくとも正面付近から見た時だけは全反射が発生するので、同様に臨界的意義が大きい。 If .theta.S is slightly less than the angle of partial total reflection, total reflection occurs at the separated side surface S when .vertline..theta.E.vertline. That is, in the case of FIG. 4a, total internal reflection is visible when observed from near the front. For one-sided total internal reflection angles as well, total internal reflection is visible when |θE| is smaller than when it is large (close to 90°). In the case of FIG. 4b, total internal reflection is visible only when at least |θE| is very close to arcsin(n M sin θS). In other words, the change when θS falls below the angle of partial total reflection or the angle of one-sided total reflection appears clearly, albeit momentarily. Moreover, since it occurs in the most frequently observed state, which is close to facing the decorative body Z, it is immediately visually recognized. Therefore, if this situation is not desirable, it is of critical significance whether the side surface S is less than the angle of partial total reflection. In addition, even if the refractive index of the filling portion L is slightly lower than that of the base material portion M, total reflection occurs at least when viewed from near the front. It has great critical significance.

特開2019-025860号公報(以下、特許文献Aと略記する。)に記載の発明のように、透明の基材部Mに色つきの溝部Gが形成された装飾体や装飾体製造方法が知られている。同明細書段落0022及び図4において、溝側面Fを塗料等で着色する加工方法、及び溝部Gを透明又は不透明の樹脂等や塗料等で埋め充填部Fiとする加工方法が記載されている。しかし、特許文献Aの図4aのように溝部Gが充填部Fiを有さず、溝側面Fのみが着色される場合、耐光性の高い着色剤によって深い溝の奥まで充分な濃度で均一に、かつ低コストで着色することは難しかった。そのため、このような溝部Gを有する造形物3を屋外の長期用途等に用いることはできなかった。 As in the invention described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2019-025860 (hereinafter abbreviated as Patent Document A), a decorative body in which a colored groove portion G is formed in a transparent base material portion M and a method for manufacturing the decorative body are known. It is Paragraph 0022 and FIG. 4 of the same specification describe a processing method of coloring the groove side surface F with paint or the like, and a processing method of filling the groove portion G with a transparent or opaque resin or the like or paint to form a filling portion Fi. However, when the groove portion G does not have the filling portion Fi and only the groove side surface F is colored as shown in FIG. , and it was difficult to color at low cost. Therefore, the model 3 having such grooves G could not be used for long-term outdoor use.

一方、特許文献Aの図4b・c・dのような、着色された充填部Fiを有する造形物3では、紫外線による劣化が少ない高級有機顔料や無機顔料等の着色剤が採用可能であるから、高い耐光性が得られる。ところが、かかる造形物3が特に屋外に設置された場合、温度変化等のため、充填部Fiと基材部Mとの界面の剥離が避けられなかった。つまり、日照による加熱と夜間の冷却を主とする温度変化や雨の吸水・乾燥により、造形物3各部で伸縮のサイクルが長期にわたり繰り返される。特に冬季の寒暖差は大きい。造形物3が赤外線の吸収率が高い樹脂等によってなる場合、日中には直射日光に含まれる赤外線により50~60℃まで熱せられるが、夜間には氷点下まで冷えることもある。また、風等による振動も常時起こっている。そのため充填部Fiと基材部Mとの界面に界面応力や内部破壊が蓄積し、この界面がやがて剥離する。さらに、造形物3が交通量の多い場所等に設置されていると、人や物が接触した衝撃で一瞬にして界面が剥離することがある。特に溝部楔角θGが小さい溝部Gの場合、溝側面Fが剥離すると、臨界角の作用で色が見えなくなる。何れにせよ、特許文献Aに記載の発明による装飾体は、屋外等の過酷な環境には耐えられないという問題を抱えていた。本実施形態は、上記造形物3より溝部の剥離が起きにくい装飾体・その装飾体を製造する装飾体製造装置及び装飾体製造方法の提供を課題としてもよい。 On the other hand, in the modeled object 3 having colored filling portions Fi, such as those shown in FIGS. , high light resistance is obtained. However, when such a molded object 3 is installed outdoors, peeling of the interface between the filling portion Fi and the base portion M is inevitable due to temperature changes and the like. That is, due to temperature changes mainly due to heating due to sunlight and cooling at night, and water absorption and drying due to rain, each part of the modeled object 3 repeats a cycle of expansion and contraction for a long period of time. Especially in winter, the temperature difference is large. If the modeled object 3 is made of a resin or the like having a high infrared absorption rate, it can be heated up to 50 to 60° C. by the infrared rays contained in direct sunlight during the daytime, but it may cool down to below freezing point at night. In addition, vibration due to wind or the like is always occurring. As a result, interfacial stress and internal breakdown accumulate at the interface between the filling portion Fi and the base material portion M, and this interface eventually separates. Furthermore, if the modeled object 3 is installed in a place with a lot of traffic, the interface may peel off in an instant due to the impact of contact with a person or object. Particularly in the case of the groove G having a small groove wedge angle .theta.G, when the groove side surface F peels off, the color becomes invisible due to the action of the critical angle. In any case, the decorative body according to the invention described in Patent Document A has a problem that it cannot withstand harsh environments such as outdoors. The object of the present embodiment may be to provide a decorative body, a decorative body manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the decorative body, and a decorative body manufacturing method in which the groove portion is less likely to be peeled off than the molded article 3 .

請求の範囲控。項1:基材部(M)〔なお、本明細書及び特許請求の範囲において( )を伴って付加された符号は、当該部分の記載内容を理解するための補助的機能を有するにとどまり、当該部分に記載された内容を限定する機能を有しない。〕と、前記基材部に形成された溝部(G)と、を有する装飾体(Z)であって、前記溝部が内部に充填部(L)を有し、前記充填部の引張伸び率が前記基材部の引張伸び率の3倍以上であることを特徴とする装飾体。前記基材部の少なくとも一部が硬質樹脂でもよい。 Claim copy. Claim 1: Base material part (M) It does not have the function to limit the contents described in the relevant part. ] and a groove (G) formed in the base material, wherein the groove has a filling portion (L) inside, and the tensile elongation of the filling portion is A decoration having a tensile elongation rate of at least 3 times that of the base material. At least part of the base material may be a hard resin.

《第2の実施形態》
本実施形態は、第1の実施形態に類似の課題等を、基本的には別の方法で解決する。本実施形態では、例えば、図3に示す装飾体Zにおいて、側面Sでの充填部L及び基材部Mの接合がより強固となることで、界面剥離が起きにくくなる。そのためには、充填部Lと基材部Mとの接合が物理的接合ではなく、化学拡散接合であってもよい。具体的には、例えば充填材料21が、材料板20を常温で溶解するジクロロメタン・クロロホルム等の溶剤を含有していれば、充填後に側面Sの材料板20を溶解し、材料板20の成分と溶け合いながら硬化する。あるいは、充填材料21の一部が(メタ)アクリレート、特にメタクリル酸メチル(MMA)であれば、ABS・PC等の樹脂によってなる材料板20に対して溶解又は浸透しつつ重合する。それらの結果、接合面が明確な界面でなく、その両側の成分が互いに移動し混ざり合った連続部分となる。このような接合状態を、本明細書では化学拡散接合と記載する。充填材料調合部44は、例えば三菱ケミカル株式会社製アクリエステルM等のMMA60重量部とPMMA粉末30~60重量部を混合攪拌し、過酸化ベンゾイル等の重合開始剤やフタル酸ジシクロヘキシル等の可塑剤等を0.1重量部程度(温度等に応じて調整可)の微量添加し、さらに着色剤Co等を適量混ぜ合わせて充填材料21を作成してもよい。充填加工部45は、充填後、溝部Gの深さと幅に応じた時間と温度、例えば70℃3時間等で加熱してもよい。この充填材料21はMMAを含むため、材料板20がPMMAであれば、重合によって一体化しやすく、さらに強い化学拡散接合となる場合がある。変性アクリレートでも同様の効果が得られることがある。このように、充填部Lと基材部Mの成分の少なくとも一部が共通すると、化学拡散接合が容易に得られる。またその場合、充填部Lと基材部Mの組成が近いために、それらの屈折率が近く、その差が0.1以下・0.05以下・0.03以下の何れかであることが多い。さらに、充填材料21の硬化性等の特別な必要から、充填部Lの分子量や密度等が基材部Mのそれらより小さいため、充填部Lの屈折率が基材部Mの屈折率より小さいことがある。これらは何れも充填部Lと基材部Mとが同等の組成であることがもたらす特徴である。本実施形態では、充填材料21と材料板20は熱可塑性樹脂でもよい。また、被覆部T・基材部M・後述の接着層A・充填接着層A0・基材上層M1及び基材下層M2等の間が化学拡散接合してもよい。
<<Second embodiment>>
This embodiment basically solves the problems similar to those of the first embodiment by a different method. In the present embodiment, for example, in the decorative body Z shown in FIG. 3, the bonding between the filling part L and the base material part M on the side surface S becomes stronger, so that interfacial peeling is less likely to occur. For that purpose, the bonding between the filling part L and the base material part M may be chemical diffusion bonding instead of physical bonding. Specifically, for example, if the filling material 21 contains a solvent such as dichloromethane or chloroform that dissolves the material plate 20 at room temperature, the material plate 20 on the side surface S is dissolved after filling, and the components of the material plate 20 are dissolved. It hardens as it melts. Alternatively, if part of the filling material 21 is (meth)acrylate, especially methyl methacrylate (MMA), it polymerizes while dissolving or permeating into the material plate 20 made of resin such as ABS/PC. As a result, the joint surface is not a distinct interface, but a continuous portion in which the components on both sides move and mix with each other. Such a bonding state is described as chemical diffusion bonding in this specification. The filling material preparation unit 44 mixes and stirs 60 parts by weight of MMA such as Acryester M manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation and 30 to 60 parts by weight of PMMA powder, and adds a polymerization initiator such as benzoyl peroxide and a plasticizer such as dicyclohexyl phthalate. The filling material 21 may be prepared by adding a very small amount of about 0.1 parts by weight (adjustable according to the temperature, etc.), and further mixing an appropriate amount of the coloring agent Co or the like. After filling, the filling processed portion 45 may be heated at a time and temperature corresponding to the depth and width of the groove portion G, for example, at 70° C. for 3 hours. Since this filling material 21 contains MMA, if the material plate 20 is PMMA, it is easily integrated by polymerization, and may result in stronger chemical diffusion bonding. A similar effect may be obtained with modified acrylates. Thus, when at least part of the components of the filling portion L and the base portion M are common, chemical diffusion bonding can be easily obtained. In that case, since the filling portion L and the base portion M have similar compositions, their refractive indices are close to each other, and the difference between them is any of 0.1 or less, 0.05 or less, or 0.03 or less. many. Furthermore, due to special requirements such as curability of the filling material 21, the molecular weight, density, etc. of the filling portion L are smaller than those of the base portion M, so that the refractive index of the filling portion L is smaller than the refractive index of the base portion M. Sometimes. All of these are characteristics brought about by the fact that the filling portion L and the base portion M have the same composition. In this embodiment, the filler material 21 and material plate 20 may be thermoplastic. Further, chemical diffusion bonding may be performed among the coating portion T, the base material portion M, an adhesive layer A to be described later, the filling adhesive layer A0, the upper base layer M1, the lower base layer M2, and the like.

充填材料21が溶剤を含む場合、通常、硬化時に、まず開口部O側から溶剤が揮発し、溝部Gを塞ぐ。次に内部の充填材料21が硬化する際、気化した溶剤が逃げられずに溝部G内に残留し、気泡となりやすい。また、揮発する溶剤の分の体積減少が大きく、気泡が大きくなりがちである。一般的なアクリル塗料やアクリル絵の具は、有機溶剤や水を大量に含むので、硬化収縮率が50~90%程度と大きく、特に大きい空隙ができることが多い。すなわち、気泡が両側の側面Sにまたがる、溝部Gの深さ方向における気泡の割合が1/2以上、溝部Gの長さ方向における気泡の長さのdGに対する比率が1/2以上・1以上・2以上の何れか、といった気泡である。この気泡は空隙なので、臨界角により全反射を呈し、充填部Lの中で目につく。これが装飾効果をもたらす場合もあるが、そうではない場合には、充填材料21が溶剤をほとんど又は全く含まず、材料板20に対する溶解力の強い又は材料板20と重合可能なモノマー(MMA・スチレン等)を含む方がよい。また、アクリル塗料等が含む溶剤は、ジクロロメタン・クロロホルム等の強力な溶剤と異なり、側面Sをわずかに白濁させる程度で、材料板20をほとんど溶解できないことが多い。 When the filling material 21 contains a solvent, the solvent usually evaporates first from the opening O side and closes the groove G during curing. Next, when the filling material 21 inside hardens, the vaporized solvent cannot escape and remains in the grooves G, easily forming air bubbles. In addition, the volume of the volatilized solvent is greatly reduced, and the bubbles tend to be large. General acrylic paints and acrylic paints contain a large amount of organic solvents and water, so that they have a high curing shrinkage of about 50 to 90%, and particularly large voids are often formed. That is, the ratio of the bubbles in the depth direction of the groove G where the bubbles straddle the side surfaces S on both sides is 1/2 or more, and the ratio of the length of the bubbles in the length direction of the groove G to dG is 1/2 or more and 1 or more.・It is a bubble such as any of 2 or more. Since this bubble is an air gap, it exhibits total internal reflection due to the critical angle and is visible in the fill L. In some cases this provides a decorative effect, but in other cases the filler material 21 contains little or no solvent and monomers (MMA, Styrene etc.) should be included. Further, unlike strong solvents such as dichloromethane, chloroform, etc., the solvent contained in the acrylic paint, etc., often makes the side surface S slightly cloudy and hardly dissolves the material plate 20 .

本実施形態による装飾体Zの特徴として、充填部Lが基材部Mから機械的に分離されると、側面Sで截然と剥離するのではなく、充填部L又は基材部Mの少なくとも一方が破壊される。つまり、充填部Lと基材部Mとの間の接着強さが充填部L等の引張強さ等より大きく、分離しようとする応力が界面剥離(界面破壊)に代わり充填部L等の内部裂損に働くことで、充填部Lを凝集破壊する。実際には、溝部Gが長さ方向に沿って割れる時に、充填部Lが片側の側面Sのみに付着したままもっていかれずに、両側の側面Sに残ることが多い。その表面には充填部Lの色がこびりつき、ざらざらしている。充填部Lの引張強さが基材部Mのそれより大きい場合には、基材部Mが同様に割れる。また、界面を強制分離した場合の表面では、おそらく応力が分散するため、波状の凹凸が発生することがある。この凹凸のピッチの範囲は、剥離物の厚さ等により変動するが、好ましくは50μm~2000μm・より好ましくは100μm~1000μm・さらに好ましくは200μm~500μm、又は好ましくは100μm~1500μm・より好ましくは300μm~1200μmである。これは、COレーザによってなる溝部Gにおいても、側面Sのうち先端付近だけでなく開口部O付近までの、充填部Lと接合していた部分に現れることで、レーザのパルス由来の凹凸と区別できる。化学拡散接合部分の剥離面には波状に限らず様々な形状の凹凸ができ、カットオフλc0.8mm・カットオフλs2.5μmでのRは好ましくは1以上・より好ましくは3以上・さらに好ましくは5以上・一層好ましくは10以上、Rが好ましくは5以上・より好ましくは12以上・さらに好ましくは25以上・一層好ましくは50以上である。そのカットオフλc0.08mm・カットオフλs0.25μmでのRは好ましくは0.25以上・より好ましくは0.5以上・さらに好ましくは1以上、Rが好ましくは0.5以上・より好ましくは1以上・さらに好ましくは2以上である。そのカットオフλc2.5mmでのRは好ましくは2以上・より好ましくは5以上・さらに好ましくは10以上、Rが好ましくは10以上・より好ましくは20以上・さらに好ましくは50以上である。そのカットオフλc0.08mmでのWは好ましくは5以上・より好ましくは10以上・さらに好ましくは15以上、Wは好ましくは2以上・より好ましくは5以上・さらに好ましくは10以上である。何れも最大は幅wないしその1/2である。充填部Lと基材部Mとの界面での全反射が少ないほうがよい場合には、充填部Lあるいは展色剤Vの屈折率は基材部Mの屈折率以上でもよく、基材部Mの屈折率と0.1以下(又は0.2以下・0.05以下)の差でもよく、それらの両方でもよい。第5の実施形態等との組み合わせの場合、先端部分では充填部Lが化学拡散接合していなくてもよい。被覆部Tはあってもなくてもよい。上記充填材料21によってなる装飾体Zが表面部Fを水平方向と平行とする状態で50cmからコンクリートの床面に自然落下しても、その側面Sは剥離しなかった。通常の不飽和ポリエステル(日本ユピカ株式会社製ユピカ2035)を展色剤Vとする装飾体Zが同様に落下すると、側面Sが数カ所で剥離した。 As a feature of the decorative body Z according to this embodiment, when the filling part L is mechanically separated from the base material part M, at least one of the filling part L and the base material part M is not peeled off at the side surface S. is destroyed. That is, the adhesive strength between the filling portion L and the base material portion M is greater than the tensile strength of the filling portion L, etc., and the stress to separate the inside of the filling portion L etc. instead of interfacial peeling (interfacial breakage). By acting on tearing, the filling part L is cohesively broken. Actually, when the groove part G is split along the length direction, the filling part L often remains on both side surfaces S instead of being attached to only one side surface S. The color of the filling part L sticks to the surface, making it rough. If the tensile strength of the filling portion L is greater than that of the base portion M, the base portion M will crack as well. In addition, wavy unevenness may occur on the surface when the interface is forcibly separated, presumably due to the dispersion of stress. The pitch range of the unevenness varies depending on the thickness of the peeled material, etc., but is preferably 50 μm to 2000 μm, more preferably 100 μm to 1000 μm, further preferably 200 μm to 500 μm, or more preferably 100 μm to 1500 μm, more preferably 300 μm. ˜1200 μm. Even in the groove G formed by the CO 2 laser, this appears not only in the vicinity of the tip of the side surface S but also in the vicinity of the opening O, which was joined to the filling portion L. distinguishable. On the peeled surface of the chemical diffusion bonding part, unevenness of various shapes is formed, not limited to wavy shapes, and R a at a cutoff λc of 0.8 mm and a cutoff λs of 2.5 μm is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 3 or more, and even more preferably. is 5 or more, more preferably 10 or more, and Rz is preferably 5 or more, more preferably 12 or more, still more preferably 25 or more, and still more preferably 50 or more. Ra at a cutoff λc of 0.08 mm and a cutoff λs of 0.25 μm is preferably 0.25 or more, more preferably 0.5 or more, still more preferably 1 or more, and Rz is preferably 0.5 or more, more preferably is 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more. Ra at the cutoff λc of 2.5 mm is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 10 or more, and Rz is preferably 10 or more, more preferably 20 or more, further preferably 50 or more. W a at the cutoff λc of 0.08 mm is preferably 5 or more, more preferably 10 or more, still more preferably 15 or more, and Wz is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 10 or more. In either case, the maximum is the width w or 1/2 thereof. When the total reflection at the interface between the filling part L and the base material part M should be small, the refractive index of the filling part L or the vehicle material V may be equal to or higher than the refractive index of the base material part M. and the difference of 0.1 or less (or 0.2 or less or 0.05 or less), or both of them. In the case of combination with the fifth embodiment or the like, the filling portion L does not have to be chemical diffusion bonded at the tip portion. The covering portion T may or may not be present. Even when the decorative body Z made of the filling material 21 naturally fell from 50 cm onto a concrete floor with the surface portion F parallel to the horizontal direction, the side face S did not peel off. When the decorative body Z using normal unsaturated polyester (U-Pica 2035 manufactured by Japan U-Pica Co., Ltd.) as the vehicle V was similarly dropped, the side surface S was peeled off at several points.

請求の範囲控。項1:基材部(M)と、前記基材部に形成された溝部(G)と、を有する装飾体(Z)であって、前記溝部が内部に充填部(L)を有し、前記溝部における前記充填部と前記基材部との界面である側面(S)の少なくとも一部において、前記充填部と前記基材部とが化学拡散接合していることを特徴とする装飾体。項2:前記充填部と前記基材部とが強制的に分離された場合、前記充填部と前記基材部の一方の一部が他方に残るか、又は両方の一部が互いの他方に残る、項1に記載の装飾体。項3:前記分離された部分の凹凸の高さが好ましくは10um以上・より好ましくは30um以上・さらに好ましくは100um以上である、項1又は2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記分離された部分の算術平均粗さRが1μm以上である、項1又は2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記基材部が透過性を有する、項1~3の何れかに記載の装飾体。項5:前記充填部が(メタ)アクリレート(系化合物)又はPMMAを含む、項1~4の何れかに記載の装飾体。項6:前記基材部が(メタ)アクリレート又はPMMAを含む、項1~5の何れかに記載の装飾体。項7:前記充填部又は前記基材部の少なくとも一方におけるPMMAの比率が好ましくは70%以上・より好ましくは80%以上・さらに好ましくは90%以上である、項1~6の何れかに記載の装飾体。項8:前記充填部が溝部の深さ方向の好ましくは1/2以上・より好ましくは1/3以上・さらに好ましくは1/4以上の何れかを占める気泡を含まない、項1~7の何れかに記載の装飾体。項9:前記装飾体の外側に露出し前記溝部が観察される面である表面部(F)を含む面のうち前記側面に最も近い部分に下した垂線又は法線と前記側面の少なくとも一部がなす角度の絶対値が好ましくはarcsin(1/n)以下・より好ましくは90-2arcsin(1/n)°以下(nは前記基材部の屈折率)である、項1~8の何れかに記載の装飾体。項10:画像・文字・ロゴ・図形・模様の少なくとも何れかを表示する、項1~9の何れかに記載の装飾体。項11:前記溝部の深さ(dG)が好ましくは3mm以上・より好ましくは6mm以上である、項1~10の何れかに記載の装飾体。項12:前記溝部が楔状であって、前記溝部の両側の側面のなす前記溝部側の角度が10°以下である、項1~11の何れかに記載の装飾体。項13:材料(20)に溝部を加工する溝加工部(43)と、前記溝部に材料(21)を充填する充填加工部(45)と、を具え、それらにより項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造装置(40)。項14:材料に溝部を加工する溝加工工程(S43)と、前記溝部に材料を充填する充填加工工程(S45)と、を具え、それらにより項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造方法。 Claim copy. Item 1: A decorative body (Z) having a substrate portion (M) and a groove portion (G) formed in the substrate portion, wherein the groove portion has a filling portion (L) therein, A decorative body, wherein the filling portion and the base material are chemically diffusion bonded to each other on at least a part of a side surface (S) of the groove, which is an interface between the filling part and the base material. Item 2: When the filling portion and the base portion are forcibly separated, a portion of one of the filling portion and the base portion remains on the other, or portions of both are on the other of each other. The decoration body according to item 1, which remains. Item 3: The decorative body according to Item 1 or 2, wherein the height of the unevenness of the separated portion is preferably 10 μm or more, more preferably 30 μm or more, further preferably 100 μm or more. Item 4: The decorative body according to Item 1 or 2, wherein the separated portion has an arithmetic mean roughness Ra of 1 μm or more. Item 4: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 3, wherein the base material has transparency. Item 5: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 4, wherein the filling part contains (meth)acrylate (based compound) or PMMA. Item 6: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 5, wherein the base material contains (meth)acrylate or PMMA. Item 7: According to any one of Items 1 to 6, the ratio of PMMA in at least one of the filling portion and the base portion is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and still more preferably 90% or more. ornaments. Item 8: The filled portion does not contain air bubbles occupying preferably 1/2 or more, more preferably 1/3 or more, and still more preferably 1/4 or more in the depth direction of the groove portion. A decoration according to any one of the above. Item 9: A perpendicular or normal drawn to a portion closest to the side surface of the surface including the surface portion (F), which is the surface exposed to the outside of the decoration and on which the groove portion is observed, and at least a part of the side surface Any of items 1 to 8, wherein the absolute value of the angle formed is preferably arcsin (1/n) or less, more preferably 90-2 arcsin (1/n) ° or less (n is the refractive index of the base material) The ornamental body described in Crab. Item 10: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 9, which displays at least one of images, characters, logos, graphics, and patterns. Item 11: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 10, wherein the depth (dG) of the groove is preferably 3 mm or more, more preferably 6 mm or more. Item 12: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 11, wherein the groove is wedge-shaped, and the angle formed by the side surfaces on both sides of the groove on the groove side is 10° or less. Item 13: The decorative body according to Item 1, comprising a groove processing unit (43) for processing grooves in the material (20) and a filling processing unit (45) for filling the grooves with the material (21). A decoration manufacturing device (40) for manufacturing the Item 14: Manufacture of a decorative body comprising a groove processing step (S43) of processing a groove in a material and a filling processing step (S45) of filling the groove with a material, thereby manufacturing the decorative body according to Item 1. Method.

《第3の実施形態》
特許文献Aは、その明細書段落0027において、造形物3の表面に保護用の板を接着することを記載している。しかし、溝部Gの開口部側が接着剤等によって接合されると、溝部Gから空気が逃げ、保護板と基材部Mとの間に入って気泡となり、品質を低下させる。また、溝部Gが空隙の場合、接着剤が溝部G内部に流れ込んでしまい、空隙である溝部Gの全反射の効果が失われる。同公報はこれらの問題を記載も示唆もしていない。粘着剤付きの保護シート等が用いられればこの問題は起こらないが、保護シート自体の劣化や剥離のため、保護の目的には不充分なことがある。保護板が接合されずに造形物3の前面に位置する場合には、それらを係合する外枠等が必要である。また保護板と造形物3の間に2面の反射面が介在する。そのため全体の全光線透過率が約10%低下し、文字等が暗く見え、不要な反射が増える。
<<Third embodiment>>
Patent Literature A describes, in paragraph 0027 of the specification, that a protective plate is adhered to the surface of the modeled object 3 . However, when the opening side of the groove G is joined with an adhesive or the like, air escapes from the groove G and enters between the protective plate and the base material M to form air bubbles, thereby degrading the quality. Moreover, if the groove G is a gap, the adhesive flows into the groove G, and the effect of total reflection of the groove G, which is a gap, is lost. The publication neither describes nor suggests these problems. This problem does not occur if a protective sheet or the like with an adhesive is used, but the protective sheet itself deteriorates or peels off, which may be insufficient for the purpose of protection. If the protective plate is not joined and positioned in front of the modeled object 3, an outer frame or the like for engaging them is required. Also, two reflective surfaces are interposed between the protective plate and the modeled object 3 . As a result, the overall total light transmittance is reduced by about 10%, characters and the like appear dark, and unnecessary reflection increases.

本実施形態は上記問題の解決を課題としてもよい。例えば、その課題とは、板材が基材部に背景技術より良好に接合された装飾体等の提供である。背景技術より良好な接合は、接合面に混入した気泡が少ない接合・接着剤が溝部Gに浸入しない接合・耐久性の高い接合・立体文字効果があり溝部Gの汚染が少ない接合・装飾体の透過率が向上する接合の何れかを含む。以下、図5・6を参照して、第3の実施形態等に係る装飾体製造装置50の構成及び動作の例を説明する。装飾体製造装置50は、例えば溝加工部43・色面層切断部54・色面層接合部55・被覆加工部46を具える。第3の実施形態に係る装飾体製造方法は、例えば図6のように、溝加工工程S43・色面層切断工程S54・色面層接合工程S55・被覆加工工程S46を含む。装飾体製造装置40及び50の各部並びに2つの装飾体製造方法の各工程は相互に組み合わせ可能である。 The present embodiment may be aimed at solving the above problem. For example, the problem is to provide a decoration or the like in which a plate material is bonded to a base material better than in the background art. Bonding that is better than the background art is bonding with few air bubbles mixed in the bonding surface, bonding in which the adhesive does not enter the groove G, bonding with high durability, three-dimensional character effect and less contamination of the groove G, decoration body Including any of the bonds that improve the transmittance. An example of the configuration and operation of the decoration manufacturing apparatus 50 according to the third embodiment and the like will be described below with reference to FIGS. The decoration manufacturing apparatus 50 includes, for example, a grooving section 43, a color layer cutting section 54, a color layer joining section 55, and a coating processing section 46. As shown in FIG. The decoration manufacturing method according to the third embodiment includes, for example, as shown in FIG. 6, a grooving step S43, a color surface layer cutting step S54, a color surface layer bonding step S55, and a coating processing step S46. Each part of the decoration manufacturing apparatuses 40 and 50 and each process of the two decoration manufacturing methods can be combined with each other.

溝加工部43(S43)は第1の実施形態でのそれと基本的に同様である。溝加工部43は画像30に基づいて材料板20に溝部Gを加工してもよい。溝部Gの断面形状は特に制限されず、楔状でもよく、平行四辺形や等脚台形等でもよい。溝部Gは空隙でもよく、充填されてもよい。 The grooved portion 43 (S43) is basically the same as that in the first embodiment. The groove processing section 43 may process the groove portion G in the material plate 20 based on the image 30 . The cross-sectional shape of the groove portion G is not particularly limited, and may be a wedge shape, a parallelogram, an isosceles trapezoid, or the like. The groove portion G may be a void or may be filled.

色面層切断部54は、例えば、画像30に基づき、色面層材料22を溝部Gと近似した形状に切断してもよい(S54)。その際、色面層切断部54は、画像30に含まれる文字等の輪郭を拡張して、文字等の各構成要素の幅を太く加工してもよい。反対に、溝加工部43が画像30の文字等を細くして溝加工してもよい。図7aのように、色面層Uが溝部Gの形状に沿った形状でもよい。これは、色面層Uの形状が一組の溝部Gの全体の外形に近似し、1つの色面層Uが複数の溝部Gの開口部Oを塞ぐ場合を含む。色面層材料22は制限されないが、典型的には株式会社中川ケミカル・トーヨーケム株式会社・桜井株式会社・3M Company・リンテック株式会社・ORAFOL等製のマーキングフィルムやその他のフィルムでもよく、より厚い樹脂板や、金属板・金属箔、紙等でもよい。色面層材料22の色は制限されない。色面層材料22の色は基材部M等と実用上同じ色でもよく、別の色であれば、色面層Uが文字等を表示できる。実用上同じ色とは、マンセル表色系(D65)において色相・彩度・明度の差が何れも2ステップ以下かつ屈折率の差が0.5以下、特記時には1又は0.5ステップ以下かつ屈折率の差が0.2以下のことである。2色の差がこれらの少なくとも何れかを超える場合、その2色は実用上異なる色である。さらに被覆部Tがあれば、溝部Gが透明体に封入され浮いているかのように見える。色面層切断部54は、PVC等のフィルムを株式会社ミマキエンジニアリング製等のカッティングプロッタやNCルータで切断してもよく、オレフィン系・PMMA(アクリル)系等のフィルムをレーザ加工機で切断してもよい。マーキングフィルムの多くの厚さは、好ましくは10~400μm・より好ましくは20~200μmであり、基材部M又は装飾体Zの厚さの好ましくは1/5~1/2000・より好ましくは1/10~1/1000・さらに好ましくは1/20~1/500・一層好ましくは1/40~1/250である。 The color surface layer cutting section 54 may cut the color surface layer material 22 into a shape similar to the groove portion G, for example, based on the image 30 (S54). At this time, the color surface layer cutting unit 54 may extend the contours of characters and the like included in the image 30 to increase the width of each constituent element of the characters and the like. Conversely, the grooving section 43 may thin the characters and the like of the image 30 and perform grooving. The color surface layer U may have a shape along the shape of the groove portion G, as shown in FIG. 7a. This includes the case where the shape of the color surface layer U approximates the outline of the entire set of grooves G, and one color surface layer U closes the openings O of a plurality of grooves G. The color surface layer material 22 is not limited, but may typically be a marking film or other film manufactured by Nakagawa Chemical Co., Ltd., Toyochem Co., Ltd., Sakurai Co., Ltd., 3M Company, Lintec Co., Ltd., ORAFOL, etc., and may be a thicker resin. A plate, a metal plate/metal foil, paper, or the like may be used. The color of the color surface layer material 22 is not restricted. The color of the color surface layer material 22 may be practically the same color as that of the base material portion M, etc. If the color is a different color, the color surface layer U can display characters and the like. Practically the same color means that the difference in hue, saturation, and lightness is 2 steps or less in the Munsell color system (D65) and the difference in refractive index is 0.5 or less, and in particular, 1 or 0.5 steps or less and The refractive index difference is 0.2 or less. If the difference between the two colors exceeds at least one of these, the two colors are practically different colors. Furthermore, if there is a covering portion T, it looks as if the groove portion G is enclosed in a transparent body and is floating. The colored surface layer cutting part 54 may cut a film such as PVC with a cutting plotter or an NC router manufactured by Mimaki Engineering Co., Ltd., or cut an olefin-based or PMMA (acrylic)-based film with a laser processing machine. may The thickness of many of the marking films is preferably 10 to 400 μm, more preferably 20 to 200 μm, and preferably 1/5 to 1/2000, more preferably 1/5 to 1/2000, more preferably 1/5 of the thickness of the base material M or the decoration Z. /10 to 1/1000, more preferably 1/20 to 1/500, more preferably 1/40 to 1/250.

色面層接合部55は、色面層材料22を溝加工された材料板20の所定位置に接合し、色面層Uとする(S55)。色面層材料22がマーキングフィルムであれば、塗布済の粘着剤Adにより容易に接合可能である。この際、図7bのように、色面層Uが溝部Gの開口部Oを塞ぐことが望ましい。色面層Uは、側面Sの肩部から溝部Gの幅方向で外側にかけて、基材部Mとの接合部分Jを有してもよい。接合部分Jの接合幅jは、好ましくは幅wの1/2以上・より好ましくは幅w以上・さらに好ましくはwの2倍以上である。また、接合幅jは、好ましくは0.1mm以上・より好ましくは0.2mm以上、さらに好ましくは0.5mm以上・一層好ましくは1mm以上である。接合幅jが大きいほど、被覆部Tがない場合に接合部分Jが剥がれにくく、色面層Uによる溝部Gの保護効果が向上する。ただし、接合幅jが大きいほど加飾効果が低下する場合がある。接合幅jは、これら2つの相反する効果の兼ね合いで決定されてもよい。色面層接合部55は、色面層Uに転写シート(アプリケーションシート)を併用し、さらに温度管理により作業中の伸縮を抑えることで、精密かつ効率的に位置決めを行える。なお、接合は粘着剤Ad等による貼付等を含み、色面層Uが接した状態で固定されていれば接合されている。色面層U及び充填部Lのない溝部Gでは、側面Sが外気に対して露出する。そのため、特に屋外用途では、埃等が溝部Gに入り込んで汚れやすい。レーザ加工等による楔状の溝部Gでは、先端部分の幅が狭いため、清掃によってこの汚れを除去することも難しい。一方、色面層Uが開口部Oを塞いでいれば、この問題は解消する。色面層Uの最も広い面が溝部G(の二分面)となす角度は様々でよい。しかし、色面層Uが溝部Gに平行であると、色面層Uは開口部Oを塞げないので、色面層Uの最も広い面は溝部Gに平行でなくてもよい。なお、実際には装飾体Zの内部は屈折して見えるので、図7aのようには見えない。図7aは屈折現象を無視し、装飾体Zの内部の溝部Gを点線により透過図として図示してある。図10も同様である。また、説明の便宜上、図7の各部で拡大率が異なる。 The color surface layer joining unit 55 joins the color surface layer material 22 to a predetermined position of the grooved material plate 20 to form a color surface layer U (S55). If the color surface layer material 22 is a marking film, it can be easily joined with the applied adhesive Ad. At this time, it is desirable that the color surface layer U closes the opening O of the groove G, as shown in FIG. 7B. The color surface layer U may have a joint portion J with the base material portion M from the shoulder portion of the side surface S to the outer side of the groove portion G in the width direction. The joint width j of the joint portion J is preferably 1/2 or more of the width w, more preferably the width w or more, and still more preferably twice the width w or more. The bonding width j is preferably 0.1 mm or more, more preferably 0.2 mm or more, still more preferably 0.5 mm or more, and still more preferably 1 mm or more. The larger the joint width j, the more difficult it is for the joint portion J to come off when there is no covering portion T, and the more effectively the colored surface layer U protects the groove portion G. As shown in FIG. However, the decorative effect may decrease as the joint width j increases. The junction width j may be determined by balancing these two conflicting effects. The color surface layer joining portion 55 uses a transfer sheet (application sheet) together with the color surface layer U, and furthermore, suppresses expansion and contraction during operation by temperature control, so that positioning can be performed precisely and efficiently. Note that bonding includes sticking with an adhesive Ad or the like, and if the color surface layer U is fixed in contact, it is bonded. In the groove portion G without the color surface layer U and the filling portion L, the side surface S is exposed to the outside air. Therefore, especially in outdoor applications, dust and the like easily enter the grooves G and make them dirty. In the wedge-shaped groove portion G formed by laser processing or the like, the width of the tip portion is narrow, so it is difficult to remove this dirt by cleaning. On the other hand, if the color surface layer U blocks the opening O, this problem is solved. The angle formed by the widest surface of the color surface layer U and the groove portion G (the bisected surface thereof) may vary. However, if the color surface layer U is parallel to the grooves G, the color surface layer U cannot close the openings O, so the widest surface of the color surface layer U does not have to be parallel to the grooves G. In addition, since the inside of the decorative body Z actually appears to be refracted, it cannot be seen as in FIG. 7a. FIG. 7a ignores the refraction phenomenon and shows the groove G inside the decorative body Z as a transparent view with dotted lines. FIG. 10 is also the same. Also, for convenience of explanation, the enlargement ratio is different in each part of FIG. 7 .

被覆加工部46は、色面層接合済の材料板20に別の材料板20を、例えばAIZ合同会社製のキレークレ‐502等の既知の接着剤25で接合し、被覆部Tとしてもよい(S46)。接着剤25によってなる接着層Aは、多くの場合に無色透明又は基材部Mと実用上同じ色であるが、加飾目的に応じてそれら以外の色でもよい。なお、図7・9・13・14以外の図面の断面図は、接着層Aを図示していないが、それらの装飾体Zも接着層Aや被覆部Tを有する場合がある。被覆部Tは厚さが一定の板状体でもよく、その場合色面層Uの最も広い面は表面部Fに(被覆部Tや接着層Aの各部の厚さの差の範囲内で)平行である。被覆部Tの表面部F側が例えば凸状で、色面層Uの最も広い面が表面部Fに平行でなくてもよい。短期用途や屋内用途であれば、被覆部Tがなく色面層Uが露出してもよい。それによる面接着の工程の省略で、製造コストが低減される。この場合、表面部Fは色面層Uの側の露出部分であって、色面層U以外の部分である。被覆加工が行われる場合、色面層Uが溝部Gを塞いでいるので、接着剤25が溝部Gに流れ込むことがない。そのため、溝部Gが充填されずに空隙のまま密封されるので、臨界角の作用により、溝部Gが光を反射して輝く。溝部Gが段落0031に記載の各条件を満たす場合、この反射効果がより高い。溝部Gは、充填部Lを有さず空隙で、側面Sの表面部分のみに着色されてもよい。これにより、第1の実施形態と異なり、溝部Gが着色された色の光を全反射して輝く。この場合も含め、色面層Uは無色透明ないし基材部M等と略同じ色で、開口部Oの蓋の役割だけを果たしてもよい。また、色面層Uが溝部Gを塞がない場合、被覆加工時に、溝部Gから漏れ出た空気が接着層Aに気泡として残りがちである。本実施形態はこのトラブルを回避する効果を奏する。装飾体Zが被覆部Tを有する場合、接合部分Jは被覆加工時だけ表面部Fと密着していればよい。よって、被覆部Tがない場合より、その接合力は弱くてもよく、接合幅jは0でもよい。つまり、色面層Uのうち溝部Gの幅方向で最も外側の部分が、対応する溝部Gのうち開口部Oにおける幅方向に最も外側の部分に対し幅方向で同位置かより外側にあるならば、色面層Uは溝部Gを塞いでいる。図12bのような形状の(図12のように肩部が凸状の)溝部Gの場合にもこれが成立する。 The coating processing unit 46 may bond another material plate 20 to the color surface layer bonded material plate 20 with a known adhesive 25 such as Kirekure-502 manufactured by AIZ LLC to form a coating portion T ( S46). The adhesive layer A made of the adhesive 25 is often colorless and transparent or practically the same color as the base material M, but it may be of a different color depending on the purpose of decoration. Although the cross-sectional views of drawings other than FIGS. The covering portion T may be a plate-shaped body with a constant thickness, in which case the widest surface of the color surface layer U is the surface portion F (within the range of the thickness difference between the covering portion T and the adhesive layer A). parallel. The surface portion F side of the covering portion T may be convex, for example, and the widest surface of the color surface layer U may not be parallel to the surface portion F. For short-term use or indoor use, the color surface layer U may be exposed without the covering portion T. Omitting the step of surface bonding thereby reduces the manufacturing cost. In this case, the surface portion F is an exposed portion on the side of the color layer U, and is a portion other than the color layer U. FIG. When the coating process is performed, since the color surface layer U closes the groove G, the adhesive 25 does not flow into the groove G. Therefore, the groove G is not filled and is sealed as a void, so that the groove G reflects light and shines due to the action of the critical angle. If the groove G satisfies each condition described in paragraph 0031, this reflection effect is higher. The groove portion G may be void without the filling portion L, and only the surface portion of the side surface S may be colored. As a result, unlike the first embodiment, the colored light in the groove G is totally reflected and shines. Including this case, the color surface layer U may be colorless and transparent or substantially the same color as the base material portion M and the like, and may serve only as a lid for the opening portion O. Further, if the color surface layer U does not cover the grooves G, air leaking from the grooves G tends to remain in the adhesive layer A as air bubbles during the coating process. This embodiment has an effect of avoiding this trouble. When the decorative body Z has the covering portion T, the joint portion J may be in close contact with the surface portion F only during the covering process. Therefore, the bonding force may be weaker than when there is no covering portion T, and the bonding width j may be zero. That is, if the outermost portion in the width direction of the groove portion G in the color surface layer U is at the same position in the width direction as the outermost portion in the width direction in the opening portion O of the corresponding groove portion G, or is further outside. For example, the color surface layer U closes the groove portion G. This is also true for grooves G shaped as in FIG. 12b (with convex shoulders as in FIG. 12).

色面層Uのうち最も広い面における最も外側の部分の少なくとも一部が、表面部Fの最も外側の部分より内側でもよい。図7では、z方向の高さの差を無視すると、色面層Uの輪郭は表面部Fの輪郭(図示された範囲の外)の内側に包含されている。そのため、被覆部Tと基材部Mとが、色面層Uの外側で色面層Uを挟まずに直接接合し、全体の接合強度が向上する。被覆部Tがない場合には、色面層Uがない部分で光の損失が減少し、透過率や発色が向上する。ただし、色面層Uが基材部Mの全面に接合され、その最も外側の部分が表面部の最も外側の部分と同じ位置でもよい。これにより色面層切断加工が省略可能となり、製造コストが低減される。また、溝部Gは閉領域状でもよい。すなわち、始点と終点が略一致し、円・多角形やさらに複雑な図形のように閉じた図形でもよい。図7aのAの文字のように複数の溝部Gが包含関係にあり、複合する閉領域状であれば、色面層Uはそれに対応する穴を有してもよい。これにより、基材部Mと被覆部Tとの接合部分が増え、接合強度が向上する。このように、色面層Uと溝部Gとが互いに対応する形状でもよい。それらが互いに同相でもよい。つまり、互いの形状が連続的に変形可能でもよい。その場合それらの穴の数が同じである。また、溝部Gは図7aのG0のように、始点と終点とが離れた開領域状でもよい。すなわち、色面層Uが両側の接合部分J及びそれらの間のみで、表面部Fとの接合部分を間に挟まなくてもよい。色面層Uが連続している箇所で、溝部Gが途切れて開領域状でもよい。開口部Oにかかる色面層Uは目立つことがある。これが望ましくない場合には、幅wは1mm以下が好ましく、0.8mm以下がより好ましく、0.5mm以下がさらに好ましい。この3段落をまとめると、色面層Uは溝部Gの開口部Oに接し、かつ次の少なくとも何れかでもよい。1:基材部より表面部又は裏面部の少なくとも一方の側にあり(すなわち、色面層Uが、表面部Fと裏面部Rの間にあって溝部Gより表面部Fの近くにあるか、表面部Fと裏面部Rの間にあって溝部Gより裏面部の近くにあるか、表面部Fのさらに外にあるか、裏面部Rのさらに外にあるか、の少なくとも何れかであり)、前記少なくとも一方と範囲が同じかそれより狭い。2:被覆部Tと基材部Mの間にあって、被覆部Tに覆われている。3:表面部又は裏面部側の少なくとも一方と色が異なる。 At least part of the outermost portion of the widest surface of the color surface layer U may be inside the outermost portion of the surface portion F. In FIG. 7, ignoring the height difference in the z-direction, the contour of the color surface layer U is contained inside the contour of the surface portion F (outside the illustrated range). Therefore, the coating portion T and the base portion M are directly bonded to each other without sandwiching the color layer U outside the color layer U, thereby improving the overall bonding strength. In the absence of the covering portion T, the loss of light is reduced in the portion without the color surface layer U, and the transmittance and color development are improved. However, the color surface layer U may be bonded to the entire surface of the base material portion M, and its outermost portion may be positioned at the same position as the outermost portion of the surface portion. This makes it possible to omit the color surface layer cutting process, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost. Moreover, the groove portion G may be a closed area shape. That is, it may be a closed figure such as a circle, a polygon, or a more complicated figure whose start point and end point are substantially the same. If a plurality of grooves G are in an inclusion relationship like the letter A in FIG. 7a and form a composite closed area, the color surface layer U may have holes corresponding to them. As a result, the number of joints between the base material portion M and the covering portion T is increased, and the joint strength is improved. In this manner, the color surface layer U and the groove portion G may have shapes corresponding to each other. They may be in phase with each other. In other words, the mutual shapes may be continuously deformable. In that case they have the same number of holes. Alternatively, the groove G may be an open area with a start point and an end point separated from each other, as shown by G0 in FIG. 7a. That is, the colored surface layer U does not have to sandwich the joint portion with the surface portion F only between the joint portions J on both sides and between them. The groove portion G may be discontinued at a location where the color surface layer U is continuous to form an open region. The color surface layer U over the opening O may be conspicuous. If this is not desired, the width w is preferably 1 mm or less, more preferably 0.8 mm or less, even more preferably 0.5 mm or less. Summarizing these three paragraphs, the color surface layer U may be in contact with the opening O of the groove G and may be at least one of the following. 1: Located on at least one side of the front surface portion or the back surface portion from the base material portion (that is, the color surface layer U is between the front surface portion F and the back surface portion R and is closer to the front surface portion F than the groove portion G, or the surface is between the portion F and the back portion R and is closer to the back portion than the groove portion G, is further outside the front portion F, or is further outside the back portion R); Same or narrower range than the other. 2: Located between the coating portion T and the base material portion M and covered with the coating portion T. 3: The color is different from that of at least one of the front side and the back side.

第1の実施形態のように溝部Gが充填部Lを有する場合でも、充填材料21の不要部分の除去時の掻き取り・硬化時の収縮・表面張力により、充填部Lの開口部O側は図3aのように凹状となることが多い(この場合にも、幅wが小さい方が、凹部の深さが小さく抑えられるので好ましい)。もし被覆加工部46が、このような溝部Gに色面層Uなしで被覆加工を行うならば、この凹部内の空気が、充填部Lがない場合と同様、被覆加工時に気泡となりがちである。また、凹部の一部に接着剤25が流入するが、別の一部には空気が残って、まだら状になることが多い。これは充填部Lがない場合でも起こることがあり、一律に空気が残っている場合より加飾性を低下させる。図3b・4のように充填部Lと基材部Mとが面一であれば、上記問題の対策となりうるが、そのためには、研磨等の工程が必要となり、コスト・研磨痕・接合部への粉塵の混入・開口部Oの角の欠けの問題がある。一方、溝部G0のように充填部Lの開口部O側が凹状であって、その部分を塞ぐ色面層Uが略平坦であれば、それらの隙間に空気が残る。この空気がクッションとなり、充填部Lと基材部Mとの膨張率の差を吸収するので、充填部Lが剥離しにくくなる。以上から、色面層Uが溝部Gの開口部Oを塞ぐことは、充填部Lを有する溝部Gに対しても効果的である。 Even when the groove portion G has the filling portion L as in the first embodiment, the opening O side of the filling portion L is affected by scraping when the unnecessary portion of the filling material 21 is removed, shrinkage during curing, and surface tension. It is often recessed as shown in FIG. 3a (also in this case, a smaller width w is preferable because the depth of the recess can be kept small). If the covering part 46 coats such a groove part G without the color surface layer U, the air in this concave part tends to become air bubbles during the covering process, as in the case where there is no filling part L. . In addition, although the adhesive 25 flows into one portion of the recess, air remains in another portion, which often results in a mottled appearance. This may occur even when there is no filling portion L, and the decorativeness is lowered as compared with the case where the air remains uniformly. If the filling part L and the base material part M are flush with each other as shown in FIGS. 3b and 4, the above problem can be solved. There is a problem that the corner of the opening O is chipped. On the other hand, if the opening O side of the filling portion L is concave like the groove portion G0 and the color surface layer U covering that portion is substantially flat, air remains in the gap between them. Since this air acts as a cushion and absorbs the difference in expansion coefficient between the filling portion L and the base material portion M, the filling portion L is less likely to separate. From the above, closing the opening O of the groove G with the color surface layer U is also effective for the groove G having the filling portion L. As shown in FIG.

溝加工部43は、画像30を左右反転し、開口部Oの反対側から見た場合に文字等が正像となるように溝加工し、さらに色面層接合部55が開口部O側に有色の色面層Uを接合してもよい。これにより、観察者が開口部Oの反対側の正面から装飾体Zを見た場合のみに文字等の内部に有色の色面層Uが見え、斜めからは色面層Uが溝部Gに隠れて見えない効果等が得られる。また、開口部Oの反対側のみから観察される場合、被覆部Tは低透過率や高ヘーズでもよい。同様に、開口部O側のみから観察される場合、開口部Oの反対側に濃色で不透明に近い板等が装着・接合されてもよい。図7cの色面層U1・2のように、複数の色面層Uが同じ箇所で重なってもよい。つまり例えば、溝部Gに直に接する色面層U1が無色透明で溝部Gを塞ぎ、その表面部F側に、色面層U1とは別の形状の有色の色面層U2が乗ってもよい。これにより有色の色面層Uの形状が自由になる。色面層接合部55は、色面層U2を被覆部Tに接合してもよい。図7cでは色面層U2のx正方向の端部が基材部M側に接しているが、被覆部T側に接してもよい。図7dのように、複数層の色面層Uが裏面部R側にあってもよい。複数の色面層Uが間に被覆部Tを挟んでもよい。なお、色面層Uが無色透明であっても、例えば次のような特徴から、色面層Uの使用が非破壊で容易に特定可能である。1:基材部Mとの屈折率の差等により、色面層Uの影が投影される。2:開口部Oを塞ぐ部分が粘着剤を有する、あるいはマーキングフィルムに特有の微粒面の反射状態を呈する。 The grooving section 43 inverts the image 30 horizontally, performs grooving so that the characters and the like are normal images when viewed from the opposite side of the opening O, and furthermore, the color surface layer joining section 55 is formed on the opening O side. A colored surface layer U may be joined. As a result, the colored surface layer U can be seen inside the character or the like only when the observer views the decorative body Z from the front on the opposite side of the opening O, and the colored surface layer U is hidden in the groove portion G from an oblique angle. Invisible effect etc. can be obtained. Further, when the image is observed only from the opposite side of the opening O, the covering portion T may have a low transmittance or a high haze. Similarly, when observation is made only from the opening O side, a plate or the like that is dark and nearly opaque may be mounted and bonded to the opposite side of the opening O. FIG. A plurality of color layers U may overlap at the same location, like the color layers U1 and U2 in FIG. 7c. That is, for example, the color layer U1 directly in contact with the groove portion G may be colorless and transparent to block the groove portion G, and the colored layer U2 having a shape different from that of the color layer U1 may be placed on the surface portion F side. . Thereby, the shape of the colored surface layer U becomes free. The color surface layer joining portion 55 may join the color surface layer U2 to the covering portion T. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 7c, the end of the color surface layer U2 in the positive x direction is in contact with the base material portion M side, but may be in contact with the covering portion T side. As shown in FIG. 7d, a plurality of colored surface layers U may be provided on the back surface portion R side. A plurality of color surface layers U may sandwich the covering portion T therebetween. Even if the color layer U is colorless and transparent, the use of the color layer U can be easily identified non-destructively, for example, from the following characteristics. 1: The shadow of the color surface layer U is projected due to the difference in refractive index from the base material portion M and the like. 2: The portion that closes the opening O has an adhesive, or exhibits a reflective state of a fine particle surface peculiar to the marking film.

図7dのように、表面部F側と裏面部R側の両側に色面層Uがあってもよい。例えば、まず、溝加工部43が開領域状の溝部Gを、材料板20を貫通させて加工する。次に、色面層接合部55が、表面部F側に無色透明の色面層U3を、裏面部R側に無色透明の色面層U4を接合する(S55)。有色透明の色面層U5が追加されてもよい。さらに、被覆加工部46が、被覆部T1及び被覆部T2を接着剤25で両側に接合する。加工の順序は任意に変更可能である。これにより深さdGが一定となる。また、色面層U3・4により、接着剤25が溝部Gに浸入したり、気泡を含んだりする問題等が解消される。被覆部T1等は有色不透明でも有色透明でも無色透明でも基材部Mと実用上同じ色でもよい。閉領域状の溝部Gであれば、色面層接合部55は、切断された複数の材料板20の位置合わせ後にそれらを色面層U3・4で接合してもよく、内側の材料板20を省いて中空にしてもよい。また、閉領域状の溝部Gの場合、溝部Gの内側と外側とで異なる色の材料板20が組み合わされてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 7d, the colored surface layer U may be present on both the front surface portion F side and the rear surface portion R side. For example, first, the grooving part 43 pierces the material plate 20 to form an open-region-shaped groove G. As shown in FIG. Next, the color layer joining unit 55 joins the colorless and transparent color layer U3 to the front surface portion F side, and joins the colorless and transparent color layer U4 to the rear surface portion R side (S55). A colored transparent color surface layer U5 may be added. Furthermore, the coating processing unit 46 joins the coating portions T1 and T2 to both sides with the adhesive 25 . The order of processing can be changed arbitrarily. This makes the depth dG constant. In addition, the colored surface layers U3 and U4 solve problems such as the adhesive 25 entering the grooves G and including air bubbles. The covering portion T1 and the like may be colored opaque, colored transparent, colorless transparent, or practically the same color as the base portion M. If the groove portion G is a closed region, the color surface layer joining portion 55 may join the cut material plates 20 with the color surface layers U3 and U4 after the alignment of the plurality of material plates 20, and the inner material plate 20 may be omitted and may be hollow. Moreover, in the case of the closed region-shaped groove G, the material plates 20 of different colors may be combined inside and outside the groove G. As shown in FIG.

請求の範囲控。項1:表面部(F)と、裏面部(R)と、溝部(G)と、色面層(U)と、を有する装飾体(Z)であって、前記裏面部が前記表面部に対向し、前記色面層と前記溝部とが少なくとも一部で互いに接し(溝部が充填部を有する又は有さない場合・溝部が充填部と色面層との間に空気層等を有する場合・色面層が溝部側に粘着剤等を有する場合を含む。)、前記色面層が前記溝部より前記表面部の側にあり(色面層が溝部の表面部側と裏面部側の両方にある場合を含む。)、前記色面層のうち前記溝部の幅方向で最も外側の部分が、前記溝部のうち前記表面部の側であって前記幅方向に最も外側の部分に対し前記幅方向で同位置かより外側にあることを特徴とする装飾体。項2:前記色面層のうち前記幅方向で最も外側の部分の少なくとも一部が、前記表面部のうち前記幅方向で最も外側の部分より前記幅方向で内側にある、項1に記載の装飾体。項3:前記色面層が前記溝部の形状に沿う形状である、項1又は2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記色面層が前記表面部に露出しない、項1~3の何れかに記載の装飾体。項5:前記色面層の色が前記表面部又は前記裏面部の少なくとも一方の色と異なる、項1~4の何れかに記載の装飾体。項6:前記溝部の両側の側面(S)がなす前記溝部側の角度が10°以下である、項1~5の何れかに記載の装飾体。項7:前記溝部の内部が空隙である、項1~6の何れかに記載の装飾体。項8:前記溝部又は前記色面層の少なくとも一方が前記表面部又は前記裏面部の少なくとも一方を透過して観察可能である、項1~7の何れかに記載の装飾体。項9:前記溝部が形成された基材部を有し、前記表面部及び前記裏面部が前記基材部の外側の界面であり、前記溝部の側面の少なくとも一部が、前記表面部を含む面のうち前記側面に最も近い部分に下した垂線又は法線となす角度の絶対値が、好ましくはarcsin(1/n)以下・より好ましくは90-2arcsin(1/n)°以下(nは前記基材部の屈折率)である、項1~8の何れかに記載の装飾体。なお、これにより溝部が空隙である場合に全反射の効果が得られる。項10:前記溝部の側面が縞状の複数の凹凸を有し、前記複数の凹凸が前記溝部の長さ方向に平行であるか又は前記長さ方向と70°から110°の角度をなすかの少なくとも一方であり、前記複数の凹凸の高さが好ましくは1~40μm・より好ましくは2~20μm・さらに好ましくは4~10μmであるか前記側面の算術平均うねりW又は最大高さうねりWが好ましくは0.5以上・より好ましくは1以上・さらに好ましくは2以上(カットオフλc0.08mm)であるかの少なくとも一方である、項1~9の何れかに記載の装飾体。なおこの凹凸は光の反射に装飾効果を付与する。前記溝部の内部が空隙である場合、反射率が特に高いためより効果的である。項11:前記凹凸のピッチが好ましくは50~2000μm・より好ましくは100~1200μm・さらに好ましくは200~700μmである、項10に記載の装飾体。項12:前記溝部の側面の算術平均粗さRが好ましくは1以下・より好ましくは0.5以下・さらに好ましくは0.25以下である、項1~11の何れかに記載の装飾体。項13:前記溝部が前記表面部又は前記裏面部の少なくとも一方に平行でない、項1~12の何れかに記載の装飾体。項14:前記色面層のうち最も広い面が前記溝部に平行でない、項1~13の何れかに記載の装飾体。項15:前記色面層の最も広い面の少なくとも一部が前記表面部又は前記裏面部の少なくとも一方に平行である(色面層Uが凹状等の曲面である場合等を含む。色面層の曲面が前記表面部又は前記裏面部となす角度は好ましくは10°以下であり・より好ましくは5°以下であり・さらに好ましくは2°以下である。)、項1~14の何れかに記載の装飾体。項16:画像・文字・ロゴ・図形・模様の少なくとも何れかを表示する、項1~15の何れかに記載の装飾体。項17:少なくとも一部が樹脂・(メタ)アクリレート(系化合物)・PMMAの何れかによってなる、項1~16の何れかに記載の装飾体。項18:前記溝部の深さ(dG)が好ましくは2mm以上・より好ましくは4mm以上・さらに好ましくは6mm以上である、項1~17の何れかに記載の装飾体。項19:前記溝部の深さ/幅(w)が、好ましくは2以上・より好ましくは4以上・さらに好ましくは8以上・一層好ましくは10以上である、項1~18の何れかに記載の装飾体。項20:前記溝部が形成された基材部を有し、前記表面部及び前記裏面部が前記基材部の外側の界面であり、前記基材部の曲げ弾性率が好ましくは700MPa以上・より好ましくは1500MPa以上・さらに好ましくは2500MPa以上である、項1~19の何れかに記載の装飾体。項21:前記表面部及び前記裏面部が、前記装飾体の一部の最も外側の境界面である(装飾体が端面を有さず表面部及び裏面部のみを外側の露出面とする場合、及び色面層が表面部又は裏面部よりさらに外側にある場合を含む。)、項1~20の何れかに記載の装飾体。項22:前記色面層の厚さが400μm以下であるか装飾体Zの厚さの1/5以下であるかの少なくとも一方である(これにより接着性がよく段差が抑えられる。)、項1~21の何れかに記載の装飾体。項23:前記色面層がPVC・アクリル系・ポリオレフィン系の少なくとも何れかの樹脂によってなる(これにより普及して加工しやすいマーキングフィルムが使用可能となる。)、項1~22の何れかに記載の装飾体。項24:前記色面層が前記溝部との間に粘着剤を有する、項1~23の何れかに記載の装飾体。項25:前記溝部が形成された基材部を有し、前記基材部と前記色面層の少なくとも一部が化学拡散接合でない、項1~24の何れかに記載の装飾体。項26:前記溝部の少なくとも一部が前記表面部又は前記裏面部の少なくとも一方を透過して観察可能である、項1~25の何れかに記載の装飾体。材料(20)に溝部を加工する溝加工部(43)と、前記溝部に色面層を接合する色面層接合部(55)と、を具え、それらにより項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造装置(50)。項23:材料に溝部を加工する溝加工工程(S43)と、前記溝部に色面層を接合する色面層接合工程(S55)と、を具え、それらにより項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造方法。 Claim copy. Item 1: A decorative body (Z) having a surface portion (F), a back surface portion (R), a groove portion (G), and a color surface layer (U), wherein the back surface portion is attached to the surface portion The color surface layer and the groove portion are opposed to each other at least partially (when the groove portion has or does not have a filling portion/when the groove portion has an air layer or the like between the filling portion and the color surface layer/ Including the case where the color layer has an adhesive or the like on the groove side), and the color layer is on the surface side of the groove (the color layer is on both the surface side and the back side of the groove) ), the outermost portion in the width direction of the groove portion of the color surface layer is located on the side of the surface portion of the groove portion and is located in the width direction with respect to the outermost portion in the width direction. A decorative body characterized by being at the same position or further outside. Item 2: Item 1, wherein at least a portion of the outermost portion in the width direction of the color surface layer is inside the outermost portion in the width direction of the surface portion in the width direction. decoration. Item 3: The decorative body according to Item 1 or 2, wherein the color surface layer has a shape that follows the shape of the groove. Item 4: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 3, wherein the color surface layer is not exposed on the surface portion. Item 5: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 4, wherein the color of the colored surface layer is different from the color of at least one of the front surface portion and the back surface portion. Item 6: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 5, wherein the angle formed by the side surfaces (S) on both sides of the groove on the side of the groove is 10° or less. Item 7: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 6, wherein the interior of the groove is void. Item 8: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 7, wherein at least one of the groove portion and the color surface layer can be observed through at least one of the front surface portion and the back surface portion. Item 9: It has a substrate portion in which the groove portion is formed, the front surface portion and the back surface portion are interfaces on the outside of the substrate portion, and at least part of the side surface of the groove portion includes the surface portion. The absolute value of the angle formed with the perpendicular or normal to the portion of the surface closest to the side surface is preferably arcsin (1/n) or less, more preferably 90-2 arcsin (1/n)° or less (n is Item 9. The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 8, wherein the refractive index of the base material portion. It should be noted that the effect of total reflection can thus be obtained when the groove is an air gap. Item 10: The side surface of the groove has a plurality of striped unevenness, and the plurality of unevenness is parallel to the length direction of the groove or forms an angle of 70° to 110° with the length direction and the height of the plurality of unevenness is preferably 1 to 40 μm, more preferably 2 to 20 μm, and even more preferably 4 to 10 μm, or the arithmetic average waviness W a or the maximum height waviness W of the side surface Item 10. The decorative body according to any one of items 1 to 9, wherein z is preferably 0.5 or more, more preferably 1 or more, and still more preferably 2 or more (cutoff λc 0.08 mm). The unevenness imparts a decorative effect to the reflection of light. If the interior of the groove is void, the reflectance is particularly high, which is more effective. Item 11: The decorative body according to Item 10, wherein the pitch of the unevenness is preferably 50 to 2000 μm, more preferably 100 to 1200 μm, further preferably 200 to 700 μm. Item 12: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 11, wherein the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the side surface of the groove is preferably 1 or less, more preferably 0.5 or less, and still more preferably 0.25 or less. . Item 13: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 12, wherein the groove portion is not parallel to at least one of the front surface portion and the back surface portion. Item 14: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 13, wherein the widest surface of the colored surface layer is not parallel to the groove. Item 15: At least part of the widest surface of the color surface layer is parallel to at least one of the front surface portion and the back surface portion (including the case where the color surface layer U is a curved surface such as a concave shape. Color surface layer The angle formed by the curved surface with the front surface portion or the back surface portion is preferably 10° or less, more preferably 5° or less, and further preferably 2° or less.), Described decorations. Item 16: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 15, which displays at least one of images, characters, logos, figures, and patterns. Item 17: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 16, at least a part of which is made of resin, (meth)acrylate (based compound) or PMMA. Item 18: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 17, wherein the depth (dG) of the groove is preferably 2 mm or more, more preferably 4 mm or more, and even more preferably 6 mm or more. Item 19: The depth/width (w) of the groove portion is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 4 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and still more preferably 10 or more, according to any one of Items 1 to 18. decoration. Item 20: It has a substrate portion in which the groove portion is formed, the front surface portion and the back surface portion are interfaces on the outside of the substrate portion, and the bending elastic modulus of the substrate portion is preferably 700 MPa or more. Item 20. The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 19, which is preferably 1500 MPa or more, more preferably 2500 MPa or more. Item 21: The front surface portion and the back surface portion are the outermost boundary surfaces of a part of the decoration (when the decoration has no end surface and only the front surface portion and the back surface are exposed outside, and the case where the color surface layer is further outside than the front surface portion or the back surface portion.), the decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 20. Item 22: The thickness of the color surface layer is at least one of 400 μm or less and 1/5 or less of the thickness of the decorative body Z (this provides good adhesion and suppresses steps). 22. The decorative body according to any one of 1 to 21. Item 23: Any of Items 1 to 22, wherein the color surface layer is made of at least one of PVC, acrylic, and polyolefin resins (this makes it possible to use marking films that are widespread and easy to process). Described decorations. Item 24: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 23, wherein the color surface layer has an adhesive between the grooves. Item 25: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 24, which has a substrate portion in which the groove portion is formed, and at least a portion of the substrate portion and the color surface layer is not chemical diffusion bonded. Item 26: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 25, wherein at least part of the groove portion is observable through at least one of the front surface portion and the back surface portion. A groove processing part (43) for processing grooves in the material (20) and a color surface layer bonding part (55) for bonding a color surface layer to the grooves, thereby manufacturing the decorative body according to item 1. decoration manufacturing device (50). Item 23: The decorative body according to Item 1 is manufactured by comprising a groove processing step (S43) for processing grooves in the material and a color surface layer bonding step (S55) for bonding a color surface layer to the grooves. decoration manufacturing method.

以下3段落は本実施形態から派生する別の形態を記載する。これは粘着フィルム等を用いた装飾体又は表示体及びその製造装置・製造方法に関する。特開2013-72064号公報に記載のような、複数のマーキングフィルムを重ねて貼る方法が知られている。同公報は、段落0007において、貼付済の装飾用マーキングフィルムが剥がされずに、その上に新しいフィルムが重ね貼りされる場合、下の古いフィルムの形状が、新しいフィルムの表面に浮き上がるという問題を記載している。同公報は、この問題を解決するため、マーキングフィルムを薄くすることで段差を小さくするという発明を記載している。しかし、上層のフィルムが下層のフィルムの上にそのまま重ね貼りされる限り、端部に隙間が必ずでき、段差となる。その部分の上層のフィルムが他の部分に比べて大きく傾斜し、他と顕著に異なる反射等を示すことは避けられなかった。段差が低ければその程度が軽減されるとはいえ、根本的な解決にはならなかった。本実施形態は、重ね貼りされた粘着フィルム等の段差が従来技術より目立ちにくいことを課題としてもよい。2段落後に記載の態様により、重ねて貼られた粘着フィルム等の段差が目立たず、気泡が抑制されることがある。この態様では、色面層Uは溝部Gを密封してもしなくてもよく、装飾体Zが溝部Gを有しても有さなくてもよい。 The following three paragraphs describe alternatives derived from this embodiment. This relates to a decorative body or display body using an adhesive film or the like, and its manufacturing apparatus and manufacturing method. There is known a method of stacking a plurality of marking films, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-72064. In paragraph 0007, the same publication describes a problem that when a new film is overlaid on top of the pasted decorative marking film without being peeled off, the shape of the underlying old film floats on the surface of the new film. is doing. In order to solve this problem, the publication describes an invention in which the thickness of the marking film is reduced to reduce the step. However, as long as the upper layer film is overlaid on the lower layer film as it is, gaps are always formed at the ends, resulting in steps. Inevitably, the upper layer of the film in that portion is tilted more than in other portions, and exhibits a remarkably different reflection or the like from the other portions. Although the level of the problem can be reduced if the step is low, it did not solve the problem fundamentally. The present embodiment may have a problem that the difference in level caused by the adhesive films or the like laminated in layers is less conspicuous than in the prior art. According to the aspect described after the second paragraph, the difference in level of the pressure-sensitive adhesive film or the like that is repeatedly stuck may be inconspicuous, and air bubbles may be suppressed. In this embodiment, the colored surface layer U may or may not seal the groove G, and the decoration Z may or may not have the groove G.

従来の方法では、複数の色面層Uが重なる場合、例えば色面層U1〔U4〕に色面層U2〔U5〕が重なる部分と色面層U2〔U5〕のみの部分との境界部分付近で段差ができ、色面層U2〔U5〕と基材部Mとの隙間に空気が残ることが多かった。これは装飾性を低下させ好ましくない。加えて、この空気のうち特に酸素が、熱や紫外線により接触する部分の色面層Uの経年劣化を促進し、周囲とのムラを引き起こす。またこの空気が、被覆部T〔T2〕の接合時に漏れ出し、接着層A内で気泡になることがある。これらの問題を避けるため、充填加工部45ないし貼合部52が、色面層U2〔U5〕となる色面層材料22の接合前に充填接着剤26を色面層U1〔U4〕となる色面層材料22の輪郭部分に塗布してもよい。あるいは、色面層接合部55がこの部分を接合せずに浮かしておき、被覆部T〔T2〕となる材料板20の接合時にこの隙間へ接着剤25を流れ込ませてもよい。これらにより、充填接着層A0が、色面層U2〔U5〕の浮いた部分の隙間を埋める(図7c・d)。接着剤25・充填接着剤26は、例えばMMA60重量部・PMMA粉末30~60重量部・微量の過酸化ベンゾイル・フタル酸ジシクロヘキシル等を含む。充填接着層A0は接着層Aと同じ組成でもよく、異なる組成でもよい。充填接着層A0の厚さは、図7cのように、一定であるか、色面層U1の端部に近い部分では色面層U1の厚さに近く、前記端部から離れるにつれて小さくなり、0に近づくか一定になることが多い。基材部M・被覆部T・色面層U1・2等の厚さが基本的に均一とみなされ、色面層U2が各部で光を均等に反射し、視覚的に被覆部Tと平行に接合されていると判断されるならば、充填接着層A0及びその部分の接着層Aの厚さは均一であると認められる。図12bのように開口部O付近の基材部Mが盛り上がるか窪んでおり、それ以外の部分で接着層A又は充填接着層A0の厚さが一定でもよい。充填接着層A0の厚さが各部で異なり、それらの少なくとも一部の差が、色面層U1の厚さに等しくてもよい。膜厚は各部の断面から段落0016と同様に測定されてもよく、依頼試験でもよい。なお、充填接着層A0の厚さは、充填接着層A0に近い表面部F又は裏面部Rに垂直な方向の長さである。充填接着層A0の厚さが0の部分では、色面層U2の粘着剤Adが基材部Mに直接接合している。なお図7b・dは粘着剤Adの図示を省略しているが、各色面層Uはそれぞれの粘着剤Adを含むことがある。色面層Uは例えば、着色された(顔料等が練り込まれた)軟質樹脂等の樹脂層と、(メタ)アクリレート系等の粘着剤Adの2層よりなる。色面層Uの色はムラなく一定でもよい。粘着剤Adには、基材部Mと化学拡散接合しないものがある。色面層Uや粘着剤Adは基材部Mと化学拡散接合してもよい。充填接着層A0の厚さの変化がなだらかなほど、段差が目立たないのでよい。充填接着層A0において、最大の厚さをtA0、厚さが最大の部分(U4の端部との境界等)から最小の部分までの最短距離をdA0とすると、dA0/tA0は3以上が好ましく、5以上がより好ましく、10以上がさらに好ましく、15以上が一層好ましい。これらの範囲は、充填接着層A0の厚さが一定の場合及び前記厚さが色面層U1〔U4〕の端部に接する部分よりそこから離れた部分の方が大きい場合を含む。dA0は充填接着層A0の粘度の調整や色面層材料22を支える治具により拡大可能である。表面部Fないし裏面部Rの片側につき3層以上の色面層Uが重なってもよい。上層の色面層Uの接合前に下層の色面層Uの重複部分近辺に充填接着剤26が塗布され、その後に上層の色面層Uが接合され、充填接着剤26の硬化前に接着剤25によって被覆部Tが接合されてもよい。充填接着剤26が接着剤25と同じ組成の場合、これにより自然に一体化する。各層の重なり順は任意に変更可能である。図7cの色面部U2と基材部Mの間の充填接着層A0の一部(例えば色面部U1の端部付近)にわずかに気泡が混入してもよい。その場合でも、被覆部Tがあれば、色面部U2が表面部Fに略平行になるので、継ぎ目部分の段差が目立たずにすむ。また、図7dにおいて、色面層U3及び色面層U4とが重なる部分と何れかのみの部分の境界部分を考えると、接着層A及び基材部Mによって、境界部分の段差が解消されている。貼合部52は、複数の色面層Uの間の層を増やすことで、3層・4層といった多層の色面層Uを同じ位置で重ねることができる。このように、複数の色面層Uが一部で互いに重なっていて、なおかつそれらが間に、表面部Fに平行な面において前記複数の色面層Uの範囲を合わせた範囲より範囲が広い層/粘着剤Adを含まない層/少なくとも一部が透過性を有する(少なくとも一部の全光線透過率が好ましくは70%以上・より好ましくは80%以上の)層/厚さが好ましくは0.4mm以上・より好ましくは0.8mm以上・さらに好ましくは1.3mm以上・一層好ましくは1.7mm以上・最も好ましくは2.3mm以上の層/曲げ弾性率が好ましくは700MPa以上・より好ましくは1500MPa以上の層を挟む場合も、次段落の請求の範囲に含まれる。これにより、複数の色面層Uが直接接することなく互いに重なる。そのため、複数の色面層Uが重なる部分に段差が発生しない。また図7cでは、複数の色面層Uが重なることで、色面層Uがない部分の被覆部Tと基材部Mとの間隔が大きくなる。そのため、接着層Aが厚くなり、作業性や仕上がりが低下することがある。一方、複数の色面層Uの間に上記のような間の層が挟まると、接着層Aの厚さが色面層U一層分にとどまるので、接合が容易である。貼合部52は、間の層を増やすことで、3層・4層といった多層の色面層Uを同じ位置で重ねることができる。複数の色面層Uが間の層を挟んで重なる場合、粘着剤つきのマーキングフィルムの境界部分の仕上がりが向上する。また、複数の色面層Uの間の層が色の特徴を有する場合、それぞれの色面層Uの見え方が異なるという効果が得られる。 In the conventional method, when a plurality of color layers U overlap, for example, near the boundary between the portion where the color layer U2 [U5] overlaps the color layer U1 [U4] and the portion where only the color layer U2 [U5] overlaps , and air often remained in the gap between the color surface layer U2 [U5] and the base material portion M. This is not preferable because it reduces decorativeness. In addition, oxygen in the air in particular accelerates aging deterioration of the color surface layer U in the portion that comes into contact with heat and ultraviolet rays, causing unevenness with the surroundings. Also, this air may leak out and form air bubbles in the adhesive layer A when the covering portion T[T2] is joined. In order to avoid these problems, the filling processing unit 45 or the bonding unit 52 applies the filling adhesive 26 to the color layer U1 [U4] before joining the color layer material 22 to become the color layer U2 [U5]. It may be applied to the contour portion of the color surface layer material 22 . Alternatively, the color surface layer joining portion 55 may float this portion without joining, and the adhesive 25 may flow into this gap when joining the material plate 20 serving as the covering portion T[T2]. As a result, the filling adhesive layer A0 fills the gaps in the floating portions of the color layer U2 [U5] (FIGS. 7c and 7d). The adhesive 25 and the filler adhesive 26 contain, for example, 60 parts by weight of MMA, 30 to 60 parts by weight of PMMA powder, a small amount of benzoyl peroxide, dicyclohexyl phthalate, and the like. The filling adhesive layer A0 may have the same composition as the adhesive layer A, or may have a different composition. The thickness of the filling adhesive layer A0 is constant or close to the thickness of the color layer U1 near the edge of the color layer U1 and decreases away from the edge, as shown in FIG. 7c, It often approaches 0 or becomes constant. The thickness of the base material portion M, the coating portion T, the color layers U1 and U2, etc. is basically uniform, and the color layer U2 reflects light evenly at each portion, and is visually parallel to the coating portion T. , it is recognized that the thickness of the filling adhesive layer A0 and the adhesive layer A in that portion is uniform. As shown in FIG. 12b, the base material portion M near the opening O may be raised or depressed, and the thickness of the adhesive layer A or the filling adhesive layer A0 may be constant in other portions. The thickness of the filling adhesive layer A0 may be different in each part, and the difference of at least a part thereof may be equal to the thickness of the color surface layer U1. The film thickness may be measured from the cross section of each part in the same manner as in paragraph 0016, or may be a request test. The thickness of the filling adhesive layer A0 is the length in the direction perpendicular to the front surface portion F or the back surface portion R near the filling adhesive layer A0. The adhesive Ad of the color surface layer U2 is directly bonded to the base material portion M at the portion where the thickness of the filling adhesive layer A0 is 0. Although FIGS. 7b and 7d omit illustration of the adhesive Ad, each color surface layer U may contain the respective adhesive Ad. The color surface layer U is composed of two layers, for example, a resin layer such as a colored soft resin (in which a pigment or the like is kneaded) and a (meth)acrylate adhesive Ad. The color of the color surface layer U may be even and constant. Some pressure-sensitive adhesives Ad do not bond to the base material portion M by chemical diffusion bonding. The color surface layer U and the adhesive Ad may be bonded to the base material portion M by chemical diffusion bonding. The smoother the change in the thickness of the filling adhesive layer A0, the less conspicuous the step is. In the filling adhesive layer A0, tA0 is the maximum thickness, and dA0 is the shortest distance from the portion with the maximum thickness (such as the boundary with the edge of U4) to the portion with the minimum thickness, where dA0/tA0 is preferably 3 or more. , is more preferably 5 or more, more preferably 10 or more, and even more preferably 15 or more. These ranges include the case where the thickness of the filling adhesive layer A0 is constant and the case where the thickness is greater in the portion away from the edge of the color surface layer U1 [U4] than in the portion in contact therewith. dA0 can be expanded by adjusting the viscosity of the filling adhesive layer A0 and by a jig supporting the color surface layer material 22. FIG. Three or more color layers U may overlap on one side of the front surface portion F or the back surface portion R. A filling adhesive 26 is applied to the vicinity of the overlapping portion of the lower color surface layer U before joining the upper color surface layer U, and then the upper color surface layer U is joined and adhered before the filling adhesive 26 is cured. The covering portion T may be joined by the agent 25 . If the filler adhesive 26 is of the same composition as the adhesive 25, this results in natural integration. The stacking order of each layer can be changed arbitrarily. Air bubbles may be slightly mixed in a portion of the filling adhesive layer A0 between the color surface portion U2 and the base material portion M in FIG. 7c (for example, near the end portion of the color surface portion U1). Even in such a case, if there is the covering portion T, the colored surface portion U2 is substantially parallel to the surface portion F, so that the step at the seam portion is inconspicuous. Also, in FIG. 7d, considering the boundary portion between the portion where the color layer U3 and the color layer U4 overlap and the portion where only one of them overlaps, the step at the boundary portion is eliminated by the adhesive layer A and the base material portion M. there is By increasing the number of layers between a plurality of color layers U, the pasting section 52 can stack multiple color layers U, such as three layers and four layers, at the same position. In this way, the plurality of color layers U partially overlap each other, and the range between them is wider than the combined range of the plurality of color layers U in a plane parallel to the surface portion F. Layer/Layer containing no adhesive Ad/At least part of which is transparent (at least part of which has a total light transmittance of preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more)/Thickness is preferably 0 0.4 mm or more, more preferably 0.8 mm or more, more preferably 1.3 mm or more, even more preferably 1.7 mm or more, most preferably 2.3 mm or more/flexural modulus of preferably 700 MPa or more, more preferably The case of sandwiching a layer of 1500 MPa or more is also included in the scope of claims in the next paragraph. As a result, the plurality of color surface layers U overlap each other without being in direct contact with each other. Therefore, a step does not occur in a portion where a plurality of color plane layers U are overlapped. Further, in FIG. 7c, by overlapping a plurality of color layers U, the distance between the covering portion T and the base portion M where the color layer U is absent increases. As a result, the adhesive layer A becomes thicker, and the workability and finish may deteriorate. On the other hand, if the above-described intermediate layer is sandwiched between a plurality of color layers U, the thickness of the adhesive layer A will be the same as the thickness of one color layer U, which facilitates bonding. By increasing the number of layers between them, the pasting section 52 can stack multiple color layers U, such as three layers and four layers, at the same position. When a plurality of color layers U are superimposed with intervening layers therebetween, the finish of the boundary portion of the adhesive-attached marking film is improved. In addition, when the layers between the plurality of color layers U have color characteristics, an effect is obtained in which each color layer U looks different.

請求の範囲控。項1:基材部(M)と、複数の色面層(U)と、が層状に重なる装飾体(Z)であって、前記複数の色面層のうち2以上の色面層及び前記基材部が重なる部分と前記2以上の色面層のうち1以上の色面層(U1・U4)を含まない部分との境界部分から前記含まない部分の少なくとも一部にかけての部分の少なくとも一部において、前記1以上の色面層の前記境界部分の端部に接する充填接着層(A0・A)を有することを特徴とする装飾体(項1:基材部(M)と、前記基材部に接合された複数の上面部(U)と、を有する装飾体(Z)であって、前記複数の上面部のうち2以上の上面部及び前記基材部が層状に重なる部分と前記2以上の上面部のうち前記基材部から最も離れた上面部(U2)を除く1以上の上面部(U1)を含まない部分との境界部分から前記含まない部分の少なくとも一部にかけての部分において、前記2以上の上面部のうち前記1以上の上面部以外の上面部(U2)と前記基材部との間に充填接着層(A0)を有することを特徴とする装飾体)。項2:前記充填接着層の少なくとも一部の厚さが一定である、項1に記載の装飾体。項3:前記装飾体が前記2以上の色面層に対する前記基材部の反対側に被覆部(T)を有し、前記被覆部が透過性を有し、前記被覆部と前記基材部との間に接着層(A)を有する、項1又は2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記充填接着層及び前記接着層が同一の組成である、項3に記載の装飾体。項5:前記充填接着層と前記基材部とが化学拡散接合であるか、前記充填接着層と前記基材部とが強制的に分離された場合、前記分離された面の算術平均粗さRが1μm以上であるかの少なくとも一方である、項1~4の何れかに記載の装飾体。項6:前記複数の色面層の少なくとも一部が粘着剤(Ad)を含む、項1~5の何れかに記載の装飾体。項7:前記粘着剤と前記基材部とが化学拡散接合でない、項6に記載の装飾体。項8:前記粘着剤の厚さが前記充填接着層の最大の厚さの好ましくは1/2以下・より好ましくは1/3以下である、項7に記載の装飾体。項9:前記充填接着層が(メタ)アクリレート(変性アクリレート・変性メタクリレート・変性ジメタクリレート及びそれらの化合物を含む。)を含む、項1~8の何れかに記載の装飾体。項10:前記充填接着層における(メタ)アクリレートの比率が、好ましくは50%以上・より好ましくは70%以上・さらに好ましくは90%以上である、項9に記載の装飾体。項11:前記基材部が(メタ)アクリレート又はPMMAを含む、項1~10の何れかに記載の装飾体。項12:前記複数の色面層の色が互いに異なる、項1~11の何れかに記載の装飾体。項13:前記複数の色面層の少なくとも1つの色が前記基材部の色と異なる、項1~12の何れかに記載の装飾体。項14:前記基材部又は前記複数の色面層の少なくとも一部が透過性を有する、項1~13の何れかに記載の装飾体。項15:画像・文字・ロゴ・図形・模様の少なくとも何れかを表示する、項1~14の何れかに記載の装飾体。項16:前記複数の色面層と前記基材部との間の部分が空気を含まない、項1~15の何れかに記載の装飾体。項17:前記複数の色面層の少なくとも一部が粘着剤(Ad)を含む、項1~16の何れかに記載の装飾体。項18:材料に複数の色面層を接合する貼合部(52ないし色面層接合部55)と、前記材料と前記複数の色面層の一部との間に充填接着層を充填する充填加工部(45)とを有し、それらにより項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造装置。項19:材料に複数の色面層を接合する貼合工程(S52ないし色面層接合工程S55)と、前記材料と前記複数の色面層の一部との間に充填接着層を充填する充填加工工程(S45)とを有し、それらにより項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造方法。 Claim copy. Item 1: A decorative body (Z) in which a substrate portion (M) and a plurality of color layers (U) are layered, wherein two or more color layers among the plurality of color layers and the At least one part from the boundary part between the part where the base material part overlaps and the part that does not include one or more color layers (U1 and U4) out of the two or more color layers to at least a part of the part that does not include the color layer In the part, a decorative body characterized by having a filling adhesive layer (A0 A) in contact with the end of the boundary part of the one or more color surface layers (Item 1: base part (M) and the base A decorative body (Z) having a plurality of upper surface portions (U) joined to a material portion, wherein two or more upper surface portions among the plurality of upper surface portions and the base portion overlap in a layered manner and the A portion from a boundary portion with a portion not including one or more upper surface portions (U1) excluding the upper surface portion (U2) farthest from the base portion to at least a part of the portion not including the above two or more upper surface portions 3), characterized in that it has a filling adhesive layer (A0) between the base material portion and an upper surface portion (U2) other than the one or more upper surface portions out of the two or more upper surface portions). Item 2: The decorative body according to Item 1, wherein at least a portion of the filling adhesive layer has a constant thickness. Item 3: The decorative body has a covering portion (T) on the side opposite to the base portion with respect to the two or more color layers, the covering portion has transparency, and the covering portion and the base portion 3. The decorative body according to item 1 or 2, which has an adhesive layer (A) between. Item 4: The decoration according to Item 3, wherein the filling adhesive layer and the adhesive layer have the same composition. Item 5: When the filling adhesive layer and the base material part are chemical diffusion bonded or the filling adhesive layer and the base material part are forcibly separated, the arithmetic mean roughness of the separated surface Item 5. The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 4, wherein Ra is at least one of 1 μm or more. Item 6: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 5, wherein at least part of the plurality of color layers contains an adhesive (Ad). Item 7: The decoration according to Item 6, wherein the pressure-sensitive adhesive and the base material are not chemical diffusion bonded. Item 8: The decorative body according to Item 7, wherein the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive is preferably 1/2 or less, more preferably 1/3 or less of the maximum thickness of the filling adhesive layer. Item 9: The decoration according to any one of Items 1 to 8, wherein the filling adhesive layer contains (meth)acrylate (including modified acrylate, modified methacrylate, modified dimethacrylate, and compounds thereof). Item 10: The decorative body according to Item 9, wherein the ratio of (meth)acrylate in the filling adhesive layer is preferably 50% or more, more preferably 70% or more, and still more preferably 90% or more. Item 11: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 10, wherein the base material contains (meth)acrylate or PMMA. Item 12: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 11, wherein the plurality of color surface layers have different colors. Item 13: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 12, wherein the color of at least one of the plurality of colored surface layers is different from the color of the base material. Item 14: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 13, wherein at least part of the base material portion or the plurality of color layers has transparency. Item 15: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 14, which displays at least one of images, characters, logos, figures, and patterns. Item 16: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 15, wherein a portion between the plurality of colored surface layers and the base material does not contain air. Item 17: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 16, wherein at least part of the plurality of color layers contains an adhesive (Ad). Item 18: A filling adhesive layer is filled between the bonding portion (52 to color layer bonding portion 55) for bonding a plurality of color layers to a material and the material and a part of the plurality of color layers. and a filling processing unit (45) for manufacturing the decoration according to item 1 therewith. Item 19: A bonding step (S52 to color layer bonding step S55) of bonding a plurality of color layers to a material, and filling a filling adhesive layer between the material and a part of the plurality of color layers. Item 1. A decoration manufacturing method comprising a filling step (S45), and manufacturing the decoration according to item 1 therewith.

《第4の実施形態》
特許文献Aは、明細書段落0021・0041等において、溝部Gの先端部分が凹凸状であり、溝部Gの深さが一定でない造形物3を記載している。かかる加工結果は、レーザ加工に付随して発生することが多い。特に、溝部の始点や終点でレーザ出力の変動が大きいため、この凹凸が顕著となることが多い。また、特許文献Aは記載していないが、溝部が複雑な形状であると、角の部分や曲率の大きい曲線部分で大きな凹凸が発生しがちである。この凹凸は、特に立体文字において、立体的な装飾効果を低下させるため、排除又は抑制されたほうがよい。しかし、特許文献Aは、段落0041において「溝部Gの一部に凹凸があればさらに細かく光って見える。」と記載し、これを解決すべき課題とするのではなく、むしろ積極的な装飾効果を呈する特徴と認めている。それゆえ、特許文献Aは、この問題に対する解決手段も記載していない。
<<Fourth Embodiment>>
Patent Document A describes, in paragraphs 0021 and 0041 of the specification, etc., a modeled object 3 in which the tip portion of the groove G is uneven and the depth of the groove G is not constant. Such processing results often occur accompanying laser processing. In particular, since the laser output fluctuates greatly at the start and end points of the groove, the irregularities are often conspicuous. Moreover, although not described in Patent Document A, if the groove has a complicated shape, large irregularities tend to occur at corners and curved portions with large curvatures. Especially in three-dimensional characters, the unevenness reduces the three-dimensional decorative effect, so it is better to eliminate or suppress it. However, Patent Document A states in paragraph 0041 that "if there is unevenness in a part of the groove portion G, it will appear to shine more finely." It is recognized as a feature that presents Patent Document A therefore does not describe a solution to this problem either.

本実施形態は、上記等の問題の解決を課題としてもよい。すなわちその課題とは、例えば、透過性を有する基材部に形成された溝部が一定の深さに見える装飾体、並びにその装飾体を製造する装飾体製造装置及び装飾体製造方法の提供である。第4の実施形態に係る装飾体製造装置は、装飾体製造装置40又は50と少なくとも一部が同じ構成を有してもよい。第4の実施形態に係る装飾体製造方法は、第1又は第3の実施形態に係る装飾体製造方法と少なくとも一部が同じ工程を有してもよい。 The present embodiment may be aimed at solving the above problems. That is, the problem is, for example, to provide a decorative body in which grooves formed in a transparent base material can be seen at a certain depth, and a decorative body manufacturing apparatus and a decorative body manufacturing method for manufacturing the decorative body. . The decoration manufacturing apparatus according to the fourth embodiment may have at least a part of the same configuration as the decoration manufacturing apparatus 40 or 50 . The decoration manufacturing method according to the fourth embodiment may have at least a part of the same steps as the decoration manufacturing method according to the first or third embodiment.

貼合部52は複数の材料板20を取得してもよい(S52)。そのうちの1つである上層材料板201は透過性を有する。それとは別の下層材料板202は上層材料板201より透過性が低くてもよく、全光線透過率が低いか、又はヘーズが多くてもよい。下層材料板202は例えば白・乳半・フロスト・ラメや模様入り・不透明又は透明な黒・青・緑等でもよい。下層材料板202は、上層材料板201との接合の容易さから、上層材料板201と同一・同種・類似の材質でもよいが、金属板等の異なる材質でもよい。下層材料板202の少なくとも一部の明度が高いほど、溝部Gからの光を受けて明るく輝く。その明度はマンセル表色系(D65)においてv6以上・v7以上・v8以上の何れかでもよい。下層材料板202の厚さは、上層材料板201の厚さより小さくてもよく、1~5mmでもよく、1.5~3mmでもよい。貼合部52は、上層材料板201及び下層材料板202を取得して既知の接着剤25等で接合してもよく、供給元により接合済の材料板20を取得してもよい。 The bonding unit 52 may acquire a plurality of material plates 20 (S52). One of them, the upper layer material plate 201, has transparency. Another lower material plate 202 may be less transmissive than the upper material plate 201, and may have a lower total light transmittance or a higher haze. The lower layer material plate 202 may be, for example, white, semi-milky, frosted, glitter, patterned, opaque or transparent black, blue, green, or the like. The lower layer material plate 202 may be made of the same, the same kind, or similar material as the upper layer material plate 201 because of ease of joining with the upper layer material plate 201, but may be made of a different material such as a metal plate. The higher the brightness of at least a portion of the lower layer material plate 202, the brighter the light from the groove G shines. The brightness may be v6 or more, v7 or more, or v8 or more in the Munsell color system (D65). The thickness of the lower layer material plate 202 may be smaller than the thickness of the upper layer material plate 201, and may be 1 to 5 mm or 1.5 to 3 mm. The bonding unit 52 may obtain the upper layer material plate 201 and the lower layer material plate 202 and bond them with a known adhesive 25 or the like, or may obtain the bonded material plate 20 from a supplier.

図8は溝部Gの長さ方向に平行な断面図である。溝加工部43は、上記接合後の材料板20に、レーザ加工部431によって溝部Gを形成してもよい(S43・S431)。レーザ加工部431は、レーザ出力・加工速度等の調整により、溝部Gの各部の深さdGの平均・又は最小の深さを、上層材料板201の厚さと同等かそれ以上にしてもよい。超短パルスレーザー等による微細加工であっても、溝部Gの先端部分は、後述のような深さに対する比率の凹凸を示すことが多いので、本実施形態は有効である。溝加工部43は機械加工等を用いてもよい。本実施形態では、充填加工部45が充填加工を行っても行わなくてもよく、被覆部Tはあってもなくてもよい。 8 is a cross-sectional view parallel to the length direction of the groove G. FIG. The groove processing unit 43 may form grooves G in the material plate 20 after the bonding by the laser processing unit 431 (S43 and S431). The laser processing unit 431 may adjust the laser output, processing speed, etc. so that the average or minimum depth dG of each portion of the groove G is equal to or greater than the thickness of the upper layer material plate 201 . This embodiment is effective because even in microfabrication using an ultrashort pulse laser or the like, the tip portion of the groove portion G often exhibits unevenness with a ratio to the depth as described later. The grooved portion 43 may be formed by machining or the like. In this embodiment, the filling section 45 may or may not perform the filling process, and the covering section T may or may not be present.

製造後の装飾体Zは、互いに透過性の異なる複数の層を含む。溝部Gのうち、先端の凹凸状部分の全部又は大部分は、図8bのように、透過性が低い基材下層M2の範囲に収まるので隠れている。観察者には、溝部Gのうち透過性が高い基材上層M1(上層材料板201)を貫通する、深さが揃った部分のみが見える。基材下層M2(下層材料板202)の全光線透過率が好ましくは40%以下・より好ましくは30%以下・さらに好ましくは20%以下、ヘーズが好ましくは10%以上・より好ましくは20%以上・さらに好ましくは40%以上、の少なくとも一方でもよい(2mm厚換算時)。ここで、視線角度・照明の明るさ・色温度・照明の方向と溝部Gの長さ方向と視線の方向との関係・観察者の視力・等の観察時の条件次第で、本実施形態の課題が解決される度合が異なる。ところが、上記全光線透過率が低いほど、より広い上記条件の範囲内で、本実施形態の課題が解決される。つまり例えば、観察者が装飾体Zの表面部Fを視線角度75°で特定の方向から見るとする。この場合に、基材下層M2の全光線透過率が50%なら基材下層M2部分の溝部Gが見えるが、上記全光線透過率が30%では、臨界角の作用等により上記部分の溝部Gが隠れる、ということが起こりうる。基材下層M2が、全光線透過率10%以下・不透明であれば、上記条件にかかわらず、常に上記部分の溝部Gが見えない。溝部Gの凹凸状部分は、一部が基材上層M1に現れてもよいが、その割合は少ないほどよい。溝部Gの総延長のうち基材上層M1が深さ方向の凹凸を有する部分の長さの割合は、30%以下が好ましく、20%以下がより好ましく、10%以下がさらに好ましく、5%以下が一層好ましい。また、前記凹凸を有する部分のうち基材上層M1の厚さに占める凹凸の深さの割合は、30%以下が好ましく、20%以下がより好ましく、10%以下がさらに好ましい。何れも下限は0%である。また、溝部Gの深さ方向の凹凸の深さ(又は凹凸のうち基材下層M2内の部分の深さ)が、1mm以上・2mm以上・3mm以上、又は幅w以上・wの2倍以上・5倍以上・10倍以上、あるいは深さdGの1/10以上・1/8以上・1/6以上の場合、本実施形態が特に大きな効果を示す。その効果は凹凸が大きいほど大きい。凹凸の上限は深さdG又はその1/2である。凹凸の深さは前述のレーザ測定機等で測定可能である。また、この凹凸のピッチは、レーザ加工機のパルスに起因するものであるから、COレーザによる場合、段落0030の記載と同様に、好ましくは50~2000μm・より好ましくは100~1200μm・さらに好ましくは200~700μmである。 The decorative body Z after manufacture includes a plurality of layers with mutually different transmittances. All or most of the uneven portion at the tip of the groove portion G is hidden because it falls within the range of the base material lower layer M2 having low permeability, as shown in FIG. 8b. The observer can see only the portion of the groove G that penetrates the base material upper layer M1 (upper layer material plate 201) with high permeability and has a uniform depth. The total light transmittance of the substrate lower layer M2 (lower layer material plate 202) is preferably 40% or less, more preferably 30% or less, further preferably 20% or less, and the haze is preferably 10% or more, more preferably 20% or more. - More preferably, at least one of 40% or more may be used (when converted to a thickness of 2 mm). Here, depending on the conditions at the time of observation such as the angle of sight, the brightness of the illumination, the color temperature, the direction of the illumination, the length direction of the groove portion G, and the direction of the sight, the visual acuity of the observer, etc. The degree to which problems are resolved varies. However, as the total light transmittance is lower, the problem of the present embodiment can be solved within a wider range of the above conditions. That is, for example, suppose that the observer views the surface portion F of the decoration Z from a specific direction at a line-of-sight angle of 75°. In this case, if the total light transmittance of the substrate lower layer M2 is 50%, the groove portion G in the substrate lower layer M2 portion can be seen. is hidden. If the base material lower layer M2 has a total light transmittance of 10% or less and is opaque, the groove G of the above portion is always invisible regardless of the above conditions. A part of the uneven portion of the groove portion G may appear in the base material upper layer M1, but the smaller the ratio, the better. The ratio of the length of the portion of the base material upper layer M1 having unevenness in the depth direction to the total extension of the groove portion G is preferably 30% or less, more preferably 20% or less, further preferably 10% or less, and 5% or less. is more preferred. In addition, the ratio of the depth of the unevenness to the thickness of the base upper layer M1 in the portion having the unevenness is preferably 30% or less, more preferably 20% or less, and even more preferably 10% or less. In both cases, the lower limit is 0%. In addition, the depth of the unevenness in the depth direction of the groove portion G (or the depth of the portion of the unevenness in the base material lower layer M2) is 1 mm or more, 2 mm or more, or 3 mm or more, or the width is w or more, and is twice or more of w. In the case of 5 times or more, 10 times or more, or 1/10 or more, 1/8 or more, or 1/6 or more of the depth dG, the present embodiment exhibits a particularly large effect. The greater the unevenness, the greater the effect. The upper limit of the unevenness is the depth dG or its half. The depth of the unevenness can be measured by the above-mentioned laser measuring machine or the like. In addition, since the pitch of the unevenness is caused by the pulse of the laser processing machine, when using a CO 2 laser, it is preferably 50 to 2000 μm, more preferably 100 to 1200 μm, more preferably 100 to 1200 μm, as described in paragraph 0030. is 200-700 μm.

施工後に裏面部Rが露出する場合、溝部Gが裏面部Rを貫通していると、屋外等においてその穴から浸水して破損の原因となるので、貫通しないほうがよい。ただし、貫通部分が円状であり、そのサイズがφ0.5mm以下・0.3mm以下・0.1mm以下であれば、浸水が少ないので、許容範囲内である。また、溝部Gのこのように細い部分では、充填加工時に、充填材料21が突起状に深い部分の先端まで届かないことがある。かかる突起状部分の先端は、空気を残すため、光を全反射して目立つ。よって、前記のφの突起状部分は、深い方が基材下層M2に隠れるので好都合である。溝加工部43は、充填時の空気の残留を避けるため、図8bの一部のように突起状部分を裏面部Rまで貫通させてもよい。被覆加工部46は、裏面部R側にさらに別の材料板20を接合する等により、下層材料板202に開いた貫通孔を密封してもよい。一方、装飾体Zが壁等に直接接合される場合、接着剤が貫通孔を塞げば浸水等の問題はない。のみならず、貫通孔に浸透した接着剤の投錨効果により接着力が向上するので、貫通孔があってもよい。 When the back surface portion R is exposed after construction, if the groove portion G penetrates the back surface portion R, water may enter from the hole outdoors and cause damage, so it is better not to penetrate. However, if the penetrating portion is circular and has a size of φ0.5 mm or less, 0.3 mm or less, or 0.1 mm or less, the infiltration of water is small, so it is within the allowable range. In addition, in such a narrow portion of the groove G, the filling material 21 may not reach the tip of the deep portion in a projecting manner during the filling process. Since the tip of such a protruding portion leaves air, it is conspicuous due to total reflection of light. Therefore, the protruding portion of φ is conveniently hidden in the base material lower layer M2 at the deeper end. In order to prevent air from remaining during filling, the grooved portion 43 may have a protruding portion penetrating to the back surface portion R as shown in a part of FIG. 8b. The covering processing part 46 may seal the through-hole opened in the lower layer material plate 202 by bonding another material plate 20 to the rear surface portion R side. On the other hand, when the decorative body Z is directly bonded to a wall or the like, there is no problem such as water infiltration as long as the adhesive blocks the through holes. In addition, since the adhesive strength is improved by the anchoring effect of the adhesive that permeates the through holes, the through holes may be provided.

請求の範囲控。項1:複数の層と、溝部(G)と、を有する装飾体(Z)であって、前記複数の層が透過性を有する層(M1)及び前記透過性を有する層より透過性が低い層(M2)を含み、前記透過性を有する層が前記溝部を有し、前記溝部の少なくとも一部が前記透過性が低い層に連続し、前記透過性が低い層に連続する溝部の少なくとも一部が、前記透過性が低い層において深さ方向の凹凸を有することを特徴とする装飾体。項2:前記溝部の両側の側面(S)がなす前記溝部側の角度が10°以下である、項1に記載の装飾体。項3:前記溝部の内部が空隙である、項1又は2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記溝部の側面が縞状の複数の凹凸を有し、前記複数の凹凸が前記溝部の長さ方向に平行であるか又は前記長さ方向と70°から110°の角度をなすかの少なくとも一方であり、前記複数の凹凸の高さが好ましくは1~40μm・より好ましくは2~20μm・さらに好ましくは4~10μmであるか前記側面の算術平均うねりW又は最大高さうねりWが好ましくは0.5以上・より好ましくは1以上・さらに好ましくは2以上(カットオフλc0.08mm)であるかの少なくとも一方である、項1~3の何れかに記載の装飾体。なおこの凹凸は、溝部Gが反射する光に特徴的なパターンを与え、この反射パターンが透過性の低い層に映り、加飾性を高める。前記溝部の内部が空隙である場合、反射率が特に高いためより効果的である。項5:前記凹凸のピッチが好ましくは50~2000μm・より好ましくは100~1200μm・さらに好ましくは200~700μmである、項4に記載の装飾体。項6:前記溝部の側面の算術平均粗さRが好ましくは1以下・より好ましくは0.5以下・さらに好ましくは0.25以下である、項1~5の何れかに記載の装飾体。項7:画像・文字・ロゴ・図形・模様の少なくとも何れかを表示する、項1~6の何れかに記載の装飾体。項8:樹脂・(メタ)アクリレート(系化合物)・PMMAの何れかを含む、項1~7の何れかに記載の装飾体。項9:前記溝部の深さ(dG)が好ましくは2mm以上・より好ましくは4mm以上・さらに好ましくは6mm以上である、項1~8の何れかに記載の装飾体。項10:前記溝部の深さ/幅(w)が、好ましくは2以上・より好ましくは4以上・さらに好ましくは8以上・一層好ましくは10以上である、項1~9の何れかに記載の装飾体。項11:前記溝部の側面(S)の少なくとも一部が前記装飾体の外側に露出し前記溝部が観察される面である表面部(F)を含む面のうち前記側面に最も近い部分に下した垂線又は法線となす角度の絶対値が、好ましくはarcsin(1/n)以下・より好ましくは90-2arcsin(1/n)°以下(nは前記透過性を有する層の屈折率)である、項1~10の何れかに記載の装飾体。項12:前記透過性を有する層及び前記透過性が低い層が互いに接合された、項1~11の何れかに記載の装飾体。項13:前記透過性を有する層の全光線透過率が70%以上である、項1~12の何れかに記載の装飾体。項14:前記透過性が低い層の少なくとも一部が不透明である、項1~13の何れかに記載の装飾体。項15:前記透過性が低い層の少なくとも一部の明度がマンセル表色系(D65、反射光測定)においてv6以上である、項1~14の何れかに記載の装飾体。項16:複数の材料(201・202)を貼り合わせる貼合部(52)と、溝加工部(43)と、を具え、項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造装置(50)。項17:複数の材料(201・202)を貼り合わせる貼合工程(S52)と、溝加工工程(S43)と、を具え、項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造方法。 Claim copy. Item 1: A decorative body (Z) having a plurality of layers and a groove (G), wherein the plurality of layers has lower permeability than the layer (M1) having permeability and the layer having permeability The layer (M2) includes a layer (M2), wherein the permeable layer has the groove, at least a part of the groove is continuous with the low-permeability layer, and at least one of the grooves is continuous with the low-permeability layer. The decorative body, wherein the portion has unevenness in the depth direction in the layer with low permeability. Item 2: The decorative body according to Item 1, wherein an angle formed by side surfaces (S) on both sides of the groove toward the groove is 10° or less. Item 3: The decorative body according to Item 1 or 2, wherein the interior of the groove is void. Item 4: The side surface of the groove has a plurality of striped unevenness, and the plurality of unevenness is parallel to the length direction of the groove or forms an angle of 70° to 110° with the length direction and the height of the plurality of unevenness is preferably 1 to 40 μm, more preferably 2 to 20 μm, and even more preferably 4 to 10 μm, or the arithmetic average waviness W a or the maximum height waviness W of the side surface Item 4. The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 3, wherein z is preferably 0.5 or more, more preferably 1 or more, and still more preferably 2 or more (cutoff λc 0.08 mm). The unevenness gives a characteristic pattern to the light reflected by the grooves G, and this reflection pattern is reflected in the layer with low transmittance to enhance the decorativeness. If the interior of the groove is void, the reflectance is particularly high, which is more effective. Item 5: The decorative body according to Item 4, wherein the pitch of the unevenness is preferably 50 to 2000 μm, more preferably 100 to 1200 μm, further preferably 200 to 700 μm. Item 6: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 5, wherein the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the side surface of the groove is preferably 1 or less, more preferably 0.5 or less, and still more preferably 0.25 or less. . Item 7: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 6, which displays at least one of images, characters, logos, figures, and patterns. Item 8: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 7, containing any one of resin, (meth)acrylate (based compound), and PMMA. Item 9: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 8, wherein the depth (dG) of the groove is preferably 2 mm or more, more preferably 4 mm or more, and still more preferably 6 mm or more. Item 10: The depth/width (w) of the groove is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 4 or more, still more preferably 8 or more, and still more preferably 10 or more, according to any one of Items 1 to 9. decoration. Item 11: At least a part of the side surface (S) of the groove is exposed to the outside of the decoration, and the surface including the surface portion (F) on which the groove is observed is located below the part closest to the side surface. The absolute value of the angle formed with the perpendicular or normal to the surface is preferably arcsin (1/n) or less, more preferably 90-2 arcsin (1/n)° or less (n is the refractive index of the layer having transparency). Item 11. The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 10. Item 12: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 11, wherein the layer having permeability and the layer having low permeability are bonded to each other. Item 13: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 12, wherein the transmissive layer has a total light transmittance of 70% or more. Item 14: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 13, wherein at least part of the layer with low permeability is opaque. Item 15: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 14, wherein at least part of the layer with low transmittance has a brightness of v6 or more in the Munsell color system (D65, reflected light measurement). Item 16: A decoration manufacturing apparatus (50) for manufacturing the decoration according to Item 1, comprising a bonding section (52) for bonding a plurality of materials (201 and 202) together and a grooving section (43). . Item 17: A decoration manufacturing method for manufacturing the decoration according to Item 1, comprising a bonding step (S52) of bonding a plurality of materials (201 and 202) together, and a grooving step (S43).

《第5の実施形態》
本実施形態は、第4の実施形態に類似の課題等を、基本的には別の方法で解決する。第4の実施形態と同様の工程において、例えば溝加工部43は、接合前の上層材料板203に溝加工してもよい。この場合、溝加工部43は、溝部Gが一部で上層材料板203を貫通し、一部で貫通しないように加工する。貫通しない溝部Gの先端部分は上層材料板203の裏面に近いほどよい。ただし、溝部Gを挟んで対向する基材部Mどうしがつながっている部分が弱すぎると、自重等により分離して抜き加工状態になってしまうので、後加工に耐える最大限まで溝部Gが深く、つながっている部分が薄いのがよい。これにより、図9aが断面を示すように、溝部Gが点線状に貫通し、それ以外の部分で両側の側面Sがつながった状態となる。この溝部Gは深い突起状部分を有さない。装飾体製造装置40は、このまま装飾体Zとしてもよいが、強度の確保と、さらなる溝部Gの凹凸の低減のため、溝加工後の上層材料板203に下層材料板204を接合してもよい。それらは同一・同種の材質でもよく、互いに異なる色でもよく、何れも透過性を有してもよく、同一メーカの同一銘柄の材料でもよく、実用上同じ色でもよい。接合のための接着剤25には、溶剤のみの接着剤よりも、ジクロロメタンやジクロロエタン等の溶剤に、PMMAや上層材料板203と同種の樹脂粉末等が溶解された接着剤・MMA等の主剤及び重合開始剤や硬化剤等の助剤によってなり、溶剤を含まない接着剤・MMA及び触媒によってなるMMAシラップ等が適する。接着剤25は、上層材料板203等と実用上同じ色である方がよい。装飾体製造装置40は、突起状部分が下向きの上層材料板203と下層材料板204とを接合する。この時、接着剤25が、接合時の貼り合わせ圧及び毛細管現象によって、溝部Gの貫通した部分に浸透する。硬化後の接着層Aのうち溝部Gに露出した部分は先端充填部Nとなり、図9bのように溝部Gの突起や凹凸を埋める。接着剤25の硬化収縮率・粘度・溶剤の沸点・塗布膜厚・貼り合わせ圧等の調整により、溝部G内での先端充填部Nの深さの制御が可能である。装飾体製造装置40は、下層材料板204をPP等の難接着材とし、これを接着剤25の硬化後に離型してもよく、下層材料板204を接合せず、上層材料板203を接着剤25に浸漬することで、同様の結果を得てもよい。被覆部T・充填部Lはあってもなくてもよい。
<<Fifth Embodiment>>
This embodiment solves the problems similar to those of the fourth embodiment by basically different methods. In a process similar to that of the fourth embodiment, for example, the grooving section 43 may groove the upper layer material plate 203 before bonding. In this case, the grooved portion 43 is processed so that the grooved portion G partially penetrates the upper layer material plate 203 and partially does not penetrate the upper layer material plate 203 . The closer the tip of the non-penetrating groove G is to the back surface of the upper layer material plate 203, the better. However, if the portion where the base material portions M facing each other across the groove portion G are connected is too weak, they will separate due to their own weight or the like, resulting in a blanking state. , the connecting part should be thin. As a result, as shown in the cross-section of FIG. 9a, the groove portion G penetrates in the form of a dotted line, and the side surfaces S on both sides are connected in other portions. This groove G does not have a deep protruding portion. The decoration manufacturing apparatus 40 may use the decoration Z as it is, but may join the lower layer material plate 204 to the upper layer material plate 203 after groove processing in order to secure the strength and further reduce the unevenness of the groove portion G. . They may be made of the same or the same kind of material, may be of different colors, may have transparency, may be made of the same brand of material by the same manufacturer, or may be of the same practical color. As the adhesive 25 for joining, rather than an adhesive consisting only of a solvent, an adhesive obtained by dissolving PMMA or a resin powder of the same kind as the upper layer material plate 203 in a solvent such as dichloromethane or dichloroethane, a main agent such as MMA, or the like is used. Adhesives containing no solvents such as polymerization initiators and curing agents, MMA syrups, and MMA syrups containing catalysts are suitable. The adhesive 25 should be practically the same color as the upper layer material plate 203 and the like. The decoration manufacturing apparatus 40 joins the upper layer material plate 203 and the lower layer material plate 204 with projecting portions facing downward. At this time, the adhesive 25 permeates into the penetrating portion of the groove G due to the bonding pressure and capillary action during bonding. The portion of the adhesive layer A after curing that is exposed in the groove portion G becomes the tip filling portion N, which fills the projections and unevenness of the groove portion G as shown in FIG. 9b. The depth of the tip filling portion N within the groove portion G can be controlled by adjusting the curing shrinkage rate, viscosity, boiling point of the solvent, coating film thickness, bonding pressure, etc. of the adhesive 25 . In the decoration manufacturing apparatus 40, the lower layer material plate 204 may be made of a hard-to-bond material such as PP, which may be released after the adhesive 25 is cured, and the upper layer material plate 203 may be bonded without bonding the lower layer material plate 204. Immersion in agent 25 may achieve similar results. The covering portion T and the filling portion L may or may not be provided.

具体的には、例えばULS社製PLS6.150Dを具えるレーザ加工部431が、8mm厚のPMMAの上層材料板203に溝部Gを加工する。θGは概ね4~5°である。加工後の溝部Gでは、加工側の反対側まで貫通した部分と、一例としては0.2~0.5mmの深さで貫通せずに残っている部分とが、交互に連続している。次に、充填加工部45が、上層材料板203と実用上同じ色等の下層材料板204に接着剤25を0.1~0.5mm程度均一に塗布し、その上に、上層材料板203を接合する。接着剤25は、例えばMMA60重量部・PMMA粉末30~60重量部・微量の過酸化ベンゾイル・フタル酸ジシクロヘキシル等を含む。その動粘度は400~2000でもよい。動粘度の単位はmm/s、25℃、測定方法は、展色剤Vが石油製品であればJIS K 2283、一部ISO2909及びISO3104等に、それ以外の液体であればJIS Z 8803等に準拠する。以下同様である。接合時には上層材料板203が毎秒2~5mmの速度で降下する。これらのパラメータは、材料板の面積と溝部Gの長さの兼ね合い・材料の温度・上層材料板203の分子量等に応じて、適切な値に変更されてよい。上層材料板203が降下するにつれ、溝部Gの先端部分に接着剤25が浸入する。あるいは、充填加工部45は、溝部Gに接着剤25を充填した後、薄いフィルム・針・楔状の板等により不要な接着剤25を掻き出して、溝部Gの先端部分のみに先端充填部Nが形成されるようにしてもよい。これにより、レーザ加工によりながら、深さ方向の凹凸の少ない溝部Gが得られる。この溝部Gでは、側面Sはレーザ加工特有の波状凹凸を有し、かつ平滑である。先端充填部Nは、突起状部分のみを埋めてもよく、突起状部分以外の細かな凹凸までも埋めてもよく、dGを一定にしてもよく、わずかな凹凸を残してもよい。これにより、完成後の装飾体Zの溝部Gにおいて、底面部BのRは好ましくは100以下・より好ましくは50以下・さらに好ましくは20以下・一層好ましくは10以下でもよい。深さ方向の凹凸が最大である部分の凹凸の量が、凹凸が最小である部分の凹凸の量の、好ましくは4倍以下・より好ましくは2倍以下・さらに好ましくは3/2倍以下でもよい。また、溝部Gの少なくとも一部の凹凸の量は、wの2倍以下・1倍以下・1/2以下、前記側面Sの凹凸のピッチの2倍以下・1倍以下・1/2以下、最大のdGの1/10以下・1/20以下・1/30以下、又は0.2mm以下・0.1mm以下・0.05mm以下の何れかでもよく、小さいほどよい。その下限は0又は測定限界である。先端充填部Nの深さは、dGの1/4以下・1/8以下・1/12以下、又は2mm以下・1mm以下・0.5mm以下でもよく、小さいほどよい。また、先端充填部Nの屈折率は基材上層M3の屈折率と異なることが多い。その差は、0.01以上・0.02以上・0.03以上・0.04以上・0.05以上の場合もある。それらの間では、屈折率以外にも赤外吸収スペクトル・結晶方向等さまざまな特性が異なる可能性がある。また、レーザ加工部431が溝加工した基材上層M3は、熱影響により、各部で異なる屈折率を示し、特に側面Sの近くほど大きな複屈折を示すことがある。一方、先端充填部N及び基材下層M4は複屈折をほとんど示さず、各部で屈折が等方的であることが多い。側面Sのある方向及びそれと直交方向からの少なくとも一部の波長に対する屈折率の差が、好ましくは0.002以上・より好ましくは0.005以上・さらに好ましくは0.008以上であり、先端充填部Nのそれが好ましくは0.0005以下・より好ましくは0.0001以下・さらに好ましくは0.00005以下でもよい。また、側面Sの平行方向又は垂直方向の2次複屈折位相差が好ましくは100nm以上・より好ましくは200nm以上・さらに好ましくは400nm以上であり、先端充填部Nのそれが好ましくは80nm以下・より好ましくは50nm以下・さらに好ましくは30nm以下でもよい。これらはエリプソメータM-2000V-Te等で測定可能であり、依頼試験でもよい。装飾体Zが複数の層によってなることが、これらの特徴から特定可能である。先端充填部Nの屈折率等の測定にあたっては、溝部Gが分割され、露出した先端充填部Nの表面が研磨されてもよく、一定の厚さに成形されてもよい。 Specifically, for example, a laser processing unit 431 equipped with PLS6.150D manufactured by ULS Corporation processes a groove portion G in the upper layer material plate 203 of PMMA having a thickness of 8 mm. θG is approximately 4 to 5°. In the groove G after machining, the part that penetrates to the opposite side of the machined side and the part that remains without penetrating to a depth of 0.2 to 0.5 mm, for example, are alternately continuous. Next, the filling processing unit 45 uniformly applies the adhesive 25 to the lower layer material plate 204 of practically the same color as the upper layer material plate 203 by about 0.1 to 0.5 mm. to join. The adhesive 25 contains, for example, 60 parts by weight of MMA, 30 to 60 parts by weight of PMMA powder, a small amount of benzoyl peroxide, dicyclohexyl phthalate, and the like. Its kinematic viscosity may be 400-2000. The unit of kinematic viscosity is mm 2 /s, 25° C., and the method of measurement is JIS K 2283 if the vehicle is a petroleum product, ISO 2909 and ISO 3104 for some, and JIS Z 8803 if it is a liquid other than that. Comply with The same applies hereinafter. During joining, the upper material plate 203 descends at a speed of 2 to 5 mm per second. These parameters may be changed to appropriate values according to the balance between the area of the material plate and the length of the groove portion G, the temperature of the material, the molecular weight of the upper layer material plate 203, and the like. As the upper layer material plate 203 descends, the adhesive 25 penetrates into the tip portion of the groove G. As shown in FIG. Alternatively, after filling the groove G with the adhesive 25, the filling processing unit 45 scrapes out unnecessary adhesive 25 using a thin film, a needle, a wedge-shaped plate, or the like, so that the tip filling portion N is formed only at the tip of the groove G. may be formed. As a result, the groove G with less unevenness in the depth direction can be obtained by laser processing. In this groove portion G, the side surface S has wave-like unevenness peculiar to laser processing and is smooth. The tip filling portion N may fill only the protruding portion, may also fill fine unevenness other than the protruding portion, may have a constant dG, or may leave slight unevenness. Accordingly, in the groove portion G of the decoration Z after completion, the Ra of the bottom portion B may be preferably 100 or less, more preferably 50 or less, still more preferably 20 or less, and even more preferably 10 or less. Even if the amount of unevenness in the portion with the largest unevenness in the depth direction is preferably 4 times or less, more preferably 2 times or less, and even more preferably 3/2 times or less of the amount of unevenness in the portion with the smallest unevenness. good. In addition, the amount of unevenness of at least a part of the groove portion G is 2 times or less, 1 time or less, 1/2 or less of w, and 2 times or less, 1 time or less, 1/2 or less of the pitch of the unevenness of the side surface S, It may be 1/10 or less, 1/20 or less, 1/30 or less of the maximum dG, or 0.2 mm or less, 0.1 mm or less, or 0.05 mm or less, and the smaller the better. The lower bound is 0 or the limit of measurement. The depth of the tip filling portion N may be 1/4 or less, 1/8 or less, 1/12 or less of dG, or 2 mm or less, 1 mm or less, or 0.5 mm or less, and the smaller the better. Moreover, the refractive index of the tip filling portion N is often different from the refractive index of the substrate upper layer M3. The difference may be 0.01 or more, 0.02 or more, 0.03 or more, 0.04 or more, or 0.05 or more. Among them, various characteristics such as infrared absorption spectrum, crystal orientation, etc. may be different in addition to the refractive index. In addition, the base material upper layer M3 groove-processed by the laser-processed portion 431 may exhibit different refractive indices due to thermal effects, and may exhibit particularly large birefringence closer to the side surface S. FIG. On the other hand, the tip filling portion N and the base material lower layer M4 show almost no birefringence, and the refraction is often isotropic at each portion. The difference in refractive index for at least part of wavelengths from a certain direction of the side surface S and a direction orthogonal thereto is preferably 0.002 or more, more preferably 0.005 or more, and still more preferably 0.008 or more, and the tip filling Part N may be preferably 0.0005 or less, more preferably 0.0001 or less, still more preferably 0.00005 or less. In addition, the secondary birefringence retardation of the side surface S in the parallel direction or the vertical direction is preferably 100 nm or more, more preferably 200 nm or more, and still more preferably 400 nm or more, and the tip filling portion N preferably has a secondary birefringence retardation of 80 nm or more. It is preferably 50 nm or less, more preferably 30 nm or less. These can be measured with an ellipsometer M-2000V-Te or the like, and may be a request test. It is identifiable from these characteristics that the decoration Z consists of a plurality of layers. In measuring the refractive index and the like of the tip filling portion N, the groove portion G may be divided, and the exposed surface of the tip filling portion N may be polished or formed to have a constant thickness.

通常、レーザ加工によってなる溝部Gは、長さ方向に垂直な断面形状が楔状又はテーパー状(長さ方向に垂直な断面形状がテーパー状の溝部Gは、平面状又は周期的な凹凸状の底面部Bを有する。)であり、さらに、開領域状の場合、始点及び終点が図9のように溝部の長さ方向にテーパー状となる。これと第1の実施形態に記載の溝部Gの深さ方向及び側面Sの凹凸はレーザ加工結果に固有の特徴である。ところが、第4の実施形態又は本実施形態の適用により、深さ方向の凹凸は解消される。これにより、レーザによる良好な加工性・低コストと、略一定の深さの溝部Gの意匠性とが両立する。この装飾体Zは、立体的効果を目的とする場合にも、一定の深さdGにより優れた立体感をもたらす。この装飾体Zは、従来の切り文字と異なり、レーザ加工等によって1枚の板上に製造できるので、壁等へ容易に取り付け可能である。この装飾体Zでは、溝部Gが、屈折の作用により、装飾体の表面部Fと端面Xとで変化して見えるので、従来の切り文字とは異なる装飾効果を呈する。従来の切り文字は外形に凹凸の突起を有するため、汚れやすく、清掃も面倒であり、破損しやすい。本実施形態はこれらの点も改善する。 Generally, the groove G formed by laser processing has a wedge-shaped or tapered cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction (the groove G with a tapered cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction has a planar or periodic uneven bottom surface ), and in the case of an open region, the start point and the end point are tapered in the longitudinal direction of the groove as shown in FIG. This and the unevenness in the depth direction of the groove portion G and the side surface S described in the first embodiment are features unique to the result of laser processing. However, by applying the fourth embodiment or this embodiment, the unevenness in the depth direction is eliminated. As a result, both good workability and low cost using a laser and the designability of the groove portion G having a substantially constant depth are achieved. The decoration body Z provides an excellent three-dimensional effect due to the constant depth dG even when aiming for a three-dimensional effect. Unlike the conventional cut letters, the ornament Z can be manufactured on a single plate by laser processing or the like, so that it can be easily attached to a wall or the like. In this decorative body Z, the grooves G appear to change between the surface portion F and the end face X of the decorative body due to the effect of refraction. Since conventional cutout characters have projections and depressions on their outer shape, they are easily soiled, troublesome to clean, and easily damaged. This embodiment also improves these points.

請求の範囲控。項1:溝部(G)を有し、前記溝部の長さ方向に垂直な断面形状が楔状又はテーパー状であり、前記断面形状における前記溝部の対向する両側の側面(S)のなす前記溝部側の角度が10°以下であり、前記側面が縞状の複数の凹凸を有し、前記複数の凹凸が前記溝部の長さ方向に平行であるか又は前記長さ方向と70°から110°の角度をなすかの少なくとも一方であり、前記溝部の幅の狭い側の先端部分の少なくとも一部における前記溝部の深さ方向の凹凸が、前記溝部の幅の2倍以下又は前記縞状の複数の凹凸のピッチの2倍以下の少なくとも一方であることを特徴とする装飾体(Z)。項2:前記溝部が前記先端部分に先端充填部(N)を有する、項1に記載の装飾体。項3:前記先端充填部の凹凸の深さが前記溝部の深さの1/4以下である、項2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記縞状の複数の凹凸の算術平均うねりWが0.5μm以上(カットオフλc0.08mm)である、項1~3の何れかに記載の装飾体。項5:前記縞状の複数の凹凸のピッチが50~2000μmである、項1~4の何れかに記載の装飾体。項6:前記縞状の複数の凹凸の算術平均粗さRが1μm以下である、項1~5の何れかに記載の装飾体。項7:前記側面が、前記長さ方向に平行な複数の凹凸を、前記溝部の深さ方向における1/2の部分から前記先端部分の反対方向にかけて有するか、前記長さ方向と70°から110°の角度をなす複数の凹凸を、前記溝部の深さ方向における1/2の部分から前記先端部分の方向にかけて有するか、の少なくとも一方である、項1~6の何れかに記載の装飾体。項8:前記装飾体の少なくとも一部が透過性を有する、項1~7の何れかに記載の装飾体。項9:画像・文字・ロゴ・図形・模様の少なくとも何れかを表示する、項1~8の何れかに記載の装飾体。項10:前記溝部の少なくとも一部が、底面部(B)と、前記底面部に対して前記溝部の反対側に2つの層の界面と、を有し、前記界面の凹凸が前記底面部の凹凸より大きい、項1~9の何れかに記載の装飾体。項11:前記側面が前記溝部以外の部分を透過して観察可能である、項1~10の何れかに記載の装飾体。項12:材料(20)に溝部を加工する溝加工部(43)と前記溝部の先端部に材料を充填する充填加工部(45)を具え項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造装置(40)。項13:材料に溝部を加工する溝加工工程(S43)と前記溝部の先端部に材料を充填する充填加工工程(S45)を具え項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造方法。 Claim copy. Item 1: It has a groove (G), the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction of the groove is wedge-shaped or tapered, and the groove side formed by the side surfaces (S) on both sides of the groove in the cross-sectional shape angle is 10° or less, the side surface has a plurality of striped unevenness, and the plurality of unevenness is parallel to the length direction of the groove portion or at an angle of 70° to 110° with the length direction at least one of forming an angle, and the unevenness in the depth direction of the groove in at least a part of the tip portion on the narrower side of the groove is not more than twice the width of the groove, or a plurality of stripes. A decorative body (Z) characterized by having at least one of two times or less the pitch of the unevenness. Item 2: The decoration according to Item 1, wherein the groove has a tip filling portion (N) at the tip portion. Item 3: The decorative body according to Item 2, wherein the depth of the unevenness of the tip filling portion is 1/4 or less of the depth of the groove portion. Item 4: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 3, wherein the arithmetic mean waviness W a of the plurality of striped irregularities is 0.5 μm or more (cutoff λc 0.08 mm). Item 5: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 4, wherein the plurality of striped unevennesses have a pitch of 50 to 2000 μm. Item 6: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 5, wherein the plurality of striped unevennesses have an arithmetic mean roughness R a of 1 μm or less. Item 7: The side surface has a plurality of unevenness parallel to the length direction, from a half part in the depth direction of the groove part to the opposite direction of the tip part, or from 70 ° to the length direction Item 7. The decoration according to any one of Items 1 to 6, wherein a plurality of unevennesses forming an angle of 110° are provided in at least one of a half portion of the groove portion in the depth direction and a direction of the tip portion. body. Item 8: The decoration according to any one of Items 1 to 7, wherein at least part of the decoration has transparency. Item 9: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 8, which displays at least one of images, characters, logos, figures, and patterns. Item 10: At least part of the groove portion has a bottom portion (B) and an interface between two layers on the opposite side of the groove portion with respect to the bottom portion, and the unevenness of the interface is the bottom portion. Item 10. The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 9, which is larger than the unevenness. Item 11: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 10, wherein the side surface can be observed through a portion other than the groove. Item 12: Manufacture of the decoration according to Item 1, comprising a groove processing unit (43) for processing grooves in the material (20) and a filling processing unit (45) for filling the tip of the groove with the material. A device (40). Item 13: A decoration manufacturing method for manufacturing the decoration according to Item 1, comprising a groove processing step (S43) of processing a groove in a material and a filling processing step (S45) of filling a tip portion of the groove with material.

《第6の実施形態》
特許文献Aは、同明細書段落0055等において、無色透明の溝部Gが、照明光の色で着色されて見えたり、光の色の変更によりさまざまな色に変化して見えたりする、という発明を記載している。しかし、この効果のためには光に色がなければならなかった。そのため、屋外に設置された造形物3が、自然光でこの効果を発揮することはできなかった。また、造形物3の広い面積の部分がこの効果を示すには、その部分全面が溝部Gを有していなければならず、高額の加工費用を要した。さらに、COレーザ加工等の場合、溝幅を狭くできないため、万線状の溝部Gのピッチの微細化にも限界があり、小サイズの造形物3では細かい絵柄の再現に無理があった。本実施形態は、特許文献Aに記載の発明と異なり、光源色に依存せず、自然光によって、無色透明の溝部Gが各部に色を投光するような装飾体や、溝部Gの色が正面からは見えず、端面からは見えるような装飾体等の提供を課題としてもよい。
<<Sixth embodiment>>
Patent Document A is an invention that, in paragraph 0055 of the same specification, the colorless and transparent groove portion G appears colored with the color of the illumination light, or appears to change to various colors by changing the color of the light. is described. However, the light had to have color for this effect. Therefore, the modeled object 3 installed outdoors cannot exhibit this effect under natural light. In addition, in order for the large-area portion of the modeled object 3 to exhibit this effect, the entire surface of the portion must have the grooves G, requiring high processing costs. Furthermore, in the case of CO 2 laser processing, etc., since the groove width cannot be narrowed, there is a limit to miniaturization of the pitch of the parallel grooves G, and it is difficult to reproduce fine patterns with the small-sized molded object 3 . . Unlike the invention described in Patent Document A, this embodiment does not depend on the color of the light source, and the colorless and transparent groove G projects a color to each part by natural light. The object may be to provide a decorative body or the like that is invisible from the outside but visible from the end face.

図10のように、溝部Gが有色透明のフィルムよりなる色帯部Kを挟み、この色帯部Kが両側の側面Sに接合されていなければ、装飾体Zの端面X等からの光が両側の側面S及び色帯部Kを透過し、入射方向の反対側に色帯部Kの色の影を投影する。一方、溝部Gの側面角θSが前記の範囲内で充分に小さければ、観察者が溝部Gを表面部F又は裏面部Rを通して見る限り、色帯部Kの色は臨界角の作用により見えない。つまり、色帯部Kの色は直接は見えず、透過光が投影された影としてのみ観察可能である。ただし、色帯部Kの色は端面Xでは側面Sを通して見え、観察者の意表を突く。図10aは、端面Xから見える溝部G2を点線で図示するが、これは溝部G2の概念的な位置を示すものである。実際には端面Xからは色帯部K2が見え、その位置は屈折によって図10aとは異なる。色帯部Kが不透明でも、端面Xからのみ見える効果は得られる。そのために、端面Xの少なくとも一部が表面部F又は裏面部Rの少なくとも一方となす小さい側の角の角度をθXとすると、|θX|=90°でもよく、|θX|≧80°でもよく、|θX|≧70°でもよく、|θX|≦90°でもよい。また、端面X上の任意の点P1に下した垂線又は法線と、点P1及び点P1との間に溝部Gを挟まない側面S上の点P2を通る直線とがなす角度をθXSとし、端面X上の任意の点P3及び点P3との間に溝部Gを挟まない側面S上の点P4を通る直線と、点P4に下した垂線又は法線とがなす角度をθSXとする。この装飾体Zにおいて、端面Xの少なくとも一部における点P1又は点P3に対し、側面Sの少なくとも一部に、|θXS|又は|θSX|がそれぞれarcsin(1/n)以下になるような点P2又は点P4が存在すれば、点P1・3から点P2・4を見た時に色帯部Kが透過して見える。さらに、そのような点P1と点P3とが一致してもよく、点P2と点P4とが一致してもよい。端面Xは平面に限られず、曲面でもよい。端面Xが曲面の場合、その一部が上記角度の条件を満たせば、その部分から色帯部Kが見える。色帯部Kが片側の側面Sのみに接合されれば、表面部Fからは、色帯部Kが、接合された側の側面Sを透過してだけ見える。色帯部Kは色や凹凸による模様を有してもよい。端面Xは段落0029記載の側面Sのように平滑であれば色帯部Kが鮮明に見え、微粒面等であれば色帯部Kの色が拡散してぼんやり見える。この装飾体Zは、例えば装飾体製造装置40により製造される。その際、溝加工部43が材料に溝加工し、充填材料調合部44が色帯部Kを取得・切断し、充填加工部45が色帯部Kを溝部G内に挿入してもよい。その後に被覆加工部46が被覆部Tを接合してもよい。これにより、色帯部Kが外側に露出せず、溝部Gから脱落しない。また、開口部O又は底面部Bにおいても色帯部Kが基材部Mや被覆部Tに接合されていない場合、θEが大きければ上記と同様の効果を奏することがある。よって、溝部Gの全体が色帯部Kとの間に空隙を有してもよい。なお、溝部Gが色帯部Kとの間に空隙を有するとは、両者が互いに密着しておらず、両者の間に薄い空気の層があり、又は両者が接していても接合されておらず、結果として両者の界面での臨界角が空気との臨界角と同等である状態を指す。 As shown in FIG. 10, if the groove portion G sandwiches the color belt portion K made of a colored transparent film and the color belt portion K is not joined to the side surfaces S on both sides, the light from the end surface X of the decoration Z and the like is emitted. The light is transmitted through the side surfaces S and the color strip K on both sides, and projects a shadow of the color of the color strip K on the opposite side of the incident direction. On the other hand, if the side angle θS of the groove portion G is sufficiently small within the above range, as long as the observer views the groove portion G through the front surface portion F or the rear surface portion R, the color of the color band portion K cannot be seen due to the action of the critical angle. . In other words, the color of the color band portion K cannot be seen directly, but can be observed only as a shadow projected by the transmitted light. However, the color of the color belt portion K can be seen through the side surface S of the end surface X, which surprises the observer. FIG. 10a illustrates the groove G2 visible from the end face X with a dotted line, which indicates the conceptual position of the groove G2. Actually, the color band K2 can be seen from the end face X, and its position is different from that shown in FIG. 10a due to refraction. Even if the color belt portion K is opaque, the effect of being visible only from the end surface X can be obtained. Therefore, if the smaller angle formed by at least a portion of the end surface X with at least one of the front surface portion F and the rear surface portion R is θX, then |θX|=90° or |θX|≧80°. , |θX|≧70° or |θX|≦90°. Further, let θXS be the angle formed by a perpendicular or normal to an arbitrary point P1 on the end surface X and a straight line passing through a point P2 on the side surface S that does not sandwich the groove G between the points P1 and P1, and Let θSX be the angle formed by a straight line passing through a point P4 on the side surface S that does not sandwich the groove G between an arbitrary point P3 on the end surface X and the point P3 and a perpendicular or normal line to the point P4. In this decorative body Z, with respect to the point P1 or the point P3 on at least a part of the end surface X, at least a part of the side surface S has |θXS| or | θSX | If the point P2 or the point P4 exists, the color belt portion K can be seen through when the point P2.4 is viewed from the point P1.3. Further, such points P1 and P3 may coincide, and points P2 and P4 may coincide. The end surface X is not limited to a flat surface, and may be a curved surface. When the end face X is a curved surface, if a portion of the curved surface satisfies the above angle condition, the color belt portion K can be seen from that portion. If the color belt portion K is joined only to one side surface S, the color belt portion K can be seen from the surface portion F only through the side surface S on the joint side. The color belt portion K may have a pattern of color or unevenness. If the end surface X is smooth like the side surface S described in paragraph 0029, the color strip K will be clearly visible, and if it is a fine grain surface, the color of the color strip K will be diffused and vague. The decoration Z is manufactured by a decoration manufacturing apparatus 40, for example. At that time, the grooving section 43 may groove the material, the filling material preparation section 44 may obtain and cut the color band K, and the filling processing section 45 may insert the color band K into the groove G. After that, the covering portion 46 may join the covering portions T together. As a result, the color belt portion K is not exposed to the outside and does not drop out of the groove portion G. Also, in the opening O or the bottom portion B, when the color band portion K is not joined to the base portion M or the covering portion T, the same effect as described above may be obtained if θE is large. Therefore, the entire groove portion G may have a gap between it and the color belt portion K. In addition, the fact that the groove portion G has a gap between the color band portion K means that the two are not in close contact with each other, there is a thin layer of air between them, or even if they are in contact, they are not joined. However, as a result, the critical angle at the interface between the two is equivalent to the critical angle with air.

色帯部Kを透過した光は、装飾体Zが基材上層M5と、それより低透過性の基材下層M6を有する場合に、基材下層M6に反射してより鮮明に見える。基材下層M6が白色かそれに近い明るい色であり、ヘーズ10%以上・20%以上・30%以上、マンセル表色系における明度がv5以上・v6以上・v7以上・v8以上、(以上分光色差計・色彩輝度計等による計測、D65、厚さにより変動する値は2mm厚換算時)、の少なくとも何れかの場合に特に効果的である(それぞれ後の値の方が効果が高い)。 When the decorative body Z has the base material upper layer M5 and the base material lower layer M6 with lower transmittance than the base material upper layer M5, the light transmitted through the color belt portion K is reflected by the base material lower layer M6 and can be seen more clearly. The base material lower layer M6 is white or a bright color close to it, and the haze is 10% or more, 20% or more, 30% or more, and the brightness in the Munsell color system is v5 or more, v6 or more, v7 or more, v8 or more (spectral color difference It is particularly effective for at least one of the following: measurement with a meter/color luminance meter, D65, and a value that varies depending on the thickness when converted to a thickness of 2 mm (the latter value is more effective).

色帯部Kの可撓性が高い方が溝部Gへの挿入作業が容易であるから、色帯部Kの曲げ弾性率は700MPa以下でもよい。色帯部Kの厚さは100μm以下・70μm以下・50μm以下・30μm以下又はwの1/4以下・1/5以下・1/8以下・1/10以下・1/20以下の少なくとも一方であれば、色帯部Kが楔状の溝部Gの先端近くまで届き、その点では小さいほどよい。なお、色帯部Kの厚さは色帯部Kの最も広い面と垂直な方向の長さである。色帯部Kは、上記樹脂からなるフィルム・株式会社東京舞台照明製ポリカラー等の照明用カラーフィルター・セロファン等でもよい。その場合、色帯部Kのうち互いに対向する最も面積の広い2つの面は互いに平行である。色帯部Kは、ビーズ状の粒体・糸状体・ダイクロイックミラーの細片・干渉膜・偏光膜等の上記作用ないし類似作用を呈する材料からなってもよい。色帯部Kと側面Sとの隙間が狭すぎると、ニュートンリングが発生することがあり、また融着することがあるので、その防止のためには、隙間がある程度大きいほうがよい。具体的には、色帯部Kと側面Sとの間の距離は、少なくとも一部で、0.03mm以上・0.05mm以上・0.1mm以上・0.15mm以上・0.2mm以上の何れかでもよく、大きいほど前記問題が起きにくい。上限は溝部Gの幅と色帯部Kの厚さとの差である。 The bending elastic modulus of the colored belt portion K may be 700 MPa or less because the insertion work into the groove portion G is easier when the colored belt portion K is more flexible. The thickness of the color belt portion K is at least one of 100 μm or less, 70 μm or less, 50 μm or less, 30 μm or less, or 1/4 or less, 1/5 or less, 1/8 or less, 1/10 or less, or 1/20 or less of w. If there is, the color belt portion K reaches near the tip of the wedge-shaped groove portion G, and in that respect the smaller the better. The thickness of the color strip K is the length in the direction perpendicular to the widest surface of the color strip K. As shown in FIG. The color band portion K may be a film made of the above resin, a lighting color filter such as Polycolor manufactured by Tokyo Butai Lighting Co., Ltd., cellophane, or the like. In that case, the two widest faces of the color strip K facing each other are parallel to each other. The color belt portion K may be made of a material exhibiting the above action or a similar action, such as bead-like granules, filaments, dichroic mirror pieces, interference films, and polarizing films. If the gap between the color belt portion K and the side surface S is too narrow, Newton's rings may occur and fusion may occur. Specifically, the distance between the color belt portion K and the side surface S is, at least in part, any of 0.03 mm or more, 0.05 mm or more, 0.1 mm or more, 0.15 mm or more, or 0.2 mm or more. The larger the size, the less likely the above problem will occur. The upper limit is the difference between the width of the groove portion G and the thickness of the color belt portion K.

色帯部Kの彩度がマンセル表色系(D65)においてc6以上又はc8以上であれば、鮮やかな透過光が得られる。溝部Gの各部の色帯部Kの色が互いに異なってもよい。例えば図10において、菱形のうちx負方向側の溝部G1の色帯部K1が赤、x正方向側の溝部G2の色帯部K2が青であれば、x負方向側から光が当たった時に菱形内の基材上層M5と基材下層M6との界面が赤く見え、x正方向側から光が当たった時に菱形が青く見える。この装飾体Zが北半球の屋外に南向きで設置された場合、太陽光の向きから朝は青、夕方は赤に光って見える。この装飾体Zに人感センサ及び照明部Iが組み合わされて門柱に設置され、人が通った時に発光したり、照射方向が変化したりしてもよい。照明部Iが照度センサにより夜間のみ発光してもよい。照明部Iが表面部Fに対し絶対値が90°より大きい入射角から光を照射すれば、端面Xから入射した光が、一部は直接、一部は表面部Fで全反射後に、溝部Gの両側の側面S及び色帯部Kを透過し、色帯部Kの色に染まる。この光は、視線角度によっては直接観察可能であり、基材下層M6があれば基材上層M5との界面に色を投影する。 If the saturation of the color band portion K is c6 or more or c8 or more in the Munsell color system (D65), vivid transmitted light can be obtained. The colors of the color band portions K in each portion of the groove portion G may be different from each other. For example, in FIG. 10, if the color strip K1 of the groove G1 on the x negative direction side of the rhombus is red, and the color strip K2 of the groove G2 on the x positive direction side is blue, the light hits from the x negative direction side. Sometimes, the interface between the base material upper layer M5 and the base material lower layer M6 within the rhombus appears red, and the rhombus appears blue when light hits it from the x-positive direction. When this decorative body Z is installed outdoors in the northern hemisphere facing south, it appears blue in the morning and red in the evening depending on the direction of sunlight. The decorative body Z may be combined with a motion sensor and an illumination unit I and installed on the gatepost so that it emits light when a person passes by or changes the irradiation direction. The illumination unit I may emit light only at night by means of an illuminance sensor. If the illumination unit I irradiates the surface portion F with light from an incident angle whose absolute value is greater than 90°, the light incident from the end surface X is partly directly reflected on the surface portion F, and partly after being totally reflected by the surface portion F. It passes through the side surfaces S on both sides of G and the color strip K, and is dyed in the color of the color strip K. This light is directly observable depending on the viewing angle, and projects color at the interface with the upper substrate layer M5 if the lower substrate layer M6 is present.

この装飾体Zは、例えば自然光が斜めから当たれば溝部Gを挟んで光の出射側が色帯部Kの色に見え、あるいは溝部Gに囲まれた領域がその色に見え、自然光が正面から当たればその色は消え、しかも溝部G自体は自然光の色に光る、という効果を奏する。色帯部Kが不透明であれば、光の入射側に色帯部K色の正反射光ないし拡散反射光が現れる。また、色帯部Kの色は装飾体Z正面からはほとんど見えないが、装飾体Zの端面からは見え、トリッキーな効果をももたらす。さらに、溝部Gが形成されていない部分まで、1本の溝部Gだけで色の光が届く。本発明は文字等を輪郭で表示できるので、複数の平行な溝部による場合より微細な文字等を表示可能である。 For example, when natural light strikes the decorative body Z obliquely, the light emitting side across the groove G appears in the color of the color band K, or the area surrounded by the groove G appears in that color, and the natural light hits it from the front. The color disappears, and the groove G itself shines in the color of natural light. If the color band portion K is opaque, specularly reflected light or diffusely reflected light of the color band portion K appears on the incident side of the light. Further, the color of the color band K is almost invisible from the front of the decorative body Z, but visible from the end face of the decorative body Z, providing a tricky effect. Furthermore, only one groove G allows color light to reach a portion where the groove G is not formed. Since the present invention can display characters and the like with outlines, it is possible to display finer characters and the like than when a plurality of parallel grooves are used.

請求の範囲控。項1:基材部(M)と、溝部(G)と、を有する装飾体(Z)であって、前記基材部の少なくとも一部(M5)が透過性を有し、前記透過性を有する基材部が前記溝部を有し、前記溝部が内部に色帯部(K)を有し、前記色帯部の色が前記透過性を有する基材部の色と異なり、前記溝部の少なくとも一部が前記色帯部との間に空隙を有することを特徴とする装飾体。項1´:少なくとも一部が透過性を有する基材部と、前記透過性を有する基材部に形成された楔状又はテーパー状の溝部と、を有する装飾体であって、前記溝部が内部に色帯部を有し、前記色帯部の厚さが一定であることを特徴とする装飾体。項2:前記溝部の深さ(dG)/幅が好ましくは5以上・より好ましくは10以上である(色帯部の色は、溝部が狭いほど正面から見えにくく、深いほど斜めから見えやすい。)、項1に記載の装飾体。項3:[前記色帯部の最も広い面のうち前記溝部の長さ方向に垂直な方向の高さ]/[前記色帯部の前記最も広い面に垂直な方向の厚さ]が好ましくは10以上・より好ましくは20以上・さらに好ましくは40以上である、項1又は2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記溝部の側面の少なくとも一部が前記装飾体の外側に露出し前記溝部が観察される面である表面部(F)を含む面のうち前記側面に最も近い部分に下した垂線又は法線となす角度の絶対値が、好ましくはarcsin(1/n)以下・より好ましくは90-2arcsin(1/n)°以下(nは前記透過性を有する基材部の屈折率)である、項1~3の何れかに記載の装飾体。項5:前記基材部の一部(M6)の透過性が、前記透過性を有する基材部の透過性より低く、前記透過性が低い基材部と前記透過性を有する基材部とが互いに接し、前記透過性が高い基材部が前記溝部の少なくとも一部を有し、前記透過性が低い一部と前記透過性を有する基材部との界面と前記溝部とが、好ましくは互いに平行でなく・より好ましくは互いに垂直である、項1~4の何れかに記載の装飾体。項6:前記色帯部が透過性を有する、項1~5の何れかに記載の装飾体。項7:前記色帯部の最も広い面に垂直な方向の厚さが100μm以下又は前記溝部の幅の1/4以下の少なくとも一方である、項1~6の何れかに記載の装飾体。項8:前記装飾体の外側に露出する面のうち、前記溝部が観察される面である表面部と、前記表面部に対向する面との間の面である端面(X)上の任意の点P1に下した垂線又は法線と、前記点P1及び前記点P1との間に溝部を挟まない側面上の点P2を通る直線とがなす角度をθXSとし、端面上の任意の点P3及び前記点P3との間に溝部を挟まない側面上の点P4を通る直線と、点P4に下した垂線又は法線とがなす角度をθSXとすると、前記端面の少なくとも一部における点P1及び点P3に対し、前記側面の少なくとも一部に、|θXS|及び|θSX|がそれぞれarcsin(1/n)(nは前記基材部の屈折率)以下になるような点P2及び点P4が存在する、項1~7の何れかに記載の装飾体。項9:前記点P1が前記点P3に一致し、かつ前記点P2が前記点P4に一致する、項8に記載の装飾体。項10:画像・文字・ロゴ・図形・模様の少なくとも何れかを表示する、項1~9の何れかに記載の装飾体。項11:前記装飾体と、前記装飾体に光を照射する照明部(I)と、を具えることを特徴とする装飾体照明設備(ZI)。項12:材料に溝部を加工する溝加工部(43)と前記溝部に材料を挿入する充填加工部(45)を具え項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造装置(40)。項13:材料に溝部を加工する溝加工工程(S43)と前記溝部に材料を挿入する充填加工工程(S45)を具え項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造方法。 Claim copy. Item 1: A decorative body (Z) having a base portion (M) and a groove portion (G), wherein at least a portion (M5) of the base portion has permeability, and the permeability is The substrate portion has the groove portion, the groove portion has a color band portion (K) therein, the color of the color band portion is different from the color of the transparent base portion, and at least the groove portion has A decorative body, wherein a part of the decorative body has a space between it and the color belt portion. Item 1′: A decorative body having a substrate part at least partially transparent, and a wedge-shaped or tapered groove formed in the transparent substrate, wherein the groove is inside A decorative body, comprising: a colored belt portion, wherein the thickness of the colored belt portion is constant. Item 2: The depth (dG)/width of the groove is preferably 5 or more, more preferably 10 or more (the narrower the groove, the more difficult it is to see the color of the color band from the front, and the deeper the groove, the easier it is to see from an angle. ), the decorative body according to item 1. Item 3: [height in the direction perpendicular to the length direction of the groove in the widest surface of the color band] / [thickness in the direction perpendicular to the widest surface of the color band] is preferably Item 3. The decorative body according to Item 1 or 2, which is 10 or more, more preferably 20 or more, further preferably 40 or more. Item 4: A perpendicular line or The absolute value of the angle formed with the normal is preferably arcsin(1/n) or less, more preferably 90-2 arcsin(1/n)° or less (where n is the refractive index of the transparent base material). , the decorative body according to any one of items 1 to 3. Item 5: Transmittance of a portion (M6) of the base material portion is lower than that of the base material portion having the permeability, and the base portion having the low permeability and the base portion having the permeability are combined. are in contact with each other, the base portion with high permeability has at least a part of the groove portion, and the interface between the portion with low permeability and the base portion with permeability and the groove portion are preferably Item 5. The decorative body according to any one of items 1 to 4, which are not parallel to each other, more preferably perpendicular to each other. Item 6: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 5, wherein the color band has transparency. Item 7: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 6, wherein the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the widest surface of the color strip is at least one of 100 μm or less and 1/4 or less of the width of the groove. Item 8: Among the surfaces exposed to the outside of the decorative body, an arbitrary Let θXS be the angle between the perpendicular or normal to the point P1 and the straight line passing through the point P2 on the side surface that does not sandwich the groove between the point P1 and the point P1, and an arbitrary point P3 and Let θSX be the angle formed by a straight line passing through a point P4 on the side surface that does not sandwich the groove between the point P3 and the perpendicular or normal line to the point P4. With respect to P3, points P2 and P4 are present on at least a part of the side surface such that |θXS| and |θSX| Item 8. The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 7. Item 9: The decoration according to Item 8, wherein the point P1 coincides with the point P3 and the point P2 coincides with the point P4. Item 10: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 9, which displays at least one of images, characters, logos, graphics, and patterns. Item 11: A decoration lighting installation (ZI) comprising the decoration and an illumination section (I) for irradiating the decoration with light. Item 12: A decoration manufacturing apparatus (40) for manufacturing the decoration according to Item 1, comprising a groove processing unit (43) for processing grooves in a material and a filling processing unit (45) for inserting the material into the grooves. Item 13: A decoration manufacturing method for manufacturing the decoration according to Item 1, comprising a groove processing step (S43) of processing a groove in a material and a filling processing step (S45) of inserting the material into the groove.

《第7の実施形態》
本実施形態は、第1の実施形態に類似の課題等を、基本的には別の方法で解決する。この方法は、第6の実施形態に関連してもよい。すなわち例えば、本実施形態では、装飾体製造装置40の充填加工部45は、色帯部Kと溝部Gとの間に液体充填部Qを充填してもよい(図11a)。液体充填部Qは、流動パラフィン・各種グリス・ワックス・水・シーダー油・桐油・ミネラルオイル・シリコーンオイル・ジヨードメタン・1-ブロモナフタレン・フルオロカーボンオイル・ペルフルオロ化合物類(ペルフルオロエーテルやペルフルオロポリエーテル等)を含むフッ素化合物等の何れか、又は混合物からなり、常温において液体でもよい。つまり、液体充填部Qは、内容物各部が固定されておらず流動可能であり、基材部Mの変形に追従して溝部G内で移動し、それぞれの位置関係を変化させる。この場合、液体充填部Qと色帯部Kとの総体が充填部Lである。液体充填部Qは無色透明でも有色でもよい。液体充填部Qの材料は特に制限されないが、装飾体Zが長期耐久性を要する場合には、基材部M内において化学的に安定であることが望ましい。例えば、基材部Mが水を吸収する樹脂であって、屋外用途の場合、水は液体充填部Qとして適さないこともある。また、第3の実施形態との組み合わせにより、色面層Uが液体充填部Qを密封でき、被覆加工時に液体充填部Qと接着剤25とが混ざり合わずにすむ。ただし、例えば被覆部Tは粘着剤Adで接合されてもよく、その場合色面層Uがなくてもよいので、本実施形態は第3の実施形態との併用を必ずしも要しない。また、液体充填部Qが揮発も流出もしない条件であれば、開口部Oが露出してもよいので、被覆部Tは必須ではない。本実施形態に係る溝部Gは、色帯部Kを有さなくてもよく、液体充填部Qによって色を有してもよい(図11b)。その場合、液体充填部Qは、上記着色剤Coや染料等により着色されてもよい。液体充填部Qと基材部Mとの界面での全反射が少ないほうがよい場合には、液体充填部Qの屈折率は基材部Mの屈折率以上でもよく、基材部Mの屈折率と0.1以下(又は0.2以下・0.05以下)の差でもよく、前者又は後者でもよく、前者かつ後者でもよい。液体充填部Qの屈折率は色帯部K・着色剤Coの屈折率以下でもよい。
<<Seventh embodiment>>
This embodiment basically solves the problems similar to those of the first embodiment by a different method. This method may relate to the sixth embodiment. That is, for example, in the present embodiment, the filling processing section 45 of the decoration manufacturing apparatus 40 may fill the liquid filling section Q between the color band section K and the groove section G (FIG. 11a). Liquid filling part Q contains liquid paraffin, various types of grease, wax, water, cedar oil, tung oil, mineral oil, silicone oil, diiodomethane, 1-bromonaphthalene, fluorocarbon oil, and perfluoro compounds (perfluoroether, perfluoropolyether, etc.). It may be made of any one of fluorine compounds, etc., or a mixture thereof, and may be liquid at room temperature. In other words, the liquid-filled portion Q is not fixed, and can flow, and moves within the groove portion G following the deformation of the base material portion M to change the positional relationship between them. In this case, the liquid filling portion Q and the color band portion K are the totality of the filling portion L. As shown in FIG. The liquid filled portion Q may be colorless and transparent or colored. Although the material of the liquid-filled portion Q is not particularly limited, it is desirable that the material is chemically stable within the base portion M when the decoration Z requires long-term durability. For example, if the base material portion M is made of a resin that absorbs water and it is used outdoors, water may not be suitable for the liquid filled portion Q. Further, by combining with the third embodiment, the color surface layer U can seal the liquid-filled portion Q, and the liquid-filled portion Q and the adhesive 25 can be prevented from being mixed with each other during the covering process. However, for example, the covering portion T may be joined with an adhesive Ad, in which case the color surface layer U may be omitted, so this embodiment does not necessarily need to be used in combination with the third embodiment. Further, if the condition is such that the liquid filled portion Q does not volatilize or flow out, the opening portion O may be exposed, so the covering portion T is not essential. The groove portion G according to this embodiment may not have the color belt portion K, and may have color due to the liquid filling portion Q (FIG. 11b). In that case, the liquid filled portion Q may be colored with the coloring agent Co, dye, or the like. When the total reflection at the interface between the liquid-filled portion Q and the base material portion M should be small, the refractive index of the liquid-filled portion Q may be equal to or higher than the refractive index of the base material portion M. and 0.1 or less (or 0.2 or less or 0.05 or less), the former or the latter, or the former and the latter. The refractive index of the liquid filled portion Q may be equal to or lower than the refractive index of the color band portion K and the colorant Co.

本実施形態では、液体充填部Qが硬化・揮発等しない限り、側面Sでの剥離が発生しないので、剥離による色の消失は特許文献Aに記載の造形物より起きにくい。液体充填部Qの消失防止のため、溝部Gは基材部Mを貫通しないか、貫通孔が塞がれたほうがよい。液体充填部Qは、その流動性により、基材部Mの伸縮や変形にも追従しやすい。色帯部Kの高さhKが一定であれば、第3・4の実施形態によらずとも、溝部Gにおける着色部分の深さが一定となる。高さhKはdGの30%以上・50%以上・70%以上・80%以上でもよい。この値が大きいほど溝部G各部での色帯部Kの位置の変動が少なく、仕上がりが良好となる。hKはdGの99%以下・95%以下・90%以下・85%以下・80%以下でもよい。この値は大きすぎない方がよい。その方が、色帯部Kの挿入工程において、dGが一定でない溝部GのうちdGが小さい部分でも、色帯部Kがはみ出さず作業性がよいからである。色帯部Kが薄膜であれば、着色部分の幅がきわめて狭いので、正面からの観察では着色部分がほとんど見えず、斜め方向からの観察時との視覚的な対比効果が向上する。複数重なった色帯部Kの枚数で濃度や色相の調整も容易に可能である。溝部Gの片側の側面Sのみが液体充填部Qによって色帯部Kと密着してもよい。また、溝部Gが2枚の有色透明の色帯部Kを含み、両側の側面Sがそれぞれ色帯部Kに液体充填部Qによって密着し、2枚の色帯部Kどうしの間が空隙であれば、空隙と色帯部Kとの界面で全反射が得られる。2つの色帯部Kの色が互いに異なれば、両側から見た時の溝部Gの色が相違する。他にも、色帯部Kが印刷等による印字を有する、1枚の不透明な色帯部Kの色が表裏で異なる等、充填材料21の充填では得られない加飾が可能である。 In the present embodiment, peeling does not occur on the side surface S unless the liquid filled portion Q is cured or volatilized. In order to prevent the liquid filled portion Q from disappearing, it is preferable that the groove portion G does not penetrate the base portion M or that the through hole is closed. Due to its fluidity, the liquid-filled portion Q easily follows expansion and contraction and deformation of the base material portion M. If the height hK of the colored belt portion K is constant, the depth of the colored portion in the groove portion G is constant regardless of the third and fourth embodiments. The height hK may be 30% or more, 50% or more, 70% or more, or 80% or more of dG. The larger this value, the less variation in the position of the color band K in each part of the groove G, and the better the finish. hK may be 99% or less, 95% or less, 90% or less, 85% or less, or 80% or less of dG. This value should not be too large. This is because, in the process of inserting the color strip K, workability is better because the color strip K does not protrude even in a portion where dG is small in the groove G where dG is not constant. If the color belt portion K is a thin film, the width of the colored portion is extremely narrow, so that the colored portion is hardly visible when observed from the front, and the visual contrast effect when observed from an oblique direction is improved. It is also possible to easily adjust the density and hue by adjusting the number of overlapping color band portions K. FIG. Only one side surface S of the groove portion G may be brought into close contact with the color band portion K by the liquid filling portion Q. In addition, the groove portion G includes two colored and transparent color band portions K, the side surfaces S on both sides are in close contact with the color band portions K by the liquid filling portions Q, and the two color band portions K are spaced apart from each other. If there is, total reflection can be obtained at the interface between the gap and the color zone K. FIG. If the colors of the two color strips K are different from each other, the colors of the grooves G are different when viewed from both sides. In addition, decorations that cannot be obtained by filling with the filling material 21 are possible, such as the color band K having a print by printing or the like, and the color of one sheet of opaque color band K being different on the front and back.

請求の範囲控。項1:基材部(M)と、前記基材部に形成された溝部(G)と、を有し、前記溝部が内部に充填部(L)を有し、前記充填部の少なくとも一部(Q)が液体であることを特徴とする装飾体。項2:前記基材部が透過性を有する、項1に記載の装飾体。項3:前記溝部の側面(S)の少なくとも一部が前記装飾体の外側に露出し前記溝部が観察される面である表面部(F)を含む面のうち前記側面に最も近い部分に下した垂線又は法線となす角度の絶対値が、好ましくはarcsin(1/n)以下・より好ましくは90-2arcsin(1/n)°以下(nは前記基材部の屈折率)である、項1又は2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記液体である充填部がフッ素化合物・シリコーン・パラフィンのうち少なくとも何れかを含む(これら3者は無色透明の製品を有し、化学的に安定した液体である点で共通の特性を有する。)、項1~3の何れかに記載の装飾体。項5:前記液体である充填部の屈折率が、前記基材部の屈折率以上である、項1~4の何れかに記載の装飾体。項6:前記充填部が固体部分を含む、項1~5の何れかに記載の装飾体。項7:前記固体部分の少なくとも一部において、前記溝部の深さ方向の高さ(hK)が一定である、項6に記載の装飾体。項8:材料に溝部を加工する溝加工部(43)と前記溝部に材料を充填する充填加工部(45)を具えそれらにより項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造装置(40)。項9:材料に溝部を加工する溝加工工程(S43)と前記溝部に材料を充填する充填加工工程(S45)を具えそれらにより項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造方法。 Claim copy. Item 1: A base material portion (M) and a groove portion (G) formed in the base material portion, the groove portion having a filling portion (L) therein, and at least part of the filling portion An ornament, wherein (Q) is a liquid. Item 2: The decorative body according to Item 1, wherein the base material has transparency. Item 3: At least a part of the side surface (S) of the groove is exposed to the outside of the decoration, and the surface including the surface portion (F) on which the groove is observed is located below the part closest to the side surface. The absolute value of the angle formed with the perpendicular or normal to the base is preferably arcsin (1/n) or less, more preferably 90-2 arcsin (1/n) ° or less (n is the refractive index of the base material). Item 3. The decorative body according to Item 1 or 2. Item 4: The filling part, which is the liquid, contains at least one of a fluorine compound, silicone, and paraffin (these three have a colorless and transparent product and have common characteristics in that they are chemically stable liquids. ), and the decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 3. Item 5: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 4, wherein the refractive index of the filling portion, which is the liquid, is equal to or higher than the refractive index of the base portion. Item 6: The decoration according to any one of Items 1 to 5, wherein the filling portion includes a solid portion. Item 7: The decorative body according to Item 6, wherein the height (hK) of the groove in the depth direction is constant in at least part of the solid portion. Item 8: A decoration manufacturing apparatus (40) comprising a groove processing unit (43) for processing grooves in a material and a filling processing unit (45) for filling material into the grooves, and manufacturing the decoration according to item 1 by these parts. . Item 9: A decoration manufacturing method comprising a groove processing step (S43) of processing a groove in a material and a filling processing step (S45) of filling the groove with a material, and manufacturing the decoration according to Item 1 by these processes.

《第8の実施形態》
溝加工後・被覆加工前の材料板20において、図12aのように開口部Oの両側が隆起している場合、被覆加工後の装飾体Zでは、図12bのように溝部Gの上部の被覆部Tがごくわずかに盛り上がることがある。このような装飾体Zの表面は一見なめらかな平面状であるが、光の映り込みがゆがんで模様となって見える。また表面に入射して反射した光が床や壁に当たり、溝部Gの形状の明暗模様を呈する。この模様は、溝部Gの形状次第で容易に様々な形状に加工可能であり、これまでにない装飾効果をもたらす。この効果は、装飾体Zの透過性が低くても得らえる。また、表面部Fが平滑であれば反射等の効果が高いが、それは必須の条件ではなく、表面部Fがマット面であっても、面状に応じてぼんやりと絵柄や映り込みが観察できる。特許文献Aに記載のような、溝部Gを有し、その上に板が接合された装飾体が知られている。特許文献Aは、その明細書段落0020において、造形物は平面的板状でもよく、その表面は平滑でもよいこと、同段落0027において、造形物3の裏面ないし表面に樹脂板等が装着又は接着されてもよいこと、を記載している。しかし、特許文献Aは、ごくわずかな凹凸でなだらかな起伏を表面に有する造形物も、その実施のための方法や効果も記載していない。また、特許文献Aに記載の造形物3では、屋外の雨水、屋内の結露により表面が濡れるが、その乾燥時に埃が固着することがあった。あるいは、水道水での洗浄後、水道水に含まれるミネラル分等がこびりつくことがあった。水分の拭き取りは傷の原因となる。撥水スプレーには耐久性の問題があった。本実施形態は、このような装飾体の汚れの低減を課題としてもよい。
<<Eighth embodiment>>
In the material plate 20 after grooving and before coating, when both sides of the opening O are raised as shown in FIG. Part T may swell very slightly. Although the surface of such a decorative body Z looks smooth and flat at first glance, it looks like a pattern due to the distorted reflection of light. In addition, the light incident on the surface and reflected hits the floor or the wall, presenting a bright and dark pattern in the shape of the groove G. This pattern can be easily processed into various shapes depending on the shape of the groove portion G, and provides unprecedented decorative effects. This effect can be obtained even if the permeability of the decorative body Z is low. In addition, if the surface portion F is smooth, the effect of reflection is high, but this is not an essential condition. . A decorative body having a groove portion G and a plate joined thereon, as described in Patent Document A, is known. In Patent Document A, in paragraph 0020 of the specification, the shaped object may be planar plate-shaped, and its surface may be smooth. It describes what may be done. However, Patent Document A does not describe a model having a surface with very slight unevenness and gentle undulations, nor a method or effect for implementing the same. In addition, in the modeled object 3 described in Patent Document A, the surface is wet due to outdoor rainwater and indoor dew condensation, but dust sometimes adheres when the surface is dried. Alternatively, after washing with tap water, minerals and the like contained in tap water sometimes stick to the surface. Moisture wiping can cause scratches. The water repellent spray had a durability problem. The present embodiment may be aimed at reducing stains on such decorations.

装飾体製造装置40又は50のレーザ加工部431が、例えば100W以上の高出力のCOレーザ等の熱加工レーザを用いて、深さ6mm以上の溝部Gを加工すれば、図12aのような開口部O付近の隆起を得やすい。加工速度・パルス周波数等の設定により、材料板20の加工箇所に熱がこもる方がよい。また、本実施形態では、基材部Mと被覆部Tとの接合には、粘着剤・エポキシ樹脂系接着剤・各種ビニル樹脂系接着剤・シリコーン等のエラストマー系接着剤は通常あまり適さない。粘着剤は被覆部Tを基材部Mから浮かせ、上記接着剤は被覆部Tと基材部Mとの隙間を充填したまま、収縮の少なさや弾性変形により表面部Fを平坦に保つからである。ただしこれらも、硬化収縮率が体積で例えば30%以上・基材部Mの隆起部分のz方向の高さhOが例えば0.5mm以上・等の場合にはこの用途に適する。この用途により好適なのは、溶剤を多く(例えば重量比で50%以上)含む接着剤・(メタ)アクリレートを含む接着剤等である。溶剤は、接合時には被着材を膨潤させるが、硬化につれて外部に揮発し、被着材を収縮させる。(メタ)アクリレート、特にMMAを含む接着剤等は硬化収縮率が大きいため、硬化前には凹凸による隙間を充填するが、接着剤が厚い部分ほど硬化後の収縮が大きく、被覆部Tを引き寄せる。何れも結果として、基材部Mの凹凸に沿ってなだらかな起伏を発生させる。接着剤の塗膜が全体に厚いと凹凸の差が出にくいので、凸部分の塗布量が小さいほうがよい。被覆加工部46は、硬化時に100mm当たり例えば2kg重以上の荷重を加えてもよい。なお、本実施形態では充填部Lはあってもなくてもよい。 If the laser processing unit 431 of the decoration manufacturing apparatus 40 or 50 processes a groove G having a depth of 6 mm or more using a thermal processing laser such as a CO 2 laser with a high output of 100 W or more, as shown in FIG. A bump near the opening O is easy to obtain. It is preferable that the heat is confined in the processed portion of the material plate 20 by setting the processing speed, pulse frequency, and the like. In addition, in this embodiment, adhesives, epoxy resin adhesives, various vinyl resin adhesives, and elastomer adhesives such as silicone are generally not suitable for joining the base material portion M and the covering portion T together. This is because the adhesive floats the covering portion T from the base material portion M, and the adhesive maintains the surface portion F flat due to little shrinkage and elastic deformation while filling the gap between the covering portion T and the base material portion M. be. However, these are also suitable for this application when the cure shrinkage rate is, for example, 30% or more in volume and the height hO of the raised portion of the base material portion M in the z direction is, for example, 0.5 mm or more. Adhesives containing a large amount of solvent (for example, 50% or more by weight), adhesives containing (meth)acrylate, and the like are more suitable for this application. The solvent swells the adherends during bonding, but evaporates to the outside as it cures, causing the adherends to shrink. Adhesives containing (meth)acrylate, particularly MMA, have a large cure shrinkage rate, so they fill the gaps due to unevenness before curing, but the thicker the adhesive, the greater the shrinkage after curing, and the more the adhesive is cured, the more the covering part T is drawn. . As a result, all of them generate gentle undulations along the unevenness of the base material portion M. If the coating film of the adhesive is thick as a whole, it is difficult to make a difference in unevenness. The coated portion 46 may apply a load of, for example, 2 kg or more per 100 mm 2 during hardening. In addition, in this embodiment, the filling part L may or may not be present.

開口部Oの肩部の隆起の高さhOは、好ましくは0.5~800μm・より好ましくは1~200μm・さらに好ましくは2.5~50μm・一層好ましくは5~20μmである。被覆部Tの厚さは小さいほど溝部Gの凹凸を反映しやすく、好ましくは3mm以下・より好ましくは2.5mm以下・さらに好ましくは2mm以下である。ただし、被覆部Tが薄すぎたりその曲げ弾性率が低すぎたりすると、開口部Oを架橋する部分が大きく凹みやすい・又は損傷しやすい。これは、装飾体Zの用途によっては好ましくないので、被覆部Tの厚さは好ましくは0.2mm以上・より好ましくは0.5mm以上・さらに好ましくは1mm以上でもよく、被覆部Tの曲げ弾性率は段落0014に記載の基材部Mの曲げ弾性率の範囲の何れかと同じでもよい。これらにより、凸部Yのz方向の高さhYは、好ましくは0.2μm以上・より好ましくは0.4μm以上・さらに好ましくは0.8μm以上となる。凸部Yに沿って水が流れる効果の点からは、高さhYは大きいほどよく、特に制限はない。しかし、装飾性の点からは、高さhYは大きすぎない方がいい場合もあり、好ましくは1000μm以下・より好ましくは300μm以下・さらに好ましくは100μm以下・一層好ましくは10μm以下である。高さhYは凸部Yを溝部Gの幅方向に跨ぐように測定されてもよい。またこの凸部Yの底部から凸部を経た隣の底部までの最短の距離dYは、好ましくは2~30mm・より好ましくは4~20mm・さらに好ましくは6~10mmである。ただし、2つの溝部Gの間の距離が変化する部分では、一方の溝部Gの両側の距離dYが各部で異なる。これらの差が長い方の10%未満となるような位置、つまりなるべく他の溝部Gからは離れた位置での測定が望ましい。これらの測定は、例えば走査型白色干渉法(ISO 25178)により、Zygo Corporation社製のNexview等の三次元表面形状測定機で行われてもよく、依頼試験でもよい。表面部Fの反りは除外されてもよい。この測定が困難な場合、あるいは表面部Fが曲面の場合等には表面粗さ測定でもよい。凸部Yのカットオフλc2.5mm又は0.8mmでの算術平均うねりWは、好ましくは0.1以上・より好ましくは0.2以上・さらに好ましくは0.5以上、好ましくは100以下・より好ましくは10以下、カットオフλc0.8mmでの最大高さうねりWは、好ましくは0.1以上・より好ましくは0.2以上・さらに好ましくは0.3以上、カットオフλc2.5mmでの最大高さうねりWは、好ましくは0.2以上・より好ましくは0.4以上・さらに好ましくは0.8以上、好ましくは100以下・より好ましくは10以下である。凸部Yの算術平均粗さRは、好ましくは0.04以下・より好ましくは0.02以下・さらに好ましくは0.01以下(カットオフλc0.08mm・カットオフλs0.0025mm)、下限は測定限界である(規格等は段落0029等と同様である。)。距離dYは表面うねり測定の解析曲線上の底部間の距離でもよい。 The height hO of the shoulder portion of the opening O is preferably 0.5 to 800 μm, more preferably 1 to 200 μm, still more preferably 2.5 to 50 μm, and even more preferably 5 to 20 μm. The smaller the thickness of the covering portion T, the easier it is to reflect the unevenness of the groove portion G. However, if the covering portion T is too thin or its flexural modulus is too low, the portion bridging the opening O is likely to be greatly dented or damaged. Since this is not preferable depending on the application of the decorative body Z, the thickness of the covering portion T may be preferably 0.2 mm or more, more preferably 0.5 mm or more, still more preferably 1 mm or more. The modulus may be the same as any of the flexural modulus ranges for the base portion M described in paragraph 0014. As a result, the height hY of the protrusion Y in the z direction is preferably 0.2 μm or more, more preferably 0.4 μm or more, and even more preferably 0.8 μm or more. From the point of view of the effect of water flowing along the protrusion Y, the larger the height hY, the better, and there is no particular limitation. However, from the standpoint of decorativeness, the height hY may not be too large, and is preferably 1000 μm or less, more preferably 300 μm or less, still more preferably 100 μm or less, and even more preferably 10 μm or less. The height hY may be measured so as to straddle the protrusion Y in the width direction of the groove G. The shortest distance dY from the bottom of this projection Y to the adjacent bottom via the projection is preferably 2 to 30 mm, more preferably 4 to 20 mm, still more preferably 6 to 10 mm. However, in the portion where the distance between the two grooves G changes, the distance dY on both sides of one of the grooves G differs in each portion. It is desirable to measure at a position where the difference between them is less than 10% of the longer length, that is, at a position away from other grooves G as much as possible. These measurements may be performed, for example, by scanning white light interferometry (ISO 25178) with a three-dimensional profilometer such as Nexview from Zygo Corporation, or may be commissioned. Warping of the surface portion F may be excluded. If this measurement is difficult, or if the surface portion F is curved, the surface roughness may be measured. The arithmetic mean waviness W a at the cutoff λc of the projection Y of 2.5 mm or 0.8 mm is preferably 0.1 or more, more preferably 0.2 or more, still more preferably 0.5 or more, and preferably 100 or less. It is more preferably 10 or less, and the maximum height waviness Wz at a cutoff λc of 0.8 mm is preferably 0.1 or more, more preferably 0.2 or more, and still more preferably 0.3 or more, at a cutoff λc of 2.5 mm. The maximum height waviness Wz of is preferably 0.2 or more, more preferably 0.4 or more, still more preferably 0.8 or more, preferably 100 or less, more preferably 10 or less. The arithmetic mean roughness R a of the convex portion Y is preferably 0.04 or less, more preferably 0.02 or less, and still more preferably 0.01 or less (cutoff λc 0.08 mm, cutoff λs 0.0025 mm), and the lower limit is This is the measurement limit (standards and the like are the same as in paragraph 0029 and the like). The distance dY may be the distance between the bottoms on the analytical curve of the surface waviness measurement.

発明者は、10mm厚のPMMA板(株式会社カナセ製カナセライト#1300)に上記工程により深さ8mmの溝部Gを加工し、接着剤25(キレークレ)によって2mm厚のPMMA板を接着した。凸部YのWは0.9649・0.9162(λc0.8mm)0.9003・0.7441(λc2.5mm)、Wは0.3634・0.2667(λc0.8mm)1.0197・0.7688(λc2.5mm)、距離dYは8.5・9mm、Rは0.0014・0.0016・0.0019であった。この装飾体Zと、表面の最大高さうねりWが0.01未満の通常の平滑なPMMA平板とを、垂直な設置状態における、水滴の乾燥の観点から比較する。後者では平板の表面に水滴が残ったまま乾燥する。これに対し、前者では水が凸部Yを伝って集まり、大きな水滴となって流れ落ちやすく、乾燥前に汚れごと滴下しやすいので、表面が汚れにくい。凸部Yは、正面からでは全く目につかず、装飾体としての機能に影響を及ぼさない。一方、斜めから観察された場合には上記の映り込みや反射の効果を奏する。また、視点Eが装飾体Zを大きな視線角度で観察する場合、溝部Gは見えないか見えにくいことが多い。その理由はこうである。溝部Gから表面部Fへ向かう光は、表面部Fで反射して装飾体Zの内部に戻る成分と、表面部Fで屈折して外側へ出射する成分とに分かれる。視線角度が大きいほど、観察者に届く後者の成分は減少するので、視線の反対方向から来て表面部Fで反射した光RLにかき消されてしまうからである。ところが、本実施形態によれば、当の表面部Fで反射した光RLが、溝部Gの形状に基づく表面部Fの凹凸によって強弱を有することで、溝部Gと同じ模様等が別のかたちで観察可能となる。これにより、装飾体Zの装飾がより広い範囲で観察可能になるという効果が得られる。本実施形態は他の実施形態との組み合わせで特に効果的である。 The inventor processed a 10 mm thick PMMA plate (Kanacelite #1300 manufactured by Kanase Co., Ltd.) with a groove G having a depth of 8 mm by the above process, and bonded the 2 mm thick PMMA plate with an adhesive 25 (Kirekure). Wa of the projection Y is 0.9649 0.9162 (λc0.8mm) 0.9003 0.7441 (λc2.5mm), Wz is 0.3634 0.2667 (λc0.8mm) 1.0197 · 0.7688 (λc 2.5 mm), the distance dY was 8.5 · 9 mm, and Ra was 0.0014 · 0.0016 · 0.0019 . This decorative body Z is compared with a normal smooth PMMA flat plate having a surface maximum height waviness Wz of less than 0.01 from the viewpoint of drying of water droplets in a vertically installed state. The latter dries with water droplets remaining on the surface of the flat plate. On the other hand, in the former case, water gathers along the protrusions Y, becomes large water droplets, and tends to run off. The projection Y is completely invisible from the front and does not affect the function as a decoration. On the other hand, when observed obliquely, the above effects of reflection and reflection are exhibited. Further, when the viewing point E observes the decorative body Z at a large viewing angle, the groove G is often invisible or difficult to see. The reason is as follows. The light traveling from the groove portion G to the surface portion F is divided into a component that is reflected by the surface portion F and returns to the inside of the decorative body Z, and a component that is refracted by the surface portion F and emitted to the outside. This is because, as the line-of-sight angle increases, the latter component reaching the observer decreases, and is therefore drowned out by the light RL coming from the opposite direction of the line of sight and reflected by the surface portion F. However, according to the present embodiment, the light RL reflected by the corresponding surface portion F has intensity due to the unevenness of the surface portion F based on the shape of the groove portion G, so that the same pattern as that of the groove portion G is formed in a different form. becomes observable. This provides an effect that the decoration of the decorative body Z can be observed in a wider range. This embodiment is particularly effective in combination with other embodiments.

請求の範囲控。項1:表面部(F)と、前記表面部(F)に対向する裏面部(R)と、を有する装飾体(Z)であって、前記表面部又は前記裏面部の少なくとも一方がなだらかな凸部(Y)を有し、前記凸部の底部から頂部を経た隣の底部までの前記少なくとも一方に平行な方向の最短距離が2~30mmであり、前記凸部の前記少なくとも一方に垂直な方向の高さが0.2μm以上かつ/又は前記凸部のカットオフλc2.5mmでの最大高さうねりWが0.2μm以上であることを特徴とする装飾体。項2:前記凸部の算術平均粗さRが0.04μm以下である、項1に記載の装飾体。項3:前記装飾体が前記表面部と前記裏面部との間に外側に露出しない溝部(G)を有し、前記凸部が前記溝部に沿う形状である、項1又は2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記垂直な方向に重なる複数の層よりなり、前記複数の層のうち前記少なくとも一方を含む被覆部(T)の前記垂直な方向の厚さが1mm以上である、項1~3の何れかに記載の装飾体。項5:前記複数の層が基材部(M)を含み、前記基材部が前記溝部を有し、前記被覆部と前記基材部との間に接着剤(A)を有し、前記接着剤が(メタ)アクリレートを含む、項4に記載の装飾体。項6:前記基材部が樹脂によってなる、項1~5の何れかに記載の装飾体。項7:少なくとも一部が透過性を有する、項1~6の何れかに記載の装飾体。項8:複数の材料(20)を接合する被覆加工部(46)を具え、上記の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造装置(40・50)。項9:複数の材料を接合する被覆加工工程(S46)を具え、上記の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造方法。 Claim copy. Item 1: A decorative body (Z) having a surface portion (F) and a back surface portion (R) facing the surface portion (F), wherein at least one of the surface portion and the back surface portion is smooth. It has a projection (Y), the shortest distance in a direction parallel to said at least one of said projections from the bottom of said projection to the adjacent bottom via the top is 2 to 30 mm, and perpendicular to said at least one of said projections A decorative body characterized by having a height of 0.2 μm or more in a direction and/or having a maximum height undulation Wz of 0.2 μm or more at a cutoff λc of 2.5 mm of the projection. Item 2: The decorative body according to Item 1, wherein the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the convex portion is 0.04 μm or less. Item 3: The decoration according to item 1 or 2, wherein the decorative body has a groove (G) that is not exposed to the outside between the surface portion and the back surface portion, and the convex portion has a shape along the groove portion. body. Item 4: Of items 1 to 3, wherein the thickness in the vertical direction of the covering portion (T) comprising a plurality of layers overlapping in the vertical direction and including at least one of the layers is 1 mm or more. A decoration according to any one of the above. Item 5: The plurality of layers includes a substrate portion (M), the substrate portion has the groove portion, an adhesive (A) is provided between the covering portion and the substrate portion, and the Item 5. A decoration according to Item 4, wherein the adhesive contains (meth)acrylate. Item 6: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 5, wherein the base material portion is made of a resin. Item 7: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 6, at least a part of which is permeable. Item 8: A decoration manufacturing apparatus (40, 50) for manufacturing the above-described decoration, comprising a covering processing section (46) for joining a plurality of materials (20). Item 9: A decoration manufacturing method comprising a covering step (S46) of joining a plurality of materials to manufacture the above decoration.

《第9の実施形態》
従来、特開2020-66133号公報に記載の発明のように、グリッターを使用した加飾画像が知られている。しかしこの加飾画像は、紙等を支持体とし、表面の保護がないか弱く、自立に耐える強度も耐候性も有さなかった。本実施形態は、安価かつ容易に製造可能な、着色された樹脂材料・装飾体の提供を課題としてもよい。
<<Ninth Embodiment>>
Conventionally, decorative images using glitter are known, such as the invention described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-66133. However, this decorative image uses a paper or the like as a support, has no or weak surface protection, and neither has the strength to stand on its own or weather resistance. The object of the present embodiment may be to provide a colored resin material/decorative body that can be manufactured inexpensively and easily.

本実施形態では、装飾体Zは基材上層M7及び基材下層M9によってなり、その間に扁平着色剤Cを有する。扁平着色剤Cは、両側から保護されているため、剥落・褪色しにくい。基材上層M7及び基材下層M9が接着層Aを挟み、接着層Aが扁平着色剤Cを含んでもよい。溶剤のみからなる接着剤25による接合の場合、接着層Aがないことがある。扁平着色剤Cは特に限定されないが、例えばアルミニウム・酸化アルミニウム・チタン・酸化チタン・金・銀・銅・ニッケル・コバルト・鉄・クロム・スズ・亜鉛・インジウム・二酸化ケイ素のうち少なくとも何れかを含んでもよく、さらに樹脂等の被膜を外側に有してもよく、ガラスや樹脂の薄片でもよく、さらに上記金属等の被膜を外側に有してもよく、マイカ・合成マイカでもよい。具体的には、ダイヤ工業株式会社製のダイヤモンドピース等の既知のグリッター製品から、所望の色・透明度・サイズ・形状の製品の1つ以上が用いられてもよい。金属を含むグリッターは、主として金属による正反射である金属光沢を呈し、他の部分とは大きく異なる色や輝きを放つ。これが加飾性を向上させる。グリッターの金属光沢は、光源方向の変化に伴って各微小部分の反射光が見えたり見えなかったりすることで識別可能である。また金属光沢では、反射光が偏光しないので、偏光フィルタを通した観察時に偏光フィルタの角度が変化しても反射状態が変化しない。金属光沢は、この特徴により、樹脂・ガラス等の反射とは区別される。 In this embodiment, the decorative body Z is composed of a base material upper layer M7 and a base material lower layer M9, and has a flat colorant C therebetween. Since the flat colorant C is protected from both sides, it is difficult to peel off and discolor. An adhesive layer A may be sandwiched between the substrate upper layer M7 and the substrate lower layer M9, and the adhesive layer A may contain the flat coloring agent C. In the case of bonding with the adhesive 25 consisting of only a solvent, the adhesive layer A may not be present. The flat colorant C is not particularly limited, but includes at least one of aluminum, aluminum oxide, titanium, titanium oxide, gold, silver, copper, nickel, cobalt, iron, chromium, tin, zinc, indium, and silicon dioxide. Further, it may have a film such as resin on the outside, it may be a thin piece of glass or resin, it may have a film such as the above metal on the outside, or it may be mica or synthetic mica. Specifically, one or more of the desired color, transparency, size, and shape may be used from known glitter products such as diamond pieces manufactured by Dia Kogyo Co., Ltd. Glitter containing metal mainly exhibits metallic luster, which is specular reflection by the metal, and emits a color and shine that are significantly different from those of other parts. This improves the decorativeness. The metallic luster of the glitter can be discerned by the visible or invisible reflection of each minute portion as the direction of the light source changes. In addition, since reflected light is not polarized with metallic luster, the reflection state does not change even if the angle of the polarizing filter changes during observation through the polarizing filter. Metallic luster is distinguished from the reflection of resin, glass, etc. by this feature.

扁平着色剤Cはグリッターに限られず、正方形・長方形等に裁断された色つきフィルムでもよい。扁平着色剤Cは一般の顔料でもよいが、より大きく扁平な薄片であれば視認性が向上する。この薄片の最大の長さlCは、好ましくは0.05mm以上・より好ましくは0.1mm以上・さらに好ましくは0.2mm以上、上限は制限されないが、製造コストから例えば10mm以下でもよく、装飾体Zのサイズが大きい場合には50mm以下でもよい。ただし、この長さが接着層Aの厚さに対して大きいほど、複数の扁平着色剤C粒子の方向が揃って一律の反射状態を呈する傾向がある。接着層Aの薄さと、多様な方向への反射効果の両立のためには、最大長さlCは、好ましくは2mm以下・より好ましくは1mm以下・さらに好ましくは0.5mm以下でもよい。図13aに示すように、扁平着色剤Cにおいて、最大長さlCの中点を通り最大長さlCの方向に直交する断面の径のうち前記中点を通る最も短い長さを厚さtCとすると、最大長さlC/厚さtCは5以上が好ましく、10以上がより好ましく、20以上がさらに好ましく、40以上が一層好ましい。これらの測定は走査型電子顕微鏡で試料を各方向から観察して行ってもよく、段落0016と同様でもよい。 The flat colorant C is not limited to glitter, and may be a colored film cut into squares, rectangles, or the like. The flat colorant C may be a general pigment, but the visibility is improved if the flakes are larger and flatter. The maximum length lC of the thin piece is preferably 0.05 mm or more, more preferably 0.1 mm or more, and still more preferably 0.2 mm or more, and the upper limit is not limited, but from the viewpoint of manufacturing cost, it may be 10 mm or less. If the size of Z is large, it may be 50 mm or less. However, as this length increases with respect to the thickness of the adhesive layer A, there is a tendency that the directions of the plurality of flat colorant C particles are aligned and a uniform reflection state is exhibited. In order to achieve both the thinness of the adhesive layer A and the reflection effect in various directions, the maximum length lC may be preferably 2 mm or less, more preferably 1 mm or less, and even more preferably 0.5 mm or less. As shown in FIG. 13a, in the flat colorant C, the thickness tC is the shortest length of the diameter of a cross section passing through the midpoint of the maximum length lC and orthogonal to the direction of the maximum length lC. Then, the maximum length lC/thickness tC is preferably 5 or more, more preferably 10 or more, still more preferably 20 or more, and even more preferably 40 or more. These measurements may be performed by observing the sample from each direction with a scanning electron microscope, and may be the same as in paragraph 0016.

このように扁平着色剤Cの面積が大きいため、通常のμmオーダー以下の顔料と異なり、それぞれの粒子とその反射が視認可能となる。扁平着色剤Cが金属光沢を有する場合に、加飾効果がより顕著である。また、通常の顔料が、微粒子のためファンデルワールス力等により凝集しやすく、分散のために分散剤Dや粉砕工程を要するのと異なり、扁平着色剤Cは容易に分散可能である。さらに、扁平着色剤Cが扁平であるため、接着層Aが薄くなり、接着層Aと金属を含む扁平着色剤Cとの膨張率の差から、温度変化によって剥離することが少ない。扁平着色剤Cは密集せず、無地の部分より少ない方が、無地の部分を引き立て、装飾体Zに視覚的変化を与える。求める加飾性によっては、接着層Aの面積に占める扁平着色剤Cの面積の割合は、好ましくは50%以下・より好ましくは30%以下・さらに好ましくは10%以下でもよく、1%以上でもよい。これは装飾体Zのスキャン画像において扁平着色剤Cの色を色域選択した割合の合計から測定できる。装飾体Zの一部ではこの割合以上に扁平着色剤Cが偏在し、画像等を表示してもよい。 Since the area of the flat colorant C is large in this manner, each particle and its reflection can be visually recognized, unlike ordinary pigments of μm order or less. The decorative effect is more pronounced when the flat colorant C has a metallic luster. In addition, unlike normal pigments, which are fine particles, tend to aggregate due to Van der Waals forces and the like, and require a dispersant D and a pulverization process for dispersion, the flat colorant C can be easily dispersed. Furthermore, since the flat colorant C is flat, the adhesive layer A is thin, and due to the difference in expansion coefficient between the adhesive layer A and the flat colorant C containing metal, peeling due to temperature changes is less likely. The flat colorant C is not densely packed, and the less the flat colorant C is than the plain part, the more the plain part is enhanced and the decorative body Z is given a visual change. Depending on the desired decorative properties, the ratio of the area of the flat colorant C to the area of the adhesive layer A is preferably 50% or less, more preferably 30% or less, and even more preferably 10% or less, or 1% or more. good. This can be measured from the sum of ratios in which the color of the flat coloring agent C in the scanned image of the decoration Z is selected in the color gamut. In some parts of the decorative body Z, the flat coloring agent C may be unevenly distributed in a proportion equal to or higher than this ratio to display an image or the like.

基材上層M7と基材下層M9とで、色・透過率(全光線透過率)・ヘーズ等が同じでもよく、異なってもよい。それらの相違は段落0060・0062等における上層材料板201及び下層材料板202に係る記載の範囲と同じでもよい。また、基材下層M9のL色空間におけるL値が、好ましくは30以下・より好ましくは20以下・さらに好ましくは10以下でもよい(CM‐5、反射光測定、SCE、D65、10°視野)。例えば基材上層M7が無色透明で基材下層M9が不透明の黒であれば、黒地と扁平着色剤Cとで色や反射のコントラストが特に大きくなる。基材下層M9が骨白等であっても、透明の場合より扁平着色剤Cが鮮明に見える。また、装飾体Zが溝部Gを有し、その全反射光が扁平着色剤Cに当たる場合(特に扁平着色剤Cと溝部Gとの最短距離が深さdG以下の場合)、その部分で扁平着色剤Cからの反射光の輝度がより高くなり、加飾性が一際増す。装飾体Zが基材上層M7と基材下層M9との間に基材中層M8を有してもよく、さらに基材中層M8が溝部Gを有してもよい(図13b)。扁平着色剤Cを含む接着層Aは基材上層M7と基材中層M8の間にあってもよく、基材下層M9と基材中層M8の間にあってもよく、それら両方でもよい。前者では扁平着色剤Cの影が基材下層M9に映り、後者では側面Sの全反射光が扁平着色剤Cに当たり、輝く扁平着色剤Cが側面Sに映って見える。側面Sが段落0029に記載の算術平均粗さR又は最大高さ粗さRや片面/両面全反射角の条件を満たしていれば、この効果がより高い。端面Xでも同様の効果が得られる。そのためには、端面Xの少なくとも一部と表面部F又は裏面部Rの少なくとも一方とのなす角度が、好ましくは70~110°・より好ましくは80~100°・さらに好ましくは85~95°でもよい。さらに基材上層M7又は基材中層M8の少なくとも一方の厚さが好ましくは1mm以上・より好ましくは1.4mm以上・さらに好ましくは1.8mm以上・一層好ましくは2.7mm以上であれば、観察者(図示しない)がこの装飾体Zを斜め方向から見た時、端面Xと表面部Fとで、基材上層M7・基材中層M8の屈折の作用により、扁平着色剤Cの層(又は第10の実施形態における加飾基材層MD・色面層U)等の見え方が変化する。これにより立体感効果が得られる。この効果は通常の顔料でも得られる。基材上層M7・基材中層M8の全光線透過率が段落0015に記載の範囲であるか、端面Xが段落0029に記載の算術平均粗さR又は最大高さ粗さRの何れかの条件を満たしていれば、この効果がより明瞭に見える。接着層Aとそれに接する層との屈折率の差が好ましくは0.05以上・より好ましくは0.1以上・さらに好ましくは0.15以上であれば、また、基材上層M7・基材中層M8の厚さにより紫外線の透過量が減り、扁平着色剤C等の褪色が減少する。基材上層M7・基材中層M8がPMMAの場合、特に紫外線遮断作用が大きい。加えて、基材下層M9の厚さが好ましくは1mm以上・より好ましくは1.4mm以上・さらに好ましくは1.8mm以上であれば、扁平着色剤Cへの保護が強化され、屋外でも充分な耐久性が得られる。上記厚さの範囲の層どうしの接合部分、又はそれらの層と接着層Aとが直接接する場合の3層の間の2つの接合部分が化学拡散接合でもよい。これにより屋外でも充分な耐剥離性が得られる。それらの層と接着層Aとの間に別の層が挟まれ、それらの間の各接合部分が化学拡散接合でもよいが、製造コストが増大するのでそうでなくてもよい。基材上層M7・基材中層M8・基材下層M9の少なくとも何れかが段落0014に記載の曲げ弾性率の条件を満たせば、看板等に使用可能な強度を有する。なお、装飾体Zの基材部Mにおいて、扁平着色剤Cの有無・屈折率・透過率・組成の少なくとも何れかが異なっていれば、それらは異なる層である。扁平着色剤Cが分散された樹脂モノマーが板状に成形された樹脂板では、後述のような扁平着色剤Cと樹脂モノマーとの比重の差により、扁平着色剤Cが表面ないし裏面の一方に偏って分布することがある。この場合、樹脂部分の屈折率・色・組成は略同一であること、扁平着色剤Cの粗密は板の厚さ方向に連続的に変化し特段の境界部分がないことから、この板は1層である。 The color, transmittance (total light transmittance), haze, etc. of the base material upper layer M7 and the base material lower layer M9 may be the same or different. The differences between them may be the same as those described for the upper layer material plate 201 and the lower layer material plate 202 in paragraphs 0060 and 0062. In addition, the L value of the base material lower layer M9 in the L * a * b * color space may be preferably 30 or less, more preferably 20 or less, still more preferably 10 or less (CM-5, reflected light measurement, SCE, D65 , 10° field of view). For example, if the base material upper layer M7 is colorless and transparent and the base material lower layer M9 is opaque black, the contrast of color and reflection between the black background and the flat coloring agent C is particularly large. Even if the base material lower layer M9 is bone white or the like, the flat colorant C can be seen more clearly than when the base material lower layer M9 is transparent. Further, when the decorative body Z has a groove portion G and the totally reflected light hits the flat coloring agent C (especially when the shortest distance between the flat coloring agent C and the groove portion G is the depth dG or less), flat coloring occurs at that portion. The brightness of the reflected light from the agent C is further increased, and the decorativeness is remarkably increased. The decoration Z may have a substrate middle layer M8 between the substrate upper layer M7 and the substrate lower layer M9, and the substrate middle layer M8 may further have a groove portion G (FIG. 13b). The adhesive layer A containing the flat colorant C may be between the substrate upper layer M7 and the substrate middle layer M8, between the substrate lower layer M9 and the substrate middle layer M8, or both. In the former, the shadow of the flat coloring agent C appears on the base material lower layer M9, and in the latter, the flat coloring agent C is reflected on the side surface S as the total reflected light of the side surface S strikes the flat coloring agent C. If the side surface S satisfies the conditions of the arithmetic mean roughness Ra or the maximum height roughness Rz and the single-sided/double-sided total reflection angle described in Paragraph 0029, this effect is enhanced. A similar effect can be obtained for the end surface X as well. For this purpose, the angle formed by at least part of the end face X and at least one of the front face F or the back face R is preferably 70 to 110°, more preferably 80 to 100°, and even more preferably 85 to 95°. good. Furthermore, if the thickness of at least one of the base material upper layer M7 or the base material middle layer M8 is preferably 1 mm or more, more preferably 1.4 mm or more, more preferably 1.8 mm or more, and even more preferably 2.7 mm or more, observation When a person (not shown) views this decoration Z from an oblique direction, a layer of flat colorant C (or The appearance of the decorative base material layer MD, the color surface layer U), etc. in the tenth embodiment changes. Thereby, a three-dimensional effect can be obtained. This effect can also be obtained with ordinary pigments. The total light transmittance of the base material upper layer M7 and the base material middle layer M8 is within the range described in paragraph 0015, or the end face X has either the arithmetic mean roughness Ra or the maximum height roughness Rz described in paragraph 0029 This effect can be seen more clearly if the condition of If the difference in refractive index between the adhesive layer A and the layer in contact therewith is preferably 0.05 or more, more preferably 0.1 or more, and still more preferably 0.15 or more, the base material upper layer M7 and the base material middle layer The thickness of M8 reduces the transmission amount of ultraviolet rays and reduces the fading of the flat colorant C and the like. When the base material upper layer M7 and the base material middle layer M8 are made of PMMA, the UV shielding effect is particularly large. In addition, if the thickness of the base material lower layer M9 is preferably 1 mm or more, more preferably 1.4 mm or more, and even more preferably 1.8 mm or more, the protection against the flat colorant C is enhanced, and the thickness is sufficient even outdoors. Provides durability. Chemical diffusion bonding may be applied to the bonding portion between the layers within the above thickness range, or two bonding portions between the three layers when those layers and the adhesive layer A are in direct contact. As a result, sufficient peeling resistance can be obtained even outdoors. Another layer may be sandwiched between those layers and the adhesive layer A, and each joint between them may be a chemical diffusion bond, but this may not be the case as the manufacturing cost increases. If at least one of the base material upper layer M7, the base material middle layer M8, and the base material lower layer M9 satisfies the flexural modulus condition described in paragraph 0014, it has a strength that can be used for signboards and the like. If at least one of the presence/absence of the flat colorant C, the refractive index, the transmittance, and the composition is different in the base material portion M of the decoration Z, they are different layers. In a resin plate in which a resin monomer in which a flat colorant C is dispersed is molded into a plate shape, the flat colorant C is formed on one of the front surface and the back surface due to the difference in specific gravity between the flat colorant C and the resin monomer as described later. It may be distributed unevenly. In this case, the refractive index, color, and composition of the resin portion are substantially the same, and the density of the flat colorant C changes continuously in the thickness direction of the plate, and there is no particular boundary portion. layer.

本実施形態では、散布部51が基材下層M9となる材料板209に扁平着色剤Cをふるい等で散らし(S51)、貼合部52が接着剤25を塗布して基材上層M7となる材料板207を接合してもよい(S52)。材料板209及び材料板207は、上記各実施形態の基材部M等と同様、市販のPMMA・PC等の平板でもよい。散布部51が接着剤25の塗布後に扁平着色剤Cを散布してもよい。接着剤25の粘度や扁平着色剤Cの比重等により適した工程は異なるが、段落0056記載の接着剤25と、日本防湿工業株式会社製のアストロフレークやダイヤモンドピースHのような、アルミ箔からなる扁平着色剤Cの場合、あらかじめの散布がよい。この場合、散布部51が画像30に基づき扁平着色剤Cで模様等を描画しておき、その上から接着剤25を滴下することができる。その際、扁平着色剤Cの比重は、好ましくは2以上・より好ましくは2.4以上でもよく、比重が大きいほど扁平着色剤Cが動きにくいので、絵柄が崩れにくい。比重はアルキメデス法で計測可能である。それによるとダイヤモンドピースH‐570ゴールドは比重2.5であり、MMAを含む接着剤25内で沈むためこの用途に適する。あるいは扁平着色剤Cの厚さのうち金属部分の厚さが好ましくは50%~100%・より好ましくは70%~100%・さらに好ましくは80%~100%でもよい。散布部51は画像30に基づいて各部の扁平着色剤Cの粗密や色調を調整してもよく、設定に応じて全体の扁平着色剤Cの密度や色調を調整してもよい。扁平着色剤Cがあらかじめ基材上層M7・基材中層M8・基材下層M9の少なくとも何れかに混錬されていてもよい。その場合のみ、接着層A以外の層は扁平着色剤Cを含む。接着層Aの代わりに基材中層M8が扁平着色剤Cをあらかじめ含んでもよい。接着剤25が上記キレークレ等であれば、従来困難であった無気泡面接着が可能であるから、接合面の気泡が高透過性部分から見えるのを防げる。接合面に気泡つまり接合されず反射状態が他の接合部分と異なる部分がないか、気泡の最大の長さ/装飾体Zの厚さ(又は加飾基材層MDの厚さ)が好ましくは10以下・より好ましくは5以下・さらに好ましくは3以下でもよい。表面部Fの算術平均粗さRが、段落0081の凸部Yに係る記載と同じ範囲でもよく、これにより透過性が向上する。 In the present embodiment, the distribution unit 51 scatters the flat colorant C on the material plate 209 that will become the base material lower layer M9 using a sieve or the like (S51), and the bonding unit 52 applies the adhesive 25 to form the base material upper layer M7. The material plate 207 may be joined (S52). The material plate 209 and the material plate 207 may be flat plates such as commercially available PMMA/PC, like the base member M and the like in each of the above-described embodiments. The spraying section 51 may spray the flat colorant C after the adhesive 25 is applied. Although the suitable process differs depending on the viscosity of the adhesive 25 and the specific gravity of the flat coloring agent C, etc., the adhesive 25 described in paragraph 0056 and aluminum foil such as Astroflake and Diamond Piece H manufactured by Nihon Moisture Industry Co., Ltd. In the case of the flat colorant C, it is preferable to spray it in advance. In this case, the spraying unit 51 can draw a pattern or the like with the flat colorant C based on the image 30, and the adhesive 25 can be dripped thereon. At that time, the specific gravity of the flat coloring agent C is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2.4 or more. The specific gravity can be measured by the Archimedes method. Diamond Piece H-570 Gold according to it has a specific gravity of 2.5 and is suitable for this application because it sinks in the adhesive 25 containing MMA. Alternatively, the thickness of the metal portion of the thickness of the flat colorant C may be preferably 50% to 100%, more preferably 70% to 100%, and even more preferably 80% to 100%. The distribution unit 51 may adjust the density and color tone of the flat colorant C in each portion based on the image 30, or may adjust the density and color tone of the entire flat colorant C according to the settings. The flat colorant C may be kneaded in advance in at least one of the substrate upper layer M7, the substrate middle layer M8, and the substrate lower layer M9. Only in that case, the layers other than the adhesive layer A contain the flat colorant C. Instead of the adhesive layer A, the base material middle layer M8 may contain the flat colorant C in advance. If the adhesive 25 is Kirekure or the like, air bubble-free surface adhesion, which has been difficult in the past, can be achieved, so air bubbles on the joint surface can be prevented from being seen through the highly permeable portion. It is preferable that there are no bubbles on the joint surface, i.e., a portion that is not joined and the reflection state is different from that of other joints. It may be 10 or less, more preferably 5 or less, still more preferably 3 or less. The arithmetic mean roughness R a of the surface portion F may be in the same range as described for the convex portion Y in paragraph 0081, thereby improving the transparency.

散布部51が100重量部の接着剤25に0.1~3重量部程度の扁平着色剤Cを混合攪拌してから材料板209に塗布し、さらに貼合部52が材料板207を接合してもよい。ここで、扁平着色剤Cが金属箔を母材とする場合、比重が大きいために接着剤25内で沈降し、それぞれの面の方向が材料板209と平行に近くなる。一方、樹脂フィルムを母材とする扁平着色剤Cは、金属箔より比重が小さいため、攪拌直後は沈降せず、多様な方向を向いたまま浮遊する。硬化までの時間が充分に短ければ、接着層Aにおいてもその方向のランダムネスが残り、顕著なグリッター効果を呈する。株式会社クラチ製のピカエースのうちラメやシャイン各色のように、真空蒸着で金属膜が形成されたタイプは、この用途に適する。また、扁平着色剤Cの比重が接着剤25の比重に対して小さすぎると、扁平着色剤Cが液中で浮き上がってしまい、材料板207と平行になることがある。これを避けるには両者の比重が近い方がよい。そのためには、前記扁平着色剤が金属膜を有する樹脂片であって、前記最も短い長さ方向において、樹脂片部分の厚さ/金属膜の厚さが好ましくは1以上・より好ましくは2以上・さらに好ましくは4以上・一層好ましくは8以上であるか、前記扁平着色剤Cの比重が好ましくは0.6~2・より好ましくは0.7~1.8・さらに好ましくは0.8~1.5であるか(ピカエースは比重1.4であり、上記MMAを含む接着剤25に混合攪拌後の接着層A中で良好に分散する。)、前記扁平着色剤の比重/接着層の比重が好ましくは2/3~1.5・より好ましくは0.75~1.3・さらに好ましくは0.8~1.2であるか、の少なくとも何れかであればよい。また、前記複数の基材層の接合面に垂直な方向において、前記接着層の厚さが好ましくは0.01mm以上・より好ましくは0.02mm以上・さらに好ましくは0.05mm以上であるか、前記接着層の厚さ/前記最も短い長さが好ましくは5以上・より好ましくは10以上・さらに好ましくは20以上であるか、の少なくとも一方でもよい。さらに、扁平着色剤Cが、最大長さlC・最大長さlC方向及び厚さtC方向に直交する方向の長さ・の両方が好ましくは0.15mm以上・より好ましくは0.3mm以上の粉体を含んでいれば、表面積の大きさにより、上記の各種接着剤25の流動につれて浮遊するので、均一に近い分布が得られる。散布部51は、扁平着色剤Cを含む接着剤25・それを含まない接着剤25・別の色のそれを含む接着剤25等を混合して、扁平着色剤Cの分布状態や色味を各部で変更してもよい。これらにより、グリッター調であって、平滑面で、小型から大型まで任意のサイズの装飾体Zが、低コストで容易に、かつ小ロットで製造可能である。その際、加熱ないし軟化による材料板20の変形・射出成形・押出成形・キャスト成形等の工程は不要である。金属箔を母材とする扁平着色剤C及び樹脂を母材とする扁平着色剤Cの混合も可能である。射出成形等による背景技術の場合、扁平なグリッターの方向は完全にランダムである。しかし、光を反射しない時のグリッターは暗く低彩度に見えて、装飾体Z全体の加飾性を下げるので、反射に寄与しないグリッターは少ないほうがよい。本実施形態では、反射が見える視線角度が大きい(表面部Fに対して傾斜した)扁平着色剤Cほど少なく分布するので、不要な扁平着色剤Cが少なく、射出成形等より有利である。接着層Aの厚さ及びそれに伴う扁平着色剤Cの方向のランダムネスは、接合時の加圧等により調節可能である。 The spreading unit 51 mixes and agitates approximately 0.1 to 3 parts by weight of the flat coloring agent C with 100 parts by weight of the adhesive 25, and then applies the mixture to the material plate 209. may Here, when the flat colorant C uses a metal foil as a base material, it settles in the adhesive 25 due to its high specific gravity, and the direction of each surface becomes nearly parallel to the material plate 209 . On the other hand, the flat colorant C, which has a resin film as a base material, has a lower specific gravity than the metal foil, so it does not settle immediately after stirring, but floats in various directions. If the time until curing is sufficiently short, the adhesive layer A also retains randomness in that direction, exhibiting a remarkable glitter effect. Among Pika Ace products manufactured by Kurachi Co., Ltd., types with a metal film formed by vacuum deposition, such as lame and shine colors, are suitable for this application. Also, if the specific gravity of the flat coloring agent C is too small relative to the specific gravity of the adhesive 25 , the flat coloring agent C may float in the liquid and become parallel to the material plate 207 . In order to avoid this, it is better that the specific gravities of the two are close to each other. For this purpose, the flat colorant is a resin piece having a metal film, and the ratio of the thickness of the resin piece portion to the thickness of the metal film in the shortest length direction is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more. More preferably 4 or more More preferably 8 or more, or the specific gravity of the flat colorant C is preferably 0.6 to 2 More preferably 0.7 to 1.8 More preferably 0.8 to 1.5 (Pika Ace has a specific gravity of 1.4 and is well dispersed in the adhesive layer A after being mixed and stirred with the adhesive 25 containing MMA), or the specific gravity of the flat colorant/adhesive layer The specific gravity is preferably 2/3 to 1.5, more preferably 0.75 to 1.3, still more preferably 0.8 to 1.2. Further, the thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably 0.01 mm or more, more preferably 0.02 mm or more, and still more preferably 0.05 mm or more in the direction perpendicular to the bonding surfaces of the plurality of base material layers, At least one of the ratio of the thickness of the adhesive layer to the shortest length may be preferably 5 or more, more preferably 10 or more, and still more preferably 20 or more. Furthermore, the flat colorant C is a powder having a maximum length lC, a length in a direction perpendicular to the maximum length lC direction and a direction perpendicular to the thickness tC direction, both of which are preferably 0.15 mm or more, more preferably 0.3 mm or more. If it contains a body, it floats along with the flow of the above various adhesives 25 due to the size of the surface area, so a nearly uniform distribution can be obtained. The spraying unit 51 mixes the adhesive 25 containing the flat coloring agent C, the adhesive 25 not containing the flat coloring agent C, the adhesive 25 containing the flat coloring agent C of another color, and the like, and distributes the distribution state and color of the flat coloring agent C. Each part may be changed. As a result, the glitter-like, smooth-surfaced decorative body Z of any size from small to large can be easily manufactured at low cost and in small lots. At that time, processes such as deformation of the material plate 20 due to heating or softening, injection molding, extrusion molding, and cast molding are unnecessary. It is also possible to mix the flat colorant C with a metal foil as a base material and the flat colorant C with a resin as a base material. In the background art, such as by injection molding, the direction of flat glitter is completely random. However, when the glitter does not reflect light, it looks dark and low in chroma, lowering the decorativeness of the decoration Z as a whole. In this embodiment, the larger the line-of-sight angle at which the reflection can be seen (tilted with respect to the surface portion F), the less the flat coloring agent C is distributed. The thickness of the adhesive layer A and the accompanying randomness in the direction of the flat colorant C can be adjusted by applying pressure or the like during bonding.

請求の範囲控。項1:層状に重なって接合された複数の基材層を有し、前記複数の基材層の少なくとも一部が透過性を有し、前記複数の基材層の少なくとも何れかが扁平着色剤を含み、前記扁平着色剤の色が前記複数の基材層の色と異なり、前記複数の基材層の少なくとも何れかの曲げ弾性率が700Mpa以上であることを特徴とする装飾体。項2:前記複数の基材層のうち前記扁平着色剤を含む層を挟む両側の基材層のそれぞれ1つ以上の曲げ弾性率が700Mpa以上である、項1に記載の装飾体。項3:前記扁平着色剤の各々の粒子において、最大の長さが、前記最大の長さの中点を通り前記最大の長さ方向に直交する断面の径のうち前記中点を通る最も短い長さの5倍以上である、項1又は2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記扁平着色剤の各々の粒子の最大の長さが0.02mm以上である、項1~3の何れかに記載の装飾体。項5:前記扁平着色剤を含む層を挟む複数の層の間が化学拡散接合である、項1~4の何れかに記載の装飾体。項6:前記複数の基材層の一部の透過性が前記透過性を有する基材層の透過性より低い、項1~5の何れかに記載の装飾体。項7:前記透過性を有する基材層の前記接合部分の接合面に垂直な方向の厚さが1mm以上である、項1~6の何れかに記載の装飾体。項8:前記扁平着色剤を含む層を挟む両側の基材層の前記接合部分の接合面に垂直な方向の厚さがそれぞれ1mm以上である、項1~7の何れかに記載の装飾体。項9:前記扁平着色剤を含む層の前記接合部分の接合面に垂直な方向の厚さが1mm以上である、項1~8の何れかに記載の装飾体。項10:前記扁平着色剤が金属光沢を有する、項1~9の何れかに記載の装飾体。項11:材料と扁平着色剤とを合わせる散布部と、材料を接合する貼合部と、を有し、それらにより項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造装置。項12:材料と扁平着色剤とを合わせる散布工程と、材料を接合する貼合工程と、を有し、それらにより項1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造方法。
《第10の実施形態》
Claim copy. Item 1: It has a plurality of base material layers that are layered and joined together, at least a part of the plurality of base material layers has transparency, and at least one of the plurality of base material layers is a flat colorant. wherein the color of the flat coloring agent is different from the color of the plurality of base material layers, and at least one of the plurality of base material layers has a flexural modulus of 700 Mpa or more. Item 2: The decorative body according to Item 1, wherein one or more of the plurality of substrate layers sandwiching the layer containing the flat colorant has a bending elastic modulus of 700 Mpa or more. Item 3: In each particle of the flat colorant, the maximum length is the shortest among the diameters of cross sections passing through the midpoint of the maximum length and perpendicular to the maximum length direction, passing through the midpoint. Item 3. The decorative body according to item 1 or 2, which is five times or more the length. Item 4: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 3, wherein the maximum length of each particle of the flat colorant is 0.02 mm or more. Item 5: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 4, wherein chemical diffusion bonding is performed between a plurality of layers sandwiching the layer containing the flat colorant. Item 6: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 5, wherein the permeability of a part of the plurality of base layers is lower than the permeability of the base layer having permeability. Item 7: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 6, wherein the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the joint surface of the joint portion of the transparent base material layer is 1 mm or more. Item 8: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 7, wherein the joint portions of the base layers on both sides sandwiching the layer containing the flat colorant each have a thickness of 1 mm or more in a direction perpendicular to the joint surfaces. . Item 9: The decoration according to any one of Items 1 to 8, wherein the joint portion of the layer containing the flat colorant has a thickness of 1 mm or more in a direction perpendicular to the joint surface. Item 10: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 9, wherein the flat colorant has a metallic luster. Item 11: A decorative body manufacturing apparatus having a spraying section for combining a material and a flat colorant and a bonding section for bonding the material, and manufacturing the decorative body according to Item 1 therewith. Item 12: A decoration manufacturing method for manufacturing the decoration according to Item 1, comprising a spraying step of combining a material and a flat colorant, and a bonding step of joining the materials.
<<Tenth Embodiment>>

特開2004-167826号公報に記載のような、各部で色が相違する光透過性の装飾体や装飾用板状体が知られている。これらは、マーブル状・格子状等の様々な模様を表示し、模様の各部において各波長帯ごとの透過特性を異にする。これらは、透過光で観察された場合に加飾性をもたらすが、背後からの照明のない用途、例えば外照式の看板では、透過率が高い部分が暗く見えるため、色の彩度・明度が低下するという問題を有していた。また、透過性の高さから背景が透けて見えてしまい、加飾性が低下する。例えば、マーブル模様の表札が凹凸のある石塀に設置されると、透過性を有する部分で凹凸の陰影が隠蔽されず、表札の絵柄が乱されるという問題があった。 本実施形態は、かかる問題の解決を課題としてもよい。すなわち、本実施形態が提供する装飾体等は、反射光下で鮮明な発色を呈してもよく、設置環境に左右されず常に一定の表示内容を提供してもよく、加えて高い設置強度・耐光性・耐剥離性等を有してもよい。 A light-transmitting decorative body and a decorative plate-like body having different colors in each part are known, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-167826. These displays various patterns such as marbles and lattices, and transmittance characteristics differ for each wavelength band in each part of the pattern. These provide decorativeness when viewed with transmitted light, but in applications without illumination from behind, such as externally lit signboards, areas with high transmittance appear dark, so color saturation and brightness had the problem of decreasing In addition, the background is seen through due to the high transparency, resulting in a decrease in decorativeness. For example, when a marble-patterned nameplate is placed on an uneven stone wall, the shadow of the unevenness is not covered by the transparent portion, and the pattern of the nameplate is disturbed. The present embodiment may be aimed at solving such a problem. In other words, the decorative body or the like provided by the present embodiment may exhibit clear color development under reflected light, may always provide constant display content regardless of the installation environment, and may have high installation strength. It may have light resistance, peeling resistance, and the like.

本実施形態では、貼合部52が取得する加飾材料板210は、表面部F側に斑状の模様等を有する。この模様は、室内用途では印刷によってもよいが、屋外用途では高耐光性の顔料等が練りこまれてなる方が有利である。この模様の各部で光の透過特性が互いに異なってもよい。貼合部52は、さらに白等の高反射材料板211を取得する。高反射材料板211はクリーム色・黄色等の明るい色でもよい。貼合部52は加飾材料板210と高反射材料板211とを接着剤25等により接合する(図14a・15a、ただし貼合部52・接着剤25は図示されない。)。接合は、全面が接合された面接着でもよく、接合面が化学拡散接合であれば、屋外でも剥離せず長期使用に耐える。さらに貼合部52が加飾材料板210に無色透明等の材料板20を接合すれば、強度・耐光性が向上する。第3の実施形態等との組合せにより、溝加工部43が溝部Gを加工してもしなくてもよい。さらに被覆加工部46が、被覆部Tを接合してもしなくてもよく、積層された材料板20を所望の大きさに切断してもよい。 In the present embodiment, the decorative material plate 210 acquired by the bonding section 52 has a mottled pattern or the like on the surface portion F side. This pattern may be printed for indoor use, but it is more advantageous for outdoor use to incorporate a highly light-resistant pigment or the like. Each portion of the pattern may have different light transmission characteristics. The lamination unit 52 further obtains a plate 211 made of a highly reflective material such as white. The highly reflective material plate 211 may be bright colors such as cream and yellow. The bonding portion 52 bonds the decorative material plate 210 and the high reflection material plate 211 with an adhesive 25 or the like (FIGS. 14a and 15a, but the bonding portion 52 and the adhesive 25 are not shown). Bonding may be surface bonding in which the entire surface is bonded, and if the bonding surface is chemical diffusion bonding, it will not peel off even outdoors and can withstand long-term use. Further, if the laminating portion 52 joins the colorless and transparent material plate 20 to the decorative material plate 210, strength and light resistance are improved. Depending on the combination with the third embodiment or the like, the groove portion G may or may not be processed by the grooved portion 43 . Furthermore, the coating processing section 46 may or may not join the coating section T, and may cut the laminated material plates 20 to a desired size.

製造後の装飾体Zは、加飾材料板210によってなる加飾基材層MDの裏側に高反射材料板211によってなる高反射基材層MLを有する(図14b・15b)。通常、加飾基材層MDの側が観察面である。加飾基材層MDから入射した光は、高反射基材層MLがなければ、加飾基材層MDの透過性が高い部分においてそのまま裏面部R側に抜ける。しかし、この装飾体Zでは、この光は高反射基材層MLによって反射し、加飾基材層MDに戻り、表面部F側から出射して観察者(図示しない。)に観察される。これにより、加飾基材層MDの高透過部分が、輝くような発色を、内照式等の光源を必要とせず低コストで呈する。加飾基材層MDの模様が印刷でなく混錬によるものであれば、顔料の分布が平面的でなく、板厚方向にも複雑に変化することがある。この積層内の各層の奥行や重なりが、加飾基材層MDの裏側の高反射基材層MLからのバックライトにより、印刷では得られない立体感をもたらす。複数の加飾基材層MDが重なればこの立体感が増大するが、その場合には加飾基材層MDの一部の透過率が高いほうがよい。透過率等の測定は、剥離され露出した加飾基材層MDに対しCM‐5等により行われてもよい。加飾基材層MDの各部での視感透過率の差ΔY(D65)の絶対値(又は視感透過率τV:JIS T 7333/ISO8980-3・分光透過率におけるある波長帯の透過率・全光線透過率・拡散光線透過率・平行光線透過率の差)は、少なくとも一部において、好ましくは0.3以上・より好ましくは0.5以上・さらに好ましくは1以上・一層好ましくは2以上でもよい(CM‐5、10°視野、D65、00全透過又は特記の場合正透過近似、自動校正又は0校正・100校正後の測定。本明細書の他の箇所での同種の測定でも基本的に同様である。視感透過率はCM‐5によって測定されたYxy又はXYZのY値とする。なお、CM‐5の透過測定時の測定範囲は広く、試料における狭い範囲での透過率の差は測定値上ではわずかに反映されるのみである。そのため、CM‐5の透過測定でΔY(D65)が0.3であっても、1mm単位の範囲内では透過率の差はより大きい。)。また、[視感透過率の差ΔY(D65)の絶対値]/[視感透過率基準値と視感透過率測定値のうち小さい値]は、少なくとも一部において、好ましくは1/20以上・より好ましくは1/10以上・さらに好ましくは1/5以上・一層好ましくは1/4以上でもよく、1以下でもよい。加飾基材層MDの透過測定時のΔL(D65)は、好ましくは1以上・より好ましくは2以上・さらに好ましくは4以上でもよい。各部で色相だけでなく透過率が異なるほど、反射による明度のコントラストが大きくなり加飾性が増す。加飾基材層MDの少なくとも一部の視感透過率は、好ましくは0.5以上・より好ましくは1以上・さらに好ましくは2以上・一層好ましくは4以上でもよい。加飾基材層MDの少なくとも一部の透過測定時のLのL(D65)値は、好ましくは3以上・より好ましくは5以上・さらに好ましくは10以上でもよい。加飾基材層MD各部の[ΔL(D65)の絶対値]/[L(D65)基準値とL(D65)測定値のうち小さい値]は、少なくとも一部において、好ましくは1/20以上・より好ましくは1/10以上・さらに好ましくは1/5以上・一層好ましくは1/4以上でもよい。加飾基材層MD各部での色差は、ΔE ab(D65)において、好ましくは1以上、より好ましくは2以上、さらに好ましくは3以上でもよい。加飾基材層MDの模様が細かい場合、測定結果が細部の差を反映しないことがある。各部の色と透過の度合が異なることが、目視によって誰の目にも明らかならば、測定によるまでもなく実物によってそれが示される。 The decorative body Z after manufacture has a highly reflective base material layer ML made of a highly reflective material plate 211 on the back side of a decorative base material layer MD made of a decorative material plate 210 (FIGS. 14b and 15b). Usually, the side of the decorative base material layer MD is the viewing surface. If there is no highly reflective base layer ML, the light that has entered from the decorative base layer MD passes through to the rear surface portion R side as it is at the portion of the decorative base layer MD with high transmittance. However, in this decoration Z, the light is reflected by the highly reflective base material layer ML, returns to the decorative base material layer MD, is emitted from the surface portion F side, and is observed by an observer (not shown). As a result, the highly transmissive portion of the decorating base material layer MD exhibits brilliant color development at low cost without requiring a light source such as an internal illumination type. If the pattern of the decorative base material layer MD is formed by kneading rather than by printing, the distribution of the pigment may not be planar and may vary in a complicated manner in the plate thickness direction. The depth and overlap of each layer in this lamination provide a three-dimensional effect that cannot be obtained by printing, due to the backlight from the highly reflective base layer ML on the back side of the decorative base layer MD. If a plurality of decorative base layers MD are overlapped, the three-dimensional effect is increased. Measurement of transmittance and the like may be performed by CM-5 or the like on the peeled and exposed decorative base layer MD. The absolute value of the difference ΔY (D65) in the luminous transmittance at each part of the decorative base layer MD (or the luminous transmittance τV: JIS T 7333/ISO8980-3, the transmittance of a certain wavelength band in the spectral transmittance, The difference in total light transmittance, diffuse light transmittance, and parallel light transmittance) is preferably 0.3 or more, more preferably 0.5 or more, still more preferably 1 or more, and even more preferably 2 or more at least in part. (CM-5, 10° field of view, D65, 00 total transmission or specular transmission approximation if specified, measurement after automatic calibration or 0 calibration / 100 calibration. Similar measurements elsewhere in this specification are also basic The luminous transmittance is the Y value of Yxy or XYZ measured by CM-5.The measurement range of CM-5 is wide, and the transmittance in the narrow range of the sample is Therefore, even if ΔY(D65) is 0.3 in the transmission measurement of CM-5, the difference in transmission within the range of 1 mm unit is more big.). In addition, [absolute value of luminous transmittance difference ΔY (D65)]/[smaller value of luminous transmittance reference value and luminous transmittance measured value] is preferably 1/20 or more at least in part. - More preferably 1/10 or more - More preferably 1/5 or more - Still more preferably 1/4 or more, or 1 or less. ΔL * (D65) of the decorative base material layer MD in transmission measurement may be preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, and even more preferably 4 or more. The more different the transmittance as well as the hue is in each part, the greater the brightness contrast due to reflection and the more decorative. The luminous transmittance of at least part of the decorative base layer MD may be preferably 0.5 or more, more preferably 1 or more, still more preferably 2 or more, and even more preferably 4 or more. The L * (D65) value of L * a * b * in transmission measurement of at least part of the decorating base layer MD may be preferably 3 or more, more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 10 or more. [Absolute value of ΔL * (D65)]/[Smaller value of L * (D65) reference value and L * (D65) measured value] of each part of the decoration base layer MD is preferably 1 at least in part /20 or more, more preferably 1/10 or more, more preferably 1/5 or more, still more preferably 1/4 or more. The color difference in each part of the decorating base material layer MD may be preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, still more preferably 3 or more in ΔE * ab (D65). If the pattern of the decorative base material layer MD is fine, the measurement result may not reflect the difference in detail. If the difference in color and degree of transmission of each part is obvious to anyone's eyes, it will be shown by the real thing, not by measurement.

高反射基材層ML(高反射材料板211)は、酸化チタンを含む骨白色や、アルミニウム等が蒸着された鏡面でもよい。その反射光測定による明度は、LのL値で、好ましくは60以上・より好ましくは70以上・さらに好ましくは80以上・一層好ましくは85以上、又はマンセルD65のV値で、好ましくは6以上・より好ましくは7以上・さらに好ましくは8以上でもよい(測定はCM‐5による。測定径3mm(SAV)、10°視野、D65、ゼロ校正・白色校正後の測定。本明細書の他の箇所での同種の測定でも基本的に同様である。)。高反射基材層MLの加飾基材層MDとの接合面が平滑であれば、正反射成分が増えるため、光の入射方向に応じて反射度合が変化する。この効果が望ましい場合には、明度の測定は、CM‐5の場合SCI(正反射光含む)でもよい。一方、接合面が微粒状等の凹凸面であれば、光の入射条件にかかわらず、一定の効果が得られる。特に指定のない限り、両者の色を同等に測定できるSCE(正反射光除去)でよい。表面部F側と裏面部R側とで高反射基材層MLの性状が同等であり、裏面部Rに高反射基材層MLが露出しているならば、測定は裏面部R側からでもよい。また、接合面又は高反射基材層MLが露出した裏面部Rの少なくとも一方の算術平均粗さRが好ましくは1以上・より好ましくは2以上・さらに好ましくは4以上、一層好ましくは8以上、最大高さ粗さRが好ましくは4以上・より好ましくは10以上・さらに好ましくは20以上、一層好ましくは40以上、上限は1000でもよい(カットオフは標準)。これにより、接合面では拡散反射成分が増え、裏面部Rでは壁等への接合時の投錨効果が得られる。高反射基材層MLは半透明の乳半等より、不透明に近い方が、反射率が高く好ましい。ただし、背景の色がにじむような加飾性が求められる場合には乳半等の板も適する。高反射基材層MLの視感透過率(又は視感透過率τV:JIS T 7333/ISO8980-3・全光線透過率・拡散光線透過率・平行光線透過率)は、好ましくは20以下・より好ましくは10以下・さらに好ましくは5以下・一層好ましくは2以下である。視感透過率は、加飾基材層MD等が除去された高反射基材層MLをCM‐5、10°視野、D65で測定する。高反射基材層MLの透過率が低いことにより、装飾体Zの設置場所の色に左右されず、常に一定の色が得られる。この場合、高反射基材層MLの色は黒等の濃色でもよく、反射率は必ずしも高くなくてもよい。その場合、高反射基材層MLのLのL値は、好ましくは20以下・より好ましくは10以下・さらに好ましくは5以下・一層好ましくは2以下、又はマンセル表色系のV値で、好ましくは3以下・より好ましくは2以下・さらに好ましくは1以下でもよい。これにより加飾基材層MDの高透過部分が暗く見え、また別の加飾性が得られる。加飾基材層MD又は高反射基材層MLの少なくとも一方の厚さは、好ましくは1mm以上・より好ましくは1.4mm以上・さらに好ましくは1.8mm以上・一層好ましくは2.7mm以上である。加飾基材層MD又は高反射基材層MLの少なくとも一方の曲げ弾性率が段落0014に記載の範囲でもよい。高反射基材層MLと加飾基材層MD等との接合部分では、透明部分から高反射基材層MLの反射面にかけて色が連続的に変化する部分が薄いほど、界面で光が吸収されず、反射率が向上するので好適である。上記連続的に変化する部分、すなわち透明度が低い部分から透明度が高い部分にかけての領域において、透明度が一定の部分を除く透明度が変化する部分の厚さは、0.5mm以下が好ましく、0.1mm以下がより好ましく、0.02mm以下がさらに好ましい。下限は0又は測定限界でもよい。これは接合部分断面の顕微鏡画像等で測定可能である。上記MMAを含む接着剤による化学拡散接合の場合、接着層Aと高反射基材層MLとの界面の厚さがこれに相当する。表面部Fの算術平均粗さRが、段落0081の凸部Yに係る記載と同じ範囲でもよく、これにより透過性が向上する。段落0089同様に気泡が小さくてもよい。 The highly reflective base material layer ML (highly reflective material plate 211) may be a bone-white color containing titanium oxide, or a mirror surface on which aluminum or the like is vapor-deposited. The lightness measured by the reflected light measurement is the L value of L * a * b * , which is preferably 60 or more, more preferably 70 or more, still more preferably 80 or more, and still more preferably 85 or more, or the V value of Munsell D65, Preferably 6 or more, more preferably 7 or more, and even more preferably 8 or more (measured by CM-5. Measurement diameter 3 mm (SAV), 10 ° field of view, D65, measurement after zero calibration and white calibration. This is essentially the same for similar measurements elsewhere in the book.) If the joint surface of the highly reflective base material layer ML with the decorative base material layer MD is smooth, the specular reflection component increases, so the degree of reflection changes according to the incident direction of light. If this effect is desired, the brightness measurement may be SCI (specular included) for CM-5. On the other hand, if the bonding surface is an uneven surface such as fine grains, a certain effect can be obtained regardless of the light incident condition. Unless otherwise specified, SCE (exclude specular reflection), which can equally measure both colors, may be used. If the properties of the highly reflective substrate layer ML are the same on the front surface portion F side and the rear surface portion R side, and the highly reflective substrate layer ML is exposed on the rear surface portion R, the measurement can be performed from the rear surface portion R side. good. In addition, the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of at least one of the bonding surface or the back surface portion R where the high-reflectance base material layer ML is exposed is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, still more preferably 4 or more, and even more preferably 8 or more. , the maximum height roughness Rz is preferably 4 or more, more preferably 10 or more, still more preferably 20 or more, still more preferably 40 or more, and the upper limit may be 1000 (standard cutoff). As a result, the diffused reflection component is increased on the joint surface, and the anchoring effect at the time of joining to a wall or the like can be obtained at the rear surface portion R. It is preferable that the highly reflective base material layer ML is nearly opaque rather than semi-transparent, such as opaque, because the reflectance is high. However, when decorativeness such as blurring of the background color is required, a board such as milk half is also suitable. The luminous transmittance (or luminous transmittance τV: JIS T 7333/ISO8980-3, total light transmittance, diffuse light transmittance, parallel light transmittance) of the high-reflectance base layer ML is preferably 20 or less and more It is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 5 or less, and still more preferably 2 or less. The luminous transmittance is measured by CM-5, 10° field of view, and D65 on the highly reflective base layer ML from which the decorative base layer MD and the like are removed. Due to the low transmittance of the highly reflective base material layer ML, a constant color can always be obtained regardless of the color of the place where the decorative body Z is installed. In this case, the color of the highly reflective base material layer ML may be a dark color such as black, and the reflectance may not necessarily be high. In that case, the L value of L * a * b * of the highly reflective base material layer ML is preferably 20 or less, more preferably 10 or less, even more preferably 5 or less, still more preferably 2 or less, or in the Munsell color system The V value may be preferably 3 or less, more preferably 2 or less, still more preferably 1 or less. As a result, the high-transmittance portion of the decorative base layer MD looks dark, and another decorative property can be obtained. The thickness of at least one of the decorative base layer MD and the highly reflective base layer ML is preferably 1 mm or more, more preferably 1.4 mm or more, still more preferably 1.8 mm or more, and still more preferably 2.7 mm or more. be. At least one of the decorative base layer MD and the high reflection base layer ML may have a bending elastic modulus within the range described in paragraph 0014. In the joint portion between the highly reflective base layer ML and the decorative base layer MD, etc., the thinner the portion where the color continuously changes from the transparent portion to the reflective surface of the highly reflective base layer ML, the more light is absorbed at the interface. It is preferable because the reflectance is improved because the reflectance is improved. In the portion where the transparency changes continuously, that is, the region from the portion where the transparency is low to the portion where the transparency is high, the thickness of the portion where the transparency changes, excluding the portion where the transparency is constant, is preferably 0.5 mm or less, and 0.1 mm. The following is more preferable, and 0.02 mm or less is even more preferable. The lower limit may be 0 or the limit of measurement. This can be measured by using a microscope image of the cross section of the joint. In the case of chemical diffusion bonding using an adhesive containing MMA, this corresponds to the thickness of the interface between the adhesive layer A and the highly reflective base material layer ML. The arithmetic mean roughness R a of the surface portion F may be in the same range as described for the convex portion Y in paragraph 0081, thereby improving the transparency. As in paragraph 0089, the bubbles may be small.

各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層における互いに透過特性が異なる各部が、互いに一体成形されてなってもよい。すなわち、加飾基材層MDは一体成形され、模様ごとの継ぎ目を有さなくてもよい。かかる加飾基材層MDが割れる際、模様の境界線に沿って割れることはなく、模様に特に沿わない形状で、応力のかかり具合次第で割れることが多い。その割れ方は、各部の色が均質である通常の樹脂板等の割れ方と同様である。いいかえれば、加飾基材層MDでは、通常の樹脂板等と同様に、各部の曲げ強さ・引張強さ・圧縮強さ(何れもJIS)が均等でもよく、各部でのそれらの値の差が好ましくは20%以下・より好ましくは10%以下・さらに好ましくは5%以下でもよい。加飾基材層MDの各色は境界部分BRで明確に切り替わるのでなく、互いに連続的に変化してもよい。その変化の少なくとも一部は、好ましくは0.25mm以上・より好ましくは0.5mm以上・さらに好ましくは1mm以上・一層好ましくは2mm以上の板厚方向のグラデーションの幅を有してもよい。加飾基材層MDの表面だけでなく内部を含む全体がその変化を有してもよい。その変化部分の少なくとも一部において、同等の色相・明度・彩度の部分を通る線は表面部F又は裏面部Rに垂直でないか曲線であるかの少なくとも一方でもよい。このような加飾基材層MDは、複数の顔料によってなる複数の色の積層を有する。この加飾基材層MDの高反射基材層MLとの接合面に垂直な断面では、接合面に平行な方向における各部で積層各層の重なり方やそれぞれの色の厚さ、透過率等の積層の状態が相違する。積層の境界部分BRは、加飾基材層MD及び高反射基材層MLの接合面に平行でないことが多い。この積層のそれぞれの厚さは、少なくとも一部において、加飾基材層MDの厚さの好ましくは1/4以上・より好ましくは1/3以上・さらに好ましくは1/2以上でもよい。積層の境界部分BRが、図15のように接合面に対して傾斜しているだけでなく、U字状に湾曲していることがある。つまり、例えば、白色の層が青色の層を表面部F側と裏面部B(裏面部R)側とから挟み、しかもその両側の白色の層がつながっている、といった場合である。換言すれば、加飾基材層MDと高反射基材層MLとの接合面に垂直な直線が、連続した境界部分BRと複数の箇所で交わっている。これにより、透過性のある色がさらに重層的で浮き上がるような発色を呈する。また、この湾曲は端面Xに露出して、表面部F側から見える模様とは異なる、層状の模様を示す。端面Xが鏡面加工されていると、この模様が鮮明に見えるだけでなく、光を反射し、この模様を壁等の取付部分に投影する。基材部M・加飾基材層MD・高反射基材層MLが鏡面加工されていれば、反射の投影の加飾性が向上する。端面Xの算術平均粗さRは、好ましくは2以下・より好ましくは1以下・さらに好ましくは0.5以下・一層好ましくは0.25以下、最大高さ粗さRは、好ましくは8以下・より好ましくは4以下・さらに好ましくは2以下、一層好ましくは1以下、下限は測定限界でもよい(JIS B 0601又はISO 4287等、単位はμm、カットオフλcは0.08mmを基準とし、見込まれる測定値に応じて調整される。)。端面Xが溝部Gでも同様である。反射の効果のためには、端面Xの少なくとも一部が表面部F又は裏面部Rの少なくとも一方となす小さい側の角の角度をθXとすると、|θX|=90°でもよく、|θX|≧80°でもよく、|θX|≧70°でもよく、|θX|≦90°でもよい。この場合、高反射基材層MLがなくてもよく、加飾基材層MDと、それに接合された基材部Mの端面Xにおいて、反射効果が得らえる。さらに、基材部Mの端面Xは、外側に光を反射して壁等を明るくするだけでなく、臨界角の作用により、装飾体Zの内側に光を反射する。この反射光と、光源からの直接の光の2方向の光が、加飾基材層MDの重層的な構造に一層複雑な加飾性を与えるという効果を奏する。基材部Mの厚さが、好ましくは2.7mm以上・より好ましくは3.6mm以上・さらに好ましくは4.5mm以上・一層好ましくは5.4mm以上であれば、この効果がさらに広い範囲で得られる。 Parts having different transmission characteristics in a layer having different transmission characteristics may be molded integrally with each other. That is, the decorating base material layer MD may be integrally molded and may not have joints for each pattern. When such a decorative base layer MD cracks, it does not crack along the boundary line of the pattern, and often cracks in a shape that does not particularly follow the pattern, depending on how much stress is applied. The method of cracking is the same as that of ordinary resin plates, etc., in which the color of each part is uniform. In other words, the decorative base layer MD may have uniform bending strength, tensile strength, and compressive strength (all of which are JIS) in each part, similarly to a normal resin plate. The difference may be preferably 20% or less, more preferably 10% or less, still more preferably 5% or less. Each color of the decorating base material layer MD may not be clearly switched at the boundary portion BR, but may be continuously changed with each other. At least part of the change may have a width of gradation in the plate thickness direction of preferably 0.25 mm or more, more preferably 0.5 mm or more, still more preferably 1 mm or more, and even more preferably 2 mm or more. Not only the surface of the decorative base material layer MD but also the whole including the inside may have the change. In at least a part of the change portion, a line passing through a portion of equivalent hue/brightness/saturation may be at least one of not perpendicular to the front face portion F or the back face portion R or curved. Such a decorating base material layer MD has a lamination of a plurality of colors made up of a plurality of pigments. In the cross section perpendicular to the joint surface between the decorative base layer MD and the high-reflectance base layer ML, it is possible to see how the laminated layers overlap, the thickness of each color, the transmittance, etc. at each part in the direction parallel to the joint surface. The state of lamination is different. The boundary portion BR of lamination is often not parallel to the joint surface of the decorative base layer MD and the high reflection base layer ML. The thickness of each of these laminates may be preferably 1/4 or more, more preferably 1/3 or more, still more preferably 1/2 or more of the thickness of the decorative base layer MD at least in part. In some cases, the boundary portion BR of the lamination is not only inclined with respect to the joint surface as shown in FIG. 15, but also curved in a U shape. That is, for example, a white layer sandwiches a blue layer from the front surface portion F side and the back surface portion B (back surface portion R) side, and the white layers on both sides are connected. In other words, a straight line perpendicular to the joint surface between the decorative base layer MD and the high reflection base layer ML intersects the continuous boundary portions BR at a plurality of points. As a result, the translucent color develops a multi-layered and floating color. Moreover, this curvature is exposed at the end surface X and shows a layered pattern different from the pattern seen from the surface portion F side. When the end face X is mirror-finished, not only can this pattern be seen clearly, but it also reflects light and projects this pattern onto the mounting portion such as the wall. If the base material portion M, the decorative base material layer MD, and the highly reflective base material layer ML are mirror-finished, the decorativeness of projection of reflection is improved. The arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the end face X is preferably 2 or less, more preferably 1 or less, still more preferably 0.5 or less, and even more preferably 0.25 or less, and the maximum height roughness Rz is preferably 8. or less, more preferably 4 or less, more preferably 2 or less, more preferably 1 or less, the lower limit may be the measurement limit (JIS B 0601 or ISO 4287, etc., the unit is μm, the cutoff λc is 0.08 mm, adjusted for expected measurements). The same applies when the end face X is the groove portion G. For the effect of reflection, |θX|=90°, where θX is the smaller angle formed by at least a portion of the end surface X with at least one of the front surface portion F and the rear surface portion R, and |θX| ≧80°, |θX|≧70°, or |θX|≦90°. In this case, the highly reflective base material layer ML may be omitted, and a reflective effect can be obtained in the decorative base layer MD and the end face X of the base material portion M joined thereto. Furthermore, the end face X of the base material portion M not only reflects the light outward to brighten the wall and the like, but also reflects the light inside the decorative body Z due to the action of the critical angle. The reflected light and the direct light from the light source have the effect of giving the multi-layered structure of the decorative base layer MD a more complex decorative effect. If the thickness of the base material portion M is preferably 2.7 mm or more, more preferably 3.6 mm or more, more preferably 4.5 mm or more, and even more preferably 5.4 mm or more, this effect can be obtained in a wider range. can get.

上記特開2004-167826号公報は、無色または有色の光透過性プラスチック板の複数のピースを互いに接合し、さらに光透過性担持板によってそれらのピースを担持させることを記載している。同明細書段落0008において、「上記プラスチックピースの光透過性担持板としては、光を透過するものであればよく、ガラスおよび各種光透過性プラスチック板を使用することができる。」とある。一方、反射光測定によるLのL値が60以上又は視感透過率が20以下の少なくとも一方であれば、反射率測定時の明度が高く、透過率が低いので、光透過性担持板に求められる条件には合致しない。また、光透過性担持板の透過率を低くすることは、ステンドグラス様装飾構造物としての同公報記載の発明の目的に反するので、同公報に接した当業者がこれを行うことは容易ではない。また同段落は、黒色で幅3~12mmの両面目地テープによってピースと光透過性担持板とを固着させるとし、同明細書段落0007は「固着剤層が両面テープでなる」としているので、本実施形態のように加飾基材層MDと高反射基材層MLとが面接着された装飾体とは異なる。よって同公報に記載の発明と本実施形態の発明とは相違する。また、同公報の段落0009では、「必要量のアクリル板ピースを裁断し、やすりで研磨後、型紙に合わせて液体アクリル系合成ゴム接着剤(ユタカメイク(株)製造)で接着する。装飾の観点から、接着剤は多量に用い、表面サイドはアクリル板より1mm程度突出させるようにする。」とあり、ピースは平滑面でもなく、接着剤で接着されているため、端面での光の反射は起こらない。 JP 2004-167826 mentioned above describes joining together a plurality of pieces of colorless or colored light-transmitting plastic plates and further carrying the pieces by means of a light-transmitting carrier plate. Paragraph 0008 of the same specification states that "as the light-transmitting support plate for the plastic piece, any material can be used as long as it transmits light, and glass and various light-transmitting plastic plates can be used." On the other hand, if the L value of L * a * b * measured by reflected light measurement is at least one of 60 or more and the luminous transmittance is 20 or less, the light transmission is high and the transmittance is low when the reflectance is measured. However, it does not meet the requirements for the carrier plate. Further, since lowering the transmittance of the light-transmitting support plate is contrary to the object of the invention described in the publication as a stained glass-like decorative structure, it is not easy for those skilled in the art who have access to the publication to do so. do not have. In addition, the same paragraph states that the piece and the light-transmitting support plate are fixed with a black double-sided joint tape having a width of 3 to 12 mm, and paragraph 0007 of the same specification states that "the adhesive layer is made of double-sided tape." It is different from the decorative body in which the decorative base layer MD and the highly reflective base layer ML are surface-bonded as in the embodiment. Therefore, the invention described in the publication is different from the invention of the present embodiment. Further, in paragraph 0009 of the same publication, ``A required amount of acrylic plate pieces are cut, sanded with a file, and glued with a liquid acrylic synthetic rubber adhesive (manufactured by Yutaka Make Co., Ltd.) according to the paper pattern. From this point of view, a large amount of adhesive should be used, and the surface side should protrude about 1 mm from the acrylic plate.” The piece is not a smooth surface, and since it is adhered with adhesive, light is reflected at the end surface. does not happen.

請求の範囲控。項1:互いに接合された複数の層を有し、前記複数の層の1つ以上のそれぞれにおいて、前記複数の層どうしの接合面に平行な面の各部で光の透過特性が互いに異なり、前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層に接合された別の層の視感透過率が20以下であることを特徴とする装飾体。項2:前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層が、複数の色の積層によってなり、前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層の前記接合面に垂直な断面の、前記接合面に平行な方向における各部で、前記積層の状態が相違する、項1に記載の装飾体。項3:前記積層の境界部分の少なくとも一部が前記接合面に平行でない、項2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記積層の境界部分において前記複数の色のうち2つ以上が連続的に変化する、項2又は3に記載の装飾体。項5:前記2つ以上の色が連続的に変化する境界部分の少なくとも一部の前記接合面に垂直な方向における長さが0.25mm以上である、項4に記載の装飾体。項6:前記接合面に垂直な直線が、前記積層の連続した境界部分と複数の箇所で交わる、項2~5の何れかに記載の装飾体。項7:前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層及び前記視感透過率が20以下である層の端面の算術平均粗さRが2μm以下である、項1~6の何れかに記載の装飾体。項8:前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層が前記視感透過率が20以下である層の反対側に全光線透過率が70%以上の層を有する、項1~7の何れかに記載の装飾体。項9:前記全光線透過率が70%以上の層・前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層・前記視感透過率が20以下である層の端面の算術平均粗さRが2μm以下である、項8に記載の装飾体。項10:前記全光線透過率が70%以上の層の前記接合面に垂直な方向の厚さが2.7mm以上である、項7~9の何れかに記載の装飾体。項11:前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層又は前記視感透過率が20以下である層の少なくとも一方の曲げ弾性率が700Mpa以上である、項1~10の何れかに記載の装飾体。項12:前記視感透過率が20以下である層の反射光測定によるLのL値が60以上である、項1~11の何れかに記載の装飾体。項13:前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層又は前記視感透過率が20以下である層の少なくとも一方の前記接合面に垂直な方向の厚さが1mm以上である、項1~12の何れかに記載の装飾体。項14:前記接合が化学拡散接合である、項1~13の何れかに記載の装飾体。項15:前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層が層の内部に色の変化を有する、項1~14の何れかに記載の装飾体。項16:複数の材料を接合し、項1に記載の装飾体を製造することを特徴とする装飾体製造方法。項B1:互いに接合された複数の層を有し、前記複数の層の1つ以上のそれぞれにおいて、前記複数の層どうしの接合面に平行な面の各部で光の透過特性が互いに異なり、前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層に接合された別の層の反射光測定によるLのL値が60以上であることを特徴とする装飾体。項B2:前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層又は前記L値が60以上である層の少なくとも一方の曲げ弾性率が700Mpa以上である、項B1に記載の装飾体。項B3:前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層又はL値が60以上である層の少なくとも一方の前記接合面に垂直な方向の厚さが1mm以上である、項B1又はB2に記載の装飾体。項B4:前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層の各部での同波長帯における透過率の差が10%以上である、項B1~B3の何れかに記載の装飾体。項B5:前記接合が化学拡散接合である、項B1~B4の何れかに記載の装飾体。項B6:前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層が前記L値が60以上である層の反対側に全光線透過率が70%以上の層を有する、項B1~B5の何れかに記載の装飾体。項B7:前記全光線透過率が70%以上の層が溝部を有する、項B6に記載の装飾体。項B8:前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層及びL値が60以上である層の厚さが何れも1mm以上である、項B1~B7の何れかに記載の装飾体。項B9:前記各部で透過特性が互いに異なる層が層の内部に色の変化を有する、項B1~B8の何れかに記載の装飾体。項B10:複数の材料を接合し項B1に記載の装飾体を製造する装飾体製造方法。 Claim copy. Item 1: Having a plurality of layers bonded together, wherein in each of at least one of the plurality of layers, light transmission characteristics are different in each part of a plane parallel to the bonded surface of the plurality of layers, 1. A decorative body, characterized in that the luminous transmittance of another layer joined to layers having different transmittance characteristics in each part is 20 or less. Item 2: Layers with different transmission characteristics in each part are formed by stacking a plurality of colors, and each part in a direction parallel to the bonding surface of a cross section perpendicular to the bonding surface of the layer with different transmission characteristics in each part Item 1. The decorative body according to Item 1, wherein the lamination states are different. Item 3: The decorative body according to Item 2, wherein at least part of the boundary portion of the lamination is not parallel to the joint surface. Item 4: The decorative body according to Item 2 or 3, wherein two or more of the plurality of colors continuously change at the boundary portion of the lamination. Item 5: The decorative body according to Item 4, wherein at least a portion of the boundary portion where the two or more colors continuously change has a length of 0.25 mm or more in a direction perpendicular to the joint surface. Item 6: The decorative body according to any one of Items 2 to 5, wherein a straight line perpendicular to the joining surface intersects the continuous boundary portion of the lamination at a plurality of locations. Item 7: The decoration according to any one of Items 1 to 6, wherein the layer having different transmission characteristics in each part and the layer having a luminous transmittance of 20 or less have an end face arithmetic mean roughness Ra of 2 μm or less. body. Item 8: Any one of Items 1 to 7, wherein the layer having different transmission characteristics in each part has a layer having a total light transmittance of 70% or more on the opposite side of the layer having a luminous transmittance of 20 or less. ornaments. Item 9: The layer having a total light transmittance of 70% or more, the layer having different transmission characteristics at each part, and the layer having the luminous transmittance of 20 or less has an end face arithmetic mean roughness Ra of 2 μm or less. , the decorative body according to item 8. Item 10: The decorative body according to any one of Items 7 to 9, wherein the layer having a total light transmittance of 70% or more has a thickness of 2.7 mm or more in a direction perpendicular to the joint surface. Item 11: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 10, wherein at least one of the layers having different transmission characteristics in each part and the layer having a luminous transmittance of 20 or less has a flexural modulus of 700 Mpa or more. Item 12: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 11, wherein the layer having a luminous transmittance of 20 or less has an L value of 60 or more for L * a * b * measured by reflected light measurement. Item 13: Any of Items 1 to 12, wherein at least one of the layers having different transmission characteristics in each part or the layer having the luminous transmittance of 20 or less has a thickness of 1 mm or more in a direction perpendicular to the bonding surface. The ornamental body described in Crab. Item 14: The decoration according to any one of Items 1 to 13, wherein the bonding is chemical diffusion bonding. Item 15: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 14, wherein the layer having different transmission characteristics at each portion has a color change inside the layer. Item 16: A method for producing an ornament, comprising joining a plurality of materials to produce the ornament according to Item 1. Term B1: having a plurality of layers bonded to each other, in each of at least one of the plurality of layers, light transmission characteristics are different in each part of a plane parallel to the bonding surface of the plurality of layers, 1. A decorative body, wherein the L value of L * a * b * is 60 or more as measured by reflected light measurement of another layer joined to layers having different transmission characteristics at each part. Term B2: The decorative body according to Term B1, wherein at least one of the layer having different transmission characteristics at each portion and the layer having the L value of 60 or more has a flexural modulus of 700 Mpa or more. Term B3: The decorative body according to Term B1 or B2, wherein at least one of the layers having different transmission characteristics in each part or the layer having an L value of 60 or more has a thickness of 1 mm or more in a direction perpendicular to the joint surface. . Item B4: The decorative body according to any one of Items B1 to B3, wherein the difference in transmittance in the same wavelength band is 10% or more at each portion of the layer having different transmission characteristics at each portion. Item B5: The decorative body according to any one of Items B1 to B4, wherein the bonding is chemical diffusion bonding. Item B6: The decoration according to any one of Items B1 to B5, wherein the layer having different transmission characteristics in each part has a layer having a total light transmittance of 70% or more on the opposite side of the layer having the L value of 60 or more. body. Item B7: The decorative body according to Item B6, wherein the layer having a total light transmittance of 70% or more has grooves. Item B8: The decorative body according to any one of Items B1 to B7, wherein the thickness of each of the layers having different transmission characteristics and the layer having an L value of 60 or more is 1 mm or more. Item B9: The decorative body according to any one of Items B1 to B8, wherein the layer having different transmission characteristics at each portion has a color change inside the layer. Term B10: A decoration manufacturing method for manufacturing the decoration according to Term B1 by joining a plurality of materials.

《第11の実施形態》
溝加工部43が溝部G3に近接して別の溝部G4を加工し、さらに充填加工部45が溝部G3のみに有色透明の充填材料21を充填してもよい。溝部G3と溝部G4とは互いに平行でもよい。溝部G3と溝部G4が何れも閉領域状で、互いに相似であるか、互いの形状に沿った形状でもよく、さらに溝部G3が外側でもよい。溝部G4は充填部Lを有さないので光を全反射し、その光が溝部G3の充填部Lを透過してその色の光となる(図16)。これにより、光の全反射を呈し、しかも無機顔料等により耐光性の高い溝部Gが実現可能となる。光の多くは溝部G3の充填部Lを透過してから溝部G4で反射し、再度充填部Lを透過するので、充填部Lの色は、第1の実施形態等より薄い方がよい。また、溝部G3とG4とが近接しているほどよい。それらの間隔sの深さdGに対する割合は、1以下が好ましく、1/2以下がより好ましく、1/3以下がさらに好ましく、1/4以下・1/8以下が一層好ましい。複数のG3がG4を挟んでもよい。
<<11th embodiment>>
The grooving part 43 may process another groove part G4 adjacent to the groove part G3, and the filling part 45 may fill only the groove part G3 with the colored and transparent filling material 21 . The groove portion G3 and the groove portion G4 may be parallel to each other. Both the groove portion G3 and the groove portion G4 may be closed regions, and may be similar to each other or may follow each other's shape, and the groove portion G3 may be on the outer side. Since the groove portion G4 does not have the filling portion L, the light is totally reflected, and the light is transmitted through the filling portion L of the groove portion G3 to become light of that color (FIG. 16). As a result, it is possible to realize a groove portion G that exhibits total reflection of light and has high light resistance due to the inorganic pigment or the like. Most of the light passes through the filling portion L of the groove portion G3, is reflected by the groove portion G4, and then passes through the filling portion L again. Also, the closer the grooves G3 and G4 are, the better. The ratio of the interval s to the depth dG is preferably 1 or less, more preferably 1/2 or less, even more preferably 1/3 or less, and still more preferably 1/4 or less and 1/8 or less. A plurality of G3 may sandwich G4.

溝部Gのうち片側の側面Sのみが着色されてもよい。例えば、溝加工部43が閉領域状の溝部Gで貫通加工を行い、充填加工部45が外側の材料板20の側面Sを塗料等の色膜H1で着色し、内側の材料板20と組み合わせてもよい。ここで第3の実施形態が併用されてもよい。完成した装飾体Zでは、外側の基材部M10の側面S1のみが色膜H1を有する。これにより、有色の全反射光が得られる。さらに、内側の基材部M11の側面S2が別の色の色膜H2を有してもよい(図16b)。色膜Hは、充填部L等と同様に、展色剤V・着色剤Co・分散剤Dを含んでもよく、側面Sに接合された色帯部Kでもよい。この場合、溝部Gがテーパー状となることがある。そのような溝部Gでは、長さ方向に垂直な断面が台形状である。 Only one side surface S of the groove portion G may be colored. For example, the grooving part 43 performs piercing processing in the closed groove part G, and the filling processing part 45 colors the side surface S of the outer material plate 20 with a color film H1 such as paint, and combines it with the inner material plate 20. may Here, the third embodiment may be used together. In the completed decoration Z, only the side surface S1 of the outer base material portion M10 has the color film H1. As a result, colored totally reflected light is obtained. Furthermore, the side surface S2 of the inner substrate portion M11 may have a different color film H2 (Fig. 16b). The color film H may contain a colorant V, a colorant Co, and a dispersant D in the same manner as the filling portion L and the like, and may be a color band portion K joined to the side surface S. In this case, the groove portion G may become tapered. Such a groove G has a trapezoidal cross section perpendicular to the length direction.

《第12の実施形態》
図8・10・13bのように、装飾体Zが互いに透過性の異なる複数の層を有し、さらに空隙に接する溝部Gを有する場合、溝部Gが臨界角により入射角を全反射し、この反射を透過性の低い層が受けてさらに輝く。この加飾効果は溝部Gの形状次第でさまざまな展開が可能である。しかし、特許文献Aは、この効果の可能性を記載していないばかりか、制限していた。特許文献Aは、段落0018及び図3gで波線状の画像1を示し、これに基づく造形物3を記載している。また、特許文献Aは、複数の溝部Gの深さdeがそれらの間の距離のcot[arcsin(1/n)]倍より大きいことで、斜め方向からの観察時に複数の溝部Gがつながって見える発明を記載している。ところが、この造形物3では、複数の溝部G間の距離が狭いがゆえに、光がある溝部Gに当たった時、ある溝部Gに隣り合う光源側の別の溝部Gに遮られてしまい、ある溝部Gの先端まで届かないことが多かった。そのため、特許文献Aに係る造形物3は、充分な反射の効果を得られなかった。本実施形態はこの問題の解決を課題としてもよい。
<<Twelfth Embodiment>>
As shown in FIGS. 8, 10, and 13b, when the decorative body Z has a plurality of layers with mutually different transmittance and further has a groove portion G in contact with the gap, the groove portion G totally reflects the incident angle due to the critical angle, and this A layer with low transparency receives the reflection and shines even more. This decorative effect can be developed in various ways depending on the shape of the groove G. However, WO 2005/010203 did not describe or limit the potential for this effect. Patent Document A shows a wavy image 1 in paragraph 0018 and FIG. 3g, and describes a modeled object 3 based thereon. Further, in Patent Document A, the depth de of the plurality of grooves G is larger than cot [arcsin(1/n)] times the distance between them, so that the plurality of grooves G are connected when observed from an oblique direction. It describes a visible invention. However, in the modeled object 3, since the distance between the plurality of grooves G is narrow, when the light strikes a certain groove G, it is blocked by another groove G on the light source side adjacent to the certain groove G. In many cases, the tip of the groove portion G was not reached. Therefore, the modeled object 3 according to Patent Document A could not obtain a sufficient reflection effect. The present embodiment may be designed to solve this problem.

本実施形態では、溝部Gが図17のように弧状部分Arを有する。弧状部分Arの凹側の側面Sの表面部Fに平行な断面が放物線であれば、側面Sに平行光線が当たった場合、基材上層M12及び基材下層M13の界面上で、側面Sのうち一部の高さの部分の反射光が弧状部分Arの焦点に集中するか、それ以外の1点付近に集まる。その他の高さの部分はその前後を明るく照らす。弧状部分Arが円弧や楕円の一部であっても、反射光が一部に集まり、その周囲は暗くなる。弧状部分Arは凹状部分を有する曲線であればよい。溝部Gが複数の弧状部分Arによってなる場合、その凹側で光の明暗が反復し、加飾性を向上させる。そのためには、光が集中する1点より隣の溝部Gが離れている必要がある。複数の弧状部分Arは角部分Crが直線状・曲線状・その他さまざまな形状でもよい。複数の弧状部分Arの凹状部分Cxが、溝部Gの一方の側を向くことで、それに対向する光による明暗が連続し、凹状部分が両側を向く単純な波線より高い装飾効果を呈する。溝部Gの方向及び使用時の光線の方向によっては、これに加えて波線状の溝部Gも併用可能である。 In this embodiment, the groove portion G has an arcuate portion Ar as shown in FIG. If the cross section parallel to the surface portion F of the side surface S on the concave side of the arc-shaped portion Ar is a parabola, when a parallel light beam hits the side surface S, on the interface between the base material upper layer M12 and the base material lower layer M13, the side surface S Reflected light from a part of the height portion is concentrated on the focal point of the arc-shaped portion Ar, or gathered around one point other than the arc-shaped portion Ar. Other heights illuminate the front and back of it brightly. Even if the arcuate portion Ar is a part of an arc or an ellipse, the reflected light gathers in one part, and the surrounding area becomes dark. The arc-shaped portion Ar may be a curved line having a concave portion. When the groove portion G is formed by a plurality of arcuate portions Ar, light and darkness are repeated on the concave side to improve the decorativeness. For that purpose, the adjacent groove portion G needs to be separated from the one point where the light concentrates. The corner portions Cr of the plurality of arcuate portions Ar may be linear, curved, or various other shapes. The recessed portions Cx of the plurality of arcuate portions Ar face one side of the groove portion G, so that the brightness and darkness of the opposing light are continuous, and a higher decorative effect than a simple wavy line in which the recessed portions face both sides is exhibited. Depending on the direction of the groove G and the direction of the light beam during use, a wavy groove G can also be used.

本実施形態に係る装飾体Zのある部分における任意の溝部G11の片側の側面をS11、側面S11に基材部Mを挟んで対向する側面をS12、側面S11の裏面部R側の端部における点をPt1、Pt1から表面部Fを含む面に下ろした垂線又は法線をPe、側面S12の表面部F側の端部のうちPeに最も近い点をPt2とする。裏面部R(表面部F)側の端部とは、側面Sの周囲の輪郭部分のうち裏面部R(表面部F)の側の一部である。垂線又は法線Peと点Pt2との最短距離をdiとすると、dG/di<cot[arcsin(1/n)]であれば、臨界角の作用により、表面部Fにおける溝部G11の見かけの深さがdiよりつねに小さい(nは基材上層M12の屈折率)。ゆえに、観察者(図示しない)が表面部F側及び裏面部R側のどの位置から見ても、側面S11と側面S12とが接して見えることはなく、点Pt1が側面S12によって隠れることはない。この条件は所期の作用の必要十分条件である。すなわち、透明な基材部M中の互いに離れた複数の溝部Gの先端部分が、斜め方向等から観察された場合にも、別の溝部Gに隠れずにつねに見えるなら、複数の溝部Gのその部分は、深さdGがdiのcot[arcsin(1/n)]倍より小さいという条件を満たしている。 S11 is the side surface on one side of an arbitrary groove portion G11 in a portion with the decorative body Z according to this embodiment, S12 is the side surface opposite to the side surface S11 with the base material portion M interposed therebetween, and A point is Pt1, a perpendicular or normal drawn from Pt1 to a plane including the surface portion F is Pe, and a point closest to Pe among the ends of the side surface S12 on the surface portion F side is Pt2. The end portion on the back surface portion R (front surface portion F) side is a part of the contour portion around the side surface S on the back surface portion R (front surface portion F) side. Assuming that the shortest distance between the perpendicular or normal Pe and the point Pt2 is di, and if dG/di<cot[arcsin(1/n M )], the action of the critical angle causes the apparent appearance of the groove G11 on the surface F to be The depth is always smaller than di ( nM is the refractive index of the upper substrate layer M12). Therefore, when an observer (not shown) sees from any position on the front surface portion F side and the rear surface portion R side, the side surface S11 and the side surface S12 do not appear to be in contact with each other, and the point Pt1 is not hidden by the side surface S12. . This condition is a necessary and sufficient condition for the intended action. That is, if the tip portions of the plurality of grooves G separated from each other in the transparent base material M are always visible without being hidden by other grooves G even when observed from an oblique direction or the like, the plurality of grooves G The portion satisfies the condition that the depth dG is less than cot[arcsin(1/n M )] times di.

請求の範囲控。項1:複数の層と、複数の溝部(G)と、を有する装飾体(Z)であって、前記複数の層が透過性を有する層(M12)及び前記透過性を有する層より透過性が低い層(M13)を含み、前記透過性を有する層が前記溝部を有し、前記溝部の少なくとも一部において、前記透過性を有する層の屈折率をnとすると、前記複数の溝部の少なくとも一部の各々の片側の前記複数の側面の一部である複数の第1の側面(S11)・それぞれ対応する該複数の第1の側面にそれぞれ対応する前記複数の溝間部の少なくとも一部を挟んでそれぞれ最も近くで向かい合う複数の第2の側面(S12)・前記複数の第1の側面における前記裏面部の少なくとも一部の側の複数の端部ごとの複数の第1の点(Pt1)・該複数の第1の点から前記表面部の少なくとも一部を含む面に下ろした垂線又は法線(Pe)・それぞれ対応する前記複数の第2の側面の前記表面部の少なくとも一部の側の複数の端部におけるそれぞれ対応する前記垂線又は法線にそれぞれ最も近い複数の第2の点(Pt2)に関し、前記溝部の深さ(dG)が、それぞれ対応する前記垂線又は法線とそれぞれ対応する前記複数の第2の点との最短距離のcot[arcsin(1/n)]倍未満(nは前記透過性を有する層の屈折率)であり、前記溝部が弧状部分(Ar)を有し、前記弧状部分に入射した平行光線のうち前記弧状部分における前記溝部の側面(S)上の異なる2点で反射した光線が交わる前記透過性を有する層及び前記透過性が低い層の界面上の点より、前記側面に隣接する別の溝部の側面が前記側面から離れていることを特徴とする装飾体。項2:前記弧状部分が複数である、項1に記載の装飾体。項3:前記複数の弧状部分が連続する、項2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記溝部の少なくとも一部の長さ方向を中心とする一方の側又は他方の側の何れかにおいて、前記複数の弧状部分の凹状部分(Cx)と、前記複数の弧状部分が互いに接する角部分(Cr)とが交互に連続する、項3に記載の装飾体。項5:前記溝部の内部が空隙であるか、前記溝部の側面が金属光沢を有する
前記溝部の側面が縞状の複数の凹凸を有し、前記複数の凹凸が前記溝部の長さ方向に平行であるか又は前記長さ方向と70°から110°の角度をなすかの少なくとも一方であり、前記凹凸の高さが好ましくは1~40μm・より好ましくは2~20μm・さらに好ましくは4~10μmであるか算術平均うねりW又は最大高さうねりWが好ましくは0.5以上・より好ましくは1以上・さらに好ましくは2以上(カットオフλc0.08mm)であるかの少なくとも一方である、項1から4に記載の装飾体。
Claim copy. Item 1: A decorative body (Z) having a plurality of layers and a plurality of grooves (G), wherein the plurality of layers are more transparent than the layer (M12) having permeability and the layer having permeability a layer (M13) having a low permeability, wherein the layer having the permeability has the groove, and in at least a part of the groove, the refractive index of the layer having the permeability is n. A plurality of first side surfaces (S11) that are a part of the plurality of side surfaces on one side of each of the portions and at least a portion of the plurality of inter-groove portions respectively corresponding to the corresponding plurality of first side surfaces a plurality of second side surfaces (S12) that face each other closest to each other across the - a plurality of first points (Pt1 ) · Perpendicular lines or normal lines (Pe) drawn from the plurality of first points to a plane including at least a portion of the surface portion · At least a portion of the surface portion of the corresponding plurality of second side surfaces With respect to a plurality of second points (Pt2) closest to the respective perpendiculars or normals, respectively, at the respective ends of the side, the depth (dG) of the groove is the same as the corresponding perpendiculars or normals, respectively. less than cot [arcsin(1/n)] times the shortest distance to the corresponding plurality of second points (where n is the refractive index of the layer having transparency), and the groove is an arcuate portion (Ar) and an interface between the layer having the transmittance and the layer having the low transmittance at which the rays reflected at two different points on the side surface (S) of the groove in the arc-shaped portion among the parallel rays incident on the arc-shaped portion intersect A decoration, characterized in that a side surface of another groove adjacent to said side surface is further from said side surface than the above point. Item 2: The decorative body according to Item 1, wherein the arc-shaped portions are plural. Item 3: The decorative body according to Item 2, wherein the plurality of arcuate portions are continuous. Item 4: The recessed portion (Cx) of the plurality of arcuate portions and the plurality of arcuate portions are in contact with each other on either one side or the other side centered on the length direction of at least a portion of the groove portion 4. The decorative body according to Item 3, wherein the corner portions (Cr) are alternately continuous. Item 5: The interior of the groove is void, or the side surface of the groove has a metallic luster, and the side surface of the groove has a plurality of striped unevenness, and the plurality of unevenness is parallel to the length direction of the groove. or at least one of forming an angle of 70° to 110° with the length direction, and the height of the unevenness is preferably 1 to 40 μm, more preferably 2 to 20 μm, and further preferably 4 to 10 μm. or the arithmetic mean waviness W a or the maximum height waviness W z is preferably 0.5 or more, more preferably 1 or more, and still more preferably 2 or more (cutoff λ c 0.08 mm). Item 5. The decorative body according to items 1 to 4.

《第13の実施形態》
本実施形態は、上記実施形態に係る装飾体等と、それに特定の範囲から光を照射する照明部Iからなる装飾体照明設備ZIに関する。図18の装飾体Zは、透過性を有する基材上層M14及びそれより低透過率の基材下層M15からなる。この装飾体Zの端面Xから光が入射すると、その表面部Fに対する入射角θFの絶対値が90°より大きければ、透明な表面部Fで光が反射し、基材上層M14と基材下層M15との界面Wに当たる。端面Xが凹凸や色による模様を有するなら、前記界面Wにその模様に応じた光の明暗像が投影される。装飾体Zは溝部G・色面層U・色帯部K等を有してもよい。溝部G等により、光がさらに反射・透過・不透過し、明暗像により複雑な変化をもたらす。溝部Gが模様を有してもよく、上記各条件を満たしてもよい。端面X・表面部F・界面W・側面Sの少なくとも何れかが段落0029・0030等に記載の算術平均粗さR・最大高さ粗さR・算術平均うねりW・最大高さうねりW等の条件の少なくとも何れかを満たせば、明暗像がより鮮明になる。照明部Iからの光が、拡散光であれば、界面の広い範囲に明暗像が拡がり、 高指向性であれば、明暗像が鮮明となる。照明部Iの発光部分の先端部(先端部が露出していない場合にはレンズ又は保護材の先端部)から300mm(特記時には端面Xまでの最短距離)の位置に照明光の中心軸(照度が最も高い部分をつなぐ直線)に垂直に照明面を置く。照度が最も高い部分が複数あるか面積を有する場合には、その範囲の中心を中心軸とする。また、前記先端部と照明面との間、照明面から50mmの位置に黒い遮光紙を置く。遮光紙は遮光面と平行かつその1辺が中心軸と交わる。照度が最も高い部分が複数あるか面積を有する場合には、遮光紙は複数の照度が最も高い部分又は面積を有する部分を遮る。光を照射した時、照明面において、遮光紙の完全な影の部分の照度の110%の照度の部分と中心軸との最短距離を照明拡散幅とする。照明拡散幅は、好ましくは30mm以下・より好ましくは20mm以下・さらに好ましくは10mm以下・一層好ましくは5mm以下でもよい。日中晴天時の太陽光は通常この条件を満たす。光の入射角は光の中心軸と入射面とのなす角度とする。
<<Thirteenth Embodiment>>
The present embodiment relates to a decorative body lighting installation ZI comprising the decorative bodies and the like according to the above-described embodiments and an illumination unit I for irradiating light from a specific range. The decorative body Z of FIG. 18 is composed of a base material upper layer M14 having transparency and a base material lower layer M15 having a lower transmittance than that. When light is incident from the end surface X of the decorative body Z, if the absolute value of the incident angle θF with respect to the surface portion F is greater than 90°, the light is reflected by the transparent surface portion F, and the upper base layer M14 and the lower base layer M14 are reflected. It hits the interface W with M15. If the end face X has a pattern of unevenness or color, a contrast image of light corresponding to the pattern is projected onto the interface W. As shown in FIG. The decorative body Z may have a groove portion G, a color surface layer U, a color belt portion K, and the like. The grooves G and the like further reflect/transmit/non-transmit light, resulting in complex changes due to contrast images. The groove portion G may have a pattern and may satisfy the above conditions. At least one of the end face X, the surface portion F, the interface W, and the side surface S has the arithmetic mean roughness Ra , maximum height roughness R z , arithmetic mean waviness W a , and maximum height waviness described in paragraphs 0029, 0030, etc. If at least one of the conditions such as Wz is satisfied, the contrast image becomes clearer. If the light from the illumination section I is diffuse light, the bright and dark image spreads over a wide range of the interface, and if it has high directivity, the bright and dark image becomes clear. The central axis of illumination light (illuminance the straight line connecting the highest points). When there are a plurality of areas with the highest illuminance or an area, the center of the range is taken as the central axis. In addition, a black light-shielding paper is placed at a position 50 mm from the illumination surface between the tip portion and the illumination surface. The light-shielding paper is parallel to the light-shielding surface and one side intersects the central axis. If there are multiple or areas with the highest illuminance, the shading paper blocks the multiple highest illuminance or areas. When light is irradiated, the light diffusion width is defined as the shortest distance between the center axis and the part with 110% of the illuminance of the completely shadowed part of the light-shielding paper on the illumination surface. The illumination diffusion width may be preferably 30 mm or less, more preferably 20 mm or less, still more preferably 10 mm or less, and even more preferably 5 mm or less. Sunlight during daylight hours usually satisfies this condition. The incident angle of light is the angle between the central axis of the light and the plane of incidence.

照明部Iの発光部分の先端部(先端部が露出していない場合にはレンズ又は保護材の先端部)から30cmの位置に照明光の中心軸に垂直に照明面を置いた時、照明面に中心軸が交わる点(照明面中の最も高照度の点)と、前記交わる点の照度の1/2の照度になる点とを、前記先端部から見込む角度の2倍を、照明光の指向角とする。照明部Iの指向角は、好ましくは30°以下・より好ましくは20°以下・さらに好ましくは10°以下・一層好ましくは5°以下でもよい。 When the illumination plane is placed perpendicular to the central axis of the illumination light at a position 30 cm from the tip of the light emitting part of the illumination unit I (the tip of the lens or protective material if the tip is not exposed), the illumination plane The point where the central axis intersects with (the point with the highest illuminance in the illumination plane) and the point where the illuminance is 1/2 of the illuminance at the intersecting point, twice the angle seen from the tip, is the illumination light be the directivity angle. The directivity angle of the illumination unit I may be preferably 30° or less, more preferably 20° or less, still more preferably 10° or less, and even more preferably 5° or less.

θF>90°となるためには、例えば次の方法がある。(1)図aのように、照明部Iが装飾体ZよりZ負方向(裏面部R側)に位置し、装飾体Zを後方から照らす。取付面の内部に照明部Iが埋め込まれてもよい。照明部Iは、光が端面X以外の部分に漏れないよう遮光部を有してもよい。(2)装飾体Zのうち照明部Iの側が取付面から浮き、照明部Iは取付面と略平行に照射する。(3)図bのように、端面Xの一部がテーパー状であり、その表面部F側より裏面部R側が照明部Iより遠方にある。照明部Iは、このテーパー状の端面Xを通して照射する。表面部Fと端面Xがなす角度θXFの少なくとも一部の絶対値は、好ましくは20~70°・より好ましくは30~60°・さらに好ましくは35~55°・一層好ましくは40~50°でもよい。端面Xは略平面状でもよく、凹状・凸状等の曲面でもよい。(4)照明部Iが取付面側に光を照射し、装飾体Zと照明部Iとの間の鏡がその光を端面Xに向けて反射する。鏡は取付面と平行でもよく、取付面となす角度θMRの絶対値が0°から15°でもよい。(5)基材上層M14が楔状であって、楔状の基材上層M14の開いた側から光が入射する。表面部Fと界面Wとのなす角度は、好ましくは0°より大きく60°以下、より好ましくは3°以上45°以下、さらに好ましくは5°以上30°以下、一層好ましくは8°以上20°以下でもよい。貼合部52は、基材上層M14をこのように楔状にするために、通常の平板状の透明な材料板20を傾けて研削・研磨してから貼り合わせてもよく、複数の材料板20の片側にスペーサーを挟んでテーパー状に向かい合わせ、その間にMMAシラップ等を流し込んで重合させてもよい。(1)から(5)が組み合わされてもよい。(3)の場合、θXFが小さいと、観察者が表面部Fを正面から見た時に、端面Xに反射した側面Sが見えることがある。第6の実施形態との組合せの場合、色帯部Kの色が見えて好ましくないことがある。その回避のためには、|θXF|≧50°が好ましく・|θXF|≧45°がより好ましい。 In order to satisfy θF>90°, there is, for example, the following method. (1) As shown in FIG. a, the lighting section I is positioned in the Z negative direction (back side R side) from the decoration Z, and illuminates the decoration Z from behind. The lighting section I may be embedded inside the mounting surface. The illumination section I may have a light blocking section so that light does not leak to portions other than the end surface X. FIG. (2) The lighting section I side of the decorative body Z is lifted from the mounting surface, and the lighting section I irradiates substantially parallel to the mounting surface. (3) As shown in FIG. b, part of the end surface X is tapered, and the rear surface portion R side is farther from the illumination portion I than the front surface portion F side. The illumination unit I irradiates through this tapered end surface X. As shown in FIG. The absolute value of at least part of the angle θXF formed by the surface portion F and the end face X is preferably 20 to 70°, more preferably 30 to 60°, further preferably 35 to 55°, and even more preferably 40 to 50°. good. The end face X may be substantially planar or curved such as concave or convex. (4) The lighting section I irradiates the mounting surface side with light, and the mirror between the decorative body Z and the lighting section I reflects the light toward the end surface X. The mirror may be parallel to the mounting surface, and the absolute value of the angle θMR formed with the mounting surface may be from 0° to 15°. (5) The substrate upper layer M14 is wedge-shaped, and light enters from the open side of the wedge-shaped substrate upper layer M14. The angle formed by the surface portion F and the interface W is preferably greater than 0° and 60° or less, more preferably 3° or more and 45° or less, still more preferably 5° or more and 30° or less, still more preferably 8° or more and 20°. It can be below. In order to form the base material upper layer M14 in such a wedge shape, the bonding section 52 may be formed by tilting, grinding, and polishing a normal flat transparent material plate 20 and then bonding the material plates 20 together. A spacer may be interposed on one side of the tapered shape, and MMA syrup or the like may be poured into the gap to polymerize. (1) to (5) may be combined. In the case of (3), when θXF is small, the side surface S reflected by the end surface X may be visible when the observer views the surface portion F from the front. In the case of combination with the sixth embodiment, the color of the color strip K may be visible, which is undesirable. To avoid this, |θXF|≧50° is preferable and |θXF|≧45° is more preferable.

表面部Fと溝部Gとの間に隙間があると、光がその隙間を通り、より奥まで届く。被覆部Tが表面部F側にあり、その厚さが好ましくは0.4mm以上・より好ましくは0.8mm以上・さらに好ましくは1.5mm以上であれば、この作用をもたらす。テーパー角が小さいほど、側面Sからの光が装飾体Zの反対側に逃げる度合いが大きくなり、正面中央を中心とし、側面Sの反射像が見えない範囲が大きくなる。テーパーで欠けた部分を埋めるように、LED等の小型の照明部Iが組み込まれてもよい。テーパー角が大きいほど、以下の特徴がある。(1)表面部Fへの入射角が同じ時の照明部Iからの光の中心軸と表面部Fとのなす角が表面部F側に大きくなる。つまり、表面部Fが取り付け壁面Waに平行な場合に、照明部Iが取り付け壁面Waと離れても上記作用を呈する。そのため、照明部Iの大きさ・形状・取り付け方法等の自由度が向上する。(2)一方、先端部分が尖るので、強度低下や危険性増大に対する対策が必要となる。(3)また、正面から見た時に基材下層M15がない部分が広くなるため、の装飾性が低下することがあるが、使用目的等によっては逆に装飾性に寄与することもある。(4)テーパー角が90°未満であると、テーパー部分がプリズム状となって、投影像に分光が現れる。この分光が顕著になり、虹色の幅が広がる。表面部Fに直接当たる光が遮光されると、この虹色がより鮮明になる。基材上層M14の厚さが好ましくは3mm以上・より好ましくは5mm以上・さらに好ましくは7mm以上・一層好ましくは9mm以上で、端面Xが広がるので同様の効果が得られる。端面Xに、段落0030に記載のような凹凸があれば、独特の視覚効果をもたらす。例えばカンナがけとバフ研磨でこれが得られる。また、表面部F又はそれと平行に、基材上層M14や被覆部Tとは色が異なる界面があれば、界面Wへの投影像上に反映し、その部分の影がそれ以外の部分とは異なる色や明るさを呈する。具体的には、有色・無色で透明・不透明の色面層や、被覆部Tと基材上層M14との間の気泡・空隙・縮緬皺・その他の着色により、意匠的効果が得られる。 If there is a gap between the surface portion F and the groove portion G, light passes through the gap and reaches deeper. If the covering portion T is located on the surface portion F side and has a thickness of preferably 0.4 mm or more, more preferably 0.8 mm or more, and even more preferably 1.5 mm or more, this effect is brought about. The smaller the taper angle, the greater the extent to which the light from the side surface S escapes to the opposite side of the ornamental body Z, and the larger the range centered on the center of the front surface where the reflected image of the side surface S cannot be seen. A small illuminating part I such as an LED may be incorporated so as to fill in the portion missing due to the taper. As the taper angle increases, the following features are obtained. (1) The angle formed by the central axis of the light from the illumination section I and the surface portion F when the incident angle to the surface portion F is the same increases toward the surface portion F side. That is, when the surface portion F is parallel to the mounting wall surface Wa, even if the lighting unit I is separated from the mounting wall surface Wa, the above effects are exhibited. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the size, shape, mounting method, etc. of the illumination unit I is improved. (2) On the other hand, since the tip portion is sharp, it is necessary to take countermeasures against a decrease in strength and an increase in danger. (3) When viewed from the front, the portion without the base material lower layer M15 becomes wider, which may reduce the decorativeness of the substrate, but may contribute to the decorativeness depending on the purpose of use. (4) If the taper angle is less than 90°, the tapered portion becomes prism-like, and the projected image shows light. This spectrum becomes conspicuous and the range of rainbow colors widens. When the light directly striking the surface portion F is blocked, the rainbow colors become more vivid. The thickness of the base material upper layer M14 is preferably 3 mm or more, more preferably 5 mm or more, still more preferably 7 mm or more, and even more preferably 9 mm or more, and the end face X is widened, so that the same effect can be obtained. If the end surface X has unevenness as described in paragraph 0030, a unique visual effect is produced. Planing and buffing, for example, provide this. In addition, if there is an interface with a different color from the base material upper layer M14 or the covering portion T at the surface portion F or parallel to it, it will be reflected on the projected image on the interface W, and the shadow of that portion will be different from the other portions. Exhibit different colors and brightness. Specifically, a colored or colorless, transparent or opaque color surface layer, air bubbles, voids, wrinkles, or other colors between the covering portion T and the base material upper layer M14 can provide a design effect.

照明部I又は装飾体Zの少なくとも一方が可動であれば、その動きにつれて明暗像が変化する。例えば装飾体Zがドアに取り付けられ、照明部Iが固定された壁に設置されるか、あるいは揺れるようにドアに半固定されれば、ドアの開閉に応じて入射角θFが変化する。照明部Iが点滅してもよく、色や照射位置を変えてもよい。複数の照明部Iが順次それを行ってもよい。本実施形態において表面部Fは基材上層M14のうち基材下層M15とは反対側の露出面である。特開2019-025860号公報において、透過性を有する基材上層とそれより低透過性の基材下層を有する装飾体の端面に、表面部Fへの入射角が90°を超える角度で光を照射することは記載されていない。前記装飾体Zが、光が入射する端面Xとは別に、光学的な界面を有してもよい。光学的な界面とは、それを境として屈折率・透過率等が異なることで、その界面の透過前・透過後の光の性質が変化するような界面である。この界面は、端面X・溝部Gの側面S・色面層Uと基材部Mとの界面の何れかでもよい。いずれも、光の入射角に応じてその光を透過・屈折又は全反射し、視覚的効果をもたらす。少なくとも一部の表面部Fに対する角度の絶対値が片面全反射角以下又は両面全反射角であるようなこの界面が段落0029・0030に記載の表面粗さの条件を満たしてもよく、さらに表面うねりの条件を満たしてもよい。前者により反射パターンが鮮明となり、後者により反射光パターンに精妙な陰影が加わる。照明部I・端面X・溝部G・色帯部K等が文字や模様等を有していれば、そのパターンが界面Wに投影される。表面部Fがハードコート等の薄膜を有する場合も、一般に上記が成立する。 If at least one of the illumination section I and the decorative body Z is movable, the contrast image changes as it moves. For example, if the decorative body Z is attached to the door and the illumination unit I is installed on a fixed wall or semi-fixed to the door so as to swing, the incident angle θF changes according to the opening and closing of the door. The illumination unit I may blink, or the color and irradiation position may be changed. A plurality of illumination units I may perform it sequentially. In the present embodiment, the surface portion F is the exposed surface of the upper substrate layer M14 on the side opposite to the lower substrate layer M15. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-025860, light is applied to the end face of a decorative body having an upper substrate layer having transparency and a lower substrate layer having lower permeability than that at an angle of incidence of more than 90° on the surface portion F. Irradiation is not mentioned. The decorative body Z may have an optical interface in addition to the end face X on which light is incident. An optical interface is an interface at which the properties of light before and after transmission through the interface change due to differences in refractive index, transmittance, and the like. This interface may be any one of the end surface X, the side surface S of the groove portion G, and the interface between the color surface layer U and the base material portion M. All of them transmit, refract, or totally reflect light depending on the angle of incidence of the light, resulting in a visual effect. This interface whose absolute value of the angle with respect to at least a part of the surface portion F is equal to or less than the single-sided total reflection angle or the double-sided total reflection angle may satisfy the surface roughness conditions described in paragraphs 0029 and 0030, and the surface It may satisfy the swell condition. The former sharpens the reflected light pattern, and the latter adds subtle shading to the reflected light pattern. If the illumination portion I, the end surface X, the groove portion G, the color belt portion K, etc. have characters, patterns, or the like, the pattern is projected onto the interface W. FIG. The above also generally holds when the surface portion F has a thin film such as a hard coat.

請求の範囲控。項1:積層状に接合された透過性を有する層及び前記透過性を有する層より透過性が低い層を有する装飾体と、前記装飾体に光を照射する照明部からなる装飾体照明設備であって、前記透過性を有する層が前記透過性が低い層の反対側に外側の界面である表面部を有し、前記表面部に対し外側透過性が低い層の反対側から垂直に照射される光の入射角を0°とすると、前記照明部が前記表面部に90°より大きい入射角となるように光を照射する(前記装飾体の内部での照明部から表面部に至る光路上に光の反射がないものとする)ことを特徴とする装飾体照明設備。項2:前記表面部の平均粗さが1μm以下である、項1に記載の装飾体照明設備。項3:前記装飾体が、光が入射する端面とは別の光学的な界面を有する、項1又は2に記載の装飾体照明設備。項4:前記界面の少なくとも一部が前記表面部に平行でない、項3に記載の装飾体照明設備。項5:前記界面が溝部である、項1~4の何れかに記載の装飾体照明設備。項6:前記界面の平均粗さが1μm以下である、項1~5の何れかに記載の装飾体照明設備。項7:前記界面の色が前記透過性を有する層と同等である、項1~6の何れかに記載の装飾体照明設備。項8:前記界面の少なくとも一部の表面部Fに対する角度の絶対値が片面全反射角以下である、項1~7の何れかに記載の装飾体照明設備。項9:前記装飾体において前記照明部からの光を受ける端面と前記表面部との前記透過性を有する層の側の角度が20~70°である、項1~8の何れかに記載の装飾体照明設備。項10:前記界面が前記装飾体の外部に露出せず、前記界面と前記透過性が低い層との間に前記透過性を有する層を有し、前記透過性を有する層前記界面と前記表面部との間に前記透過性を有する層と実用上同じ色の層を有する、項1~9の何れかに記載の装飾体照明設備。 Claim copy. Item 1: A decoration lighting equipment comprising a decoration having a layer having transparency joined in a laminated state and a layer having a lower permeability than the layer having transparency, and an illumination unit for irradiating the decoration with light. wherein the layer having permeability has a surface portion which is an outer interface on the opposite side of the layer with low permeability, and the surface portion is irradiated perpendicularly from the opposite side of the layer with low outer permeability. Assuming that the incident angle of the light is 0°, the illumination section irradiates the surface portion with light at an incident angle larger than 90° (on the optical path from the illumination section to the surface portion inside the decorative body). There shall be no reflection of light in the decorative body lighting equipment. Item 2: The decorative lighting equipment according to Item 1, wherein the surface portion has an average roughness of 1 μm or less. Item 3: The decorative body lighting equipment according to Item 1 or 2, wherein the decorative body has an optical interface different from an end face on which light is incident. Item 4: The decorative lighting equipment according to Item 3, wherein at least part of the interface is not parallel to the surface portion. Item 5: The decorative lighting equipment according to any one of Items 1 to 4, wherein the interface is a groove. Item 6: The decorative lighting equipment according to any one of Items 1 to 5, wherein the interface has an average roughness of 1 μm or less. Item 7: The decorative lighting equipment according to any one of Items 1 to 6, wherein the color of the interface is the same as that of the transparent layer. Item 8: The decorative lighting equipment according to any one of Items 1 to 7, wherein the absolute value of the angle of at least a portion of the interface with respect to the surface portion F is equal to or less than the one-sided total reflection angle. Item 9: The item according to any one of Items 1 to 8, wherein an angle between an end surface of the decorative body that receives light from the illumination unit and the surface portion on the side of the transparent layer is 20 to 70°. Decorative lighting fixtures. Item 10: The interface is not exposed to the outside of the decorative body, and the layer having the permeability is provided between the interface and the layer having low permeability, and the layer having the permeability The interface and the surface Item 10. The decorative lighting equipment according to any one of items 1 to 9, which has a layer practically having the same color as the layer having transparency between the part.

《第14の実施形態》
従来、特開2019-005965号公報に記載の発明のように、グリッターを使用した加飾画像が知られている。しかしこの加飾画像は、紙等を支持体とし、表面の保護がないか弱く、自立に耐える強度も耐候性も有さなかった。本実施形態は、安価かつ容易に製造可能であって、屋外等でのサイン用途に使用可能な高耐久性の材料・装飾体の提供を課題としてもよい。本実施形態では、貼合部52が扁平着色剤Cを含む扁平着色層MCの裏面部R側に透過性の低い低透過層MO等を接着層Aで接合する。扁平着色剤Cは特に限定されないが、例えばアルミニウム・酸化アルミニウム・チタン・酸化チタン・金・銀・銅・ニッケル・コバルト・鉄・クロム・スズ・亜鉛・インジウム・二酸化ケイ素のうち少なくとも何れかを含んでもよく、さらに樹脂等の被膜を外側に有してもよく、ガラスや樹脂の薄片やフィルムでもよく、さらに上記金属等の被膜を外側に有してもよく、マイカ・合成マイカでもよい。金属を含むグリッターは、主として金属による正反射である金属光沢を呈し、他の部分とは大きく異なる色や輝きを放つ。これが加飾性を向上させる。グリッターの金属光沢は、光源方向の変化に伴って各微小部分の反射光が見えたり見えなかったりすることで識別可能である。また金属光沢では、反射光が偏光しないので、偏光フィルタを通した観察時に偏光フィルタの角度が変化しても反射状態が変化しない。金属光沢は、この特徴により、樹脂・ガラス等の反射とは区別される。扁平着色剤Cはグリッターに限られず、正方形・長方形等に裁断された色つきフィルムでもよい。扁平着色剤Cは一般の顔料でもよいが、より大きく扁平な薄片であれば視認性が向上する。この薄片の最大の長さlCは、視認性のため、好ましくは0.02mm以上・より好ましくは0.05mm以上・さらに好ましくは0.1mm以上・一層好ましくは0.2mm以上・より一層好ましくは0.4mm以上でもよい。上限は制限されないが、この長さが接着層Aの厚さに対して大きいほど、複数の扁平着色剤C粒子の方向が揃って一律の反射状態を呈することがある。多様な方向への反射効果のためには、最大長さlCは、好ましくは40mm以下・より好ましくは20mm以下・さらに好ましくは10mm以下でもよい。図19aに示すように、扁平着色剤Cにおいて、最大長さlCの中点を通り最大長さlCの方向に直交する断面の径のうち前記中点を通る最も短い長さを厚さtCとすると、最大長さlC/厚さtCは5以上が好ましく、10以上がより好ましく、20以上がさらに好ましく、40以上が一層好ましい。扁平着色剤Cが湾曲している場合、厚さtCは湾曲量を含む差し渡し長ではなく、扁平着色剤C本体の厚さである。扁平着色剤Cにおいて、最大の長さlC及び厚さtCの両方向に垂直な方向の長さは、厚さtCの好ましくは2倍以上・より好ましくは4倍以上・さらに好ましくは8倍以上でもよい。これらの測定は走査型電子顕微鏡等で試料を各方向から観察して行ってもよく、段落0016のスキャナを使用する方法等と同様でもよい。
<<14th embodiment>>
Conventionally, decorative images using glitter are known, such as the invention described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-005965. However, this decorative image uses paper or the like as a support, has no or weak surface protection, and does not have the strength and weather resistance to stand on its own. The object of the present embodiment may be to provide a highly durable material/decorative body that can be manufactured inexpensively and easily, and that can be used for outdoor sign applications. In this embodiment, the bonding portion 52 bonds the low-transmittance layer MO or the like with the adhesive layer A to the rear surface portion R side of the flat colored layer MC containing the flat coloring agent C. FIG. The flat colorant C is not particularly limited, but includes at least one of aluminum, aluminum oxide, titanium, titanium oxide, gold, silver, copper, nickel, cobalt, iron, chromium, tin, zinc, indium, and silicon dioxide. Further, it may have a film such as resin on the outside, it may be a thin piece or film of glass or resin, it may further have a film such as the above metal on the outside, or it may be mica or synthetic mica. Glitter containing metal mainly exhibits metallic luster, which is specular reflection by the metal, and emits a color and shine that are significantly different from those of other parts. This improves the decorativeness. The metallic luster of the glitter can be discerned by the visible or invisible reflection of each minute portion as the direction of the light source changes. In addition, since reflected light is not polarized with metallic luster, the reflection state does not change even if the angle of the polarizing filter changes during observation through the polarizing filter. Metallic luster is distinguished from the reflection of resin, glass, etc. by this feature. The flat colorant C is not limited to glitter, and may be a colored film cut into squares, rectangles, or the like. The flat colorant C may be a general pigment, but the visibility is improved if the flakes are larger and flatter. For visibility, the maximum length lC of the flake is preferably 0.02 mm or more, more preferably 0.05 mm or more, still more preferably 0.1 mm or more, still more preferably 0.2 mm or more, and even more preferably It may be 0.4 mm or more. Although the upper limit is not limited, the longer the length is with respect to the thickness of the adhesive layer A, the more flat colorant C particles may be oriented and exhibit a uniform reflection state. For reflective effects in multiple directions, the maximum length lC may preferably be 40 mm or less, more preferably 20 mm or less, even more preferably 10 mm or less. As shown in FIG. 19a, in the flat colorant C, the thickness tC is the shortest length among the diameters of a cross section passing through the midpoint of the maximum length lC and orthogonal to the direction of the maximum length lC. Then, the maximum length lC/thickness tC is preferably 5 or more, more preferably 10 or more, still more preferably 20 or more, and even more preferably 40 or more. When the flat colorant C is curved, the thickness tC is the thickness of the main body of the flat colorant C, not the span length including the amount of curvature. In the flat colorant C, the length in the direction perpendicular to both the maximum length lC and the thickness tC is preferably 2 times or more, more preferably 4 times or more, and even more preferably 8 times or more of the thickness tC. good. These measurements may be performed by observing the sample from each direction with a scanning electron microscope or the like, or may be the same as the method using a scanner in Paragraph 0016 or the like.

扁平着色層MCのうち扁平着色剤C以外の部分である透過部MTは、段落0015に記載の全光線透過率の条件を満たしてもよい。透過部MTの視感透過率(D65、又は視感透過率τV:JIS T 7333/ISO8980-3・分光透過率におけるある波長帯の透過率・全光線透過率・拡散光線透過率・平行光線透過率)は、好ましくは50%以上・より好ましくは60%以上・さらに好ましくは70%以上・一層好ましくは80%以上でもよい(CM‐5、10°視野、D65、00全透過又は特記の場合正透過近似、自動校正又は0校正・100校正後の測定。本明細書の他の箇所での同種の測定でも基本的に同様である。視感透過率はCM‐5によって測定されたYxy又はXYZのY値とする。)。ただし、扁平着色層MCが扁平着色剤Cを大量に含む場合、透過率が不均等であるため、これらの測定が難しいことや、測定値が実際の透過率を反映していないことがある。その場合、透過率が均等な標本体との目視比較でもよい。扁平着色剤Cの光輝性は、背景となる低透過層MOとのコントラストによって最大化する。よって、扁平着色剤Cが扁平着色層MCを埋め尽くし、低透過層MOを遮蔽してしまうのは望ましくないことがある。扁平着色層MCにおける扁平着色剤Cが占める部分の割合は、好ましくは2~80%・より好ましくは4~70%・さらに好ましくは8~60%である。ただし、装飾体Zが低透過層MOを有さない場合等には、この割合が80%を超えてもよい。測定は、低透過層MOを除去した扁平着色層MCの透過光源によるスキャン画像を対象とする。画像は正方形でグレースケールのポジ画像、シャープネスなし、最大長さlCが画像の1辺の1/10ないし1/20に近くなるような画像解像度に設定される。スキャン時のトーンカーブはリニアとし(又はガンマ値1)、透過部分の最も明るい画素が100%明度、扁平着色剤Cの最も暗い画素が0%明度となるようなリニアのトーンカーブで、この画像がトーン変換される。さらにこの画像が、50%を閾値として2階調化される。この画像における黒の割合が、求める割合である。ただし、この測定方法では、扁平着色剤Cが小さいほど、その面積に対する輪郭長の比率が大きくなるので、光源からのフレアの影響が大きく、扁平着色剤Cの割合が実際より小さく反映される傾向がある。そのために、上記のような、比率が小さい側に広い範囲となっている。扁平着色剤Cは透過部MTと実用上異なる色でもよい。散布部51は、キャスト製法等の既知の工程で、扁平着色剤CをMMA等の透過部MTの材料に散布・混錬して材料板20を製造してもよい。図19aのように扁平着色層MCがさらに表面部F側の層を有さず表面部F側に露出していれば、扁平着色剤Cに入射し反射して観察者に届く光量の減衰が、入射から出射に至る光路の間の夾雑物が少なくなる分、低減される。これにより扁平着色剤Cの光輝性効果が向上する。 The transmissive portion MT, which is a portion of the flat colored layer MC other than the flat coloring agent C, may satisfy the total light transmittance condition described in paragraph 0015. Luminous transmittance of the transmission part MT (D65, or luminous transmittance τV: JIS T 7333 / ISO8980-3, transmittance of a certain wavelength band in spectral transmittance, total light transmittance, diffuse light transmittance, parallel light transmittance ratio) is preferably 50% or more, more preferably 60% or more, still more preferably 70% or more, and even more preferably 80% or more (CM-5, 10° field of view, D65, 00 total transmission or in special cases Measurements after specular transmission approximation, auto-calibration, or calibrations of 0 and 100. Similar measurements elsewhere in this specification are essentially the same.Luminous transmittance is measured by CM-5 Yxy or Y value of XYZ). However, when the flat colored layer MC contains a large amount of the flat coloring agent C, the transmittance is uneven, making it difficult to measure these, and the measured values may not reflect the actual transmittance. In that case, a visual comparison with a specimen having a uniform transmittance may be performed. The brightness of the flat colorant C is maximized by the contrast with the background low-transmittance layer MO. Therefore, it may not be desirable for the flat colorant C to fill the flat colored layer MC and shield the low-transmittance layer MO. The ratio of the portion occupied by the flat coloring agent C in the flat colored layer MC is preferably 2 to 80%, more preferably 4 to 70%, still more preferably 8 to 60%. However, when the decoration Z does not have the low-permeability layer MO, this ratio may exceed 80%. The target of the measurement is a scanned image of the flat colored layer MC from which the low-transmitting layer MO has been removed, by a transmitted light source. The image is a square, grayscale positive image, no sharpness, and the image resolution is set such that the maximum length lC is close to 1/10 to 1/20 of a side of the image. The tone curve at the time of scanning is linear (or a gamma value of 1). is tone-converted. Further, this image is converted to two gradations with a threshold of 50%. The percentage of black in this image is the desired percentage. However, in this measurement method, the smaller the flat coloring agent C, the larger the ratio of the contour length to the area, so the flare from the light source has a greater influence, and the ratio of the flat coloring agent C tends to be reflected smaller than it actually is. There is Therefore, as described above, the range is wide on the side where the ratio is small. The flat colorant C may be of a color practically different from that of the transmissive portion MT. The distributing section 51 may manufacture the material plate 20 by distributing and kneading the flat colorant C with the material of the transmitting section MT such as MMA in a known process such as a casting method. If the flat colored layer MC does not have a layer on the surface portion F side and is exposed on the surface portion F side as shown in FIG. , is reduced by the amount of contaminants in the optical path from the entrance to the exit. Thereby, the glittering effect of the flat colorant C is improved.

また、それぞれの扁平着色剤Cの最も広い面がランダムに多様な方向を向いている方が、視点や光線の方向の変化に応じて異なる位置の扁平着色剤Cが順次明滅する効果が大きくなる。この度合を扁平方向乱雑率とし、好ましくは20%以上・より好ましくは30%以上・さらに好ましくは40%以上・一層好ましくは50%以上・より一層好ましくは60%以上・さらに一層好ましくは70%以上でもよい。最大は100%であるが、通常は、光らない扁平着色剤Cや両方向で光る扁平着色剤Cがあるため100%にはならない。扁平方向乱雑率は以下の方法で測定可能である。低透過層MOを除去した扁平着色層MCの表面部F側の任意の点に対し、z負(正)方向の同じ位置から、同じ撮影範囲で同画素数の5点の画像が撮影される。その際、最大長さlCが画像の短辺の1/10ないし1/20に近く、かつ露光面中心から前記短辺を見込む角度が12°になるよう焦点距離・撮影距離・画面の範囲が調整される。5点の画像A・B・C・D・Eは、それぞれ異なる照明条件で撮影される。うちA・B・C・Dは、撮影対象中心に下した垂線に対して45°の斜め方向であって、z方向から見た時に互いに垂直又は平行(反対)であるような4方向から(例えばA:上・B:下・C:左・D:右の各斜め方向から)、充分な大きさの面光源で照射して撮影される。光源は1灯等の減衰がなだらかな照明で、照明面内の輝度差が1/10以下になるような距離に設置されてもよい。扁平着色層MCの背景は無反射布等の充分に低反射の面である。Eは背景側から拡散光線で照射される。5点とも同じ露光条件となるよう光量が調整される。5点とも上記の要領で2階調化される。z方向から見た時に照射方向が互いに反対の2点の画像の2組に対し、それぞれの差分成分を加算して2点の画像とする。この2点の画像の差分が合算された成分の、全扁平着色剤Cの成分に対する割合が、求める値である。つまりそれは、A及びBを差の絶対値モードで重ねた画像並びにC及びDを同様に重ねた画像を合成した画像における差分の合計の画素数(重複する部分は含まない)を、Cの黒の画素数で除した商の百分率表示である。 In addition, when the widest surface of each flat colorant C is randomly oriented in various directions, the effect of sequentially blinking the flat colorants C at different positions according to changes in the viewpoint and the direction of the light is enhanced. . This degree is defined as a flat direction randomness rate, preferably 20% or more, more preferably 30% or more, still more preferably 40% or more, even more preferably 50% or more, even more preferably 60% or more, and even more preferably 70% It can be more than that. The maximum is 100%, but usually it does not reach 100% because there are flat colorants C that do not shine and flat colorants C that shine in both directions. The flat direction randomness factor can be measured by the following method. For an arbitrary point on the surface portion F side of the flat colored layer MC from which the low-transmittance layer MO has been removed, five images of the same number of pixels are photographed from the same position in the z negative (positive) direction in the same photographing range. . At that time, the focal length, the photographing distance, and the range of the screen are adjusted so that the maximum length lC is close to 1/10 to 1/20 of the short side of the image, and the angle of viewing the short side from the center of the exposure surface is 12°. adjusted. Five images A, B, C, D, and E are shot under different illumination conditions. Among them, A, B, C, and D are oblique directions at 45° to the perpendicular to the center of the object to be photographed, and from four directions that are perpendicular or parallel (opposite) to each other when viewed from the z direction ( For example, from each oblique direction of A: top, B: bottom, C: left, and D: right), the image is captured by illuminating with a sufficiently large surface light source. The light source may be illumination with gentle attenuation, such as one lamp, and may be installed at a distance such that the luminance difference in the illumination plane is 1/10 or less. The background of the flat colored layer MC is a sufficiently low reflection surface such as non-reflection cloth. E is illuminated with diffuse light from the background side. The amount of light is adjusted so that all five points have the same exposure conditions. All five points are converted to two gradations in the manner described above. Difference components are added to two sets of images of two points whose irradiation directions are opposite to each other when viewed in the z-direction to obtain two images of two points. The ratio of the component obtained by summing the differences between the two images to the total component of the flat colorant C is the value to be obtained. In other words, it is the total number of pixels of the difference (not including the overlapping part) in the composite image of the image in which A and B are overlapped in the absolute difference mode and the image in which C and D are overlapped in the same way, and the black of C. is a percentage display of the quotient divided by the number of pixels.

低透過層MOは白・黒等の様々な色でもよく、無色透明でもよく、扁平着色層MCとは異なる扁平着色剤Cを含んでもよい。低透過層MOは扁平着色層MCと同じ扁平着色剤Cを含んでもよい。その視感透過率(又は視感透過率τV・分光透過率におけるある波長帯の透過率・全光線透過率・拡散光線透過率・平行光線透過率)は、好ましくは30%以下・より好ましくは10%以下・さらに好ましくは5%以下・一層好ましくは3%以下でもよい。低透過層MOの全光線透過率は、好ましくは30%以下・より好ましくは10%以下・さらに好ましくは5%以下・一層好ましくは3%以下でもよい。なお、全光線透過率は一般に透明体の測定に用いられるが、この場合便宜的に不透明ないしそれに近い樹脂等の測定に準用される。低透過層MOのLのL値が、好ましくは20以下・より好ましくは10以下・さらに好ましくは5以下・一層好ましくは2以下、又はマンセル表色系のV値で、好ましくは3以下・より好ましくは2以下・さらに好ましくは1以下であれば、扁平着色剤Cと背景とのコントラストが特に大きい(CM‐5、反射光測定、SCE、D65、10°視野)。低透過層MOは壁面Wa・床面・卓上面等でもよい。装飾体Zの壁面等への設置方法は、接着剤23だけでなく、ビス等の建築金物・装飾金物つまり金具(プラスチック・木等の非金属製品も含む。)でもよい。これにより装飾体Zが壁面から浮いた状態で設置可能となる。扁平着色層MC・低透過層MO・後述の被覆部Tは段落0014に記載の材料板20の曲げ弾性率の範囲と同様でもよい。 The low-transmittance layer MO may have various colors such as white and black, may be colorless and transparent, and may contain a flat colorant C different from the flat colored layer MC. The low-permeability layer MO may contain the same flat colorant C as the flat colored layer MC. The luminous transmittance (or luminous transmittance τV, transmittance in a certain wavelength band in spectral transmittance, total light transmittance, diffuse light transmittance, parallel light transmittance) is preferably 30% or less, more preferably It may be 10% or less, more preferably 5% or less, and even more preferably 3% or less. The total light transmittance of the low-transmitting layer MO may be preferably 30% or less, more preferably 10% or less, even more preferably 5% or less, and even more preferably 3% or less. Incidentally, the total light transmittance is generally used for the measurement of a transparent body, but in this case, for the sake of convenience, it is applied mutatis mutandis to the measurement of an opaque or nearly opaque resin. The L value of L * a * b * of the low-permeability layer MO is preferably 20 or less, more preferably 10 or less, even more preferably 5 or less, still more preferably 2 or less, or the V value of the Munsell color system, preferably is 3 or less, more preferably 2 or less, still more preferably 1 or less, the contrast between flat colorant C and the background is particularly large (CM-5, reflected light measurement, SCE, D65, 10° field of view). The low-permeability layer MO may be a wall surface Wa, a floor surface, a table surface, or the like. The decoration body Z may be installed on the wall surface or the like using not only the adhesive 23 but also construction hardware such as screws, decorative hardware, that is, metal fittings (including non-metallic products such as plastic and wood). As a result, the decorative body Z can be installed in a state of floating from the wall surface. The flat colored layer MC, the low-transmittance layer MO, and the covering portion T, which will be described later, may have the same flexural modulus range as that of the material plate 20 described in paragraph 0014.

扁平着色層MCの厚さにより紫外線の透過量が減り、扁平着色剤C等の褪色が減少する。扁平着色層MCがPMMA等の(メタ)アクリレートを含む場合、特に紫外線遮断作用が大きい。加えて、扁平着色層MCの厚さが好ましくは1.4mm以上・より好ましくは1.8mm以上・さらに好ましくは2.3mm以上・一層好ましくは2.8mm以上であれば、紫外線遮断作用がより大きい。その厚さが1mm以上・1.5mm以上でもよい。さらに、扁平着色層MCが厚いほど、一般に扁平着色剤Cが多様な方向を向くので、視線を移動すると様々な位置で明滅が観察される効果が増す。また層の厚さ方向における扁平着色剤Cの分布位置の幅が拡がるため、立体感が向上する。この立体感のためには、扁平着色層MCの厚さのうち扁平着色剤Cが分布する部分の厚さの割合が、好ましくは20%以上・より好ましくは40%以上・さらに好ましくは60%以上・一層好ましくは80%以上でもよい。扁平着色剤Cが分布する部分が厚さ方向で複数に分かれている場合にはそれらの厚さの合計である。また、扁平着色剤Cが分布する部分の厚さが、好ましくは0.5mm以上・より好ましくは1mm以上・さらに好ましくは1.5mm以上でもよい。低透過層MOの厚さが好ましくは0.4mm以上・より好ましくは0.9mm以上・さらに好ましくは1・3mm以上・一層好ましくは1.8mm以上であれば、充分に不透明になる。この厚さは1mm以上・1.4mm以上でもよい。また、扁平着色剤Cへの保護が強化され、屋外でも充分な耐久性が得られる。装飾体Z全体の厚さは、好ましくは2mm以上・より好ましくは3mm以上・さらに好ましくは4mm以上でもよい。これにより装飾体Zが自立可能となり、堅牢性を得る。厚さの上限は特に限定されないが、扁平着色剤Cの光輝効果や重量等から、1000mm以下又は500mm以下が現実的である。大きさも限定されないが、出願時点で入手可能な材料板20のサイズからすると、2200×3300mm程度が実用上の最大サイズである。扁平着色剤Cの光輝性が視認可能である最小サイズは、3×3mm程度である。 The thickness of the flat colored layer MC reduces the amount of transmission of ultraviolet rays, thereby reducing the fading of the flat coloring agent C and the like. When the flat colored layer MC contains a (meth)acrylate such as PMMA, it has a particularly large UV shielding effect. In addition, when the thickness of the flat colored layer MC is preferably 1.4 mm or more, more preferably 1.8 mm or more, more preferably 2.3 mm or more, and even more preferably 2.8 mm or more, the UV blocking action is enhanced. big. The thickness may be 1 mm or more or 1.5 mm or more. Furthermore, the thicker the flat colored layer MC, the more various directions the flat coloring agent C generally faces, so the effect of observing flickering at various positions when the line of sight is moved increases. In addition, since the width of the distribution position of the flat colorant C in the thickness direction of the layer is widened, the three-dimensional effect is improved. For this three-dimensional effect, the ratio of the thickness of the portion where the flat coloring agent C is distributed to the thickness of the flat colored layer MC is preferably 20% or more, more preferably 40% or more, and still more preferably 60%. 80% or more, more preferably 80% or more. When the portion where the flat colorant C is distributed is divided into a plurality of portions in the thickness direction, the thickness is the sum of the thicknesses. Further, the thickness of the portion where the flat colorant C is distributed may be preferably 0.5 mm or more, more preferably 1 mm or more, further preferably 1.5 mm or more. If the thickness of the low-transmittance layer MO is preferably 0.4 mm or more, more preferably 0.9 mm or more, more preferably 1.3 mm or more, and even more preferably 1.8 mm or more, it becomes sufficiently opaque. This thickness may be 1 mm or more or 1.4 mm or more. In addition, the protection of the flat coloring agent C is strengthened, and sufficient durability can be obtained even outdoors. The overall thickness of the decorative body Z may be preferably 2 mm or more, more preferably 3 mm or more, still more preferably 4 mm or more. As a result, the decorative body Z can stand on its own and obtain robustness. Although the upper limit of the thickness is not particularly limited, it is practically 1000 mm or less or 500 mm or less in consideration of the luster effect and weight of the flat colorant C. Although the size is not limited, considering the size of the material plate 20 available at the time of filing, the practical maximum size is about 2200×3300 mm. The minimum size at which the glitter of the flat colorant C is visible is about 3×3 mm.

扁平着色層MC・低透過層MO・接着層Aの間の2つの接合部分が化学拡散接合でもよい。その部分の凹凸の高さの差が、好ましくは0.01mm以上・より好ましくは0.02mm以上・さらに好ましくは0.05mm以上・一層好ましくは0.1mm以上でもよい。それにより、3層が強固に一体化し、雨水等の過酷な環境下でも剥離しにくくなる。散布部51は、例えば三菱ケミカル株式会社製アクリエステルM等のMMA60重量部とPMMA粉末30~60重量部を混合攪拌し、過酸化ベンゾイル等の重合開始剤やフタル酸ジシクロヘキシル・フタル酸ジブチル等の可塑剤等を0.1重量部程度(温度等に応じて調整可)の微量添加し、これを扁平着色層MC又は低透過層MOに塗布・滴下又は充填する(本明細書等ではこれらを塗布と総称する。散布工程S51)。貼合部52は、扁平着色層MC及び低透過層MOを重ね、温水槽等により60~100℃程度の各層のガラス転移点又は融点より若干低い温度で数時間から数日加熱し、その後徐冷してもよい(貼付工程S52)。これはMMAを含むため、材料板20がPMMAであれば、重合によって一体化しやすく、さらに強い化学拡散接合となる場合がある。変性アクリレートでも同様の効果が得られることがある。このように接着層Aで接合することで、厚さ3mm以上の装飾体Zの製造が、大規模な設備によらず容易に可能になる。接着層Aは段落0015に記載の全光線透過率の条件を満たしてもよく、視感透過率(又は視感透過率τV・分光透過率におけるある波長帯の透過率・全光線透過率・拡散光線透過率・平行光線透過率)は、好ましくは70%以上・より好ましくは80%以上・さらに好ましくは90%以上でもよい。接着層Aの厚さは、好ましくは0.03mm以上・より好ましくは0.1mm以上・さらに好ましくは0.3mm以上・一層好ましくは0.8mm以上でもよい。これは、スペーサー・接着剤25の粘度・扁平着色層MCの厚さ及び比重・接合時の加重等によって調整可能である。あるいは、色面層接合部55が扁平着色層MCと低透過層MOとの間にマーキングフィルム等の色面層Uを挟めば、その厚さによって接着層Aの厚さを調整可能である。扁平着色層MCの表面は、扁平着色剤Cの影響で、凹凸状であることが多い。接着層Aが上記の範囲の厚さであれば、この凹凸が埋まり、良好に接合される。また、特に扁平着色剤Cが、樹脂片にアルミ等の金属が蒸着されたものである場合、扁平着色剤Cは入射した光の一部を透過する。透過した光が扁平着色層MCと低透過層MOとの界面で反射すると、扁平着色剤Cが直接反射した光に影響を及ぼす。つまり、扁平着色剤Cの反射をにじませ、そのコントラストを低下させる。このような現象の防止のため、扁平着色層MCと低透過層MOとの間隔が離れているほうがよい。そのためにも、接着層Aが上記の厚さであるとよい。ただし、接着層Aが厚すぎるのは重量や発色の点で支障となることがある。よって、接着層Aの少なくとも一部の厚さは、好ましくは3mm以下・より好ましくは2mm以下・さらに好ましくは1.5mm以下・一層好ましくは1mm以下・最も好ましくは0.5mm以下でもよい。材料板20の反り等のため、一部の厚さがこれを超えてもよい。接着層Aの厚さは、扁平着色層MC又は低透過層MOの少なくとも一方の厚さに対し、好ましくは1/2以下・より好ましくは1/5以下・さらに好ましくは1/10以下・一層好ましくは1/20倍以下でもよい。 Two bonding portions among the flat colored layer MC, the low-permeability layer MO, and the adhesive layer A may be chemical diffusion bonding. The difference in height of the irregularities at that portion may be preferably 0.01 mm or more, more preferably 0.02 mm or more, still more preferably 0.05 mm or more, and even more preferably 0.1 mm or more. As a result, the three layers are strongly integrated and are less likely to peel off even in harsh environments such as rainwater. The spraying unit 51 mixes and stirs, for example, 60 parts by weight of MMA such as Acryester M manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation and 30 to 60 parts by weight of PMMA powder, and adds a polymerization initiator such as benzoyl peroxide and a polymerization initiator such as dicyclohexyl phthalate and dibutyl phthalate. A small amount of about 0.1 parts by weight of a plasticizer or the like (can be adjusted according to the temperature, etc.) is added, and this is applied, dropped, or filled in the flat colored layer MC or the low-permeability layer MO (in this specification, these are referred to as This is generically referred to as coating, which is a spraying step S51). The lamination portion 52 is formed by stacking the flat colored layer MC and the low-permeability layer MO, heating them in a hot water bath or the like at a temperature of about 60 to 100° C. slightly lower than the glass transition point or melting point of each layer for several hours to several days, and then slowly heating. It may be cooled (pasting step S52). Since this contains MMA, if the material plate 20 is PMMA, it may be easily integrated by polymerization, resulting in stronger chemical diffusion bonding. A similar effect may be obtained with modified acrylates. By bonding with the adhesive layer A in this way, the decorative body Z having a thickness of 3 mm or more can be easily manufactured without using large-scale equipment. The adhesive layer A may satisfy the conditions of the total light transmittance described in paragraph 0015, and the luminous transmittance (or luminous transmittance τV, transmittance in a certain wavelength band in spectral transmittance, total light transmittance, diffusion Light transmittance/parallel light transmittance) may be preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, still more preferably 90% or more. The thickness of the adhesive layer A may be preferably 0.03 mm or more, more preferably 0.1 mm or more, still more preferably 0.3 mm or more, and even more preferably 0.8 mm or more. This can be adjusted by the spacer, the viscosity of the adhesive 25, the thickness and specific gravity of the flat colored layer MC, the weight applied during bonding, and the like. Alternatively, if the colored layer joining portion 55 sandwiches a colored layer U such as a marking film between the flat colored layer MC and the low-transmittance layer MO, the thickness of the adhesive layer A can be adjusted by the thickness of the colored layer U. The surface of the flat colored layer MC is often uneven due to the influence of the flat coloring agent C. If the adhesive layer A has a thickness within the above range, the irregularities are filled and good bonding is achieved. In particular, when the flat coloring agent C is a resin piece on which a metal such as aluminum is vapor-deposited, the flat coloring agent C transmits part of the incident light. When the transmitted light is reflected at the interface between the flat colored layer MC and the low-transmitting layer MO, the flat coloring agent C affects the directly reflected light. In other words, the reflection of the flat colorant C is smudged and its contrast is lowered. In order to prevent such a phenomenon, it is preferable that the flat colored layer MC and the low-transmittance layer MO are separated from each other. Therefore, it is preferable that the adhesive layer A has the above thickness. However, if the adhesive layer A is too thick, it may be a problem in terms of weight and color development. Therefore, the thickness of at least part of the adhesive layer A may be preferably 3 mm or less, more preferably 2 mm or less, still more preferably 1.5 mm or less, even more preferably 1 mm or less, and most preferably 0.5 mm or less. A portion of the thickness may exceed this due to warping of the material plate 20 or the like. The thickness of the adhesive layer A is preferably 1/2 or less, more preferably 1/5 or less, still more preferably 1/10 or less of the thickness of at least one of the flat colored layer MC or the low-permeability layer MO. Preferably, it may be 1/20 times or less.

色面層Uが粘着剤Adを有すれば、色面層接合部55は色面層Uを低透過層MOに容易に接合できる。その場合、粘着剤Adは色面層Uの形状に沿う形状である。色面層Uがロール状等の柔軟な粘着シートであれば、板材への接合が特に容易である。貼合部52がその後扁平着色層MCを接合すれば、色面層Uと扁平着色層MCとが化学拡散接合となることがある。粘着剤Adと低透過層MOとは化学拡散結合でないことが多い。色面層Uと低透過層MOとが異なる色であれば、扁平着色剤Cは複数の色を背景にして複数の見え方を呈する。また色面層Uは扁平着色層MCによって保護されるので、屋外用途でも充分な耐光性・耐候性を具える。色面層接合部55は扁平着色層MCの表面部F側に色面層Uを加工してもよく、その上に被覆加工部46が被覆部Tを加工してもよい。その場合、扁平着色層MCと低透過層MOとの間の色面層Uはあってもなくてもよい。色面層Uの分光透過率又は分光反射率のうち、ある波長と別の波長とで、透過率又は反射率の差が、好ましくは20%以上・より好ましくは40%以上・さらに好ましくは60%以上でもよい。また、色面層Uと低透過層MOとで、ある波長における分光透過率又は分光反射率の差が、好ましくは20%以上・より好ましくは40%以上・さらに好ましくは60%以上でもよい。これらにより、文字等が鮮明に表示される。測定はCM‐5等による。また、複数の色面層Uが扁平着色層MCを挟む場合、それぞれの色面層Uの見え方が異なる。例えば、図19bの装飾体Zの表面部F側からは、色面層U11が不透明ならば、色面層U11がある部分では扁平着色剤Cが隠れ、色面層U12には扁平着色剤Cが乗って見える。さらに、色面層U11と色面層U12のように間に別の層を挟む複数の色面層U、あるいは直接重なる複数の色面層Uにおいて、一方が他方の形状に沿う形状でもよく、一部が他の一部の形状に沿う形状でもよい。このような複数の色面層Uは、互いに、扁平着色層MCに対して同じ側でもよく、異なる側でもよい。例えば色面層U11が色面層U12のネガ像(色面層U12が文字で色面層U11が抜き文字等)であれば、図示しない観察者が表面部Fを正面(z負(正)方向)から見た時、色面層U11の透過部から色面層U12が見え、斜め方向から見た時には低透過層MOの色が色面層U12の一部の輪郭の外側に見え、立体感効果を呈する。色面層U11・色面層U12の両方又は一方が抜き加工でも同様の効果が得られる。色面層U11・色面層U12が正確にポジ・ネガの関係ではなく、何れかが太くても大きくてもよい。一方が他方の形状に沿う形状は、さらに以下のような場合も含む;色面層U11が複数の文字状に抜き加工され、色面層U12が、色面層U11の抜き加工された穴部分から透過して見える範囲すべてに覗いて見えるように、色面層U11より一回り大きい矩形状にカットされている;色面層U11が複数の文字からなる数個の単語を表示し、それらが単語ごとに互いに異なる色になるように色面層U12がカットされている;つまり、色面層U12が複数の色に塗りわけられ、その境界部分が被覆部T側の色面層U11によって隠れている;複数の色面層Uが扁平着色層MCと低透過層MOとの間に挟まれ、それらが一部で同じ形状にカットされ、上の色面層Uが下の色面層Uを隠している;又は、下の色面層Uが上の色面層Uより一回り大きく、縁取っている。複数の色面層Uがz方向に重なってもよい。3層以上の色面層Uがz方向で重なる場合には、それらが複数の接合部分や接着層Aに分かれてもよい。低透過層MO及び扁平着色層MCの間の色面層Uが複数でもよい。これにより、低透過層MOが白等の無彩色や透明(透過部MTと同等の透過性を有する)でも、文字の背景の色が自由に選択可能となる。複数の色面層Uが直接重なり、1つの層が別の層の形状に沿う形状である場合、次のような効果が得られる。一方の層が他方の層より一回り大きく、他方の層の範囲を覆っていれば、色面層Uの貼付け時に、それらの境界部分に気泡が入って浮くことがなく、色の変化や酸素の混入による褪色が抑制される。収縮による剥離も防止される。UVプリンタ等により画像等が色面層U・扁平着色層MC・低透過層MO・被覆部Tにプリントされてもよい。これらがあらかじめプリントされた材料でもよい。色面層Uはこのような印刷でもよい。プリントされた透明等の色面層Uの粘着剤Adが扁平着色層MCに接合されてもよい。色面層Uや扁平着色剤Cは布・紙・砂・花弁・葉・昆虫の羽等でもよい。色面層Uは、一般のマーキングフィルムのように、同じ層の中で色の濃淡や階調変化等を有さず、単色であってもよく、各部で実用上同じ色でもよく、層の有無のみによって文字等を表示してもよい。文字等において色面層Uが穴状等に欠落した部分は接着層Aによって埋められてもよい。色面層Uは扁平着色層MC・低透過層MO・接着層Aの接合面の全面でもよく、一部でもよい。一部であれば大きな接合強度が得られる。色面層Uが端面Xに露出しなくてもよい。これにより、色面層Uの剥離が防止される。反対に、色面層Uが端面Xに露出してもよく、装飾体Zを正面から見た場合に全面を覆っていてもよい。ただし、そのような色面層Uが扁平着色層MC等の別の2層の間に挟まれる場合には、それらの接合が弱いことがある。そのため、色面層Uが、正面から見た場合に装飾体Zの全面を覆う場合には、色面層Uが表面部F側に露出してもよい。扁平着色層MCが片側ないし両側に色面層Uだけを有し、被覆部Tも接着層Aも有さなくてもよい。複数の色面層Uのうち2以上の色面層Uの色が互いに異なってもよく、実用上異なってもよく、マンセル色相環(D65)におけるそれらの色相の近い側の間隔の歩度分が、好ましくは25~50・より好ましくは35~50・さらに好ましくは45~50、又はそれらがHSV色空間のH値において離れている小さい側の角度が好ましくは90~180°・より好ましくは120~180°・さらに好ましくは150~180°でもよく、それらの少なくとも何れかの彩度がマンセル表色系(D65)において好ましくはc6以上・より好ましくはc7以上・さらに好ましくはc8以上でもよい。色面層U及び扁平着色層MCが、接着層Aとは別の層を間に挟んでもよい。表面部F側の色面層U等が有色透明であれば、扁平着色剤Cがその色で輝くので、他の部分とは異なって見える。この色面層Uの視感透過率が好ましくは50%以上・より好ましくは60%以上・さらに好ましくは70%以上・一層好ましくは80%以上でこの効果が強く得られる。表面部F側の色面層Uが白の場合、扁平着色剤Cによって暗く見えることがある。それが好ましくない場合には、白等の明度の高い色面層Uは扁平着色層MCより表面部F側のほうがよい。さらに、被覆部Tによっても色面層Uの明度が下がって見えることがあるので、白等の色面層Uは表面部Fに露出してもよい。これに適した色面層Uの反射光測定でのLのL値は、好ましくは60以上・より好ましくは70以上・さらに好ましくは80以上・一層好ましくは90以上、マンセル値のV値は、好ましくは6以上・より好ましくは7以上・さらに好ましくは8以上でもよい。色面層Uが扁平着色層MC等と一部又は全部で接合されなくてもよく、間に空隙を有してもよい。あるいは、色面層Uの範囲が積層面全面より一回り狭く、色面層Uを取り囲んで、扁平着色層MCと低透過層MO等とが接合又は化学拡散接合してもよい。つまり、色面層Uの周囲で色面層Uを挟む複数の層が箱状に接合されてもよい。これにより、密閉性が得られ、接合工程が容易になり、接着層Aを通して観察される場合より色面層Uが明るく見えることがある。ただしその場合、臨界角の作用により、大きな視線角度からは色面層Uの色が見えなくなることがある。また、色面層Uが接着層Aで面接着される場合より接合強度が下がる。 If the color layer U has the adhesive Ad, the color layer joining portion 55 can easily join the color layer U to the low-transmittance layer MO. In that case, the adhesive Ad has a shape that conforms to the shape of the color layer U. If the color surface layer U is a flexible adhesive sheet such as a roll, it is particularly easy to bond it to the plate material. If the bonding portion 52 then bonds the flat colored layer MC, the color surface layer U and the flat colored layer MC may be chemical diffusion bonded. The adhesive Ad and the low-permeability layer MO are often not chemical diffusion bonded. If the color surface layer U and the low-transmittance layer MO have different colors, the flat colorant C presents a plurality of appearances against a background of a plurality of colors. Further, since the colored surface layer U is protected by the flat colored layer MC, it has sufficient light resistance and weather resistance even for outdoor use. The colored surface layer joining portion 55 may process the colored surface layer U on the surface portion F side of the flat colored layer MC, and the coating processing portion 46 may process the coating portion T thereon. In that case, the colored surface layer U between the flat colored layer MC and the low-transmittance layer MO may or may not exist. Among the spectral transmittance or spectral reflectance of the color layer U, the difference in transmittance or reflectance between a certain wavelength and another wavelength is preferably 20% or more, more preferably 40% or more, and even more preferably 60%. % or more. Further, the difference in spectral transmittance or spectral reflectance at a certain wavelength between the color layer U and the low-transmittance layer MO may be preferably 20% or more, more preferably 40% or more, still more preferably 60% or more. With these, characters and the like are displayed clearly. Measurement is by CM-5 or the like. Further, when a plurality of color layers U sandwich the flat colored layer MC, each color layer U looks different. For example, from the surface portion F side of the decorative body Z in FIG. appears to ride on it. Furthermore, in a plurality of color layers U with another layer sandwiched between them, such as the color layer U11 and the color layer U12, or in a plurality of color layers U directly overlapping each other, one may follow the shape of the other, A part may have a shape that conforms to the shape of another part. Such a plurality of color surface layers U may be on the same side or on different sides with respect to the flat colored layer MC. For example, if the color layer U11 is a negative image of the color layer U12 (the color layer U12 is a character and the color layer U11 is a blank character, etc.), an observer (not shown) faces the front surface portion F (z negative (positive) direction), the color layer U12 can be seen from the transmissive portion of the color layer U11, and when viewed from an oblique direction, the color of the low-transmission layer MO can be seen outside the outline of a part of the color layer U12. It has a sensory effect. A similar effect can be obtained even if both or one of the color layer U11 and the color layer U12 is punched. The relationship between the color layer U11 and the color layer U12 is not exactly positive/negative, and either one may be thicker or larger. The shape in which one side conforms to the shape of the other also includes the following case; the color layer U11 is punched into a plurality of character shapes, and the color layer U12 is the punched hole portion of the color layer U11. The color layer U11 is cut into a rectangular shape that is one size larger than the color layer U11 so that the entire range visible through the window can be seen; The color surface layer U12 is cut so that each word has a different color; that is, the color surface layer U12 is divided into a plurality of colors, and the boundary portions are hidden by the color surface layer U11 on the covering part T side. A plurality of color layers U are sandwiched between the flat colored layer MC and the low-transmittance layer MO, which are partially cut into the same shape, and the upper color layer U is the lower color layer U or the lower color layer U is one size larger than the upper color layer U and borders. A plurality of color plane layers U may overlap in the z direction. When three or more color layers U overlap in the z-direction, they may be divided into a plurality of joining portions or adhesive layers A. A plurality of colored layers U may be provided between the low-transmittance layer MO and the flat colored layer MC. As a result, even if the low-transmittance layer MO is an achromatic color such as white or transparent (having the same transmittance as that of the transmissive portion MT), the background color of characters can be freely selected. When a plurality of color plane layers U are directly overlapped and one layer has a shape following the shape of another layer, the following effects can be obtained. If one layer is one size larger than the other layer and covers the range of the other layer, when the color surface layer U is attached, air bubbles will not enter the border and float, and color change and oxygen will not occur. fading due to contamination is suppressed. Peeling due to shrinkage is also prevented. An image or the like may be printed on the color surface layer U, the flat colored layer MC, the low-transmittance layer MO, and the covering portion T by a UV printer or the like. These may be pre-printed materials. The color surface layer U may be printed in this manner. The adhesive Ad of the printed color surface layer U such as transparent may be bonded to the flat colored layer MC. The color surface layer U and the flat colorant C may be cloth, paper, sand, petals, leaves, wings of insects, or the like. The color surface layer U does not have color shading or gradation change in the same layer like a general marking film, and may be a single color, or may be practically the same color in each part. A character or the like may be displayed only by the presence or absence. The adhesive layer A may be used to fill in the portions where the color surface layer U is cut off in the form of holes or the like in characters or the like. The colored surface layer U may be the entire joint surface of the flat colored layer MC, the low-transmittance layer MO, and the adhesive layer A, or may be a part thereof. A large bonding strength can be obtained if it is a part. The color surface layer U does not have to be exposed on the end surface X. As a result, peeling of the color surface layer U is prevented. On the contrary, the color surface layer U may be exposed on the end surface X, and may cover the entire surface when the decoration Z is viewed from the front. However, when such a colored surface layer U is sandwiched between two other layers such as the flat colored layer MC, the bonding between them may be weak. Therefore, when the color layer U covers the entire surface of the decoration Z when viewed from the front, the color layer U may be exposed on the surface portion F side. The flat colored layer MC may have only the colored surface layer U on one or both sides, and may have neither the covering portion T nor the adhesive layer A. The colors of two or more color layers U out of the plurality of color layers U may be different from each other, and may be different in practice, and the rate of the interval on the side of the close side of the Munsell color wheel (D65) is , preferably 25 to 50, more preferably 35 to 50, more preferably 45 to 50, or the smaller angle at which they are separated in the H value of the HSV color space is preferably 90 to 180°, more preferably 120 ~180°, more preferably 150 to 180°, and at least one of them may have a chroma of preferably c6 or more, more preferably c7 or more, and still more preferably c8 or more in the Munsell color system (D65). A layer other than the adhesive layer A may be sandwiched between the colored surface layer U and the flat colored layer MC. If the colored surface layer U or the like on the surface portion F side is colored and transparent, the flat coloring agent C shines with that color, so that it looks different from the other portions. This effect can be strongly obtained when the luminous transmittance of the color layer U is preferably 50% or more, more preferably 60% or more, still more preferably 70% or more, and still more preferably 80% or more. When the color surface layer U on the surface portion F side is white, it may appear dark due to the flat colorant C. If this is not preferable, the color surface layer U having a high lightness such as white should be closer to the surface portion F than the flat colored layer MC. Furthermore, since the lightness of the color surface layer U may appear lowered due to the covering portion T, the color surface layer U such as white may be exposed on the surface portion F. The L value of L * a * b * in the reflected light measurement of the color surface layer U suitable for this is preferably 60 or more, more preferably 70 or more, still more preferably 80 or more, still more preferably 90 or more, Munsell value may be preferably 6 or more, more preferably 7 or more, still more preferably 8 or more. The colored surface layer U may not be partially or wholly bonded to the flat colored layer MC or the like, and may have a gap therebetween. Alternatively, the area of the color layer U may be slightly narrower than the entire lamination surface, and the flat color layer MC and the low-transmittance layer MO may be joined or chemically diffusion-bonded to surround the color layer U. That is, a plurality of layers sandwiching the color layer U around the color layer U may be joined in a box shape. This provides a tight seal, facilitates the bonding process, and may make the color surface layer U appear brighter than when viewed through the adhesive layer A. However, in that case, due to the effect of the critical angle, the color of the color plane layer U may not be visible from a large viewing angle. Moreover, the bonding strength is lower than in the case where the color surface layer U is surface-bonded with the adhesive layer A.

接着層Aは無色透明又は透過部MTと実用上同じ色でもよい。接着層Aと低透過層MOとの接合部分では、接着層Aから低透過層MOにかけて色が連続的に変化する部分が薄いほど、界面での光の拡散が抑えられるので好適である。上記連続的に変化する部分、すなわち透過率が高い部分から透過率が低い部分にかけての領域において、透過率が一定(測定限界未満)の部分を除く透過率が変化する部分の厚さは、0.5mm以下が好ましく、0.1mm以下がより好ましく、0.02mm以下がさらに好ましく、扁平着色層MCの厚さの1/10以下が好ましく、その1/30以下がより好ましく、その1/30以下がさらに好ましい。下限は0又は測定限界でもよい。これは接合部分断面の顕微鏡画像等で測定可能である。化学拡散接合の場合、接着層Aと低透過層MOとの界面の厚さがこれに相当する。接着剤25が溶剤を含む場合、この部分が厚くなりやすい。また、接着層Aの屈折率が透過部MTの屈折率より小さいと、それらの界面で全反射が発生して迷光となり、扁平着色剤Cの光輝性のコントラストを下げることがある。これが望ましくない場合、接着層Aの屈折率が透過部MT又は低透過層MOの少なくとも一方の屈折率以上の方がよい。接着層Aとそれに接する層との屈折率の差が好ましくは0.002以上・より好ましくは0.005以上・さらに好ましくは0.01以上であれば、端面Xから入射した迷光のより多くが全反射を繰り返して反対側の端面Xに抜けるので、コントラストの低下が抑えられる。ただし、屈折率の差が大きすぎると、端面Xでそれらの界面が目立ち、屈折像の歪み等が発生する。それが望ましくない場合には、上記差が好ましくは0.2以下・より好ましくは0.1以下・さらに好ましくは0.05以下でもよい。なお、装飾体Zにおいて、扁平着色剤Cの有無・屈折率・透過率・組成の少なくとも何れかが異なっていれば、それらは異なる層である。扁平着色剤Cが分散された樹脂モノマーが板状に成形された樹脂板では、扁平着色剤Cと樹脂モノマーとの比重の差等により、扁平着色剤Cが表面ないし裏面の一方に偏って分布することがある。この場合、樹脂部分の屈折率・色・組成は略同一であること、扁平着色剤Cの粗密は板の厚さ方向に連続的に変化し特段の境界部分がないことから、この板は1層である。 The adhesive layer A may be colorless and transparent or practically the same color as the transmissive portion MT. At the joint portion between the adhesive layer A and the low-transmittance layer MO, the thinner the portion where the color continuously changes from the adhesive layer A to the low-transmittance layer MO, the more the diffusion of light at the interface is suppressed, which is preferable. In the continuously changing portion, that is, the region from the high transmittance portion to the low transmittance portion, the thickness of the portion where the transmittance changes, excluding the portion where the transmittance is constant (below the measurement limit), is 0 0.5 mm or less, more preferably 0.1 mm or less, still more preferably 0.02 mm or less, preferably 1/10 or less of the thickness of the flat colored layer MC, more preferably 1/30 or less thereof, and 1/30 thereof More preferred are: The lower limit may be 0 or the limit of measurement. This can be measured by using a microscope image of the cross section of the joint. In the case of chemical diffusion bonding, this corresponds to the thickness of the interface between the adhesive layer A and the low-permeability layer MO. If the adhesive 25 contains a solvent, this portion tends to be thick. Further, if the refractive index of the adhesive layer A is smaller than the refractive index of the transmissive portion MT, total reflection occurs at the interface between them, resulting in stray light, which may lower the brightness contrast of the flat colorant C. FIG. If this is not desirable, the refractive index of the adhesive layer A should be equal to or greater than the refractive index of at least one of the transmissive portion MT or the low-transmissive layer MO. If the difference in refractive index between the adhesive layer A and the layer adjacent thereto is preferably 0.002 or more, more preferably 0.005 or more, and still more preferably 0.01 or more, more stray light incident from the end surface X Since the total reflection is repeated and the light passes through the end surface X on the opposite side, a decrease in contrast can be suppressed. However, if the difference in refractive index is too large, the interface between them will be conspicuous at the end face X, causing distortion of the refractive image and the like. If this is not desirable, the difference may be preferably 0.2 or less, more preferably 0.1 or less, and even more preferably 0.05 or less. Note that if at least one of the presence/absence of the flat colorant C, the refractive index, the transmittance, and the composition is different in the decoration Z, they are different layers. In a resin plate in which a resin monomer in which a flat colorant C is dispersed is molded into a plate shape, the flat colorant C is unevenly distributed on either the front surface or the back surface due to the difference in specific gravity between the flat colorant C and the resin monomer. I have something to do. In this case, the refractive index, color, and composition of the resin portion are substantially the same, and the density of the flat colorant C changes continuously in the thickness direction of the plate, and there is no particular boundary portion. layer.

扁平着色層MC等が溝部G又は端面Xの少なくとも一方を有し、溝部Gの側面S又は端面Xの少なくとも一方が鏡面状でもよい。その部分が扁平着色剤Cを映し、立体感を付与する。また、その部分が臨界角の作用により入射光を反射し、近隣の扁平着色剤Cを照らす。照らされた扁平着色剤Cは、光源からの直接の光と反射光の2方向から、装飾体Zの角部では3方向以上から光を受け、ひときわ明るく、また他より多く輝く。その部分の算術平均粗さRは、好ましくは0.5以下・より好ましくは0.25以下・さらに好ましくは0.1以下・一層好ましくは0.05以下・より一層好ましくは0.025以下、最大高さ粗さRは、好ましくは2以下・より好ましくは1以下・さらに好ましくは0.5以下・一層好ましくは0.25以下、下限は測定限界でもよい(JIS B 0601又はISO 4287等、単位はμm、カットオフλcは0.08mmを基準とし、見込まれる測定値に応じて調整される。)。そのために、被覆加工部46等は、接合後に、レーザによる外周のカット・鏡面機でのエッジ加工・バフ研磨等を行ってもよい。特に鏡面機による場合、端面Xに、表面部Fとは斜め方向に線条痕状の筋が多数残ることがある。この筋は、端面X上においてR50~500又はR100~300(mm)の緩やかな曲線状のこともある。この筋が表面部F及び端面Xの角部の交線となす角度は、好ましくは30~85°・より好ましくは35~80°・さらに好ましくは40~75°・一層好ましくは45~70°である。この筋部分の凹凸を前記角部と平行に測定した場合、その算術平均粗さRは、好ましくは1以下・より好ましくは0.3以下・さらに好ましくは0.1以下・一層好ましくは0.05以下、その算術平均うねりW(カットオフλc0.08又は0.25等、筋のピッチに応じる)は、好ましくは0.05以上・より好ましくは0.1以上・さらに好ましくは0.2以上でもよい。0.3~16でもよい。算術平均うねりW又は最大高さうねりWは、好ましくは0.5以上・より好ましくは1以上・さらに好ましくは2以上(カットオフλc0.08mm)でもよい。これらのうねりのカットオフλcは、凹凸のピッチが小さければ0.025mmでもよい。凹凸のピッチは、表面うねり測定の解析曲線に現れる周期的凹凸の複数のピーク間距離の算術平均でもよく、その場合うねり測定の解析より101/2倍又は10倍大きい(小さい)カットオフλcを用いてもよい。鏡面機による鏡面加工では、熱影響が少ないので加工物の劣化が抑えられる。反射の効果のためには、端面Xないし側面Sの少なくとも一部が表面部F又は裏面部Rの少なくとも一方となす小さい側の角の角度をθXとすると、|θX|≧80°でもよく、|θX|≧70°でもよく、|θX|≦90°でもよい。端面Xないし側面Sの少なくとも一部と表面部F又は裏面部Rの少なくとも一方とのなす角度が、好ましくは70~110°・より好ましくは80~100°・さらに好ましくは85~95°でもよい。さらに扁平着色層MCの厚さが好ましくは1mm以上・より好ましくは1.4mm以上・さらに好ましくは1.8mm以上・一層好ましくは2.7mm以上であれば、観察者(図示しない)がこの装飾体Zを斜め方向から見た時、端面Xと表面部Fとで、扁平着色層MCの屈折の作用により、扁平着色層MC(又は色面層U)等の見え方が変化する。これにより立体感効果が得られる。端面Xないし側面Sの少なくとも一部が一部全反射角・片面全反射角・両面全反射角の条件を満たしてもよい。これらの場合を含め、低透過層MOがなくてもよい。表面部Fの算術平均粗さRが、好ましくは0.1以下・より好ましくは0.03以下・さらに好ましくは0.01以下でもよく、これにより透過性が向上する。 The flat colored layer MC or the like may have at least one of the groove portion G and the end surface X, and at least one of the side surface S and the end surface X of the groove portion G may be mirror-finished. The portion reflects the flat coloring agent C and imparts a three-dimensional effect. Also, the portion reflects incident light due to the action of the critical angle, illuminating the neighboring flattened colorant C. The illuminated flat colorant C receives light from two directions, ie, direct light and reflected light from the light source, and three or more directions at the corners of the decorative body Z, and shines brighter and brighter than others. The arithmetic mean roughness Ra of that portion is preferably 0.5 or less, more preferably 0.25 or less, still more preferably 0.1 or less, still more preferably 0.05 or less, and even more preferably 0.025 or less. , The maximum height roughness R z is preferably 2 or less, more preferably 1 or less, more preferably 0.5 or less, and even more preferably 0.25 or less, and the lower limit may be the measurement limit (JIS B 0601 or ISO 4287 etc., the unit is μm, the cutoff λc is based on 0.08 mm, and is adjusted according to the expected measurement value). For this reason, the coating processing section 46 and the like may perform cutting of the outer periphery with a laser, edge processing with a mirror surface machine, buffing, and the like after joining. In particular, in the case of using a specular machine, a large number of streak-like streaks may remain on the end face X in a direction oblique to the surface portion F. This streak may be a gentle curve with R50 to 500 or R100 to 300 (mm) on the end face X. The angle formed by this streak with the line of intersection of the corners of the surface portion F and the end surface X is preferably 30 to 85°, more preferably 35 to 80°, more preferably 40 to 75°, and even more preferably 45 to 70°. is. When the unevenness of the streak portion is measured parallel to the corner portion, the arithmetic mean roughness Ra is preferably 1 or less, more preferably 0.3 or less, further preferably 0.1 or less, and even more preferably 0. 0.05 or less, and its arithmetic mean waviness W a (cutoff λc of 0.08 or 0.25, depending on the pitch of the stripes) is preferably 0.05 or more, more preferably 0.1 or more, and still more preferably 0.05 or more. It may be 2 or more. 0.3 to 16 may be used. The arithmetic mean waviness W a or the maximum height waviness W z may be preferably 0.5 or more, more preferably 1 or more, still more preferably 2 or more (cutoff λc 0.08 mm). A cutoff λc of these undulations may be 0.025 mm if the pitch of the unevenness is small. The pitch of the asperities may be the arithmetic mean of the peak-to-peak distances of the periodic asperities appearing in the analytical curve of the surface waviness measurement, in which case the cutoff λc is 10 1/2 times or 10 times larger (smaller) than the analysis of the waviness measurement. may be used. In the mirror surface processing by the mirror surface machine, deterioration of the workpiece can be suppressed because the heat effect is small. For the effect of reflection, |θX|≧80°, where θX is the smaller angle formed by at least a portion of the end surface X or the side surface S and at least one of the front surface portion F and the rear surface portion R, and |θX|≧70° or |θX|≦90°. The angle formed by at least a part of the end surface X or the side surface S and at least one of the front surface portion F or the rear surface portion R may be preferably 70 to 110°, more preferably 80 to 100°, and further preferably 85 to 95°. . Furthermore, if the thickness of the flat colored layer MC is preferably 1 mm or more, more preferably 1.4 mm or more, more preferably 1.8 mm or more, and even more preferably 2.7 mm or more, an observer (not shown) can see this decoration. When the body Z is viewed from an oblique direction, the appearance of the flat colored layer MC (or the colored surface layer U) and the like changes between the end face X and the surface portion F due to the refraction action of the flat colored layer MC. Thereby, a three-dimensional effect can be obtained. At least part of the end surface X or the side surface S may satisfy the conditions of partial total reflection angle, single side total reflection angle, and double side total reflection angle. Including these cases, the low-transmittance layer MO may be omitted. The surface portion F may have an arithmetic mean roughness Ra of preferably 0.1 or less, more preferably 0.03 or less, and even more preferably 0.01 or less, thereby improving the permeability.

鏡面加工の際、透過部MT及び接着層Aの境界部分付近に、段差が生じる・研磨粉が食い込んで残る・気泡状に荒れる等の意匠性の低下が発生することがある。こうした問題が、使用中に、雨水や紫外線の影響・塵埃の侵入により悪化することもある。これらは接着剤が溶剤を含む場合に起きやすい。透過部MT及び接着層Aが無色透明の場合、これらが特に目立つ。その防止のために、以下の少なくとも何れかでもよい。(1)扁平着色剤C以外の部分及び接着層Aが(メタ)アクリレートを含み、その全体に対する重量比が好ましくは50%以上・より好ましくは70%以上・さらに好ましくは80%以上である。(2)透過部MT又は接着層Aの少なくとも一方の鉛筆硬度(JIS K 5600等を準用)が、好ましくはF~5H・より好ましくはH~4H・さらに好ましくは2H~3Hである。(3)それらの鉛筆硬度の差が、好ましくは3段階以下(Fと3H等)・より好ましくは2段階以下・さらに好ましくは1段階以下である。(4)透過部MT又は接着層Aの少なくとも一方のロックウェル硬さ(JIS B 7726・B 7730・K 7202‐2・Z 2245等、株式会社ミツトヨ製HR‐530L等で測定、HRMS‐p)が、好ましくは40~150・より好ましくは60~130・さらに好ましくは80~110である。(5)それらのロックウェル硬さの差が、好ましくは50以下・より好ましくは40以下・さらに好ましくは30以下である。これらにより、端面Xが面一になる。具体的には、扁平着色層MC・接着層A・低透過層MOの境界部分の少なくとも一部において、端面Xに垂直な方向の凹凸の深さが、好ましくは0.8mm以下・より好ましくは0.4mm以下・さらに好ましくは0.2mm以下・一層好ましくは0.1mm以下・より一層好ましくは0.05mm以下・最も好ましくは0.02mm以下、又は端面Xを境界の方向に垂直に測定した最大高さ粗さRが、好ましくは100以下・より好ましくは50以下・さらに好ましくは25以下・一層好ましくは10以下・より一層好ましくは5以下でもよい。何れも下限は測定限界である。凹凸の深さは、表面粗さ測定機の解析プロファイルの図から読み取り可能である。この凹凸は、接着層Aの扁平着色層MCないし低透過層MOに対する凹みを含む。なお、色面層Uが端面Xに露出する場合、透過部MT及び接着層Aとの色の差が大きければ、意匠性の低下が目立つことは少ない。また、端面Xに露出した扁平着色剤Cが、加工時に端面Xの透明度を下げないために、扁平着色剤Cはポリオレフィン・PET・(メタ)アクリレートの少なくとも何れかを含んでもよく、PVCを含まなくてもよい。さらに貼合部52又は被覆加工部46等が装飾体Zの各辺にC面取り処理を行ってもよい。各種の事故防止のため、そのC面(又はR面)が好ましくはC0.05(又はR、単位はmm、以下同)~2・より好ましくは0.07~1・さらに好ましくは0.1~0.5でもよい。 During the mirror finish, there are cases where a step is formed near the boundary between the transparent portion MT and the adhesive layer A, polishing powder is left behind, and the design is roughened like air bubbles. These problems may be exacerbated during use by the influence of rainwater, ultraviolet rays, and the intrusion of dust. These tend to occur when the adhesive contains a solvent. When the transmissive portion MT and the adhesive layer A are colorless and transparent, they are particularly conspicuous. To prevent this, at least one of the following may be used. (1) The portion other than the flat colorant C and the adhesive layer A contain (meth)acrylate, and the weight ratio thereof to the whole is preferably 50% or more, more preferably 70% or more, and still more preferably 80% or more. (2) At least one of the transmissive portion MT or the adhesive layer A has a pencil hardness (using JIS K 5600 or the like) of preferably F to 5H, more preferably H to 4H, and even more preferably 2H to 3H. (3) The difference in pencil hardness between them is preferably 3 steps or less (F and 3H, etc.), more preferably 2 steps or less, still more preferably 1 step or less. (4) Rockwell hardness of at least one of the transmission part MT or the adhesive layer A (JIS B 7726, B 7730, K 7202-2, Z 2245, etc., measured with HR-530L manufactured by Mitutoyo Co., Ltd., HRMS-p) However, it is preferably 40 to 150, more preferably 60 to 130, still more preferably 80 to 110. (5) The difference in Rockwell hardness thereof is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 40 or less, still more preferably 30 or less. As a result, the end surface X becomes flush. Specifically, in at least a part of the boundary between the flat colored layer MC, the adhesive layer A, and the low-permeability layer MO, the depth of the unevenness in the direction perpendicular to the end face X is preferably 0.8 mm or less, more preferably 0.4 mm or less, more preferably 0.2 mm or less, more preferably 0.1 mm or less, even more preferably 0.05 mm or less, and most preferably 0.02 mm or less, or the end face X is measured perpendicular to the boundary direction The maximum height roughness Rz may be preferably 100 or less, more preferably 50 or less, even more preferably 25 or less, even more preferably 10 or less, and even more preferably 5 or less. In both cases, the lower limit is the measurement limit. The depth of the unevenness can be read from the analysis profile of the surface roughness measuring machine. The unevenness includes depressions of the adhesive layer A with respect to the flat colored layer MC or the low-transmittance layer MO. When the colored surface layer U is exposed on the end surface X, if the difference in color between the transmissive portion MT and the adhesive layer A is large, the deterioration of the design is not noticeable. In order that the flat colorant C exposed on the end face X does not reduce the transparency of the end face X during processing, the flat colorant C may contain at least one of polyolefin, PET, and (meth)acrylate, and may contain PVC. It doesn't have to be. Further, each side of the decorative body Z may be chamfered by the bonding section 52 or the coating processing section 46 or the like. In order to prevent various accidents, the C surface (or R surface) is preferably C 0.05 (or R, unit is mm, hereinafter the same) to 2, more preferably 0.07 to 1, more preferably 0.1 ~0.5 is acceptable.

表面部F・裏面部R・端面Xの少なくとも何れかがハードコート層を有してもよく、さらに下地としてプライマー層を有してもよく、これらを有さなくてもよい。ハードコート層の鉛筆硬度(JIS K 5600等)は、好ましくは3H以上・より好ましくは4H以上・さらに好ましくは5H以上でもよい。ハードコート層(及び含む場合にはプライマー層)の厚さは好ましくは0.1~100μm、より好ましくは0.3~30μm、さらに好ましくは1~10μmでもよい。装飾体Zが表面部F側又は裏面部R側に厚さが好ましくは0.8mm以上・より好ましくは1.3mm以上・さらに好ましくは1.8mm以上の被覆部Tを有してもよい。扁平着色層MCでは、扁平着色剤Cが外側に露出することがある。そこから雨水等が入って扁平着色剤Cに酸化・剥離等が発生し、意匠性を下げることがある。ハードコート層や被覆部Tはこれらを防ぐ。またこれらは、扁平着色層MCの凹凸を隠蔽し、意匠性を向上させる。被覆部Tが上にハードコート層を有してもよい。ハードコート層又は被覆部Tと扁平着色層MCとが間に色面層Uを挟んでもよい。これは、表面部F側からの観察では、扁平着色剤Cを隠すかその上に乗るので、扁平着色層MCと低透過層MOとの間の色面層Uとは別の見え方になる。被覆部Tと扁平着色層MCとが間に上記厚さの接着層Aを挟めば、扁平着色層MCの凹凸が解消されるので、接合力が向上する。これらが化学拡散接合でもよい。この場合、低透過層MOがなくてもよく、裏面部R側が色面層Uのみでもよい。被覆部Tが扁平着色剤Cを含有してもよく、それが扁平着色層MCとは異なる扁平着色剤Cでもよい。 At least one of the front surface portion F, the back surface portion R, and the end surface X may have a hard coat layer, and may or may not have a primer layer as a base. The hard coat layer may preferably have a pencil hardness (JIS K 5600 or the like) of 3H or higher, more preferably 4H or higher, and even more preferably 5H or higher. The thickness of the hard coat layer (and the primer layer if included) may be preferably 0.1 to 100 μm, more preferably 0.3 to 30 μm, still more preferably 1 to 10 μm. The decorative body Z may have a covering portion T having a thickness of preferably 0.8 mm or more, more preferably 1.3 mm or more, and still more preferably 1.8 mm or more on the front surface portion F side or the rear surface portion R side. In the flat colored layer MC, the flat coloring agent C may be exposed to the outside. Rainwater or the like enters from there, and the flat coloring agent C is oxidized, peeled off, or the like, and the design may be deteriorated. The hard coat layer and the covering portion T prevent these. In addition, these cover the unevenness of the flat colored layer MC to improve the design. The covering portion T may have a hard coat layer thereon. A colored surface layer U may be interposed between the hard coat layer or covering portion T and the flat colored layer MC. When observed from the surface portion F side, the flat coloring agent C is hidden or placed on top of it, so it looks different from the color surface layer U between the flat colored layer MC and the low-permeability layer MO. . If the adhesive layer A having the thickness described above is sandwiched between the covering portion T and the flat colored layer MC, unevenness of the flat colored layer MC is eliminated, thereby improving the bonding strength. These may be chemical diffusion bonding. In this case, the low-transmittance layer MO may be omitted, and only the color surface layer U may be provided on the rear surface portion R side. The covering portion T may contain the flat coloring agent C, and the flat coloring agent C different from the flat coloring layer MC may be used.

請求の範囲控。項1:複数の層が積層された装飾体であって、前記複数の層が、透過性を有しかつ扁平着色剤が分散された扁平着色層と、前記扁平着色層と同じ扁平着色剤を含有しない層と、前記扁平着色層を前記含有しない層に接合する接着層と、を含み、前記扁平着色層において、前記扁平着色剤の色が前記透過性を有する部分の色と異なり、前記扁平着色剤の最大長さが0.02mm以上であり、前記扁平着色剤の少なくとも一部において、それぞれの最大長さが、前記最大長さの中点を通り前記最大長さの方向に直交する断面の径のうち前記中点を通る最も短い長さの5倍以上であることを特徴とする装飾体。項2:前記扁平着色層の前記積層方向の厚さが1.5mm以上であり、前記含有しない層の前記積層方向の厚さが0.4mm以上である、項1に記載の装飾体。項3:前記扁平着色層及び前記含有しない層の曲げ弾性率が700Mpa以上である、項1又は2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記接着層の前記積層方向の厚さが0.03mm以上である、項1~3の何れかに記載の装飾体。項5:前記扁平着色層及び前記含有しない層と前記接着層とが化学拡散接合であるか、前記扁平着色層と前記含有しない層とが強制的に分離された場合、前記分離された面の算術平均粗さRが1μm以上であるかの少なくとも一方である、項1~4の何れかに記載の装飾体。項6:前記扁平着色層及び前記含有しない層の間に色面層を有し、前記色面層の色が前記透過性を有する部分及び前記接着層の色と異なる、項1~5の何れかに記載の装飾体。項7:前記色面層が粘着層を有する、項6に記載の装飾体。項8:前記含有しない層が前記透過性を有する部分より低透過性である、項1~7の何れかに記載の装飾体。項9:前記扁平着色層が溝部又は端面の少なくとも一方を有し、前記溝部の側面又は前記端面が前記扁平着色層及び前記接着層の界面に平行でなく、前記側面又は前記端面の少なくとも一部が鏡面状である、項1~8の何れかに記載の装飾体。項10:前記鏡面状の少なくとも一部の算術平均粗さRが好ましくは0.5(μm)以下・より好ましくは0.3以下・さらに好ましくは0.2以下・一層好ましくは0.1以下・最も好ましくは0.05以下である、項9に記載の装飾体。項11:前記装飾体が、外側の界面の一部である表面部を有し、前記表面部を通して前記扁平着色剤が観察可能であり、前記扁平着色層が溝部又は端面の少なくとも一方を有し、前記溝部の側面又は前記端面が前記扁平着色層及び前記接着層の界面に平行でなく、前記側面又は前記端面の少なくとも一部と前記少なくとも一部から前記表面部を含む面に下した垂線又は法線とがなす角度の絶対値が、好ましくはarcsin(1/n)以下・より好ましくは90-2arcsin(1/n)°以下(nは前記基材部の屈折率)である、項1~10の何れかに記載の装飾体。項12:前記扁平着色層・前記含有しない層及び前記接着層が外部との界面である端面を有し、前記端面が前記扁平着色層及び前記接着層の界面に平行でなく、前記端面に露出した前記扁平着色層・前記含有しない層及び前記接着層の境界部分の少なくとも一部において、前記端面に垂直な方向の凹凸の深さが好ましくは0.8mm以下・より好ましくは0.4mm以下・さらに好ましくは0.2mm以下・一層好ましくは0.1mm以下・より一層好ましくは0.05mm以下・最も好ましくは0.02mm以下、又は前記端面を境界の方向に垂直に測定した最大高さ粗さRが100μm以下の少なくとも一方である、項1~11の何れかに記載の装飾体。項13:前記装飾体の外側の各面の角部の少なくとも一部がC0.05mm以上又はR0.05mm以上である、項1~12の何れかに記載の装飾体。項14:前記接着層の屈折率が前記透過性を有する部分の屈折率以上である、項1~13の何れかに記載の装飾体。項15:前記接着層の屈折率が前記透過性を有する部分の屈折率より0.002以上大きい、項1~14の何れかに記載の装飾体。項16:前記接合部分の透過率が高い部分から透過率が低い部分にかけての領域において、透過率が一定の部分を除く透過率が変化する部分の厚さが0.5mm以下である、項1~15の何れかに記載の装飾体。項17:前記扁平着色剤が金属光沢を呈する、項1~16の何れかに記載の装飾体。項18:画像・文字・ロゴ・図形・模様の少なくとも何れかを表示する、項1~17の何れかに記載の装飾体。項19:前記扁平着色層の前記接着層とは反対側の面が最も外側の面である、項1~18の何れかに記載の装飾体。項20:材料に接着剤を塗布する散布部と、複数の材料を接合する貼合部と、を有し、項1~19の何れかに記載の装飾体を製造することを特徴とする装飾体製造装置。項21:材料に接着剤を塗布する散布工程と、複数の材料を接合する貼付工程と、を有し、項1~20の何れかに記載の装飾体を製造することを特徴とする装飾体製造方法。項01:複数の層が積層された装飾体であって、前記複数の層が、透過性を有しかつ扁平着色剤が分散された扁平着色層と、前記扁平着色層のうち透過性を有する部分より透過性が低い層と、前記扁平着色層を別の層に接合する接着層と、を含み、前記扁平着色層において、前記扁平着色剤の色が前記透過性を有する部分の色と異なり、前記扁平着色剤の最大長さが0.02mm以上であり、前記扁平着色剤の少なくとも一部において、それぞれの最大長さが、前記最大長さの中点を通り前記最大長さの方向に直交する断面の径のうち前記中点を通る最も短い長さの5倍以上であることを特徴とする装飾体。項01に記載の装飾体は、さらに上記項2~7又は項9~19の何れかの特徴を具えてもよい。 Claim copy. Item 1: A decorative body in which a plurality of layers are laminated, wherein the plurality of layers includes a flat colored layer having transparency and in which a flat coloring agent is dispersed, and a flat coloring agent that is the same as the flat coloring layer. and an adhesive layer that bonds the flat colored layer to the non-containing layer, and in the flat colored layer, the color of the flat coloring agent is different from the color of the transparent portion, and the flat The maximum length of the coloring agent is 0.02 mm or more, and in at least a part of the flat coloring agent, each maximum length is a cross section passing through the midpoint of the maximum length and orthogonal to the direction of the maximum length. 5 times or more the shortest length passing through the midpoint of the diameter of the ornament. Item 2: The decoration according to Item 1, wherein the flat colored layer has a thickness of 1.5 mm or more in the stacking direction, and the non-containing layer has a thickness of 0.4 mm or more in the stacking direction. Item 3: The decorative body according to Item 1 or 2, wherein the flat colored layer and the non-containing layer have a flexural modulus of 700 Mpa or more. Item 4: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 3, wherein the adhesive layer has a thickness of 0.03 mm or more in the stacking direction. Item 5: When the flat colored layer and the non-containing layer and the adhesive layer are chemical diffusion bonded, or when the flat colored layer and the non-containing layer are forcibly separated, the separated surface Item 5. The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 4, wherein the arithmetic mean roughness R a is at least one of 1 μm or more. Item 6: Any of Items 1 to 5, wherein a colored surface layer is provided between the flat colored layer and the non-containing layer, and the color of the colored surface layer is different from the color of the transparent portion and the adhesive layer. The ornamental body described in Crab. Item 7: The decoration according to Item 6, wherein the color surface layer has an adhesive layer. Item 8: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 7, wherein the non-containing layer has lower permeability than the permeable portion. Item 9: The flat colored layer has at least one of a groove portion and an end surface, the side surface or the end surface of the groove portion is not parallel to the interface between the flat colored layer and the adhesive layer, and at least part of the side surface or the end surface Item 9. The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 8, wherein is mirror-like. Item 10: The arithmetic mean roughness R a of at least a part of the specular surface is preferably 0.5 (μm) or less, more preferably 0.3 or less, more preferably 0.2 or less, and still more preferably 0.1 Item 9. A decoration according to Item 9, which is less than or equal to 0.05 or less. Item 11: The decorative body has a surface portion that is part of the outer interface, the flat coloring agent is observable through the surface portion, and the flat colored layer has at least one of a groove portion and an end surface. , the side surface or the end surface of the groove portion is not parallel to the interface between the flat colored layer and the adhesive layer, and at least a portion of the side surface or the end surface and a perpendicular line drawn from the at least a portion to the surface including the surface portion, or Item 1, wherein the absolute value of the angle formed with the normal is preferably arcsin (1/n) or less, more preferably 90-2 arcsin (1/n)° or less (where n is the refractive index of the base material) 11. The decorative body according to any one of 10. Item 12: The flat colored layer, the non-containing layer and the adhesive layer have an end face that is an interface with the outside, and the end face is not parallel to the interface between the flat colored layer and the adhesive layer and is exposed on the end face In at least a part of the boundary between the non-containing layer and the adhesive layer, the depth of the unevenness in the direction perpendicular to the end face is preferably 0.8 mm or less, more preferably 0.4 mm or less. More preferably 0.2 mm or less, more preferably 0.1 mm or less, even more preferably 0.05 mm or less, most preferably 0.02 mm or less, or the maximum height roughness measured perpendicularly to the boundary direction of the end face Item 12. The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 11, wherein at least one of Rz is 100 μm or less. Item 13: The decoration according to any one of Items 1 to 12, wherein at least part of the corners of each outer surface of the decoration has a C of 0.05 mm or more or an R of 0.05 mm or more. Item 14: The decoration according to any one of Items 1 to 13, wherein the refractive index of the adhesive layer is equal to or higher than the refractive index of the transparent portion. Item 15: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 14, wherein the refractive index of the adhesive layer is 0.002 or more greater than the refractive index of the transparent portion. Item 16: In the region from the high transmittance portion to the low transmittance portion of the joint portion, the thickness of the portion where the transmittance changes is 0.5 mm or less, excluding the portion where the transmittance is constant. 16. The decorative body according to any one of 15. Item 17: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 16, wherein the flat colorant exhibits metallic luster. Item 18: The decoration according to any one of Items 1 to 17, which displays at least one of images, characters, logos, graphics, and patterns. Item 19: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 18, wherein the surface of the flat colored layer opposite to the adhesive layer is the outermost surface. Item 20: A decoration characterized by manufacturing the decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 19, having a spraying section for applying an adhesive to a material and a bonding section for bonding a plurality of materials. body manufacturing equipment. Item 21: A decorative body characterized by manufacturing the decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 20, comprising a spraying step of applying an adhesive to a material and a sticking step of joining a plurality of materials. Production method. Item 01: A decorative body in which a plurality of layers are laminated, wherein the plurality of layers includes a flat colored layer having transparency and in which a flat coloring agent is dispersed, and one of the flat colored layers having transparency and an adhesive layer for bonding the flat colored layer to another layer, wherein in the flat colored layer, the color of the flat coloring agent is different from the color of the transparent portion. , the maximum length of the flat colorant is 0.02 mm or more, and in at least a part of the flat colorant, each maximum length passes through the midpoint of the maximum length and extends in the direction of the maximum length A decoration having a diameter of at least 5 times the shortest length passing through the midpoint among the diameters of cross sections perpendicular to each other. The decorative body according to item 01 may further include the features of any one of items 2 to 7 or items 9 to 19 above.

《第15の実施形態》
扁平着色層MCが厚く、扁平着色剤Cのz方向の分布の幅が大きいほど、扁平着色剤Cの立体感の効果が向上する。そのために、貼合部52は、図20aのように、複数の扁平着色層MCを積層させてもよい。これらの扁平着色層MCの厚さは段落0115・0119等に記載の範囲でもよい。さらに接着層Aが上記段落0116等の範囲の厚さであれば、扁平着色剤Cを含む層と透明な層とが交互に重なり、表面部F側と裏面部R側の扁平着色剤Cのz方向の距離が大きくなるので、この立体感がさらに強調される。また、上記の扁平着色層MCにおける扁平着色剤Cが占める部分の割合が低い材料板20によって、この割合が高い装飾体Zが製造可能となる。この割合が高くて板厚が薄い板は、扁平着色剤Cの密度が高いため、板材としての強度が低く、割れやすいことが多い。それに対し、この割合が低い板による複数積層板の場合、間の接着層Aの強度も寄与し、装飾体Zの曲げ強度・引張強度等が良好になる。扁平着色剤Cが大きいほどこの効果は増す。最大の長さlCが、好ましくは1mm以上・より好ましくは2mm以上・さらに好ましくは5mm以上・一層好ましくは10mm以上であれば、この効果が特に大きい。複数の扁平着色層MCの各層が互いに異なる色やサイズの扁平着色剤Cを含んでいれば、さらに重層的な加飾効果が得られる。積層方向(z方向、接合面に垂直な方向)だけでなく、xy方向(接合面が含む各方向)に、異なる扁平着色剤Cを含む扁平着色層MCが並んでもよい。それらないし後述の扁平着色層MCの有無の境界部分が色面層Uで隠れれば、色面層U内の透過部分における各要素の色等が相違し(例えば複数の抜き文字の隣や奥に、それぞれ別の色の扁平着色剤Cが見えて)、加飾性が向上する。この場合、色面層Uの透過性が低いほうがよく、その視感透過率(又は視感透過率τV・分光透過率におけるある波長帯の透過率・全光線透過率・拡散光線透過率・平行光線透過率)は、好ましくは30%以下・より好ましくは10%以下・さらに好ましくは5%以下・一層好ましくは3%以下でもよい。ただし、色面層Uを通して扁平着色層MCの反射が見える効果が求められる場合には、この限りではない。扁平着色層MCが単層の場合でも、扁平着色層MCの表面部F側に色面層Uがある場合、色面層Uの影が、z方向の多様な高さに分布する扁平着色剤Cに当たり、通常の透明材では得られない立体感を呈する。それはいわば、室内に浮遊する無数の埃に、カーテンの隙間から一筋の日光が当たることで、光の方向が立体的に可視化される状態に類似する。扁平着色層MCが積層されていれば、この効果がさらに増し、接着層Aの厚みとも相まってより深い奥行き感を示す。積層される扁平着色層MCの数は3以上でもよく、4以上でもよく、5以上でもよい。その数に上限はないが、扁平着色剤Cのサイズないし接着層Aや透過部MTの透過率等に応じて、10から20程度にとどめられるのが無難である。その数が増えるほど裏面部R側の扁平着色層MCを表面部Fから見た場合の透過性が下がることが多いからである。複数の扁平着色層MCの間に扁平着色剤Cを含まない層・全体が無色透明又は有色透明の層が入ってもよい。その層の厚さが好ましくは0.9mm以上・より好ましくは1・3mm以上・さらに好ましくは1.8mm以上であれば奥行き方向の立体感が増す。ただし、正面から光が当たった際の照明効率のためには、扁平着色剤Cを含まず上記厚さの層がなくてもよい。複数の扁平着色層MCの接合は、接着層Aによらなくてもよく、熱溶着・化学拡散接合でない粘着剤や粘着テープ、ネジ等の機械的接合によってもよい。
<<Fifteenth embodiment>>
The thicker the flat colored layer MC and the wider the width of the distribution of the flat coloring agent C in the z direction, the more the effect of the three-dimensional effect of the flat coloring agent C is improved. For this purpose, the laminating section 52 may laminate a plurality of flat colored layers MC as shown in FIG. 20a. The thickness of these flat colored layers MC may be within the range described in paragraphs 0115 and 0119 and the like. Furthermore, if the adhesive layer A has a thickness within the range of the above paragraph 0116, etc., the layer containing the flat colorant C and the transparent layer are alternately overlapped, and the flat colorant C on the front surface portion F side and the back surface portion R side is Since the distance in the z-direction increases, the three-dimensional effect is further emphasized. In addition, the decorative body Z having a high ratio can be manufactured by using the material plate 20 in which the ratio of the portion occupied by the flat coloring agent C in the flat colored layer MC is low. A plate having a high ratio and a small plate thickness has a high density of the flat colorant C, and therefore has low strength as a plate material and is often easily broken. On the other hand, in the case of a plurality of laminated plates made of plates with a low ratio, the strength of the adhesive layer A between them also contributes, and the flexural strength, tensile strength, etc. of the decorative body Z are improved. This effect increases as the flat colorant C increases. This effect is particularly large if the maximum length lC is preferably 1 mm or more, more preferably 2 mm or more, still more preferably 5 mm or more, and still more preferably 10 mm or more. If each layer of the plurality of flat colored layers MC contains flat coloring agents C of different colors and sizes, a more multi-layered decorative effect can be obtained. The flat colored layers MC containing different flat colorants C may be arranged not only in the stacking direction (z direction, the direction perpendicular to the joint surface) but also in the xy direction (each direction including the joint surface). If the boundary between them or the presence or absence of the flat colored layer MC, which will be described later, is hidden by the color surface layer U, the colors of the respective elements in the transmissive portions in the color surface layer U will differ , the flat colorants C of different colors are visible), and the decorativeness is improved. In this case, the transparency of the color layer U is preferably low, and its luminous transmittance (or luminous transmittance τV, transmittance in a certain wavelength band in spectral transmittance, total light transmittance, diffuse light transmittance, parallel Light transmittance) may be preferably 30% or less, more preferably 10% or less, still more preferably 5% or less, still more preferably 3% or less. However, this is not the case when the effect that the reflection of the flat colored layer MC can be seen through the colored layer U is desired. Even if the flat colored layer MC is a single layer, if the colored surface layer U is on the surface portion F side of the flat colored layer MC, the shadow of the colored surface layer U is distributed at various heights in the z direction. It corresponds to C and presents a three-dimensional effect that cannot be obtained with ordinary transparent materials. It is similar to the state in which the direction of light is visualized three-dimensionally by shining a ray of sunlight through a gap in a curtain against countless dust particles floating in a room. If the flat colored layer MC is laminated, this effect is further enhanced, and together with the thickness of the adhesive layer A, a deeper sense of depth is exhibited. The number of laminated flat colored layers MC may be 3 or more, 4 or more, or 5 or more. Although there is no upper limit to the number, it is safe to limit the number to about 10 to 20 depending on the size of the flat colorant C or the transmittance of the adhesive layer A and the transmission portion MT. This is because the transmittance of the flat colored layer MC on the back surface portion R side when viewed from the front surface portion F tends to decrease as the number increases. A layer not containing the flat coloring agent C or a layer entirely colorless and transparent or colored and transparent may be inserted between the plurality of flat colored layers MC. If the thickness of the layer is preferably 0.9 mm or more, more preferably 1.3 mm or more, and still more preferably 1.8 mm or more, the three-dimensional effect in the depth direction is increased. However, for the illumination efficiency when the light hits from the front, the flat colorant C may not be included and the layer having the above thickness may be omitted. Bonding of the plurality of flat colored layers MC does not have to be based on the adhesive layer A, and may be performed by mechanical bonding such as an adhesive, adhesive tape, screws, etc., which is not heat welding or chemical diffusion bonding.

扁平着色層MCの数が増えて、装飾体Zの厚みが増すほど、その重量が増大し、壁等への取付コストと落下リスクが膨らむ。この問題を解決するために、貼合部52は、図20bのように、裏面部R側の扁平着色層MC(裏側扁平着色層MR)のxy平面方向の範囲を表面部F側の扁平着色層MC(表側扁平着色層MF)の範囲より狭めてもよい。つまり、色面層Uが不透過型のマーキングフィルム等であって透過性が低ければ、色面層Uで遮られている部分には表側扁平着色層MF以外の扁平着色層MCは不要である。それゆえ、裏面部R側に追加された裏側扁平着色層MRが色面層Uの抜き部分等の形状に沿う形状でもよい。これにより次の各効果が得られる。1)装飾体Zが軽量化される。ただし、裏側扁平着色層MRの範囲が狭すぎると、色面層Uの抜き部分から裏側扁平着色層MRの端面Xが見えてしまい、加飾性を損なう。これを防ぐために以下のようでもよい。色面層Uに最も近く色面層Uより裏面部R側の層を含み、該裏面部R側の層から最も裏面部Rに近い層までの複数の層のうち、一部又は全部が透過性を有する層の連続である2以上の層の厚さの合計を高さhとする。また、z方向において色面層Uと前記2以上の層とが重なる部分における、色面層Uの端部から前記2以上の層の端面(裏側扁平着色層MRの端面X)までのxy平面上の最短距離をw1とする。装飾体Zの少なくとも一部において、w1/hは好ましくは1/4以上・より好ましくは1/2以上・さらに好ましくは1以上・一層好ましくは2以上でもよい。さらに、色面層Uと端面Xとの間から裏側扁平着色層MRの端面Xが見えにくいようにするために、以下のようでもよい。z方向において色面層Uと前記2以上の層とが重ならない部分における、色面層Uの端部から前記2以上の層の端面までのxy平面上の最短距離をw2とすると、装飾体Zの少なくとも一部において、w2/hは好ましくは1/2以上・より好ましくは1以上・さらに好ましくは2以上でもよい。前記2以上の層の端面は表面部Fや各層の接合面に垂直でなくてもよい。前記2以上の層の表面部F側と裏面部R側とで、一方が他方より広くてもよい。2)端面Xの鏡面処理等が容易になる。3)端面Xが壁等の取付面から浮いて見え、装飾体Zの影が取付面に投影されることで、加飾性が向上する。4)色面層Uが、裏側扁平着色層MRの端面Xを隠し、なおかつ表側扁平着色層MFの外側の部分を隠さなければ(図20bにおいて後述の脚部Le及び照明部Iがない状態に相当する。)、浮いた前記外側の部分の扁平着色剤Cの影が取付面(図示しない。)に投影され、加飾性を向上させる。この効果は、裏側扁平着色層MRに限らず、装飾体Zが木材やアルミ型材等によって取付面から浮かされた状態でも得られる。そのために、表側扁平着色層MFの端面Xから前記2以上の層の端面までのxy平面上の最短距離をw3とすると、装飾体Zの少なくとも一部において、w3/hは好ましくは1/2以上・より好ましくは1以上・さらに好ましくは2以上でもよい。表側扁平着色層MFは最低限1層あればよいが、強度の向上等のために2層以上でもよい。積層された複数の扁平着色層MCの厚さ又は高さhは、好ましくは3mm以上・より好ましくは5mm以上・さらに好ましくは7mm以上・一層好ましくは9mm以上でもよい。裏面部R側に低透過層MOがある場合には、その厚さを含む、表側扁平着色層MFから裏面部Rまでの厚さは、好ましくは4mm以上・より好ましくは6mm以上・さらに好ましくは8mm以上・一層好ましくは10mm以上でもよい。これらの値が大きいほど、取付面に投影される表側扁平着色層MF等の影が装飾体Zから離れることが多く、立体感が増す。特に、表側扁平着色層MFの周囲等、装飾体Zの一部において、z方向に重なる色面層Uがなく、裏側扁平着色層MRがない又は1層のみ有し、表側扁平着色層MFが単層であるか被覆部Tとの2層、又はさらに接着層Aを含む3層等であって表側扁平着色層MF以外の層が透過性を有するような場合には、個々の扁平着色剤Cの影の加飾性がさらに高まる。なお、装飾体Zの一部に何らかの層があるとは、z方向において、その一部に重なってその層があるということである。表側扁平着色層MF(扁平着色層MC)及び表面部F側の被覆部Tが色面層Uを挟む場合、端面Xの周辺に色面層Uがなければ、扁平着色層MCと被覆部Tとが接着層Aにより強固に接合されることが多い。この扁平着色層MCの周辺部の色面層Uがない部分の幅は、好ましくは3mm以上・より好ましくは5mm以上・さらに好ましくは7mm以上でもよい。 As the number of flat colored layers MC increases and the thickness of the decorative body Z increases, the weight of the decorative body Z increases, and the mounting cost on the wall and the risk of falling increase. In order to solve this problem, as shown in FIG. It may be narrower than the range of the layer MC (front side flat colored layer MF). That is, if the color layer U is an opaque marking film or the like and has low transparency, the flat colored layer MC other than the front side flat colored layer MF is unnecessary in the portion blocked by the colored layer U. . Therefore, the rear flat colored layer MR added to the rear surface portion R side may have a shape that conforms to the shape of the cutout portion of the colored surface layer U or the like. This provides the following effects. 1) The weight of the decoration Z is reduced. However, if the range of the back side flat colored layer MR is too narrow, the end face X of the back side flat colored layer MR will be visible through the cutout portion of the color layer U, impairing the decorativeness. To prevent this, the following may be done. Some or all of the layers from the layer on the back side R side to the layer closest to the back side R including the layer closest to the color layer U on the back side R side from the color layer U are transmitted Let h be the total thickness of two or more layers that are continuous layers having properties. Also, the xy plane from the end of the color layer U to the end face of the two or more layers (the end face X of the back flat colored layer MR) in the portion where the color layer U and the two or more layers overlap in the z direction Let w1 be the shortest distance above. In at least part of the decoration Z, w1/h may be preferably 1/4 or more, more preferably 1/2 or more, still more preferably 1 or more, and even more preferably 2 or more. Furthermore, in order to make it difficult to see the end surface X of the back flat colored layer MR from between the colored surface layer U and the end surface X, the following may be adopted. If w2 is the shortest distance on the xy plane from the edge of the color surface layer U to the end surface of the two or more layers in the portion where the color surface layer U does not overlap with the two or more layers in the z direction, the decorative body In at least part of Z, w2/h may be preferably 1/2 or more, more preferably 1 or more, still more preferably 2 or more. The end surfaces of the two or more layers may not be perpendicular to the surface portion F or the joint surface of each layer. One of the front surface portion F side and the back surface portion R side of the two or more layers may be wider than the other. 2) The end surface X can be easily mirror-finished. 3) The end surface X appears to be floating from the mounting surface such as the wall, and the shadow of the decorative body Z is projected onto the mounting surface, thereby improving the decorativeness. 4) Unless the color surface layer U hides the end face X of the back flat colored layer MR and hides the outer portion of the front flat colored layer MF (in FIG. ), and the shadow of the flat coloring agent C on the floating outer portion is projected onto the mounting surface (not shown), thereby improving the decorativeness. This effect is obtained not only in the back flat colored layer MR, but also in a state in which the decorative body Z is lifted from the mounting surface by a piece of wood, an aluminum profile, or the like. Therefore, when w3 is the shortest distance on the xy plane from the end face X of the front flat colored layer MF to the end face of the two or more layers, w3/h is preferably 1/2 in at least part of the decoration Z. At least 1, more preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more. The front side flat colored layer MF may be at least one layer, but two or more layers may be used to improve the strength. The thickness or height h of the laminated flat colored layers MC may be preferably 3 mm or more, more preferably 5 mm or more, even more preferably 7 mm or more, and even more preferably 9 mm or more. When there is a low-permeability layer MO on the back surface portion R side, the thickness from the front side flat colored layer MF to the back surface portion R, including the thickness thereof, is preferably 4 mm or more, more preferably 6 mm or more, and more preferably It may be 8 mm or more, more preferably 10 mm or more. The larger these values are, the more often the shadows of the front flat colored layer MF and the like projected onto the mounting surface are farther away from the decorative body Z, increasing the three-dimensional effect. In particular, in a part of the decoration Z, such as the periphery of the front side flat colored layer MF, there is no colored surface layer U overlapping in the z direction, there is no back side flat colored layer MR or only one layer, and the front side flat colored layer MF is In the case that it is a single layer, two layers with the covering portion T, or three layers including an adhesive layer A, and the layers other than the front side flat colored layer MF have transparency, individual flat coloring agents The decorativeness of the shadow of C is further enhanced. It should be noted that the fact that a part of the decoration Z has some layer means that the layer overlaps that part in the z-direction. When the front side flat colored layer MF (flat colored layer MC) and the covering portion T on the surface portion F side sandwich the colored surface layer U, if there is no colored surface layer U around the end surface X, the flat colored layer MC and the covering portion T are firmly joined by the adhesive layer A in many cases. The width of the peripheral portion of the flat colored layer MC where there is no colored surface layer U may be preferably 3 mm or more, more preferably 5 mm or more, still more preferably 7 mm or more.

貼合部52は、取付を容易にするため、色面層Uの形状には特に沿わずに、裏面部R側に扁平着色層MCを追加積層してもよい。これが単なる取付用の脚部Leであれば、扁平着色層MCでなく、通常の透明や白等の材料板20によるものでもよい。脚部Leと裏側扁平着色層MRの取付面の高さが同等であって、取付面が面一であれば、装飾体Zの壁面等への取付が容易になる。脚部Leはネジ・釘等の取付用金具を含んでもよい。脚部Leは照明部Iを取り囲んでもよい。これにより照明部Iや裏側扁平着色層MRが雨水や汚損から保護される。その場合脚部Leが透明や乳半等の半透明で透過性を有すれば、脚部Leがない場合と同様、後述の照明部Iにより装飾体Zの外側の壁がかすかに間接照明される。さらにこれらの裏面部R側が蓋で覆われれば防水性等が向上する。脚部Leがx方向ないしy方向で表側扁平着色層MFの端面Xと同じ位置かより外側でもよい。端面Xが外側に張り出していると、衣類等が引っかかることによる事故の可能性があるが、これによりその可能性が低下する。脚部Leの外側と端面Xが面一であれば、これらの鏡面加工が容易である。脚部Leや裏側扁平着色層MRの、表側扁平着色層MF等への取り付け部分が、図20bのようなRを有してもよい。このRは、好ましくは0.1mm以上・より好ましくは0.2mm以上・さらに好ましくは0.5mm以上・一層好ましくは1mm以上でもよい。これにより接合強度が増し、後述の照明部Iによる光の回り込みが改善される。このRは接着剤23の粘度等の調整で得られる。あるいは、このR部分は平面状でもよい。そのために、直角三角形や長方形等の形状の補強材が接合部分の角に接合されてもよい。その場合には補強材の直角を挟む辺の長さが上記Rと同等でもよい。裏側扁平着色層MRの端面Xから表側扁平着色層MFへの付け根付近にかけて、防水や強度向上のため、シリコーン・シーラント等でコーキングされてもよい。このコーキング材はシリコーン・変性シリコーン・ポリウレタン・ポリサルファイド・(メタ)アクリレート・ブチルゴム・ポリイソブチレンの少なくともいずれかを含んでもよく、透過部MTと異なる組成でもよい。コーキング材の曲げ弾性率は好ましくは500MPa以下・より好ましくは300MPa以下・さらに好ましくは100MPa以下でもよい。その切断時伸び(JIS K 6251・K 6272等)は好ましくは30%以上・より好ましくは50%以上・さらに好ましくは100%以上・一層好ましくは200%以上でもよい。 In order to facilitate attachment, the laminating portion 52 may additionally laminate a flat colored layer MC on the back surface portion R side, without particularly conforming to the shape of the colored surface layer U. If this is just a leg portion Le for attachment, it may be a material plate 20 of ordinary transparent, white or the like instead of the flat colored layer MC. If the mounting surfaces of the leg portions Le and the rear flat colored layer MR are equal in height and the mounting surfaces are flush with each other, the decorative body Z can be easily mounted on a wall surface or the like. The legs Le may include mounting hardware such as screws and nails. The leg Le may surround the lighting portion I. This protects the illumination section I and the back flat colored layer MR from rainwater and stains. In this case, if the legs Le are translucent or translucent, such as semi-translucent or opaque, the outer wall of the decorative body Z is faintly illuminated by the illuminator I, which will be described later, as in the case without the legs Le. be. Furthermore, if the rear surface portion R side is covered with a lid, the waterproofness and the like are improved. The leg portion Le may be at the same position as or outside the end surface X of the front side flat colored layer MF in the x direction or the y direction. If the end surface X protrudes outward, there is a possibility of an accident due to clothing or the like being caught, but this reduces the possibility. If the outer side of the leg portion Le and the end surface X are flush with each other, it is easy to mirror-finish them. The attachment portions of the leg portions Le and the back side flat colored layer MR to the front side flat colored layer MF and the like may have R as shown in FIG. 20b. This R may be preferably 0.1 mm or more, more preferably 0.2 mm or more, still more preferably 0.5 mm or more, and still more preferably 1 mm or more. As a result, the bonding strength is increased, and the wraparound of light by the lighting section I, which will be described later, is improved. This R can be obtained by adjusting the viscosity of the adhesive 23 or the like. Alternatively, this R portion may be planar. To that end, stiffeners in the form of right triangles, rectangles, etc. may be joined at the corners of the joints. In that case, the length of the sides sandwiching the right angle of the reinforcing member may be equal to the above R. The area from the end face X of the back flat colored layer MR to the vicinity of the base of the front flat colored layer MF may be caulked with a silicone sealant or the like in order to improve waterproofness and strength. This caulking material may contain at least one of silicone, modified silicone, polyurethane, polysulfide, (meth)acrylate, butyl rubber, and polyisobutylene, and may have a composition different from that of the transmission portion MT. The flexural modulus of the caulking material may be preferably 500 MPa or less, more preferably 300 MPa or less, still more preferably 100 MPa or less. The elongation at break (JIS K 6251, K 6272, etc.) may be preferably 30% or more, more preferably 50% or more, still more preferably 100% or more, still more preferably 200% or more.

貼合部52はさらに、裏側扁平着色層MRによって形成された段差部分に、図20bのように照明部Iを装着してもよい(なお、図20bの図示の都合上、照明部Iの部分のみ断面図ではない。)。これにより、z負方向奥の扁平着色剤Cがx方向及びy方向から、あるいはそれらの複合方向から照射され、従来なかった内照型照明の効果を呈する。照明部Iは例えばLED等の既知の発光体と制御回路等からなり、バッテリーを内蔵してもよく、外部からの電源供給を受けてもよい。照明部Iの一部又は全部が装飾体Zに固定されてもよく、補修や仕様変更等のため交換可能でもよい。端面Xは鏡面でもよく、その平滑度は上記の端面Xの算術平均粗さRの範囲と同じでもよい。これにより、照明部I等からの照射光の入射効率が向上する。また、端面Xが粗面でもよく、その算術平均粗さRが好ましくは1以上・より好ましくは3以上・さらに好ましくは10以上・一層好ましくは30以上・より一層好ましくは100以上・さらに一層好ましくは300以上でもよい。これにより照射光が散乱し、様々な方向の扁平着色剤Cに均等に光が届く。上限は特に定めないが、3mm以下ないし扁平着色層MCの厚み以下でもよい。照明部Iの照射方向の数は1以上のいくつでもよい。照明部Iは例えば端面Xの反対側、装飾体の外側に向かって光を照射してもよく、それにより装飾体Zが浮いているように見える効果が向上する。照明部Iは光の色・照度・明滅周期等を変更してもよい。照明部Iは、複数の扁平着色層MCのうち一部のみに光を照射してもよい。具体的には、色面層U等により光が届く範囲が制限されればこれが実現される。照明部Iが複数の色の光を照射し、複数の照射範囲ごとに光の色・照度・照射方向・光の到達距離・拡散性等を違えてもよい。照明部Iとは別の照明が、表面部F側からz負方向に近い方向に光を照射してもよい。これが照明部Iを代替してもよい。このような照明は、表側扁平着色層MFの扁平着色剤Cや色面層Uを効率よく照射し、扁平着色剤Cの表面部Fからの距離が大きいほど照射を弱くするので、立体感を強調する。 The bonding unit 52 may further attach the lighting unit I to the stepped portion formed by the back flat colored layer MR as shown in FIG. is not a cross-sectional view.). As a result, the flat colorant C behind the negative z direction is illuminated from the x direction and the y direction, or from a combination thereof, thereby exhibiting an effect of internal lighting that has not existed in the past. The illumination unit I is made up of a known light emitter such as an LED, a control circuit, etc., and may incorporate a battery or receive power supply from the outside. Part or all of the lighting section I may be fixed to the decorative body Z, or may be replaceable for repair or specification change. The end face X may be a mirror surface, and its smoothness may be the same as the range of the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the end face X described above. As a result, the incidence efficiency of the irradiation light from the illumination section I or the like is improved. In addition, the end surface X may be a rough surface, and the arithmetic average roughness Ra is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 3 or more, still more preferably 10 or more, still more preferably 30 or more, still more preferably 100 or more, and even more Preferably, it may be 300 or more. As a result, the irradiation light is scattered, and the light reaches the flat colorant C in various directions evenly. Although the upper limit is not specified, it may be 3 mm or less to the thickness of the flat colored layer MC or less. The number of irradiation directions of the illumination unit I may be one or more. The illumination section I may irradiate light toward the outside of the decoration, for example, on the opposite side of the end face X, thereby improving the effect that the decoration Z looks like it is floating. The illumination unit I may change the color, illuminance, blinking cycle, etc. of the light. The illumination section I may irradiate only a part of the plurality of flat colored layers MC with light. Specifically, this can be achieved by limiting the range of light arrival by the color surface layer U or the like. The illumination unit I may irradiate light of a plurality of colors, and the color, illuminance, irradiation direction, reachable distance, diffusibility, etc. of the light may be different for each of a plurality of irradiation ranges. An illumination different from the illumination section I may irradiate light from the surface section F side in a direction close to the z-negative direction. This may replace the lighting section I. Such illumination efficiently illuminates the flat colorant C and the color surface layer U of the front side flat colored layer MF, and the illumination is weakened as the distance of the flat colorant C from the surface portion F increases, so that a three-dimensional effect can be obtained. Emphasize.

裏面部R側に低透過層MOがあってもなくてもよい。表側扁平着色層MFの裏面部R側(図20bの張り出し部分)に低透過層MOがあってもよい。裏面部R側に、全面で接合されずに固定された低透過板があれば、裏面部Rの透明部分による全反射が得られるので照射効率が向上し、なおかつ、正面からの観察時には扁平着色剤Cの隙間に低透過板の色が見える。上記蓋がこれでもよい。本実施形態の装飾体Zは扁平着色剤Cを含まなくてもよく、他の手段によって内部で光を反射させてもよい。例えば、扁平着色層MCが、扁平着色剤のかわりに、溝部Gや無数の雑多な方向の亀裂を有していれば、この亀裂が臨界角の作用等により光を反射して、同等の効果を呈する。つまり、装飾体Zが内部に光の反射面を有してもよい。装飾体Zは光学的な界面を有してもよい。光学的な界面とは、それを境として屈折率・透過率等が異なることで、その界面の透過前・透過後の光の性質が変化するような界面である。端面X、溝部Gの側面S、色面層U・扁平着色層MC・接着層A・低透過層MOの界面も、光学的な界面である。いずれも、光の入射角に応じてその光を透過・屈折又は全反射し、視覚的効果をもたらす。アルミ製のコの字型のチャンネル材等の型材が端面Xを囲むように装着されてもよい。 The low-permeability layer MO may or may not be present on the back surface portion R side. A low-permeability layer MO may be provided on the rear surface portion R side of the front flat colored layer MF (overhanging portion in FIG. 20b). If there is a low-transmittance plate that is fixed without being joined over the entire surface on the back surface portion R side, total reflection is obtained by the transparent portion of the back surface portion R, so that the irradiation efficiency is improved, and furthermore, when observed from the front, the color is flat. The color of the low-transmittance plate can be seen in the gaps between the agents C. The above lid may be this. The decorative body Z of this embodiment may not contain the flat coloring agent C, and light may be internally reflected by other means. For example, if the flat colored layer MC has grooves G or a myriad of cracks in various directions instead of the flat coloring agent, the cracks reflect light due to the action of the critical angle or the like, resulting in the same effect. present. That is, the decorative body Z may have a light reflecting surface inside. The decoration Z may have an optical interface. An optical interface is an interface at which the properties of light before and after transmission through the interface change due to differences in refractive index, transmittance, and the like. The end surface X, the side surface S of the groove portion G, and the interface between the colored surface layer U, the flat colored layer MC, the adhesive layer A, and the low-transmittance layer MO are also optical interfaces. All of them transmit, refract, or totally reflect light depending on the angle of incidence of the light, resulting in a visual effect. A shape member such as a U-shaped channel member made of aluminum may be attached so as to surround the end surface X.

請求の範囲控。項1:複数の層が積層された装飾体であって、前記複数の層が、透過性を有しかつ扁平着色剤が分散された2以上の扁平着色層を含み、前記扁平着色層において、前記扁平着色剤の色が前記透過性を有する部分の色と異なり、前記扁平着色剤の最大長さが0.02mm以上であり、前記扁平着色剤の少なくとも一部において、それぞれの最大長さが、前記最大長さの中点を通り前記最大長さの方向に直交する断面の径のうち前記中点を通る最も短い長さの5倍以上であり、前記扁平着色剤が薄片状であることを特徴とする装飾体。項2:前記2以上の扁平着色層のうち一部の扁平着色層と、残りの扁平着色層において、前記積層方向に垂直な方向の大きさが異なる、項1に記載の装飾体。項3:前記2以上の扁平着色層のうち前記積層方向において一方の側に最も近い扁平着色層を含む1以上の扁平着色層が、前記一方の側とは反対側に最も近い扁平着色層を含む1以上の扁平着色層より、前記積層方向に垂直な方向の範囲が広い、項1又は2に記載の装飾体。項4:前記一方の側に最も近い扁平着色層よりさらに前記一方の側の近くに色面層を有し、前記色面層の色が前記透過性を有する部分の色と異なる、項3に記載の装飾体。項5:前記色面層が粘着層を有する、項4に記載の装飾体。項6:前記色面層の視感透過率が30%以下である、項4又は5に記載の装飾体。項7:前記扁平着色層の少なくとも一部の前記積層方向に垂直な方向の形状が、前記色面層の少なくとも一部の形状に沿う形状である、項4~6の何れかに記載の装飾体。項8:少なくとも一部において、前記色面層より前記反対側であって前記色面層に最も近い層を含み、前記最も近い層から最も前記反対側の層までの複数の層のうち、一部又は全部が透過性を有する層の連続である2以上の層の厚さの合計が、前記積層方向において前記色面層と前記連続である2以上の層とが重なる部分における、前記色面層の端部から前記連続である2以上の層の端面までの前記積層方向に垂直な方向の最短距離の1/4以上である、項4~7の何れかに記載の装飾体。項9:前記2以上の扁平着色層が接着層によって接合された、項1~8の何れかに記載の装飾体。項10:前記接合が化学拡散接合であるか、前記2以上の扁平着色層が強制的に分離された場合、前記分離された面の算術平均粗さRが1μm以上であるかの少なくとも一方である、項9に記載の装飾体。項11:前記扁平着色層の少なくとも一部の前記積層方向の厚さが1.5mm以上である、項1~10の何れかに記載の装飾体。項12:前記最大長さが1mm以上である、項1~11の何れかに記載の装飾体。 Claim copy. Item 1: A decorative body in which a plurality of layers are laminated, wherein the plurality of layers includes two or more flat colored layers having transparency and in which a flat coloring agent is dispersed, and in the flat colored layer, The color of the flat coloring agent is different from the color of the portion having transparency, the maximum length of the flat coloring agent is 0.02 mm or more, and at least part of the flat coloring agent has a maximum length of , the diameter of the cross section passing through the midpoint of the maximum length and perpendicular to the direction of the maximum length is at least five times the shortest length passing through the midpoint, and the flat colorant is in the form of flakes. A decorative body characterized by Item 2: The decorative body according to Item 1, wherein some of the two or more flat colored layers and the remaining flat colored layers have different sizes in the direction perpendicular to the stacking direction. Item 3: One or more flat colored layers including the flat colored layer closest to one side in the stacking direction among the two or more flat colored layers is the flat colored layer closest to the side opposite to the one side Item 3. The decorative body according to Item 1 or 2, wherein the range in the direction perpendicular to the stacking direction is wider than the one or more flat colored layers included. Item 4: Item 3, wherein a color surface layer is provided closer to the one side than the flat colored layer closest to the one side, and the color of the color surface layer is different from the color of the transparent portion. Described decorations. Item 5: The decorative body according to Item 4, wherein the color surface layer has an adhesive layer. Item 6: The decorative body according to Item 4 or 5, wherein the color surface layer has a luminous transmittance of 30% or less. Item 7: The decoration according to any one of Items 4 to 6, wherein the shape of at least part of the flat colored layer in the direction perpendicular to the stacking direction is a shape that follows the shape of at least part of the color surface layer. body. Item 8: At least in part, one of a plurality of layers from the closest layer to the layer closest to the opposite side, including a layer on the opposite side of the color layer and closest to the color layer The total thickness of two or more layers that are partially or wholly continuous layers having transparency is the color surface in the portion where the color surface layer and the two or more continuous layers overlap in the stacking direction Item 8. The decorative body according to any one of Items 4 to 7, wherein the shortest distance in the direction perpendicular to the stacking direction from the end of the layer to the end face of the two or more continuous layers is 1/4 or more. Item 9: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 8, wherein the two or more flat colored layers are joined by an adhesive layer. Item 10: At least one of the bonding is chemical diffusion bonding, or when the two or more flat colored layers are forcibly separated, the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the separated surface is 1 μm or more Item 9. The ornament according to Item 9. Item 11: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 10, wherein at least part of the flat colored layer has a thickness of 1.5 mm or more in the stacking direction. Item 12: The decorative body according to any one of Items 1 to 11, wherein the maximum length is 1 mm or more.

上記各実施形態はそれぞれの発明の実施の一例である。各発明の技術的範囲は上記の範囲には限定されない。当業者にとって、上記各実施形態に多様な変更又は改良を加えることが可能である。そのような変更又は改良を加えた形態も本発明の技術的範囲に含まれ得ることが、特許請求の範囲及び請求の範囲控の記載から明らかである。また、各実施形態は、特記されない事項を含む多くの点において互いに共通する。各実施形態は組み合わせて実施されてもよい。上記各特徴は、組み合わせて実施されることでそれぞれの効果を同時かつ相乗的にもたらす。 Each of the above embodiments is an example of implementation of the respective invention. The technical scope of each invention is not limited to the above range. A person skilled in the art can add various modifications or improvements to each of the above embodiments. It is clear from the description of the claims and the copy of the claims that forms with such modifications or improvements can also be included in the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, each embodiment has many points in common including items not specifically mentioned. Each embodiment may be implemented in combination. Each of the above features brings about their respective effects simultaneously and synergistically by being implemented in combination.

本発明が提供する装飾体Zは、例えば看板・店舗サイン・社名表示板・表札・案内板・広告表示板等の各種サイン、店舗等のディスプレイ・什器、窓・壁面・インテリア・エクステリア・オブジェといった建築物関連、自動車・電車・航空機・船舶等の乗り物、携帯情報端末・コンピュータといった家電製品等の装飾に有用である。 The decorative body Z provided by the present invention includes, for example, various signs such as signboards, store signs, company name display boards, nameplates, information boards, and advertising display boards, displays and fixtures for shops, windows, walls, interiors, exteriors, and objects. It is useful for decorating buildings, vehicles such as automobiles, trains, aircraft, and ships, and home electric appliances such as personal digital assistants and computers.

20 材料板、 21 充填材料、 22 色面層材料、 30 画像、 40・50 装飾体製造装置、 51 散布部、52 貼合部、 43 溝加工部、 431 レーザ加工部、 44 充填材料調合部、 45 充填加工部、 46 被覆加工部、 54 色面層切断部、 55 色面層接合部、 B 底面部、 C 扁平着色剤、 F 表面部、 G 溝部、K・K1・K2 色帯部、 L 充填部、 M 基材部、N 先端充填部、 Q 液体充填部 R 裏面部、 S 側面、 T・T1・T2 被覆部、 U・U1-5 色面層、 V 展色剤、 Z 装飾体 20 material plate, 21 filling material, 22 color layer material, 30 image, 40 50 decoration manufacturing apparatus, 51 spraying unit, 52 bonding unit, 43 groove processing unit, 431 laser processing unit, 44 filling material preparation unit, 45 Filling processing part 46 Covering processing part 54 Color surface layer cutting part 55 Color surface layer joining part B Bottom part C Flat colorant F Surface part G Groove part K K1 K2 Color belt part L Filling Part M Base Material Part N Tip Filling Part Q Liquid Filling Part R Back Side Part S Side Side T T1 T2 Coating Part U U1-5 Color Surface Layer V Vehicle Z Decoration

Claims (2)

複数の層が積層された装飾体であって、
前記複数の層が、透過性を有する部分に扁平着色剤が分散された扁平着色層と、
前記透過性を有する部分とは異なる色の色面層と、を含み、
前記扁平着色層において、前記扁平着色剤の色が前記透過性を有する部分の色と異なり、
前記扁平着色剤の最大長さが0.02mm以上であり、
前記扁平着色剤の少なくとも一部において、それぞれの最大長さが、前記最大長さの中点を通り前記最大長さの方向に直交する断面の径のうち前記中点を通る最も短い長さの5倍以上であり、
前記扁平着色剤が薄片状であり、
前記積層方向に垂直な方向において、前記色面層が複数の部分を有し、前記複数の部分の一部が前記垂直な方向における前記色面層の外周部に少なくとも一部で接せず、かつ前記色面層が存在しない抜き部分であり、
前記抜き部分を透過して前記扁平着色層が観察可能であり、
前記装飾体を前記垂直な方向に区分する複数の部分領域において、前記扁平着色層の少なくとも一部の外周部に対応する部分領域が前記色面層の外周部に対応する部分領域より狭い
ことを特徴とする装飾体。
A decorative body in which a plurality of layers are laminated,
a flat colored layer in which a flat coloring agent is dispersed in a portion having transparency;
and a color surface layer having a color different from that of the portion having transparency,
In the flat colored layer, the color of the flat coloring agent is different from the color of the transparent portion,
The maximum length of the flat colorant is 0.02 mm or more,
In at least a part of the flat colorants, each maximum length is the shortest length of the diameter of a cross section passing through the midpoint of the maximum length and perpendicular to the direction of the maximum length, passing through the midpoint. 5 times or more,
The flat colorant is flaky,
In a direction perpendicular to the stacking direction, the color surface layer has a plurality of portions, and at least a portion of the plurality of portions does not touch the outer peripheral portion of the color surface layer in the perpendicular direction, and a cutout portion where the color surface layer does not exist,
The flat colored layer can be observed through the cutout portion,
wherein, among the plurality of partial regions that divide the decorative body in the vertical direction, a partial region corresponding to at least a part of the outer peripheral portion of the flat colored layer is narrower than a partial region corresponding to the outer peripheral portion of the colored surface layer. Characteristic decoration.
前記色面層の視感透過率が30%以下である、請求項1に記載の装飾体。 2. The decoration according to claim 1, wherein the color layer has a luminous transmittance of 30% or less.
JP2021142819A 2020-09-01 2021-09-01 DECORATION, DECORATION MANUFACTURING DEVICE AND DECORATION MANUFACTURING METHOD Active JP7133695B1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022041952A JP7288113B2 (en) 2020-09-01 2022-03-16 DECORATION, DECORATION MANUFACTURING DEVICE, DECORATION MANUFACTURING METHOD, AND DECORATION LIGHTING EQUIPMENT

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020147178A JP6997841B1 (en) 2020-09-01 2020-09-01 Decorative body, decorative body manufacturing equipment and decorative body manufacturing method
JP2020147178 2020-09-01
JP2020210892 2020-12-19
JP2020210892 2020-12-19
JP2021065545 2021-04-07
JP2021065545 2021-04-07

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
JP7133695B1 true JP7133695B1 (en) 2022-09-08
JP2022135878A JP2022135878A (en) 2022-09-15

Family

ID=83192272

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2021142819A Active JP7133695B1 (en) 2020-09-01 2021-09-01 DECORATION, DECORATION MANUFACTURING DEVICE AND DECORATION MANUFACTURING METHOD
JP2022041952A Active JP7288113B2 (en) 2020-09-01 2022-03-16 DECORATION, DECORATION MANUFACTURING DEVICE, DECORATION MANUFACTURING METHOD, AND DECORATION LIGHTING EQUIPMENT

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2022041952A Active JP7288113B2 (en) 2020-09-01 2022-03-16 DECORATION, DECORATION MANUFACTURING DEVICE, DECORATION MANUFACTURING METHOD, AND DECORATION LIGHTING EQUIPMENT

Country Status (1)

Country Link
JP (2) JP7133695B1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2018167500A (en) 2017-03-30 2018-11-01 大日本印刷株式会社 Decorative sheet for exterior
WO2021066185A2 (en) 2019-10-03 2021-04-08 正義 平井 Decorative body, decorative body manufacturing apparatus, and decorative body manufacturing method

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS6235899A (en) * 1985-08-10 1987-02-16 紀伊産業株式会社 Decorative structure
JPH11348222A (en) * 1998-06-11 1999-12-21 Trinity Ind Corp Surface-processed product
JP2001150624A (en) * 1999-11-25 2001-06-05 Honda Motor Co Ltd Decorative sheet
JP7235516B2 (en) * 2019-01-17 2023-03-08 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Decorative laminated film and its manufacturing method

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2018167500A (en) 2017-03-30 2018-11-01 大日本印刷株式会社 Decorative sheet for exterior
WO2021066185A2 (en) 2019-10-03 2021-04-08 正義 平井 Decorative body, decorative body manufacturing apparatus, and decorative body manufacturing method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2022135878A (en) 2022-09-15
JP2023035793A (en) 2023-03-13
JP7288113B2 (en) 2023-06-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6060157A (en) Transparent decorative article having an etched appearing/prismatic image thereon
US6696126B1 (en) Visual-tactile signage
KR20140035361A (en) Graphic image display for operation with backlight and/or ambient light
EP1217396A3 (en) Resin sheets, processes for producing the same, and liquid crystal displays
EP1787276B1 (en) Substrates with multiple images and methods of use
WO2021066185A2 (en) Decorative body, decorative body manufacturing apparatus, and decorative body manufacturing method
KR102500967B1 (en) Dark-colored or black projection screen
JP7133695B1 (en) DECORATION, DECORATION MANUFACTURING DEVICE AND DECORATION MANUFACTURING METHOD
WO2006028681A2 (en) Substrates with multiple images
JP6997841B1 (en) Decorative body, decorative body manufacturing equipment and decorative body manufacturing method
JP4845414B2 (en) Pearl pattern decorative body
US20060046159A1 (en) Methods of manufacturing substrates with multiple images
JP6818971B1 (en) Ornament
JP6748800B1 (en) Decorative body, decorative body manufacturing apparatus, and decorative body manufacturing method
JP6748799B1 (en) Decorative body, decorative body manufacturing apparatus, and decorative body manufacturing method
JP6968486B1 (en) Decorative body, decorative body manufacturing equipment and decorative body manufacturing method
JP2001324606A (en) Laminated light-diffusing film and method for manufacturing the same
JP6679094B1 (en) Decorative body, decorative body manufacturing apparatus, and decorative body manufacturing method
EP1784809A2 (en) Substrates with multiple images
CN206973377U (en) Have high-contrast and the preceding optical mode group of brightness concurrently
JP6704561B2 (en) Decorative body, decorative body manufacturing apparatus, and decorative body manufacturing method
WO2006028605A2 (en) Substrates with multiple images
KR101601199B1 (en) Sheet for back light unit of liquid crystal display
JPH0621082U (en) Anti-glare sheet for illuminated display

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20211125

A871 Explanation of circumstances concerning accelerated examination

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A871

Effective date: 20211125

A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20211126

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A131

Effective date: 20211213

A601 Written request for extension of time

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A601

Effective date: 20220214

A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20220401

A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20220411

TRDD Decision of grant or rejection written
A01 Written decision to grant a patent or to grant a registration (utility model)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A01

Effective date: 20220704

R150 Certificate of patent or registration of utility model

Ref document number: 7133695

Country of ref document: JP

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R150